EpicorImplementation UserGuide 100600

Epicor ERP
Implementation
User Guide
Disclaimer
This document and its contents, including the viewpoints, dates and functional content expressed herein are the
proprietary copyrighted property of Epicor Software Corporation, are intended for informational purposes only and
are believed to be accurate as of its date of publication. However, Epicor Software Corporation makes no guarantee,
representations or warranties with regard to the enclosed information and specifically disclaims any applicable implied
warranties, such as fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, satisfactory quality or reasonable skill and care.
As each user of Epicor software is likely to be unique in their requirements in the use of such software and their business
processes, users of this document are always advised to discuss the content of this document with their Epicor support
representative, account manager and/or consulting personnel. All information contained herein is subject to change
without notice and changes to this document since printing and other important information about the software
product are made or published in release notes, and you are urged to obtain the current release notes for the software
product. The usage of any Epicor software shall be pursuant to an Epicor end user license agreement and the performance
of any consulting services by Epicor personnel shall be pursuant to Epicor's services terms and conditions. Usage of the
solution(s) described in this document with other Epicor software or third party products may require the purchase of
licenses for such other products. Where any software is expressed to be compliant with applicable laws or other statutory
or regulatory requirements in this document, such compliance is not a warranty and is based solely on Epicor's current
understanding of such laws and requirements. All laws and requirements are subject to varying interpretations as well
as to change and accordingly, Epicor cannot guarantee that the software will be compliant and up to date with such
changes. All statements of platform and product compatibility in this document shall be considered individually in
relation to the products referred to in the relevant statement, i.e., where any Epicor software is stated to be compatible
with one product and also stated to be compatible with another product, it should not be interpreted that such Epicor
software is compatible with both of the products running at the same time on the same platform or environment.
Additionally platform or product compatibility may require the application of Epicor or third-party updates, patches
and/or service packs and Epicor has no responsibility for compatibility issues which may be caused by updates, patches
and/or service packs released by third parties after the date of publication of this document. Epicor, Business Inspired
and the Epicor logo are trademarks of Epicor Software Corporation, registered in the United States, certain other
countries and/or the EU. All other trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. Copyright
Epicor Software Corporation 2014. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the prior written consent of Epicor Software Corporation.
Version 10
Revision: May 30, 2014 4:03 p.m.
Total pages: 457
sys.ditaval
Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide
Contents
Contents
Introduction..........................................................................................................................13
Chapter 1: Company Configuration...............................................................14

Company Maintenance..................................................................................................................................14
General Settings.....................................................................................................................................14
Email and Reporting...............................................................................................................................17
Attachments...........................................................................................................................................20
BAQ External Datasources.......................................................................................................................21
Company Configuration................................................................................................................................22
Detail......................................................................................................................................................23
All Modules............................................................................................................................................24
General...........................................................................................................................................24
Localization.....................................................................................................................................26
Detail.......................................................................................................................................26
Intrastat...................................................................................................................................28
Currency.........................................................................................................................................35
GL Control......................................................................................................................................36
Sales.......................................................................................................................................................37
Opportunity/Quote..........................................................................................................................37
Order..............................................................................................................................................39
Primary Order Options..............................................................................................................39
Shipping and Other Options.....................................................................................................41
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)....................................................................................43
Case Management..........................................................................................................................44
Demand..........................................................................................................................................45
Production..............................................................................................................................................46
Job..................................................................................................................................................46
Data Collection................................................................................................................................50
Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)...............................................................................................52
Quality Assurance (QA)....................................................................................................................53
Material Requirements Planning (MRP)............................................................................................54
Materials................................................................................................................................................56
Inventory.........................................................................................................................................56
General Inventory Options........................................................................................................56
Lot Inventory Options...............................................................................................................58
Purchase..........................................................................................................................................58
Shipping Receiving..........................................................................................................................60
Serial Mask Formats.........................................................................................................................63
Finance...................................................................................................................................................65
Accounts Receivable........................................................................................................................65
Epicor ERP | Version 10
Contents
General....................................................................................................................................65
National Accounts....................................................................................................................70
Individual Deposit Invoice Tracking...........................................................................................71
Accounts Payable............................................................................................................................72
Primary AP Options..................................................................................................................72
Enable Invoice Dates and Other Options...................................................................................75
General Ledger................................................................................................................................76
Payroll.............................................................................................................................................78
Asset Management.........................................................................................................................79
Tax Interface....................................................................................................................................80
Set Up Tax Interface.................................................................................................................81
Test Epicor Tax Connect...........................................................................................................82
Payment Instruments.......................................................................................................................83
Maintenance..........................................................................................................................................85
Services..................................................................................................................................................86
Field Service.....................................................................................................................................86
Project Billing...................................................................................................................................87
Multi-Companies...........................................................................................................................................90
External Systems.....................................................................................................................................91
Enter an External System.................................................................................................................91
External Company Maintenance.............................................................................................................92
Select External System.....................................................................................................................92
Establish Field Translations...............................................................................................................94
External Company Configuration............................................................................................................94
Define Company Information..........................................................................................................95
Create External Sites and Warehouses.............................................................................................96
Enter Multi-Company Details...........................................................................................................99
Set Up Epicor Commerce Connect.................................................................................................101
Initialize Multi-Company Records...................................................................................................102
Global Tables........................................................................................................................................103
Define Global Tables......................................................................................................................103
Chapter 2: Sites..............................................................................................105
Sites.............................................................................................................................................................105
Site Maintenance..................................................................................................................................105
Planning and Costing....................................................................................................................107
Transfer Requirement Planning......................................................................................................111
Address and Comments........................................................................................................................112
GL Controls (Sites)................................................................................................................................113
Site Configurations......................................................................................................................................114
Select the Site.......................................................................................................................................114
Inventory Management.........................................................................................................................115
General.........................................................................................................................................115
Detail.....................................................................................................................................115
Contents
GL Control (Inventory)............................................................................................................117
Shared Warehouses.......................................................................................................................118
Transfer Definition.........................................................................................................................120
Transfer Detail........................................................................................................................120
GL Control (Transfer Inventory)...............................................................................................122
Transfer Resources.........................................................................................................................124
Serial Tracking...............................................................................................................................125
Cycle Count..................................................................................................................................127
Cycle Count Detail.................................................................................................................127
ABC Codes.............................................................................................................................128
Time and Expense.................................................................................................................................131
Time..............................................................................................................................................131
Expense.........................................................................................................................................134
Production Management......................................................................................................................136
External MES.................................................................................................................................140
Maintenance Management...................................................................................................................140
Advanced Material Management (AMM)..............................................................................................141
Shipping Receiving................................................................................................................................145
General (Shipping Receiving).........................................................................................................145
General - International...................................................................................................................146
Billing............................................................................................................................................148
FedEx............................................................................................................................................150
UPS...............................................................................................................................................151
Site Costs.....................................................................................................................................................154
Production Calendars...................................................................................................................................156
Create the Calendar.............................................................................................................................156
Non-Working Days...............................................................................................................................157
Where Used..........................................................................................................................................158
Week Numbers.....................................................................................................................................159
Chapter 3: Part Parameters...........................................................................161

Part Classes..................................................................................................................................................161
Create a Part Class................................................................................................................................162
Sites and Part Classes............................................................................................................................163
Units of Measure.........................................................................................................................................164
Unit of Measure Maintenance...............................................................................................................164
Unit of Measure Class Maintenance......................................................................................................166
Add UOM Codes..................................................................................................................................167
Serial Number Masks............................................................................................................................167
Restricted Substances...................................................................................................................................169
Substance Maintenance........................................................................................................................169
Substance Restriction Type Maintenance...............................................................................................169
Reference Designators.................................................................................................................................171
Reference Category Maintenance.........................................................................................................171
Contents
Chapter 4: Personnel.....................................................................................172
Persons and Contacts...................................................................................................................................172
Contact Creation..................................................................................................................................173
Additional Contact Information............................................................................................................174
Links.....................................................................................................................................................175
Actions Menu Functions.......................................................................................................................176
Shifts...........................................................................................................................................................177
Add a Shift...........................................................................................................................................177
Shift Breaks..........................................................................................................................................178
Payroll Employees........................................................................................................................................179
Add a Payroll Employee........................................................................................................................179
Payroll, Deduction, and Tax Information................................................................................................181
Employees...................................................................................................................................................184
Add a New Employee...........................................................................................................................185
Employee Production Information.........................................................................................................187
Role Codes...........................................................................................................................................188
Employee Calendar...............................................................................................................................189
Time and Expense Approvals.................................................................................................................189
Warehouse Teams.......................................................................................................................................192
Create a Warehouse Team....................................................................................................................192
Users...........................................................................................................................................................194
Create a User........................................................................................................................................195
User Privileges.......................................................................................................................................197
Define Tools Options.....................................................................................................................198
Define Access Options...................................................................................................................200
Define System Options..................................................................................................................201
Define Social Enterprise Options....................................................................................................202
Define Enterprise Search Options...................................................................................................203
Companies...........................................................................................................................................203
Add Companies.............................................................................................................................204
Chapter 5: Warehouses and Bins..................................................................206

Warehouse Maintenance.............................................................................................................................206
Create a Warehouse.............................................................................................................................207
GL Controls..........................................................................................................................................207
Warehouse Zones........................................................................................................................................208
Warehouse Bin Sizes....................................................................................................................................209
Warehouse Bins...........................................................................................................................................210
Warehouse Bin Setup Wizard.......................................................................................................................213
Chapter 6: Multi-Currencies..........................................................................216
Multiple Currencies......................................................................................................................................216
Contents
Rate Types...................................................................................................................................................219
Conversion Rules..................................................................................................................................221
Exchange Rates............................................................................................................................................222
Import Exchange Rates.........................................................................................................................223
Rounding Engine.........................................................................................................................................224
Currency Master Maintenance..............................................................................................................224
Company Configuration.......................................................................................................................225
Customer Maintenance........................................................................................................................227
Chapter 7: General Ledger............................................................................230

Fiscal Calendars...........................................................................................................................................230
Add Fiscal Calendar..............................................................................................................................230
Add Fiscal Years....................................................................................................................................231
Add Fiscal Periods.................................................................................................................................232
Chart of Accounts........................................................................................................................................232
Define Segment Values.........................................................................................................................233
Modify Display Order............................................................................................................................235
COA Categories...........................................................................................................................................236
GL COA Reference Types.............................................................................................................................237
Create Account Masks..........................................................................................................................238
Restricted Functions.....................................................................................................................................239
Account Segment Values.............................................................................................................................240
Natural Account Options......................................................................................................................242
General Ledger Accounts.............................................................................................................................243
Generate Chart of Accounts.................................................................................................................244
Self-Balancing Segments..............................................................................................................................246
GL Account Budgets....................................................................................................................................247
GL Account Allocations................................................................................................................................248
Enter Allocation Detail Lines..................................................................................................................249
GL Control Types.........................................................................................................................................250
GL Controls.................................................................................................................................................252
Journal Codes..............................................................................................................................................254
Recurring Journal Entry................................................................................................................................254
Recurring Journal Entry - Header...........................................................................................................254
Recurring Journal Entry - Detail.............................................................................................................256
Recurring Journal Entry Generate Recurring Journals..........................................................................257
Recurring Journal Entry - Schedule........................................................................................................257
Accounting Segment Mapping.....................................................................................................................258
COA Mapping......................................................................................................................................259
Account Mapping..........................................................................................................................259
Segment Mapping.........................................................................................................................260
Books..........................................................................................................................................................261
Retained Earnings.................................................................................................................................262
Report..................................................................................................................................................263
Contents
Posting.................................................................................................................................................264
Source Book Details.......................................................................................................................264
Posting Details...............................................................................................................................265
Validations....................................................................................................................................266
Lookup Tables Setup....................................................................................................................................266
Lookup Table Links...............................................................................................................................268
GL Transaction Types...................................................................................................................................269
Select Transaction Type.........................................................................................................................269
Create a Revision..................................................................................................................................270
Incoming Document Line......................................................................................................................271
Add a Book..........................................................................................................................................273
Daily Balances Setup....................................................................................................................................275
Daily Balances Setup - Copy GL Account Masks....................................................................................276
Consolidation..............................................................................................................................................277
Consolidation Rate Type Maintenance..................................................................................................278
Consolidation Type Maintenance..........................................................................................................279
Consolidation Definition Maintenance..................................................................................................280
Consolidation Definition Maintenance - Detail...............................................................................280
Consolidation Definition Maintenance Source Detail...................................................................282
Financial Report Designer.............................................................................................................................283
Chapter 8: Legal Numbers.............................................................................287

Transaction Document Types.......................................................................................................................287
Legal Numbers.............................................................................................................................................289
Default Sequences................................................................................................................................290
Alternate Prefixes and Sequences..........................................................................................................291
Document Types...................................................................................................................................293
Chapter 9: Global Tax Engine.......................................................................295

Cents Override.............................................................................................................................................295
Tax Report Categories..................................................................................................................................296
Legal Text....................................................................................................................................................297
Tax Jurisdictions...........................................................................................................................................298
Tax Boxes.....................................................................................................................................................298
Custom Tax Algorithms................................................................................................................................300
Tax Types.....................................................................................................................................................302
Create a Tax Type.................................................................................................................................302
Rates....................................................................................................................................................305
Enter Rate Codes...........................................................................................................................305
Define Effective Rates....................................................................................................................305
Specify Exemptions........................................................................................................................307
Add Tax Boxes...............................................................................................................................308
Add GL Controls............................................................................................................................309
International Descriptions.....................................................................................................................310
Contents
European Union Data...........................................................................................................................310

Product Tax Categories................................................................................................................................311
Tax Liabilities................................................................................................................................................312
Add Tax Types......................................................................................................................................313
Tax Authorities.............................................................................................................................................314
Chapter 10: Electronic Interfaces..................................................................315

Electronic Interfaces.....................................................................................................................................315
Create an Electronic Interface...............................................................................................................316
Properties.............................................................................................................................................316
Property Values.....................................................................................................................................318
Pay Methods................................................................................................................................................318
Create a Pay Method............................................................................................................................319
Additional AP.......................................................................................................................................320
Additional AR.......................................................................................................................................321
Electronic Reports........................................................................................................................................322
Chapter 11: Automatic Data Processing......................................................324

The System Agent........................................................................................................................................324
Modify the System Agent.....................................................................................................................325
Create a Schedule.................................................................................................................................326
Task Agent Rules..................................................................................................................................327
Edit Task Agent Rules....................................................................................................................328
Task Agent Rules Hierarchy............................................................................................................330
View Task Parameters...........................................................................................................................330
Select a Schedule..................................................................................................................................331
Process Set Maintenance..............................................................................................................................332
Create a Process Set.............................................................................................................................332
Add Tasks to a Process Set....................................................................................................................333
Schedule a Process Set..........................................................................................................................336
System Monitor...........................................................................................................................................336
Use the System Monitor........................................................................................................................336
Chapter 12: Enterprise Content Management............................................339

Functionality Setup......................................................................................................................................339
Attachment Configuration....................................................................................................................339
Document Types...................................................................................................................................342
Document Type Controls......................................................................................................................343
Third Party Parameters.................................................................................................................................344
Document Type Metadata....................................................................................................................345
External File References.........................................................................................................................346
Document Associations.........................................................................................................................347
Attaching Files.............................................................................................................................................348
Contents
Attach File to Record............................................................................................................................349

Attached Files in Action........................................................................................................................351
Chapter 13: Reporting Tools.........................................................................353

Epicor ERP and SSRS Integration...................................................................................................................353
Reporting Functionality Setup......................................................................................................................354
Report Type Configuration....................................................................................................................354
Printer Maintenance.............................................................................................................................356
Work Station Maintenance...................................................................................................................357
Report Data Maintenance and Report Maintenance.....................................................................................359
Report Data Maintenance.....................................................................................................................359
Create a Report Definition.............................................................................................................359
Add and Modify Report Labels.......................................................................................................361
Add Report Tables.........................................................................................................................363
Add Calculated Fields....................................................................................................................364
Exclude Fields and Field Labels.......................................................................................................366
Add Data Filtering Criteria.............................................................................................................367
Add Fields from Linked Tables.......................................................................................................370
Add Table Relationships.................................................................................................................371
Add Relationship Parameters.........................................................................................................373
Set Up Report Routing...................................................................................................................374
Report Style Maintenance.....................................................................................................................375
Create a Report Style.....................................................................................................................375
Alternate Report Style Maintenance.............................................................................................................378
Create Alternate Report Files................................................................................................................379
Define Report Routing..........................................................................................................................379
Define Report Styles..............................................................................................................................381
Define Alternate Report Styles..............................................................................................................382
Preview and Print Reports............................................................................................................................384
Using the Report Form Controls............................................................................................................384
SQL Server Report Print Controls...........................................................................................................387
Print Preview.........................................................................................................................................389
The System Monitor..............................................................................................................................391
Auto Printing with BPM........................................................................................................................392
Report Form Customization.........................................................................................................................392
Customize a Report Form.....................................................................................................................392
Chapter 14: Security......................................................................................398

Run Time Argument Menu Control..............................................................................................................398
Security Group Maintenance........................................................................................................................400
Create a Security Group........................................................................................................................400
User Account Maintenance..........................................................................................................................401
Assign User Privileges............................................................................................................................401
Assign User Groups..............................................................................................................................404
10
Contents
Assign User Companies and Sites..........................................................................................................405

Menu Maintenance......................................................................................................................................407
Create a Security ID..............................................................................................................................408
Assign Menu Security...........................................................................................................................411
Process Security Maintenance......................................................................................................................413
Process (Business Object) Security.........................................................................................................414
Method Security...................................................................................................................................417
Field Security Maintenance...........................................................................................................................420
Assign Global Field Security..................................................................................................................420
Group and User Field Security...............................................................................................................421
Test Field Security.................................................................................................................................423
Review Field Security Settings...............................................................................................................424
Reset a Field.........................................................................................................................................426
Reset a Table........................................................................................................................................426
Security Reports...........................................................................................................................................427
Menu Security Report...........................................................................................................................427
Change Log Report...............................................................................................................................429
Users/Groups Report.............................................................................................................................430
User Session Log Report........................................................................................................................431
Chapter 15: Startup Configurations.............................................................432

Configuration Settings File...........................................................................................................................432
Configuration File Location...................................................................................................................432
Locate the Files..............................................................................................................................432
Make a Copy of Default........................................................................................................................433
Multiple Configuration Files..................................................................................................................433
The Configuration Editor......................................................................................................................433
Launch the Configuration Editor....................................................................................................433
Configuration Editor Interface.......................................................................................................434
Automatic Login............................................................................................................................435
Settings - The Complete List.................................................................................................................437
Application Settings.......................................................................................................................437
User Settings.................................................................................................................................441
Deployment Settings.....................................................................................................................445
Help Settings.................................................................................................................................446
Sort Settings..................................................................................................................................447
Run Time Arguments...................................................................................................................................448
Activate Run Time Arguments...............................................................................................................448
Run Time Arguments List......................................................................................................................450
11
Contents
12
Introduction |
Introduction
Your Epicor application contains a number of setup programs, module parameters, and interface conventions.
These items configure the application to match the business practices, network, and system requirements for
your organization. You can fine-tune the application to reflect your day-to-day production cycle, define the
multiple currencies through which you conduct business, and set up financial books for different reporting
purposes. You can also set up report generation defaults, file attachments, security, and other system wide
parameters.
Use the Epicor Implementation User Guide to review these options. This material is intended for system managers
and other individuals responsible for setting up various areas of the Epicor application. Leverage this guide as a
starting point for understanding implementation options, as it contains an overview of the available interface
features, major setup programs, and system functionality.
This guide begins with information about the interface and the tools available to improve your use of the
application. It next examines the company wide settings you define for each module. The guide then explores
the supply side options for each Site within your company as well as the high-level settings for part records. It
then explores the financial setup programs you can leverage to add multiple currencies, create books, define
your chart of accounts, and fine-tune the posting rules. The final chapters describe how you can automatically
populate data in reports and trackers, attach external files to Epicor records, modify system reports, define user
security, and configure workstations.
Help topics and education courses are also available that provide more information on each item described in
this guide. You should also work with your consultant before making any final decisions on how to best set up
the application. When you configure the application to closely match your business and system needs, you
maximize your investment in the Epicor application.
13
Chapter 1 | Company Configuration
Chapter 1: Company Configuration

A company is the base maintenance record within your Epicor application. System administrators must set up at least
one company in the Epicor Administration Console for the application to run. If your organization has a multi-site
license, system administrators can create multiple companies that reflect the different business functions within your
organization.
Each company has its own set of application programs. You enter the overall system options for the company through
Company Maintenance. Use this program to enter the company's address, integrate the company with features like
Social Enterprise and Enterprise Search, define reporting options, set up attachment libraries, and other options. You
then use the Company Configuration program to define how the company interacts with each licensed module. Most
modules have general parameters you define through this key program, like the starting numbers for quotes and
invoices, Material Requirements Planning (MRP) parameters, service calls job prefixes, landed cost default options, and
so on. Lastly, you then use multi-company programs like External System Maintenance and External Company
Maintenance to indicate how the companies within your organization interact with each other.
Secure access to each company through User Account Security Maintenance by defining the companies users can and
cannot. Users can only add records to companies for which they have access, and they are prevented from displaying
programs in a secured company. When they have access rights to multiple companies, users move between them by
expanding different company nodes in the Menu tile (Modern Shell interface) or the Main Menu tree view (Classic
interface). Users within each company can engineer parts, make sales orders, request quotes, manage financial
information, and so on. Besides being different in name, you can further define the separate companies by assigning
different visual styles to each company. When users switch between companies, they can then identify the current
company based on the different look of the interface.
This chapter focuses on the options you define in Company Maintenance, Company Configuration, and the
multi-company programs. For information on styles, review the Styling chapter in the Epicor ICE User Experience and
Customization Guide. For information on security, review the Security chapter found later in this guide.
Company Maintenance
After a system administrator creates a company through the Epicor Administration Console, you can then access
this company from the tree view (Classic style) or Menu tile (Modern Shell style) in the Epicor application.
Use Company Maintenance to set up the overall parameters for the new company. Define these options to modify
the application to best fit each company within your organization. This set up program contains the overall
options used across the company. You use this program to enter the company's default address, email setup,
document attachments, and external BAQ sources.
Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Maintenance
This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access.
General Settings
The General Settings sheet defines the overall settings for the current company. Use this sheet to enter the
company's physical address and the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) addresses for Service Connect, Enterprise
Search, Performance Canvas, and so on.
1. The fields at the top of the sheet display read-only information defined when the system administrator
created the company in the Epicor Administration Console. The Company field displays the identifier
14
Company Configuration | Chapter 1
for the current company, while the Product and Edition fields display the application (typically Epicor or
ICE) and version IDs.
2. Use the Name, Address, City, State/Prov, and Postal Code fields to enter the physical address for the
current company.
3. Enter the Country in which this company resides. The country you enter determines default values such as
currency, language, tax region, ship via, and the printed address format for new customers and suppliers.
The Country value is also used for VAT reporting.
4. Enter the primary Phone and Fax numbers for this company.
5. If this company will integrate data with Epicor Service Connect, enter the Server URL where the Service
Connect application is installed.
6. Now enter the User and Password for the user account that has rights to access Service Connect.
7. To make sure this company is linked to Service Connect, click the Test Connection button. If the Epicor
application can locate the server and the user account you entered is valid, a dialog box displays indicating
the connection is established.
8. Now click the UBAQ Workflow Package drop-down list to select the Service Connect workflow package
for this company. Workflow packages are created using the External Business Activity Query Designer,
and these items are the Service Connect equivalent of a physical folder. You use workflow pages to store
document processes.
When you design an external business activity query
(BAQ), this setting is used when you click the New button
on Update > Update Processing sheet. The package name
that displays is the default workflow package selected
15
here in Company Maintenance. However if you need, you

can select or enter a different option.
9. If you want to track all the transactions users perform within the company, select the System Activities
check box. These transactions display on a system log. This feature is useful for tracking issues.
10. Personalizations are interface changes users can make to match the Epicor application to their specific needs.
If you wish to track the personalizations made within the current company, select the Personalization
check box.
11. In the Enterprise Search section, specify the Search URL where the Enterprise Search application is installed.
This activates this search program. Enterprise Search is an optional search application which you can use to
retrieve content from your Epicor application and then launch specific programs to display the data.
If a Search URL value is entered in the configuration
settings file (for example, local.sysconfig), that URL
overrides the value entered here. The Enterprise Search
functionality is described in the Searches chapter within
the Epicor ICE Tools User Guide.
12. If this Search URL is used by all companies in the organization, select the Global URL check box. Users from
another company can then search for records in the current company.
13. Use the fields in the Web Access section to set up the Epicor Web Access (EWA) interface for this company.
The Web Access URL defines the uniform resource locator for the web forms. Enter the location where
users can access EWA; for example: http://lis-t60/ EpicorWeb
14. The MetaData Output Path defines the directory location used by this company to receive metadata. This
directory path indicates where metadata generated through the EWA is stored. This metadata is required
16
for the Epicor Web Access forms to run properly. Enter the directory path into this field; for example:
C:\Inetpub\wwwroot\EpicorWeb
15. The Performance Canvas URL defines the web location for your Epicor Enterprise Performance Management
(EEPM) Server. Once you define this web location, you can place performance canvases directly on your
Menu tile (Modern Shell interface) or Main Menu tree view (Classic interface). You can also embed canvases
within dashboards.
16. Enter values in the Social Enterprise fields to activate the Epicor Social Enterprise application. Enter the
Social Enterprise URL for the website associated with this Epicor application. Users who access Epicor
Social Enterprise from within the Epicor application connect to this website.
17. The Notification Source ID is the identifier required to connect Epicor Social Enterprise with the current
company. If the Epicor application can validate the Social Enterprise URL and the Notification Source ID, this
company is connected to Epicor Social Enterprise.
Email and Reporting

You define email and reporting options on the Email and Reporting sheet. Users within this company can then
send and receive global alert email and print reports.
1. The Port field defines the email link port number for email messages sent within the current company. Enter
an unused port number within this field. This port is used when sending a global alert with an attachment.
When the user opens the alert and clicks on the attachment, the application retrieves the correct data in
the program related to the alert.
2. The Global Alert From fields define the Email Address and Email Label used on global alerts. When a
global alert is sent, it uses this address to send the email. These values also display on the global alert email.
17
3. Use the Allowed Report Style drop-down list to select what report systems are available within the current
company. Available options are SSRS Only and Crystal and SSRS. Typically you select the SSRS Only option,
but if you are moving to the SSRS report writer and you still need to use Crystal Reports, select the Crystal
and SSRS option.
Epicor ERP does not support Crystal Reports. If your
organization has an earlier Epicor version that used Crystal
Reports, you should update reports and reporting
functions to SSRS. To help you with your conversion to
SSRS reports, the Crystal Reports versions of the standard
reports are available on EPICWeb in the Epicor ERP >
Downloads area. These reports are compressed in a .zip
file you can download and expand in a folder on your
server.
4. The Work Station Method defines the method used to calculate the Workstation ID. This identifier generates
when the application determines what reports a user can print or preview automatically in the System
Monitor. The default option uses Computer Name + Session ID.
5. Enter the Epicor SSRS Portal this company will use to link with the SQL Server Report Portal web site.
when you create custom SSRS reports that use ODBC, you must specify this URL.
You can use the Configure Epicor SSRS Service utility to
verify the URL you enter here. On the server where the
Epicor SSRS components are installed, navigate to Start
> Programs > Epicor Software > Epicor SQL Report
Monitor and select Configure Epi SSRS Service. The URL
displays in the Epi SSRS site field on the Configure the
SQL Server Report Portal screen.
6. Select the SSRS Printer Option this company uses to determine which printers a report is sent for printing.
Available options:
Client and Server Printing -- The default option, indicates reports will first attempt to print on any
printers directly linked to the client. If no client printers are available, the report will then attempt to print
on any printers connected to the server.
Client Printing Only -- Indicates reports will only be sent to printers connected to clients.
Server Printing Only -- Indicates reports will only be sent to printers connected to servers.
7. Use the Auto-Print Defaults section to indicate the default Reports Printer and Labels Printer. Select
the printers this company will use by default from these drop-down lists.
You create printer records within Printer Maintenance. Default printers and other report options are
described later in this guide within Reporting Tools chapter.
8. Use the fields in the SMTP section to connect this company with external email. The SMTP Server field
defines the name of the server that handles this email, while the Port defines the port number used on the
SMTP Server. You can specify if SMTP communication should be encrypted using the SSL (TLS) protocol.
You can connect to the SMTP Server using the following ways:
Authenticate Anonymously - used for performing anonymous access to your exchange server. In order
to use this feature, anonymous access must be allowed on the SMTP server.
18
Use Specified Credentials - used to connect to your email server using the specified account. When
selected, this option enables User and Password fields. Use these fields to enter your SMTP account
credentials.
If Use Specified Credentials is selected, but no User name is entered, the application uses the AppPool
account to connect to SMTP server.
If you change your SMTP settings, stop and restart the
Task Agent service. The Epicor application can then
re-initialize with your new email configuration.
9. The default SQL Server for Reporting Services (SSRS) report server location is set up in the Epicor
Administration Console. However if this server will be in a different location for this company, select the
Override Defaults check box. The fields in the SSRS Report Server group box activate.
10. Enter the Base URL (Uniform Resource Locator) for the alternate SSRS Report Server. This value is typically
http://<localhost>/ReportServer.
To find the value you need to enter in this field, go to the
server machine and launch Reporting Services
Configuration Manager. From the tree view, click the Web
Service URL icon. The value displays in the Report Server
Web Service URLs section.
11. Defines the Server Name of the database for the Report Server. The value you enter in this field depends
on how you have set up your system. This database can be:
The same database used by the Epicor application -- Although this set up is not recommended,
your report server database can be the same as your main database.
19
A separate database on the SQL Server -- This set up method is most common, as the report data
then populates this separate database on the server.
A database on a different SQL Server -- The report data from the Epicor application is sent to another
server dedicated to SSRS report processing. If you are a larger organization, you may set up your system
in this way to improve performance.
12. Click the Authentication drop-down list to indicate how the SQL Server user account is validated by the
Epicor application. Available options:
Windows Authentication -- Select this option to login using the user credentials from the Internet
Information Services (IIS) site. Created dynamic by IIS, this user is called IIS APPOOL/<application pool
name>. Once you select this option, this user account automatically populates the User and Password
fields.
SQL Server Authentication -- Select this option to login using an administrator account you set up for
SQL Server. Once you select this option, you need to enter your Login and Password.
13. Enter the User name and Password for the user account that has access to the server machine.
14. Use the SQL DB Name drop-down list to define the name of the SQL Server database that contains the
data from where you want the reports to generate.
15. When you finish enter the values you need for your alternate SSRS Report Server location, click the Test
Connection button. If the Epicor application can find the alternate SSRS server, a dialog box displays verifies
the connection.
Attachments
The Attachments sheet defines how the company handles and stores file attachments to records.
This section briefly describes the attachment features you set
up on a company record. For more information about
attachments, review the Enterprise Content Management
chapter.
1. Use the File System Location fields to indicate attached files are stored within a central folder on a server
available through your network. To activate this functionality, select the Enable File System check box.
2. Now enter a directory path in the Default Base URL field. This path defines the repository for the
attachments.
20
3. If the attached files are available in a SharePoint library, select the Enable SharePoint check box.
4. You next enter a web site location within the SharePoint Site field.
5. After you have defined this SharePoint web location, click the Create Site Library button. A library is built
in the SharePoint library for the current company, and users can store attachments within this site library.
6. When you select the Allow Default Document check box, you indicate attachments can be dragged onto
attachment nodes on the tree view for a specific record. Users can then right-click the tree view node and
attach a file to the record.
7. The Method option defines how users attach files to a record. Available options:
File System Document - The attachment is automatically saved to the Default Base URL directory path.
SharePoint Document - The attachment is automatically saved to the SharePoint Site location.
Attachment Link - Causes a default attachment value that populates the File Name field on the
Attachment window.
BAQ External Datasources

Use the BAQ External Datasources sheet to enable external datasources for the current company. On this sheet,
you can also modify the security settings applied against external datasources.
Through this sheet, you indicate which external business activity queries (BAQs) are activate in the current company.
You can then incorporate these external BAQs on dashboards. For more details on this feature, review the External
Business Activity Queries chapter in the Epicor ICE Tools User Guide.
1. In the Datasources grid, the external datasources created in External Datasource Maintenance display.
21
2. Select the Enabled check box for each datasource you want available in the current company. Only the
datasources you enable can be selected in the External BAQ Designer.
3. To skip security checking for the selected datasource, in the Datasources grid, select the Skip Filter check
box.
For the selected datasource, Filter Groups and Filter Definitions grids become unavailable.
4. To skip security checking for a specific group defined for the selected datasource, in the Filter Groups grid,
select the Skip Filter check box.
In External Datasource Type Maintenance, you can create
multiple filter groups. The selected external datasource
retrieves the required data based on datasource type
settings. For example, you can filter the external data by
a specific company you want to display in a dashboard.
However you later may want to display data in the
dashboard from all companies. Select the Skip Filter check
box to ignore the filtering for the selected group.
5. If the selected filter group uses a BAQ constant to filter the data, use the Filter Definitions grid to override
this constant. The current value of the selected constant displays in the ConstantValue field.
6. If you wish to override the default BAQ constant by applying a custom value, clear the Use Default check
box and enter a custom constant in the FilterValue field.
7. When you finish selecting options for the current company, click Save.
Company Configuration
The Company Configuration program defines how modules run and interact within each company. Before you
begin live use of the Epicor application, the main options for each module should be defined. Work with your
system administrator to determine the options best match your business needs.
Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration
22
Detail
You define the primary information for each company on the Detail sheet.
1. The Company field displays the identifier for the current company, while the Product field displays the
specific application (typically Epicor or ICE) for which this company is used.
2. The Company Info section contains the name, address, and phone number for the current company.
3. The Federal ID displays the identifier you use when filing national taxes for the current company.
4. The Tax ID contains the identifier you use when filing state/province and local taxes for the current company.
5. The Tax Liability field indicates the tax liability region for this company. Each tax liability record defines the
national, regional, and local taxes for which this company is charged. For more information on tax liability
(region) records, review the General Ledger chapter later in this guide.
6. The Base Currency Code section displays information about the main, or base, currency used for most
transactions within the company. The Currency ID (identifier), Name, and decimals available for specific
transaction types display. For more information, review the Multi-Currencies chapter later in this guide.
7. If your company sends records using Electronic Data Interchange (EDI), the identifier for this company displays
within the EDI Code field.
8. The Production Calendar defines how many days during the year sites within this company manufacture
product. This item is the calendar that displays by default for sites and other records; if you need, you can
select a different production calendar on these records. You create production calendars within Production
Calendar Maintenance. This program is explored later in the Sites chapter.
23
9. The Fiscal Calendar defines the financial periods used by default for transactions that occur within this
company. You create fiscal calendars within Fiscal Calendar Maintenance. This program is explored later
in the General Ledger chapter.
10. Use the Employment Code field to select either the 941 (Option R) tax form or the 944 (Option F) tax form,
depending on the tax form the employer files. This selection is used in the W2 Processing program during
W2 form export. Available options are Regular Form 941 and Regular Form 944.
11. The Kind of Employer section defines the classification for the employing company. These classifications
are useful when the current company is a government entity. Available options:
Federal Government
State and Local Governmental Employer
Tax Exempt Employer
State and Local Tax Exempt Employer
None Apply
All Modules
The All Modules sheets contain parameters which apply across all modules within the company. These sheets
define the default values for sites, warehouses, costing methods, currencies, and so on.
General
Use the Modules > All Modules > General sheet to define overall parameters for options that affect multiple
modules.
1. The Default Site value indicates the main site used for most transactions. You can override this selection
within other programs. For more information on creating and configuring site records, review the Sites
chapter later in this guide.
2. The Site Cost ID indicates the default site cost identifier (ID) for costing parts in multiple sites. For example,
if three sites share the same cost set, they then use the same costing method (Average, FIFO, FIFO Lot, Last,
Lot, or Standard) for parts they manufacture.
24
3. In the Quantity Display Decimal field, enter a value to indicate the number of decimals used for displaying
numbers. For example, if Quantity Display Decimals is set to 4, the numbers display as 12.3426; if Quantity
Display Decimals is set to 2, the numbers are displayed as 12.34.
4. Use the Default Warehouse fields to define the primary warehouses for General use, Receiving materials,
and Shipping product. Notice you can also define the default shipping and receiving bins. For more
information on warehouses and bins, review the Warehouses and Bins chapter later in this guide.
5. The COA Master drop-down list indicates the Chart of Accounts used with the current company. You
can create COA records that match the financial needs of businesses throughout your organization. You
create COA records within Chart of Accounts Structure Maintenance; this program is explored later in the
General Ledger chapter.
6. The Product Configurator Rules Directory defines the directory path and file folder for all rules documents
created through the Configurator. You use the Configurator to define variations for your products which
you can then make available to your customers. For example, your company may sell both a blue and a
black version of a product. You use the Configurator to define these different product options.
7. The Costing Method section indicates how the cost of parts issued or shipped is calculated within this
company. The available Cost Methods are Average, Standard, Last, and FIFO. For information on costing
methods, review the Part section in the Inventory Management chapter in the Epicor Application User Guide
or view the Job Costing Technical Reference Guide in the application help (navigate to the Production
Management > Job Management > Working With... node.
8. You specify how often the change log updates by selecting a Collection Method option. These options
include Daily, By User, and Each Transaction.
25
Localization
You access the Localization sheets to set up the localization options this company uses. If this company exists in
a locality that has additional legal requirements, use these sheets to define these requirements.
Detail
The Modules > All Modules > Localization > Detail sheet contains fields where you define financial requirements
and Restrictions on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) options for each localization available on the current company.
1. Click the Localization drop-down list to define which country requirements you wish to localize for the
current company. Depending on the country you select, different fields on this sheet activate.
2. If this localization permits red storno transactions, use the Red Storno Option drop-down list to define
how the current company handles these transactions. Available options:
Not Allowed - Red Storno is unavailable in the Automatic Transaction Reversal, Document Type, and
Journal Entry programs.
Allowed in Automatic Transaction Reversal Only - Red Storno is available in the Automatic Transaction
Reversal program, but unavailable in the Document Type and Journal Entry programs.
Allowed - Red Storno is available in all programs.
3. Select the Enable Substances and Restrictions check box to activate the Restrictions on Hazardous
Substances (RoHS) functionality. All material quantities used in purchased and manufactured materials are
then totaled (rolled-up) and validated against RoHS specifications.
26
4. Select the Synchronize substance weight check box to indicate whether two or more restriction types of
a material or operations should share the same substances. If synchronized, then the weight for those
substances is only entered once per material or operation.
5. Select the Stop at First Failure check box to specify the roll-up for a restriction type will stop the transaction
when it first fails; otherwise the application validates compliance for each additional material and operation.
For more information on setting up the RoHS functionality,
review the Restricted Substances section in Part Parameters
chapter later in this guide.
6. If you need, select the Use Tax Boxes check box to indicate that sales taxes can also use the tax format
required for reporting VAT taxes accurately in some countries. This function is required by taxing authorities
such as Belgium or other countries.
7. Use the check boxes in the Copy Exchange Rate group box to define which financial documents will copy
and display the exchange rate from the original invoice. Available options:
AR Credit Memos
AR Correction Invoices
AR Cancellation Invoices
AP Debit Memos
AP Correction Invoices
8. Select the Allow Invoices to be overpaid check box to indicate cash can be over-allocated against an
invoice to give it a credit balance. The overpayment is left as a balance on the same chart of account (usually
AR Chart of Account) as if it were an invoice. Use the AR Apply Credit Memo and Write-Off and
Adjustment processes to record the invoice overpayment.
9. If this localization accepts prepayments against AP invoices through automatic processing, select the Apply
Pre Pymt Automatically check box.
10. Select the Validate Tax ID check box to indicate the identifier entered in Tax ID fields is validated. Users
can then only enter tax identifiers that exist in the database.
11. Select the Enable Tax Witholdings for Invoice Total check box to indicate Latin American tax calculations
are activated; these calculations control how the tax withholdings are included in the AP invoice total.
12. Use the fields in the Official Registration group box to define how this company is legally registered for
this localization. Research the legal requirements for the locality to determine what values to enter in these
fields.
27
Intrastat
Use the sheets under the Intrastat tab to define the Intrastat options for the localized company. You can use
these sheets to define the options for Internationalization related to Intrastat codes and reporting.
Detail
You define the primary Intrastat options for the company on the Modules > All Modules > Localization > Intrastat
> Detail sheet.
1. Select the Active check box to activate Intrastat functionality for the current company.
2. Use the Description options to define the source from which the Description text originates. Available
options:
None
From Part
From Commodity Code
3. Now use the Period Format options to define how the fiscal period displays on Intrastat transactions.
Available options:
MMYY Two-Digit Month and Year
YYYYMM Four-Digit Year and Two-Digit Month
28
4. Select the Border Crossing check box to track entry and exit points for Intrastat reporting. If you select this
check box, you can specify the Intrastat country entry or exit code for a customer, customer shipping method,
supplier, and supplier purchase point.
Selecting this check box activates the Country Exit field
in both Customer Maintenance and Ship Via Maintenance,
and the Country Entry field in both Supplier Maintenance
and Supplier Purchase Point Maintenance.
5. Select the Country of Origin Required check box to indicate Intrastat invoices require the country of origin
to be listed.
6. Now select the Block Zero Weight check box to prevent invoices from posting that do not have a required
weight specified. For most Intrastat Commodity codes, weight does not need to be reported.
This field works together with the Weight Required field
in Intrastat Commodity Maintenance. If you select the
Block Zero Weight check box here and you select the
Weight Required check box for the commodity code, the
Epicor application prevents an invoice from posting that
does not specify a weight.
7. Enter the official Arrival submission code. For example, in the United Kingdom, this value is A.
8. Likewise enter the official Despatch submission code. For example, in the United Kingdom, this value is D.
These Flow values help custom authorities provide their
national authorities with statistics on the despatches and
arrivals of goods. If you use these values for a period of
time and then change them, you may experience
unexpected results on the Intrastat report. If you filter this
report by flow (Despatch or Arrival), any transactions that
use the old Flow value do not display.
9. Enter the Default Region used as the primary region on Intrastat transactions.
10. The Currency Indicator field defines how the currency amount is submitted on Intrastat transactions. Unless
you need to track the currency submission type, you should leave this field blank. Typically Intrastat
transactions are recorded in the base currency. However during the switch to the Euro, some countries
required a 1 or a 2 to indicate whether the submission was in legacy or Euro currency.
11. Use the Starting Intrastat Ref field to enter a starting number for additional manual entries. For example,
you could enter 10000 in this field; you could use this value for sorting later.
29
Receipt > Normal

You use the Receipt sheets to define how to this company receives goods through Intrastat transactions. The
Modules > All Modules > Localization > Intrastat > Receipt > Normal sheet handles typical receipt transactions.
1. Click the Flow drop-down list to indicate whether normal receipts are handled by Arrival or Despatch
designation. The designation value you entered on the Detail sheet is then used to identify these transactions.
2. The Transaction Type identifies the nature of the receipt transaction.

3. Use the Spec field to identify the specification code for the receipt transaction.
Receipt > Returned Goods

You use the Modules > All Modules > Localization > Intrastat > Receipt > Returned Goods sheet to record Intrastat
transactions for returned goods.
1. Click the Flow drop-down list to indicate whether returned goods are handled by Arrival or Despatch
2. The Transaction Type identifies the nature of the returned goods transaction.
30
3. Use the Spec field to identify the specification code for the returned goods transaction.
4. If you need, select the Generate 2nd Line check box to record an additional transaction in the Intrastat
report file for debit memos. This activates the additional fields for the debit memo transaction.
5. Enter the Flow, Transaction Type, and Spec values you will use for the debit memo statistics.
Shipment > Normal

Use the Shipment sheets to define how this company ships goods through Intrastat transactions. The Modules
> All Modules > Localization > Intrastat > Shipment > Normal sheet handles typical shipment transactions.
1. Click the Flow drop-down list to indicate whether normal shipments are handled by Arrival or Despatch
2. The Transaction Type identifies the nature of the shipment transaction.

3. Use the Spec field to identify the specification code for the shipment transaction.
31
Shipment > Returned Goods

You use the Modules > All Modules > Localization > Intrastat > Shipment > Returned Goods sheet to record
Intrastat transactions for returned goods.
1. Click the Flow drop-down list to indicate whether returned goods are handled by Arrival or Despatch
2. The Transaction Type identifies the nature of the returned goods transaction.
3. Use the Spec field to identify the specification code for the returned goods transaction.
4. If you need, select the Generate 2nd Line check box to record an additional transaction in the Intrastat
report file for credit memos. This activates the additional fields for the credit memo transaction.
5. Enter the Flow, Transaction Type, and Spec values you will use for the credit memo statistics.
32
Percent at Border
Use the Percent at Border sheet to enter the percentage of the miscellaneous charges applied to Intrastat
transactions for different countries.
1. To add a new percent at border value, click the New button above the Percent at Border grid.
2. Click the Destination Country drop-down list and select the country you need.
3. Enter the % At Border value. This value defines the percentage that will be used to calculated the
miscellaneous charges applied to Intrastat transactions for the selected country.
Additional Tax Information

Click the Additional Tax Information sheet to add additional tax information for a selected localization.
1. In the Tax Info fields, enter the information you want to include on the Intrastat records.
2. When you finish updating the fields, click Save.
33
Invoice Banking Reference

Use the Invoice Banking Reference sheet to set up optical character recognition (OCR) numbers for use on sales
and purchase invoices. OCRs are used in some countries, such as Finland and Sweden, on sales and purchase
invoices. These values are used when the files are imported and exported.
To set up optical character recognition:
1. The Length field defines the maximum OCR length to be allowed. This value is a localization setting for
Sweden, Finland, and Estonia.
2. Use the Derived From drop-down list to indicate from where the banking reference numbers (OCRs)
originate. Available options:
Internal Number
Legal Number
3. Enter the Default Algorithm the reference will use to configure the format of the legal number. This legal
number is used for invoices.
4. Select the Use Banking Reference Number check box to indicate optical character recognition (OCR)
numbers are used as banking reference numbers. This localization is required for Sweden, Finland, and
Estonia.
5. If you need, select the Use Account Reference Number check box to indicate an account reference number
is used as a banking reference on an AR invoice.
6. Select the Validate Bank Branch ID check box to activate validation on the Bank Branch ID field. Only
identifiers that exist in the database can be selected on customer bank, supplier bank, or bank accounts.
7. Select the Validate IBAN check box to activate validation for the International Bank Account Number
(IBAN) field. Only identifiers that exist in the database can be selected on customer bank, supplier bank, or
bank accounts.
8. When you finish setting up localization options, click Save.
34
Currency
Use the Currency sheet to define which currency conversion rules are used for transactions within the current
company. You mainly select Rate Types on this sheet; these records define how source currencies convert to
amounts in a specific target currency. You also define the rate locking options, bank funds transfer, and sub-ledger
revaluation options on this sheet.
For more information on setting up multiple currencies, review the Multi-Currencies chapter later in this guide.
To define currency options:
1. Click the Company General drop-down list to define the rate type used for all transactions that do not fall
in the sales, purchasing, production, or other financial areas.
2. The rate type selected on the Sales and Invoicing drop-down list defines the conversion rules for sales
orders and AR invoices.
3. Click the Purchase and Expenditure drop-down list to define the rate type used for all purchase orders
and AP invoices.
4. Use the Inventory and Production drop-down list to define the rate type used for all stock quantities and
production expenses that occur between sites located in different countries.
5. The rate type selected on the Fixed Assets drop-down list defines the conversion rules used for all financial
transactions that involve the assets of the current company - items such as facilities, production equipment,
and computers.
6. Use the Payroll drop-down list to define the rate type used for employee expenses that require international
transactions.
35
7. Click the Cash Management drop-down list to define the rate type used for multiple currency transactions
that involve cash amounts.
8. Use the Expenses drop-down list to indicate the default rate type used in Expense Entry when the expense
currency is different from the claim currency.
9. Select a Rate Locking Option for the current company. Available options:
Force 1:1 rate for the same currencies The default option, this causes the amount used on the
source transaction to be used on the target transaction, regardless of whether the exchange rate is or
is not locked.
Always use locked rate conversion through base - Specifies the amount on the source transaction
uses the exchange rate defined on the base currency. The converted amount is then converted again
using the exchange rate for the target currency. This option calculates changes made to the exchange
rates with the base currency defined for this company.
10. Select the Currency Exchange Difference you need to define how the application calculates exchange
rate amounts for source and target bank transactions for bank fund transfers. Available options:
Always use default rates
Use explicit transfer amount, or use default
Use explicit transfer amount or use source amount
11. Click the Sub-Leger Revaluation drop-down lists to determine how amounts are re-valued on certain
financial documents. When the Currency Revaluation process runs, it uses the methods defined on this
sheet. You define methods for AR Invoices, AP Invoices, Bank Accounts, and Petty Cash Desk amounts.
Available options:
Immediate Reverse
No Reverse
12. When you finish setting up the multi-currency options, click Save.
GL Control
Use the GL Control sheets to define the default accounts and journal codes available during the posting process
for the current company. This sheet specifies company-level general ledger (GL) controls for Accounts Receivable
(AR), Accounts Payable (AP), and other modules. The Epicor application uses these GL controls if no GL control
is available when a GL transaction is posted.
GL control types define the contexts and entities required for a GL control; GL controls define the account and
journal contexts used on specific transactions. For more information on GL controls and GL control types, review
the General Ledger chapter.
To add a GL control:
36
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New GL Control.
2. Now click the Type button to find and select the GL control type that contains the account contexts you
need. For example, AR Account.
3. Next click the Control button to find and select a GL control contained by the selected GL control type.
4. Continue to add the GL control types you need for the current company. When you finish, click Save.
Sales
You set up the company configuration for the Opportunity/Quote Management, Order Management, Customer
Relationship Management (CRM), and Case Management modules through the Sales sheets. This section describes
the options available for each module.
Opportunity/Quote
Use the fields on the Modules > Sales > Quote sheet to define global parameters for the Opportunity/Quote
module.
To modify the Opportunity/Quote options:
1. Enter the Starting Quote number you wish to use for the first quote created in Opportunity/Quote Entry.
Quote numbers generate automatically by the Epicor application by adding 1 to the highest quote number
37
available in the database. If you do not enter a value in this field, the quotes begin with 1 and increase from
this number.
2. Select the Generate Quantities From Price Breaks check box to indicate you want quantities and related
price breaks to display during Quote Entry. Price list information must be entered for the parts, and customers
must be assigned that price list. Quantities and price breaks then automatically display on each quote.
3. Select the Refresh Worksheet on Demand check box to indicate you want the Quote Worksheet to
both refresh automatically through a regular time interval and manually when a user presses the Refresh
button.
4. Enter the Expiration Days value for your quotes. This specifies how many days your quotes are considered
active by the Epicor application. This value is added to the quote date to calculate the Expire Date on each
quote.
5. The Follow Up Days number defines how many days after a quote generates your sales staff should wait
before contacting the customer again. This value is added to the quote date to calculate the Follow Up
Date on each quote.
6. The Days to Quote value specifies how many days after a quote is entered it becomes due. This value is
added to the current date to calculate the default Due Date on each quote.
7. Select the Prevent Changes check box to indicate users cannot make changes to quotes marked as Quoted.
Users can then only add or update memos associated with the quote.
8. Select the Create Audit Log check box to indicate users are required to enter a brief memo description
whenever they change a quote marked as Quoted. This option is available if you select the Prevent Changes
check box.
To view the log of all the quote changes, launch
Opportunity/Quote Entry, from the Actions menu, select
the Audit Log option.
9. Use the Quote Form Messages fields to enter standard text that appears on the bottom of each quote.
10. When you finish defining the quote options, click Save.
38
Order
Leverage the fields on the Modules > Sales > Order sheet to define global parameters for the Order Management
module.
Primary Order Options

1. Enter the Starting Order number for the first sales order created in Sales Order Entry. Sales order numbers
generate automatically by adding 1 to the highest number available in the database. If you do not enter
a value in this field, the sales orders begin with 1 and increase from this number.
2. Enter the Starting RMA number for the first return material authorization (RMA) created in RMA Processing.
RMA numbers generate automatically by adding 1 to the highest number available in the database. If
you do not enter a value in this field, the RMA numbers begin with 1 and increase from this number.
You can manually enter sales order and RMA numbers.
To do this, enter 99999 as the Starting Order and/or
Starting RMA value, then enter the numbers you want in
Sales Order Entry and RMA Processing. The numbers you
enter must be smaller than the number in the Starting
Order and Starting RMA fields.
3. Select the Book Sales Orders check box to indicate audit entries are created for changes made to sales
orders. The application then writes audit entries any time sales order lines are added, changed, deleted, or
voided. This information displays in the Sales Order Tracker.
39
4. When you click the Apply Order Based Discounts Automatically check box, you activate the automatic
pricing system. The application applies discounts based on the quantity for each sales order line, the total
value of the order, or both.
5. Select the Ready to Process check box to indicate new sales orders will have their Ready to Process check
boxes selected. Sales taxes can then be automatically calculated against the AR invoice created for this sales
order.
f you use the Tax Connect functionality (Avalara
AvaTax), this check box also indicates that sales taxes
are automatically calculated and validated through this
third party tax service. For an overview of the Tax Connect
functionality, review the Tax Interface section later in this
chapter.
6. Click the Discount Rounding Options drop-down list to specify the rounding method applied to the unit
price or the line value. Available options:
Round net price by extended amount
Round net price by unit price
Round discount by extended amount
Round discount by unit price
7. Enter the Days Lookup for Order From History value to specify the number of days that display in the
Build Order From History program. This program, available in Sales Order Entry from the Actions menu,
displays information on past orders for the customer selected on the sales order.
8. Use the Credit Limit Actions options to indicate how you want the application to alert you when customers
exceed their credit limit. Available options:
Sales Order - These options specify what occurs when you enter or change a sales order for a customer
on credit hold. If you select Warn, a message alert displays, but you can continue processing the order.
If you select Stop, a message alert displays and the sales order cannot be processed.
For more information on customer credit, review the
Customer Credit Manager topics within the application
help.
Shipment - These options specify what occurs when you enter or change a packing slip for a customer
on credit hold. If you select Warn, a message alert displays, but you can continue processing the packing
slip. If you select Stop, a message alert displays and the packing slip cannot be processed.
9. Select the Keep Line Quantity Constant check box to indicate the total quantity on each sales order detail
line cannot change. As you add releases to an order line, all release quantities must equal the original line
order quantity.
Release 1 cannot be deleted or shipped before other
releases. When Release 1 is shipped or closed, other
releases for the line automatically close. To avoid this
situation, the Ship Date for Release 1 should be the date
when you want the last release to be shipped. You receive
a warning message if you attempt to close Release 1 when
the other releases have not already shipped.
40
10. When you select the Allow Project/WBS Phase To Be Defined check box, you can display the project or
WBS phase linked to a sales order.
11. Select the Base Currency as secondary price list check box so when a customer uses a currency other
than the base currency, the Epicor application will access a price list that uses the base currency to calculate
the amounts.
12. The Default Line Type drop-down list defines the typical purpose for each sales order line. Available options:
Project
Manufactured
No Job
Shipping and Other Options

1. Enter the Invoice Group Prefix for counter sales orders. Counter sales are sales orders where the customer
takes the parts directly out of your distribution center. All invoices generated from counter sales group
together using this prefix value.
2. Use the Ship Via drop-down list to specify a default ship via code for counter sales. Each sales transaction
requires a ship via code, and the value you select becomes the default code.
3. Enter the Starting Packing Slip number for the first packing slip created in the shipping programs. Packing
slip numbers generate automatically by adding 1 to the highest number available in the database. If you
do not enter a value in this field, the packing slip numbers begin with 1 and increase from this number.
41
4. Select the Allow Shipment from any Job check box to indicate orders can be shipped from a job in
Customer Shipment Entry. All jobs can be shipped, even if the job does not have a demand link for the order
release. If you clear this check box, all shipments without job links are automatically placed against inventory.
5. Select the Save Shipment for Invoicing check box to indicate customer shipments entered in the
Shipping/Receiving module are available for the Get Shipments function in AR Invoice Entry. You can then
create AR invoices from shipping information. Typically you should select this check box if your company
uses the Accounts Receivable module.
6. When you select the Allow Change Shipping Address check box, you indicate shipping address changes
can occur during shipment entry. For example, if you are using Customer Shipment Entry and you attempt
to add a new release that contains a different ship to address, a warning message appears, but the new
release can be added. If this check box is clear, you cannot enter releases that do not have valid ship to
addresses.
7. Click the Use Referenced Invoice Costs check box to specify the invoice reference is required on RMA
(Return Materials Authorization) transactions for invoice costing.
8. Enter the Invoice Group Prefix for invoices that automatically generate for customer shipments that use
Evaluated Receipt Settlement and Self Billing (ERS). Customers use this billing type to pay invoices based
on packing slip information.
9. Select the transaction Document Type used to generate legal numbers for invoices created automatically
at the shipment.
You create document types using Transaction Document
Type Maintenance. A document type links a system
transaction to a unique legal number that generates when
the transaction is printed. This maintenance program is
located in the Financial Management > Accounts
Receivable > Setup folder.
10. Use the Cash Group Prefix and Invoice Group Prefix to specify the prefixes for cash groups and invoice
groups generated for credit card payments. These invoices then display together using the prefixes you
specify in these fields.
11. Select the Default Bank you want to use for credit card payments. This default bank can be changed on
specific sales orders.
12. Select an option from the Default Create drop-down list to specify how the application processes parts
that do not have part master records. Available options:
You create part records using Part Maintenance. This
maintenance program is located in the Sales Management
> Order Management > Setup folder.
Buy To Order - The part number is identified as a BTO part. On the sales order, the Epicor application
automatically selects the Buy To Order check box and clears the Make Direct check box.
Make to Order - The part number is identified as a Make Direct part. On the sales order, the application
automatically selects the Make Direct check box and clears the Buy To Order check box.
13. Select the Raise POs on CTP Confirmation check box to specify whether purchase orders or PO suggestions
generate for BTO and drop shipped parts. You run this functionality on the Capable to Promise program
available from the Actions menu in Sales Order Entry.
42
If the Raise POs on CTP Confirmation option is active, selecting the Confirm check box on a sales order
causes purchase orders to generate. If this option is not active, selecting the Confirm check box causes PO
suggestions to generate instead.
14. When you finish defining the sales order options, click Save.
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

Use the Modules > Sales > CRM sheet to define the options for the Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
module.
To define the CRM options:
1. Click the Task Set drop-down list to specify the default task set you want to use when working with leads,
opportunities, and quotes.
2. Click the Territory drop-down list to specify the default sales territory to assign to suspects and prospects
on opportunities or quotes.
3. Enter the Number of CRM Calls shown value to specify the maximum number of calls that automatically
populate when loading CRM calls from another application.
4. Click the drop-down lists in the Campaign group box to define default marketing campaigns for specific
marketing activities. Available lists:
Marketing Defines the campaign used to schedule events.
You create campaign records in Marketing Campaign
Maintenance. This maintenance program is located in
the Sales Management > Customer Relationship
Management > Setup folder.
Web Marketing Specifies the campaign used for web activities.
43
Inter-Company Marketing Specifies the campaign used for inter-company events.

5. Click the Win drop-down list to specify the default reason code that displays when a customer accepts a
quote.
You create reason codes in Reason Code Maintenance.
This maintenance program is located in the Sales
Management > Customer Relationship Management >
Setup folder.
6. Click the Loss drop-down list to specify the default reason code that displays when a customer rejects a
quote.
7. Use the Task field to specify whether by default each reason code task is approved or rejected.
8. Select the Close Tasks to Milestone check box to indicate when a milestone is closed, any open tasks
related to this milestone also automatically close. Selecting this option saves time, as you no longer need to
manually close each task.
9. Select the Close Tasks on Lose check box to indicate you want tasks to close when the Lose status is
assigned to an opportunity or a quote. Select this option when you follow a procedure that allows a Lose
action to occur. Selecting this option saves time, as you no longer need to manually close each task.
10. When you select the Territory Security on Sales Orders check box, you restrict access to sales orders in
both Sales Order Entry and Sales Order Tracker. Salespeople can then only display sales orders linked to their
respective sales territories in these programs.
11. When you finish defining the CRM options, click Save.
Case Management
Use the options on the Modules > Sales > Case Management sheet to define the options for this module.
To define help desk options:
1. Click the Workflow Group button to find and select the default workflow group used for help desk tasks.
Each workflow group contains both a task set and list of users that work on these tasks.
You create workflow groups in Workflow Group

Maintenance. This maintenance program is located in the
Sales Management > Case Management > Setup folder.
44
2. Click the Task Set drop-down list to select a default task set for new Help Desk cases.
3. Select the Auto Complete Tasks check box to indicate you can automatically complete Help Desk tasks
when you indicate a workflow stage is complete.
4. When you finish defining the Case Management options, click Save.
Demand
Leverage the Modules > Sales > Demand sheet to define options for the Demand Management module.
To set up the Demand module options:
1. Select the Check Unfirm Schedules check box to indicate unfirm schedules are included in the Lead
Time calculation. Unfirm releases cannot be turned into jobs.
2. Select the Check Forecast Schedules check box to indicate forecast schedules are included in the Lead
Time calculation.
Lead Time is the total estimated time required to
manufacture all levels of an assembly.
3. Click the Action drop-down list to specify what happens when you run the Close program. This program
is available on the Actions menu in Demand Entry. Available options:
Cancel Releases - Automatically cancels sales order releases for closed demand schedules received from
customer trading partners.
Delete Releases - Automatically deletes sales order releases for closed demand schedules received from
customer trading partners.
4. Select the Automatically Match All check box to indicate the Demand Matching program automatically
matches all new demand schedules and potential sales order releases. Although this program is available
from the Actions menu in Demand Entry, selecting this check box causes it to run as a continuous process.
You then do not need to launch this program and manually select matches.
5. Click the Import Folder button to specify the default folder that receives imported sales demand files.
45
6. Select the Consider Working Days in the Delivery Days Calculation check box to indicate the Delivery
Days fields on customer records are used to specify how many days are required to ship a part quantity
from your manufacturing center to a customer trading partner. The Epicor application then uses this additional
date interval to calculate Ship By Dates when you use the Need By Date to determine demand.
You create customer records in Customer Maintenance.
This maintenance program is located in the Sales
Management > Demand Management > Setup folder.
7. When you finish defining the Demand Management options, click Save.
Production
You set up the company configuration for the Job Management, Data Collection, Production Lifecycle Management
(PLM), Quality Assurance (QA), and Material Requirements Planning (MRP) modules through the Production
sheets. This section describes the options available for each module.
Job
Use the Modules > Production > Job sheet to define the options for the Job Management module.
Available options:
1. Use the options in the Labor group box to define what prompts you want to appear during time entry or
data collection entry. Available prompt options:
Resource Prompt Users are required to select a Resource ID on time entries.
Scrap Reasons Users are prompted to enter a Scrap Rework reason on time entries.
Rework Reasons Users are prompted to enter a Rework reason on time entries.
Labor to Payroll Transfers labor hours from the Job Management module to the Payroll module. If
you want to enter your payroll manually, or if you do not have the Payroll module, clear this check box.
Advanced labor Rates Select this check box to be able to enter Service labor rates used to bill a
service call. If you select this check box you can define labor rates values in Service Contract Entry,
Customer Maintenance (customer and ship to customers), and Employee Maintenance. The values
defined in these programs include Expense Code, Rate Type, Rate Multiplier, and Fixed Rate.
46
If you clear this check box, the Labor Rate defined in the Employee Maintenance > Production Info sheet
is used instead.
2. Use the Time Format options to define the format for Clock In and Clock Out entries. These options only
define how times are entered. After they are saved, the entries display as decimal values. Available options:
Hours/Minutes
Hours/Hundredths
Using the Hours/Hundredths format, a Clock In time of
13.30 and Clock Out time of 14.45 creates a labor
transaction of 1.25 hours, not 1.15 hours.
3. Enter the Length the Epicor application uses for sequential numbers on all or a portion of your job numbers.
The maximum value you can enter is 9.
4. Now enter the value you want for the Next job number. This number is inserted in the Job Number field
whenever you use the Next Job Number function in Job Entry.
You can choose to always use the Year reference followed
by a dash (-) as the first 3 characters of every job number,
and then assign sequential numbers. To use this
numbering scheme, enter the first 3 characters in the
field, and then select to insert the next sequential number.
The sequential number is as long as the value you enter
in the Length field.
5. Select the Quick Job ID numbering method the module uses when creating jobs in the Order Job Wizard.
Available options:
Next Job Generates the next available job number by default.
47
Order Release Generates a job number that combines the Order Number, Order Line Number,
and Release Number.
6. Click the Default Standard Format drop-down list to define the default Production Standard on
operations. The Production Standard is an estimate of the production time required to complete an operation.
Available options:
Fixed Hours
Hours/Piece
Minutes/Piece
Operations/Piece
Operations/Hour
Operations/Minute
Pieces/Hour
Pieces/Minute
7. If you select either Hours/Piece or Minutes/Piece, you next must define how many pieces are worked on
during the operation. You can select Each, /100, /1000, and /10000.
8. Select the Global Reschedule Started Operations check box to indicate started operations can be
rescheduled by either the Global Scheduling or Job Scheduling programs. If this check box is clear,
operations with labor reported against them cannot be rescheduled.
9. Select the Allow Scheduling Before Today check box to indicate jobs can be scheduled with Start Dates
before the current date. Clear this check box so all jobs begin scheduling from the current date forward
into the production calendar.
For more information about scheduling, review the
Scheduling module topics and the Scheduling Technical
Reference Guide within application help.
10. Use the Change Impact Grace Periods to define the date ranges during which jobs can complete before
or after the Due Date and still be considered on time. These values display on the Schedule Impact report.
Available fields:
Early Grace Period (Days) Defines the number days ahead of the job's Due Date the job is considered
on time. For example, you enter an Early Grace Period (Days) value of 4. If a job is scheduled to end 5
days ahead of schedule, it is considered Early. If the job is scheduled to end 4 days ahead of schedule,
it is considered On Time.
Late Grace Period (Days) Defines the number days after the job's Due Date the job is considered on
time. For example, you enter a Late Grace Period (Days) value of 1. If a job is scheduled to end 1 day
late, the job is still considered On Time. If the job is scheduled to end 2 days after the Due Date, the job
is considered Late.
If you enter a zero in either field, it indicates you do not
want to use this grace period.
48
11. Enter the Kanban Prefix to define the default prefix assigned to Kanban job identifiers. When the application
generates Kanban receipts, it adds this prefix to the generated job numbers.
12. Select the Prevent Changes check box to indicate users cannot make changes to jobs selected as Engineered.
Users can then only add or edit memos and select or clear user-defined check boxes.
13. When you select the Prevent Changes check box, you activate the Create Audit Log check box. This indicates
when users make changes to check boxes on the job header, they must enter memo descriptions for each
change.
14. Click the Relieved by drop-down list to define how you wish to remove load on operations. Load is the
total number of hours remaining on an operation, including setup and production. You can relieve load
using Hours, Quantity, and Cost.
Most companies calculate load based on Quantity
(Quantity Remaining * Estimated Hours per Piece).
However, if you manufacture one piece quantities and
cannot report them, you can calculate load through Hours
(Estimated Hours - Actual Hours) or Cost (Estimated Cost
- Actual Cost).
15. Select the Change Impact Price List you will use on the Schedule Impact report. This price list contains
prices for your companys finished goods. The Schedule Impact report uses these prices to calculate the
value of job demand not related to order releases, so select a price list you want to use to measure the
effects of schedule changes.
16. Use the Direct Ship Standard Cost Job Variances radio button options to define the method you use to
record variances from jobs you ship direct. Available options:
Post to Cost of Sales The default option, this method causes job variances to post in the Cost of Sales
(COS) account.
49
Post to Product Group Causes job variances to post to the account selected on the parts Product
Group.
17. Select the Enable Mfg Cost Elements check box to activate the alternate Split Cost Elements job estimate
calculation. This calculation provides detailed job cost analysis by totaling the cost buckets independently
throughout each jobs method of manufacturing. It then arrives at separate material, labor, burden,
subcontract, and material burden (if used) total cost values for the highest level assembly.
In contrast, the default job estimate calculation totals all the cost buckets on each assembly in the material
bucket, then adds this material value to the material cost bucket on the next level assembly. This process
continues throughout each level in the method of manufacturing.
You review the analysis generated by the Split Cost
Elements calculation within the Job Tracker. For more
information, review the Job Costing Technical Reference
Guide located within the application help.
18. You can enter up to five User Defined Check Off Labels. These labels display next to custom check boxes
on the Job Entry > Job Header sheet, and they indicate where the job is at within its production cycle.
When you define these labels, you customize Job Entry to display the labels and the check off boxes.
After these check boxes display in Job Entry, you activate the global alert that monitors each check off box.
This causes a global alert to be sent to users who need to know this specific task is complete.
To learn about global alerts, review the Global Alerts
Maintenance help topics or the Global Alerts chapter in
the Epicor ICE Tools User Guide. To learn how to
customize a program, review the Customization help
topics or the Epicor ICE User Experience and
Customization Guide.
19. When you finish defining the Job Management options, click Save.
Data Collection
Use the Modules > Production > Data Collection sheet to define the options for the Data Collection module
(which includes Handheld and MES functions). The Data Collection module configuration settings also define
several job default values.
To set up Data Collection options:
50
1. Select the Calc Idle Time check box to indicate idle time entries generate in the Data Collection module.
Idle time records the difference between employee total time and the sum of all the reported labor detail
transactions.
2. The Default Site field displays the primary Site for the current company. You cannot change this value.
3. The Resource Group drop-down list specifies the resource group against which idle time entries are recorded.
When you select the Calc Idle Time check box, you must select a resource group.
4. Select an Indirect Labor code against which idle time entries are recorded. When you select the Calc Idle
Time check box, you must select an Indirect Labor code.
5. Select the Use Shop Warnings check box to generate shop warning messages when specific conditions
occur in the database. These warnings display in multiple programs throughout the Epicor application.
6. Enter the number of Weeks to Keep Warnings during which shop warnings are stored in the application.
When a Data Collection user logs into the application, any warnings generated before this Weeks to Keep
Warnings value are deleted.
7. Select the Prevent First Article Bypass check box to cause materials defined as first articles to go through
First Article Inspection after they are finished in the Work Queue.
51
8. When you select the Consider Grace for Labor Detail check box, you indicate the Clock-In and Clock-Out
Allowance times display on the Labor Edit report. If this check box is clear, the actual Clock-In and Clock-Out
times display for late clock-ins and early clock-outs on the Labor Detail report.
You define the clock-in allowance time as 10, and the
clock-in allowance time as 2. Your first shift starts at 7:00
a.m. John clocks in at 6:50. His clock-in time is adjusted
to 7:00, since it falls within the 10-minute early allowance.
Jane clocks in at 7:03. Her clock-in time will remain at
7:03, because it falls outside the 2-minute late allowance.
9. Use the Clock In Allowance Time fields to define how many minutes before and after a scheduled shift
starts an employee can clock in and still be considered as starting on time. You enter this range in the Early
and Late fields.
10. Use the Clock Out Allowance Time fields to define how many minutes before and after a scheduled shift
ends an employee can clock in and still be considered as starting on time. You enter this range in the Early
and Late fields.
11. Select a Default Shift for the current company. When you add an employee in Employee Maintenance,
this default shift value automatically displays on the new record. For more information on Employee
Maintenance, review Chapter 5: Personnel.
12. When you finish defining the Data Collection options, click Save.
Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)

Use the Modules > Production > PLM sheet to define the options for the Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)
module.
Available options:
1. Enter the PLM Export Directory from which you export Product Lifecycle Management files. You then
import these files in the PLM third party application.
2. Click the ECO Group drop-down list to select the default ID for the Engineering Change Order (ECO) group.
This ECO group is used for BOM data downloaded from Product Lifecycle Management.
3. When you finish defining the Product Lifecycle Management options, click Save.
52
Quality Assurance (QA)

Use the Modules > Production > QA sheet to define the options for the Quality Assurance module.
To set up Quality Assurance options:
1. The Default Site field displays the Site you use at this company for inspections. You cannot change this
value.
2. Click the Default Inspection Warehouse drop-down list to specify the default warehouse used for inspecting
received parts.
3. Use the Initialization Options to define the starting numbers for Non-Conformance IDs and Corrective
Action IDs. These identifier numbers generate automatically by adding 1 to the highest number available
in the database. If you do not enter a value in these fields, these numbers begin with 1 and increase from
this number.
4. Select the Move Costs to DMR check box to indicate you want the default action for failed assemblies to
move their costs to the Discrepant Material Report (DMR).
Assembly costs are not removed from the job when the
assembly is in inspection; the application only removes
them when the assembly fails inspection and moves to
DMR. This check box only applies to assemblies. Material
costs are removed from the job when they are moved to
inspection.
5. Select the IQS Active checkbox to enable integration with the IQS Advanced Quality module. This checkbox
enables movement of data in both directions, from the Epicor application to IQS and vice versa.
6. This activates the Export Folder... button. Click this button to find and select the folder that will contain
the records you will export to IQS. For example: C:\Epicor3Data\ServiceConnect\AQM\DataExportOut
7. Click the Synchronize.. button to launch a Mass Data update. This sends all the records in the static data
files synchronized with IQS to the selected Export Folder. The IQS Advanced Quality module will then use
these files to update data.
53
8. When you finish defining the Quality Assurance options, click Save.
Material Requirements Planning (MRP)

Use the Modules > Production > MRP sheet to define the Material Requirements Planning (MRP) module options.
To set up Material Requirements Planning options:
1. Define the Forecast Window you need. This window is a date range around the forecast date in which
sales order demand is included in the overall forecast. You enter two values:
Days Before Specifies the number of days before the actual forecast date that the forecast includes
sales order demand.
Days After Specifies the number of days after the actual forecast date that the forecast includes sales
order demand.
For example, if you enter 15 in both the Days Before and
Days After fields, then a forecast for November 20, 2015
includes all sales orders whose required Due Dates occur
on November 5 December 5.
2. The Suggest Job Prefixes section displays the prefix values for jobs generated by MRP. These prefixes are
added to the Job IDs to identify and group MRP jobs. Available options:
Unfirm Job Prefix The prefix initially added to Job IDs generated by MRP. Unfirm jobs are suggestions
production managers review to decide whether the job will be produced.
Firm Job Prefix The prefix that replaces the Unfirm Job Prefix on a Job ID when production managers
select the Firm check box on an MRP job.
If you have a multi-plant environment, these values display
as read only values in Company Configuration; you enter
these prefix values for specific sites in Site Configuration.
The prefix values identify the plant that produces the job
as well. For more information, review the Sites chapter
later in this guide.
54
3. In addition to the job prefixes, you also determine how MRP generates Job ID numbers. You do this by
selecting an option in the MRP Job ID group box. Available options:
Next Job Generated jobs use the next highest available job number.
Order Release If the sales order release is defined as Make to Order, MRP generates job identifiers
from the sales orders, using the Sales Order Line Release number format. However, if the sales
order release is not Make to Order, MRP uses the next highest available job number.
4. Use the Default Import Format drop-down list to identify the format to use when sales history data is
imported from external forecast solutions. The format defines the data imported in the file; valid options
include combinations of Customer, Part, and Plant.
5. Use the Default Export Format drop-down list to identify the format to use when sales history data is
exported to external forecast solutions. The format defines the data exported in the file; valid options include
combinations of Customer, Part, and Plant.
For new companies, run Conversion 10870 to make the
export formats available. To do this, navigate to Start >
Programs > Epicor > Epicor Admin Tools. Click Run
Conversion Program and locate conversion 10870. From
the Conversion menu, select Run Conversion Program.
6. Use the Forecast Periods drop-down list to specify what fiscal periods this company uses for the forecast
import and export process. This value determines the Periods Per Year value. Available options:
Day
Week
Month
Quarter
Semester
Year
7. The Periods Per Year value identifies the number of forecast periods per year. Typically this field populates
based on the Forecast Periods value; however, if you select Day or Week for the Forecast Period, you can
edit this value.
8. Select the Replace Missing Values check box to indicate forecast periods with zero demand will still export
with the forecast data.
9. The Import Day determines the forecast date for each imported forecast period. The number you enter
here depends on the Forecast Period you select. Valid entries:
Day The only valid entry is 1
Week Valid entries are 1 - 7
Month Valid entries are 1 - 31
Quarter Valid entries are 1 - 93
Semester Valid entries are 1 - 186
Year Valid entries are 1 - 365
10. When you finish defining the MRP options, click Save.
55
Materials
Through the Materials sheets, you set up the company configuration for the Inventory Management, Purchase
Management, and Shipping/Receiving modules. This section describes the options available for each module.
You can also review the options for serial mask formats.
Inventory
Use the General and Lot sheets to define the options for the Inventory Management module.
General Inventory Options

The Modules > Materials > Inventory > General sheet contains options for Engineering Change Orders (ECO),
bar codes, transfer orders, and stock provision reports. Define these options to reflect the current companys
inventory process flow.
To set up general inventory options:
1. Select the Print Bar Codes check box to indicate bar codes can be printed on certain reports/forms.
In addition to selecting the Print Bar Codes check box,
you must also install the Epicor Bar 39 font in the
Windows/Fonts directory. You can then use the Bar Code
option on any reports/forms that use Crystal Reports.
2. When you click the Use Inventory Adjustment Reasons check box, you specify reason codes are required
to enter inventory and cost adjustments. You enter these changes in the Cost Adjustments and Quantity
Adjustments programs.
56
3. Select the Stop on UOM Rounding if No Rounding Selected check box to indicate users will be stopped
from using a unit of measure (UOM) value that violates UOM standards of number of decimals and rules
for rounding. Clear this check box if values should be truncated (as if using the Round Down option) without
displaying a message to the user.
If you change the setting of this check box, you must
restart Internet Information Services (IIS) for the change
to take effect.
4. Select the Unapprove Revision On Check Out option to cause the status of part revisions to automatically
change. When users check out an Engineering Change Order (ECO), the part revisions status automatically
changes to Unapproved.
5. Select the Verify Password on Check In option to indicate user passwords are verified during Revision
approvals and check-in/out processes.
6. When you click the Workflow Required check box, both a workflow group and task set must be selected
on Engineering Change Order (ECO) requests.
7. Select the Single User check box to limit each ECO Group to only have one user. Users check out these
groups in the Engineering Workbench. If the check box is clear, specific revisions within a group are locked
instead.
8. Select the Allow Express Part Checkout option to activate the Express Part Checkout program. Users
can then check out a part revision through this program as well as the Engineering Workbench.
9. Enter the Transfer Order Number Length to determine how many digits you need in transfer order
numbers.
10. Next, enter the Starting Transfer Order Number. Transfer order numbers generate automatically by
adding 1 to the highest number available in the database. If you do not enter a value in this field, the
transfer orders begin with 1 and increase from this number.
For example, if you enter 4 in the Transfer Order Number
Length field and your Starting Transfer Order Number is
20, the Epicor application fills in the remaining two digits
with zeroes. The first transfer order number will be 0020.
11. Select the Automatically Receive TO's for intersite Job Receipt to Jobs check box to indicate transfer
orders should automatically be recorded against their receiving jobs.
12. You can select a Default Slow Moving Format Code to use on the Slow Moving Stock Provision report.
This report calculates stock provisions for slow moving stock and also calculates the value of obsolete stock.
13. You can select a Default Excess Format Code to use on the Excess Stock Provision report. This report
calculates stock provisions for the excess stock and also calculates the value of obsolete stock.
For more information on this report, review the Stock
Provision Report Format Maintenance topics in the
application help.
14. When you finish defining your general inventory options, click Save.
57
Lot Inventory Options

Use the Modules > Materials > Inventory > Lot sheet to define lot attribute default values at the company level.
Whenever a new lot is created or used for a specific part, these attributes are required. They sort information
that can be tracked at the lot level.
The attributes you select on this sheet display in Part Maintenance on the Lots > Attributes sheet. Although
required when a new lot is created for a part, these values can be overridden on specific part records.
To set up lot inventory options:
1. This sheet contains a number of lot attributes. Select the various attributes you want to make available for
lot controlled parts in the current company. Available options:
Batch
MFG Batch
MFG Lot
Heat Number
Firmware
Best Before Date
Original Mfg Date
Cure Date
Expire Date
2. When you finish, click Save.
Purchase
Use the Modules > Materials > Purchase sheet to define the default purchasing options for the Purchase
Management module.
To set up purchasing options:
58
1. Enter the Starting PO number. Purchase order numbers generate automatically by adding 1 to the highest
number available in the database. If you do not enter a value in this field, the purchase orders begin with
1 and increase from this number.
2. Enter the Starting RFQ number. Request For Quote (RFQ) numbers generate automatically by adding 1
to the highest number available in the database. If you do not enter a value in this field, the RFQs begin
with 1 and increase from this number.
You can manually enter purchase order and RFQ numbers.
To do this, enter 99999 as the Starting PO and/or Starting
RFQ value, then enter the numbers you want in Purchase
Order Entry and Request For Quote Entry. The numbers
you enter must be smaller than the number in the Starting
PO and Starting RFQ fields.
3. Use the Default Quantity options to define the quantity users can change on the purchase order detail
line. Available options:
Our
Supplier
4. Select the Enable Sourcing check box to activate the Epicor Sourcing functionality. This internet web
auction application integrates with Request for Quotes (RFQ) Entry. You leverage this functionality to
make RFQ lines available for online bidding from suppliers.
When buyers post their RFQs to Epicor Sourcing, suppliers
can place bids against the RFQ lines. Each record has a
time limit, so when this limit is reached, bidding on the
RFQ closes. Buyers can then use the Sourcing application
to determine which bid to accept. To purchase this
separate internet application, contact your Epicor Account
Manager.
59
5. In the Sourcing URL field, define the uniform resource locator (URL) that contains the Epicor Sourcing
application. Epicor Sourcing is then integrated with your Epicor application.
6. Now enter the Username and Password for the individual who can launch Epicor Sourcing. This user then
creates sourcing (auction) events.
7. Enter the Purchasing Company you need for consolidated purchasing. If your organization has the Multi-Site
Management license, you can create consolidated purchase orders. The selected company is the central
purchasing company for these purchase orders. Consolidated purchase orders control purchases for separate
companies and sites across your organization.
8. Use the Global Currency Code drop-down list to specify the default currency for consolidated purchase
orders. When a consolidated purchase order is created by the purchasing company and sent to a receiving
company, the application converts the purchase orders base currency to this global currency. For more
information, review the Multi-Currencies chapter later in this guide.
9. Select the Allow linked PO changes check box to indicate purchase orders used for inter-company trading
automatically update when these POs are modified.
10. If your organization uses the Purchase Contracts Management module, the Purchase Schedule Mode field
specifies how related demand requirements should be handled for this company.
Select Schedule Fixed in Period to designate that demand for the resulting purchase schedule delivery
dates should not be moved forward but remain on the calculated delivery dates.
Select Schedule Forward One Period to designate that demand requirements for a part should be
pulled forward in time to the next earlier delivery date, within the established (overall) delivery date
schedule.
You can override this at the site level in the Site Configuration program.
11. When you finish defining your purchasing options, click Save.
Shipping Receiving
Use the Modules > Materials > Shipping Receiving sheet to define the options for the Shipping/Receiving module.
The Landed Cost options on this sheet are available if your organization has a Landed Cost license.
To set up shipping and receiving options:
60
1. Click the Default Misc Freight Code drop-down list to specify the default miscellaneous charge used on
customer shipments.
2. Select the Staging Required check box to activate the shipment staging logic. This logic tracks the status
of each shipment by displaying Open, Closed, Freighted, and so on.
3. Some countries require packing slips include the taxes levied against shipped goods. When you click the
Calculate Taxes for Customer Shipments check box, you specify taxes are calculated and printed on
packing slips for customer shipments.
4. Some countries require packing slips display the value of the shipped goods. If you select the Calculate
Prices check box, you indicate prices are calculated and printed on packing slips for both customer and
transfer order shipments. If you select the Calculate Taxes for Customer Shipments check box, this check
box is selected by default.
5. Select the Allow Shipments for Orders on Hold check box to give users the ability to process shipments
for sales orders placed on credit hold. Sales orders are placed on hold either manually or automatically
through demand contracts.
6. Use the Receipt Default Quantity options to indicate how quantity charges are calculated for receipt lines.
Available options:
Our Qty
Supplier Qty
7. The options in the Container Tracking Defaults section define how this module tracks discrepant materials.
Select the PO Release Shipping Option to specify how to handle discrepant quantities between the original
PO release and the shipped quantity. Likewise, select the PO Release Receipt Option to specify how to
handle discrepant quantities between the original PO release and the received quantity. Available options:
None
61
Create New
Ship Short
8. When you select the Allow Landed Cost In Receipt Entry check box, you indicate landed costs can be
calculated in Receipt Entry and Container Receipt Entry.
9. Select the Apply Landed Cost After Receipt check box so users can apply landed costs to posted receipts.
10. Select the Allow Split Container Shipment check box so users can divide the quantities in container
shipments.
11. Select the Allow Transfer of Indirect Costs check box so users can transfer indirect costs to multiple
shipments when invoices apply against two or more shipments.
12. Select the Allow Update of PO Transaction Value check box so users can update duty calculations.
Activating this option does not affect the purchase order value of received goods.
13. To shut off the uplift percentage calculation, select the Disable Uplift Percent check box.
14. Select the Default Disburse Method this module uses to disburse landed costs to a shipment. Available
options:
Value
Quantity
Weight
Volume
Material
62
15. Select the Allow update of Supplier Price when Receiving check box to indicate supplier price updates
can modify purchase order lines when these lines are received. The Epicor application uses the supplier prices
specified at time of receipt for all subsequent processing such as costing, invoicing, accounting, stock and
job updates.
Supplier prices can only be updated at time of receipt for
internally managed inventory items. They cannot be
adjusted for externally managed (customer or
supplier-owned) or contract purchase order inventory
items.
Selecting this check box activates both the Percentage Tolerance and Monetary Tolerance fields.
16. The Percentage Tolerance value specifies the price adjustment tolerance you allow when users update
purchase order prices at time of receipt. If a price exceeds this tolerance percentage, you can either Stop
the transaction or Warn the user through an alert.
17. Enter a Monetary Tolerance value you need. Use this value to specify the supplier price adjustment tolerance
you allow when users update purchase order prices at time of receipt.
If 1.50 is entered in the Monetary Tolerance field, users
can only enter supplier price adjustments within 1.5 of
the extended value, based on the original PO unit price.
If the extended value is 100.00, the supplier price
adjustments can only change through a plus or minus 1.5
value in this case, 99.50 - 101.50.
18. Use the Supplier Price Limit Action radio button options to determine whether price adjustments that
exceed either tolerance cause the application to Warn a user through an alert message or Stop the
transaction.
19. When you finish defining the shipping and receiving options, click Save.
Serial Mask Formats

Use the Modules > Materials > Serial Mask Formats sheet to define the options for the Serial Mask Formats
module. You can define a serial number mask by setting up internal codes. The masked fields translate to the
characters you define; you can use the default standard English characters or create your own.
To set up serial mask options:
63
1. Enter the Alphanumeric Character that represents an alphanumeric character in the mask (for example,
5, A, or a). The default is the ampersand (&).
2. Use the Alpha Only Character field to specify the mask character used to represent an alpha character
(for example, [a to z] or [A to Z]). The default is the commercial At sign (@).
3. Enter the Numeric Only Character that represents a numeric character (for example, [0 to 9]). The default
is the pound sign (#).
4. In the Mandatory Character of any Format field, enter the character that represents a mandatory variable
for any alphanumeric character. The default is the question mark (^). For example, if you enter 2^ in the
mask, when a serial number is created, the ^ must be replaced by a character.
5. Enter the Optional Alphanumeric Character value to specify the mask value that represents any
alphanumeric character that may be needed in the serial number. The default is the exclamation point (!).
This character is always the last character in a mask.
6. In the Strip Character field, enter the mask character that represents any removed characters when the
internal serial number is created. The default is a Tilde (~). This character can only be at the front or back
of a mask.
7. The Day Character field specifies the mask character used to represent the day of the year. The default is
the letter D. The mask character replaces two characters of the serial number.
8. Enter the Month Character that represents the month of the year; the default value is the letter M. This
mask character replaces two characters of the serial number.
9. In the Two Number Year Characters field, enter the mask characters that represent the year. The default
is YY. The mask characters replace two characters of the serial number.
10. The Four Number Year Characters field specifies the four mask characters used to represent the year. The
default is YYYY. The mask characters replace four characters of the serial number.
11. The Part Number Representation Character specifies the two mask characters used for the part number.
These characters are entered as <Px>, where P is the default for the part number and x is the number of
64
characters of the part number. For example, if the part number is DS4000-1 and <P6> is entered in the
mask, then DS4000 will be included in the serial number.
12. The Example Strings group box displays example characters and strings that display in the serial mask
example. This example displays in other programs. Available example fields:
Alpha Numeric Example Character
Alpha Only Example Character
Part Number Replacement Example String
13. When you finish defining the serial mask options, click Save.
Finance
Use the Finance sheets to set up the company configuration for the Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable,
General Ledger, Payroll and Asset Management modules. This section describes the options available for each
module. You also define how the company integrates with Tax Connect and uses payment instruments.
Accounts Receivable
Modify the sheets under the Accounts Receivable tabs to define the default values that affect operation of
Accounts Receivable (AR) processes and programs.
General
The Modules > Finance > Accounts Receivable > General sheet has several overall settings that define how the
Accounts Receivable (AR) module functions.
Primary AR Options
To set up general AR options:
65
1. Enter the Starting Invoice number. Invoice numbers generate automatically by adding 1 to the highest
number available in the database. If you do not enter a value in this field, the invoices begin with 1 and
increase from this number.
2. Select the Ready To Calculate check box to cause new AR invoices to automatically select their Ready to
Calculate check boxes. Sales taxes are then automatically calculated against the AR invoice.
If you use the Tax Connect functionality (Avalara AvaTax), this check box also indicates sales taxes against
each AR invoice are automatically calculated and validated through this service. For more information on
Tax Connect, review the Tax Interface section later in this chapter.
3. When you select the Use Alt Bill To Address check box, you indicate the alternate bill to location defined
on each customer record is the locality used to generate sales tax amounts. Clear this check box to indicate
the ship-to address specified on a customer ship to location is used instead.
When Tax Connect generates the taxes on AR invoices, sales tax percentages assigned to the specified
localities are multiplied against the invoice amounts. If you need, you can override this setting on specific
invoices.
4. Select the Customer specific Tax Rules check box to specify the tax rounding calculation level (line or
total) uses the rounding rules defined on each customer record. If this check box is clear, the tax rounding
uses the rules for the currency, and the sales tax calculation level (line or total) uses the Company
Configuration settings you define on the Modules > Sales > Order sheet. For more information, review the
previous Sales Order section.
You select the rounding rules on customer records in
Customer Maintenance on the Billing > Detail sheet. You
select the rounding rules for a currency in Currency Master
Maintenance on the Rounding sheet.
66
5. Select the Allow Confirmation Taxes check box to activate the tax confirmation process. When you receive
a confirmation document from a customer, you enter the confirmation date and update the tax tables. This
process is required in some countries.
6. Click the Default Aging Report Format Code drop-down list to specify the default format code for aging
AR when running the Aged Receivables report.
7. Activate the Use Shipment Date for Invoice Date check box to indicate you want the Shipment Date to
also be used as the Issued Date. If this check box is clear, the Invoice Date is used for the Issued Date instead.
8. Enter the Tolerance level the AR module uses for rounding calculations. This value determines the tolerance
amount the AR module allows for rounding differences that may happen when invoices are settled in a
different currency from the invoice currency. You can enter a value up to six decimals.
9. Select the Prorate Discount to Line check box to indicate the credit value linked to invoices and sales
orders can change amounts on all detail lines on these records. These transactions are typically negotiated
discounts for a settlement. This feature also updates taxes associated with the original invoice, as well as
discounts and sales commissions from the original sales order.
The posting engine tracks the pro-rated tax values on
gross amounts, displaying these amounts for sales and
tax analysis. Because separate GL accounts can be used
for sales and discounts at each tax rate, you can then
verify the tax value from the corresponding discounted
sales account values.
10. Select the Enable Terms on Credit Memos to calculate settlement discounts for credit memos in AR. The
application then calculates and updates settlement discount data (dates and amounts) for a credit memo
in the same way it does for invoices, but with negative amounts. When you select this check box, the Less
Discount field becomes available on the Cash Receipts Entry > A/R Receipt > Detail sheet.
You will need to enter cash discounts manually in payment
routines for debit memos created before this check box
was activated.
11. Select the Use A/R Clearing Accounting check box to indicate invoice transactions post to the AR clearing
accounts.
12. If legal numbers are required for your locality, select the AR Invoices and Credit Memos check box. Legal
numbers then display on AR invoices and credit memos. Users then need to print a transaction to generate
a legal number. If this check box is clear, legal numbers generate when you post a transaction. For more
information, review the Legal Numbers chapter later in this guide.
Finance Charges and Other Options

1. Use the Finance Charge Options to determine how the AR module calculates additional late charges.
Available options:
Calculation Based on Days Overdue Indicates finance charges are based on how many days an
invoice is overdue. It then calculates the finance charge percentage against past due invoice amounts
during these date ranges.
67
Calculations Based on Invoice Amount Indicates finance charges are calculated by multiplying the
Finance Charge Percent against the current invoice amount.
2. If the Percentage Based on Invoice Amount check box is selected, you can activate the Once Per Invoice
check box. This indicates a finance charge generates once for each overdue invoice. If this check box is clear,
a new finance charge generates against each overdue invoice whenever the Process Finance/Late
Charges program runs.
You enter finance charges and rates using Finance/Late
Charge Maintenance; you generate finance charges by
running the Process Finance/Late Charges program. These
programs are located in the Accounts Receivable Setup
and General Operations folders.
3. Select the Combine With Reminder Letter check box to indicate reminder letters will contain information
related to late charges.
4. When you select the Allow Invoice Settlement in Different Currency check box, you specify an AR
invoice can be created in one currency but paid in a different currency.
Selecting this check box activates fields in Cash Receipts
Entry, these fields are found on the AR Receipt > Header
> Currency sheet. You can then use this sheet to receive
payment against an invoice in a different currency.
5. Click the Preferred Bank drop-down list to specify a preferred bank for cash receipts from sales.
68
6. Select the Enable Invoice Dates Set Up check box to define automatic date calculations for AR invoices.
This option activates all the fields in the Invoice Dates Set Up group box.
7. Use the Apply fields to define how the Apply Date value is automatically generated on AR invoices. The
Apply Date is the date on which an invoice is applied to a GL journal. Available options:
Amend Indicates this date is automatically generated. You cannot change this option.
Defaults Use this drop-down list to indicate whether the Apply Date defaults from either the Ship
Date or the Invoice Date.
Linking Use this drop-down list to indicate you want the Apply Date to be used as the default value
for another date. You can select None, Ship Date, or Invoice Date.
8. Use the Shipment fields to define how the Shipment Date value automatically generates on AR invoices.
Available options:
Amend Select this check box to indicate you want this rate to automatically generate.
Defaults Indicates the Ship Date is always the date of the last delivery to the customer. You cannot
change this value.
Linking Use this drop-down list to indicate you want the Shipment Date to be used as the default
value for another date. You can select None, Apply Date, or Invoice Date.
9. Use the Tax Point fields to define how the Tax Point Date value automatically generates on AR invoices.
This date is used to determine when taxes are calculated against an AR invoice and this value is also used
as the Tax Report Date. Available options:
Amend Select this check box to indicate you want this date to automatically generate.
Defaults Indicates the Tax Date defaults from either the Ship Date or the Invoice Date.
Linking Use this drop-down list to indicate you want the Tax Point Date to be used as the default value
for another date. You can select None, Apply Date, Ship Date, or Invoice Date.
10. Use the Tax Rate fields to define how the Tax Rate value is automatically calculated on AR invoices. The
tax rate active on the date indicated through these fields defines the rate calculated against the AR invoice.
Available options:
Defaults Indicates the Tax Rate value defaults from either the Ship Date or the Invoice Date.
Linking Use this drop-down list to indicate you want the date on which the tax rate calculates used
as a default for another date. You can select None, Apply Date, Ship Date, Invoice Date, or Tax
Point Date.
11. Use the Tax Rate Credit fields to define how the Tax Rate Credit value is automatically calculated on AR
invoices. The credit rate active on the date indicated through these fields defines the credit rate calculated
against the AR invoice. Available options:
Amend Select this check box to indicate you want this credit rate to automatically generate.
Defaults Indicates the Tax Rate value defaults from either the Credit Date on which the credit value
was entered or the Applied Invoice Date on which the invoice was recorded in the general ledger.
12. Select the Exchange Rate Date to use with the Accounts Receivable module. This value defines the date
this module uses to determine the date for the exchange rate value. Available options:
Apply Date
69
Invoice Date
Some European countries require you use the Invoice
Date.
13. As part of SEPA payments in Europe, Creditors (billers) can collect funds from a debtor's (payer's) account
as long as a signed mandate is granted by the debtor to the creditor. A mandate authorizes the creditor to
collect a payment and to instruct the debtor's bank to pay those collections. Use the Mandate Counter
field to enter a starting value for new mandate records. The application will number new mandates using
this starting value and then get the next number.
14. When you finish defining the general options for the AR module, click Save.
National Accounts
Use the Modules > Finance > Accounts Receivable > National Accounts sheet to designate relationship classes
used to define national accounts. The sheet specifies the classes for relationships where customers share credit,
reporting, and payer sold-to accounts.
To set up national account relationship options:
1. National account customers can share credit. To activate this function, select the check box next to the
Credit Checking button. Then click this button to find and select the relationship class.
You set up national accounts using both Relationship
Class Maintenance and National Account Relationship
Maintenance. These programs are located in the Financial
Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup folder.
2. National accounts can define reporting relationships based on markets or other criteria. You activate this
national account function by clicking the check box next to the Reports button. Then click this button to
select the relationship class you need.
3. You can also establish payer-sold-to relationships. Through these relationships, a payer customer pays for
a sold to customer who receives invoices. To activate this national account function, select the check box
next to the Payer-Bill To button. Then click this button to find and select the relationship class.
70
4. Select the Across National Account check box to indicate your company accepts payments from any
customer within the national account. This feature then ignores parent-child relationships when determining
from whom you receive payment.
5. When you finish setting up national accounts, click Save.
Individual Deposit Invoice Tracking

Use the Modules > Finance > Accounts Receivable > Individual Deposit Invoice Tracking sheet to set up how you
handle deposit invoices for taxes. The tax is calculated based on the options you select on this sheet; the default
setting allocates a deposit invoice against a sales order without collecting taxes.
To set up general deposit invoice tracking:
1. Click the Invoice Deposit Tax Treatment drop-down list to specify how taxes are charged on deposit
invoices. Available options:
No Tax - Default setting
Tax Shipment Net movement - Charges tax on net goods
Reverse tax on shipment invoice - Reversal of original tax at original rate
Reverse tax by invoice match - Independent deposits and subsequent matching (method used by
Russia)
2. Select the Product Tax Category to use for the deposit invoices. Product tax categories classify different
products and services based on taxes, so you can assign a specific tax rate to a specific product tax category.
You create these categories in Product Tax Category
Maintenance. This program is available in the Financial
Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup folder; click
the Tax Product Category icon.
3. Select the Require Deposit Invoice check box to indicate deposit invoices are mandatory for payments.
4. If the Require Deposit Invoice check box is not selected, you can enter an Invoice Days Delay value. Use
this field to define how many days you allow for a late deposit invoice.
71
5. Click the Deposit Transaction Document Type drop-down list to specify what transaction type will assign
legal numbers to deposit invoices.
Transaction document types define the kinds of
documents assigned to legal number sequences. You
create these types in Transaction Document Type
Maintenance. This program is located in the Financial
Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup folder.
6. Select the Deposit Invoices show prior linked Deposit Invoices check box to indicate each deposit
invoice can display a previous deposit invoice. This invoice is linked to the current deposit invoice.
7. If you set the Invoice Deposit Tax Treatment drop-down list to the Tax Shipment Net Movement option,
then the Allow shipment invoice with negative net tax elements check box activates. If selected, you
can process shipment invoices with negative tax amounts.
This situation occurs if the shipment invoice contains items that use a different rate from the rate for the
deposit invoice. If this check box is clear, this off-set can only be for items in the same tax type. Separate
credits are then needed for unmatched values.
8. When you finish setting up deposit invoice tracking, click Save.
Accounts Payable
Use the Modules > Finance > Accounts Payable sheet to define options for the Accounts Payable (AP) module.
Primary AP Options
To set up accounts payable options:
72
1. Select the Save Receipts for Invoicing check box so users can create accounts payable invoices from
receipts. PO receipt information entered in the Shipping/Receiving module is then available to use on billing
lines in AP Invoice Entry.
2. Select the Ready To Calculate check box to cause new AP invoices to automatically select their Ready to
Calculate check boxes. Sales taxes are then automatically calculated against the AP invoice.
If you use the Tax Connect functionality (Avalara AvaTax), this check box also indicates sales taxes against
each AP invoice are automatically calculated and validated through this service. For more information on
Tax Connect, review the Tax Interface section later in this chapter.
3. Select the Default Tax Exempt from PO Line check box to pull in the Taxable setting from PO detail lines
into AP invoices. Within Purchase Order Entry, users can select or clear the Taxable check box on the Lines
> Detail sheet. This setting is then used in AP Invoice Entry.
4. Select the AP Purchase Type check box to specify the Purchase Code field is available in Purchase Order
Entry on the Lines > Detail sheet. Purchase codes contain an extra debit and credit GL account required for
some European financial localities.
5. Select the Exchange Rate Date to use with the Accounts Payable module. This value defines the date this
module uses to determine the date for the exchange rate value. Available options:
Apply Date
73
Invoice Date
Some European countries require you use the Invoice
Date.
6. When you select the Auto Create Supplier for Employee check box, each time you enter an employee
record, a supplier record is generated. You use this functionality for processing expenses.
7. Enter the Supplier ID Prefix to include when you automatically create a supplier record from an employee
record. This prefix is added to each Supplier ID, making it easier to locate and identify these supplier records.
8. Click the Default Aging Report Format Code drop-down list to select the default code for aging accounts
payable records on the Aged Payables report.
9. Select the Always Take Discount check box to cause discounts to always calculate during AP payment
entry, regardless of the Discount Due Date. If you clear this check box, discounts are only calculated if the
Payment Date is on or before the Discount Due Date. Users can override the discount amount on specific
payments.
10. Click the Enable Terms on Debit Memos check box to calculate settlement discounts for debit memos in
AP and modify terms for debit memos in AP Invoice Entry.
You will need to enter cash discounts manually in
payments for debit memos created before you activated
this check box.
74
Enable Invoice Dates and Other Options

1. When you select the Accept rounding at Invoice Entry check box, you indicate rounding differences
automatically post with AP invoices. If this check box is clear, users must manually balance transactions with
rounding differences.
2. Enter the Tolerance at Payment level the AP module uses for rounding calculations. This value determines
the tolerance amount the AP module allows for rounding differences that may happen when invoices are
settled in a different currency from the invoice currency. You can enter a value up to six decimals.
3. If your company uses the Central AP Invoice Payment functionality, click the Parent Company drop-down
list to select the company that makes these central payments. To activate this functionality, both the subsidiary
(child) company and parent company must select the same parent company from this drop-down list.
After a subsidiary posts an AP invoice, the parent company
receives this invoice and turns it into an AP invoice within
its database. After the parent company pays the invoice,
a payment history memo is sent to the subsidiary database
and this memo is attached to the original AP invoice.
4. Click the Enable Invoice Dates Set Up check box to define automatic date calculations for AP invoices.
Selecting this check box activates the fields within the Invoice Dates Set Up group box.
75
5. Use the Apply fields to define how the Apply Date value is automatically generated on AP invoices. The
Apply Date is the date on which an invoice is applied to a GL journal. Available options:
Amend Indicates this date is automatically generated. You cannot change this option.
Defaults Use this drop-down list to indicate whether the Apply Date defaults from the Group Appy
dates.
Linking Use this drop-down list to indicate you want the Apply Date to be used as the default value
for another date. You can select None or Invoice Date.
6. Use the Tax Point fields to define how the Tax Point Date value automatically generates on AP invoices.
This date is used to determine when taxes are calculated against an AP invoice and this value is also used
as the Tax Report Date. Available options:
Defaults Indicates the Tax Date defaults from the Apply Date.
Linking Use this drop-down list to indicate you want the Tax Point Date to be used as the default value
for another date. You can select None, Apply Date, or Invoice Date.
7. Use the Tax Rate fields to define how the Tax Rate value is automatically calculated on AP invoices. The
tax rate active on the date indicated through these fields defines the rate calculated against the AP invoice.
Available options:
Defaults Indicates the Tax Rate value defaults from the Apply Date.
Linking Use this drop-down list to indicate you want the date on which the tax rate calculates used
as a default for another date. You can select None, Apply Date, and Invoice Date, or Tax Point Date.
8. Click the Accounting Option drop-down list to define how the application handles logged invoices. Available
options:
Account for Taxes causes the payables and tax accounts to directly post. Expenses are posted to suspense
accounts.
Authorization Tracking only creates invoices for authorization. When users post invoices, these invoices
do not affect the general ledger.
Book All to Suspense Accounts causes payables, tax, and expenses to post to corresponding suspense
accounts.
9. Select the Auto Approve Logged Invoices check box to indicate when a logged invoice is posted, it is
also automatically approved. If you selected Authorization Tracking as the Accounting Option, this field is
not available.
10. Leverage the Available Users and Authorized Admins lists to indicate which users are authorized to
approve logged AP invoices. Select the users you want from the Available Users list and then click the Right
Arrow button to move them to the Authorized Admins list.
11. When you finish setting up the accounts payable options, click Save.
General Ledger
Leverage the Modules > Finance > General sheet to define the options for the General Ledger (GL) module.
To set up general ledger options:
76
1. Select the System Interfaces you wish to link to the General Ledger module. Transactions posted to the
interfaces you select also create GL journal transactions. Available options:
Accounts Payable
Accounts Receivable
Payroll
Inventory
When you activate the Inventory check box, you can post Inventory, WIP, and Cost of Sales information to
your general ledger. Within the Capture WIP/COS Activity program, the Post to General Ledger check
box is available. However before you select the Inventory check box, be sure to review the Company section
within the Inventory Transactions Technical Reference Guide within application help.
Select the system interface options after you enter the
initial GL balances. If you select an interface before you
enter these transactions, you receive a warning message
each time you post. You can ignore these warnings; they
stop displaying after you post transactions to the general
ledger.
2. Select the Allow Unbalanced Manual General Journal Entries check box so unbalanced journal entries
can be posted to the general ledger. A warning message still displays so you can verify all unbalanced journal
entries.
3. Select the Use current date when matching GL transactions check box to specify GL transactions pull
the current system date when users run the GL Transaction Matching program. Clear this check box to use
the last Apply Date for the matched transactions instead.
4. When you select the Batch Balances check box, you maintain GL balance records in batch mode instead
of real-time.
77
5. If the check box is not selected, you can select the Batch Daily Balances check box. The GL module then
maintains GL daily balances in batch mode instead of real-time.
6. Use the Tax Entry Mode in GL Journal drop-down list to determine how taxes are delivered and reported
in GL Journal Entry. Available options:
No Taxes - Taxes are not reported in General Ledger. If this value is selected, then the Default Tax Type
and Default Tax Liability drop-down lists are disabled.
Taxable Journal Lines - Indicates that tax types and tax liabilities can be calculated against journal lines
in GL Journal Entry.
Taxable Journal Lines or Tax Adjustment Journal - Indicates that tax types and tax liabilities can be
calculated against both journal lines and tax adjustments in GL Journal Entry.
7. Select the Default Tax Liability used for journal lines and tax adjustments in General Ledger. A tax liability
represents taxes a company handles when they trade with customers and suppliers. These can be taxes liable
due to both your company's tax status or the tax status of the customer or supplier. You create these records
in Tax Liability Maintenance; review the application help for more information.
8. Select the Default Tax Type used for journal lines and tax adjustments in General Ledger. Tax types contain
attributes like a calculation algorithm, collection method, time of recognition, and so on. You can select
any tax type, even a tax type not linked to the selected tax liability. You create tax types in Tax Type
Maintenance; review the application help for more information.
9. If this company will use multiple books, select the Default Book Mode for entries made in these books.
Available options:
Single Book - The selected books fiscal calendar, currency, and COA of the selected book are the
defaults.
Multi Book - The current companys fiscal calendar, currency, and the Master COA are the defaults.
10. Click the Default Journal Code drop-down list to define the journal used for entering transactions. These
codes group journals associated with posting processes. You create these codes in Journal Code
Maintenance; review the application help for more details on journal codes.
11. Select the Default Opening Journal Code to define the journal code you wish to use for starting journals.
12. Select the Default Closing Journal Code to define the journal code you wish to use for closing journals.
13. When you finish selecting the general ledger options, click Save.
Payroll
Use the Modules > Finance > Payroll sheet to define the options for the Payroll module.
To set up payroll options:
78
1. The Start Date field specifies the date on which you begin payroll processing. You can modify this date
until you enter a payroll transaction in Payroll Check Entry; this field then becomes read-only.
Be sure to begin payroll processing at the beginning of a
quarter.
2. If you run payroll semimonthly (twice a month), enter the 2nd Period Start Day value. This specifies the
day of the month on which the second payroll run in each month should begin.
3. You can also select the Print Rates check box. This causes the pay rates to display on the payroll checks.
4. Select the HCM Integration Enabled to indicate Epicor Human Capital Management (HCM) is integrated
with the Payroll module. Records are then linked from Epicor HCM to Payroll Employee Maintenance
and Person/Contact Maintenance.
5. Select a Check Print Order option to define the sequence through which payroll checks print. Available
options:
Department
Employee ID
Employee Name
Supervisor ID
6. When you finish setting up the payroll options, click Save.
Asset Management
Use the Modules > Finance > Asset Management sheet to define company configuration options for the this
module.
To set up asset management options:
79
1. Click the Fiscal Calendar... button to find and select the fiscal calendar you will use with the Asset
Management module.
You create these calendars in Fiscal Calendar
Maintenance. For more information, review the General
Ledger chapter later in this guide.
2. Now click the Fiscal Year/Suffix button to specify the current fiscal year. Asset Management uses this year
to begin its calculations. The Asset Year End Process automatically updates this year through the following
conditions:
The Fixed Asset Closed Period check box in Fiscal Calendar Maintenance is selected (Fiscal Year >
Fiscal Period > List) for the modified period.
The modified fiscal period is greater than or equal to the current fiscal period defined in Company
Configuration.
3. Click the Fiscal Period button to find and select the fiscal period during which the Asset Management
module begins its calculations. The Asset Year End Process automatically updates this period through the
following conditions:
The modified fiscal period is in the current fiscal year.
The modified fiscal period is greater than or equal to the current fiscal period defined in Company
Configuration.
4. When you finish defining the Asset Management options, click Save.
Tax Interface
Use the Tax Interface sheet to define how the application interacts with the Avalara AvaTax service. This service
eliminates determining the sales tax jurisdictions of ship-to addresses, maintaining tax codes and rates, and
tracking jurisdiction-specific and commodity-specific taxation rules.
To use this functionality, you need to purchase licenses for both Epicor Tax Connect and Avalara AvaTax. For
an overview of this functionality, review the Epicor Tax Connect topic within application help.
80
Set Up Tax Interface

Access the Modules > Finance > Tax Interface sheet to enter connection information and security settings. These
options determine how Epicor Tax Connect integrates with Avalara AvaTax to validate addresses and calculate
taxes. You can also test the tax service connection on this sheet.
To define how this company calculates taxes:
1. Select the Tax Connect Enabled check box to activate Epicor Tax Connect. When you indicate this
company automatically calculates taxes (Tax Calculation Enabled) and validates addresses (Address Validation
Enabled), this tax information is automatically passed along to the AvaTax service.
2. To test the data being sent to Avalara, select the Debug Mode check box. The files sent and received from
Avalara are not deleted; you can then review them.
3. Click the Test Connection button to validate the connection to the Epicor Tax Connect interface. After the
connection is tested, a window appears indicating whether the connection was successful. If not, an error
message displays explaining why the connection failed.
You can clear the Tax Connect Enabled check box and
then click the Test Connection button to verify this
functionality is working internally. When you are satisfied
with the results, activate Epicor Tax Connect.
4. Enter the AvaTax service URL (Uniform Resource Locator) to specify the location where the Epicor application
automatically sends tax and address validation information.
5. Use the Request Timeout field to determine how much time passes before the connection to the
AvaTax service is disconnected. When the application cannot detect any activity (requests), this time interval
must pass before the application disconnects the service. Enter the value in seconds.
81
6. The Account User Name value specifies the account user name or number used by Avalara to verify this
application can use AvaTax.
7. The Key/Password field defines the account key or password used by Avalara to verify this application
can use AvaTax.
8. Click the Text Case drop-down list to specify the case used by Epicor Tax Connect and the AvaTax service
to validate the addresses. Available options:
Default
Upper
Mixed
9. Select the Address Validation Enabled check box to activate the address validation functionality. This
activates the Validate Address options available on Actions menus within Customer Maintenance, AR
Invoice Entry, and other programs. Users can also run the Bulk Address Validation process, which
validates all the addresses through a recurring schedule.
10. Select the Tax Calculation Enabled check box to indicate tax calculations are run using Epicor Tax Connect
and then sent to the AvaTax service. If AR invoices or sales orders are selected for tax calculations, sales
taxes calculations automatically generate.
As described in previous sections in this chapter, you indicate invoices and sales orders use Epicor Tax Connect
by selecting the Ready to Calculate check boxes on the Modules > Finance > Accounts Receivable and the
Modules > Finance > Accounts Payable sheets and the Ready to Process check box on the Modules > Sales
> Order sheet. You can also activate the Tax Connect functionality on specific invoices in AR Invoice Entry
and AP Invoice Entry; the Summary sheets in both programs have Ready to Calculate check boxes. You can
active this functionality on specific sales orders as well; the Sales Order Entry > Summary sheet has a Ready
to Process check box.
If the Tax Calculation Enabled check box is not selected, the standard sales tax calculations run by default.
When the Tax Connect Enabled check box is not selected,
both the Address Validation Enabled and Tax Calculation
Enabled check boxes are still available. You can then both
set up the functionality and test the connection without
passing this information externally out to the AvaTax
service.
11. Enter the Tax ID Prefix you want to use. This value identifies any sales tax records automatically generated
by Epicor Tax Connect.
12. Click the Default Tax Category drop-down list to specify the sales tax category used by default when a
category is not available for the sales order and/or AR invoice transaction. All sales tax categories available
within the application display on this list.
13. When you finish setting up the taxing options, click Save.
Test Epicor Tax Connect

You can use the Actions menu to activate Epicor Tax Connect, test the connection to the Avalara AvaTax service,
and validate the companys current address. These menu options are a shortcut to identical functions found on
the Tax Interface sheet.
To run these Actions menu options:
82
1. Click Actions > Tax Connect > Tax Connect Enabled to activate Epicor Tax Connect. This option is
identical to the Tax Connect Enabled check box. When you indicate this company automatically calculates
taxes (Tax Calculation Enabled) and validates addresses (Address Validation Enabled), this tax information
is automatically passed along to the AvaTax service.
If Epicor Tax Connect is active, a check appears next to this option. You can deactivate Epicor Tax Connect
from this menu to run setup and testing tasks.
2. When you select the Test Connection option, a window appears indicating either the connection succeeded
or failed. If there was an error, correct the issue and then test the connection again.
3. When you select the Validate Address option, the current companys address is validated against the Epicor
Tax Connect parameters. When the process is complete, the Address Validation window displays. Use this
program to review the results of the validation and update the address if needed.
For more information about the validation process, review
the Address Validation topics within application help.
Payment Instruments
Use the Modules > Finance > Payment Instruments sheet to define parameters for both Accounts Receivable (AR)
and Accounts Payable (AP) payment instruments. You first determine the stage at which a payment instrument
is recorded in the general ledger and then assign starting numbers for them. Additionally for AR payment
instrument processing, you select default statuses for each stage.
You set up statuses for payment instrument stages in Payment
Instrument Status Maintenance. After you enter these statuses,
return to Company Configuration to select these status options.
You can then return to Payment Instrument Status Maintenance
and define your GL controls. For more information on statuses,
review application help; to learn more about GL controls, review
Chapter 8: General Ledger.
83
To set up the payment instrument functionality:

1. Click the First GL Update Stage drop-down list to define the first AR payment instrument stage that
requires GL posting.
2. Select the Create GL Journal for Status Changes check box to indicate whether a GL journal entry is
automatically created when a status change occurs for the same GL control.
3. The Default Statuses group box contains a series of drop-down lists that define default statuses available
for payment instruments. Available statuses:
Unapproved
Portfolio
Apply to Bank
Settled Status
As a payment instrument progresses, it goes through a
number of stages. Within a stage, there can be multiple
statuses. For example, during the Accounts Receivable
(AR) Portfolio stage, there could be both the Portfolio
Signed and Portfolio Posted statuses. Set up multiple
statuses for any of the stages as required for your payment
instrument process.
4. Enter the Starting Number for the first number used for the AR payment numbering sequences.
5. Enter the Number of Digits available for AR payment instrument numbers.
6. You set up a similar series of options for AP payment instruments. Use the First GL Update Stage drop-down
list to define the first AP payment instrument that requires GL posting.
84
7. Enter the Starting Number for the first number used for the AP payment numbering sequences.
8. Enter the Number of Digits available for AP payment instrument numbers.
9. When you finish defining the payment instrument options, click Save.
Maintenance
Use the Modules > Maintenance sheet to specify the default job template and starting prefix for maintenance
jobs. These default values are used in the Maintenance Management module.
To define the maintenance parameters:
1. Click the Template button to find and select the template job used for the current companys maintenance
jobs. When users run the Maintenance Plan Processor program, these jobs generate using this template.
The job template contains the details (operations, assemblies, and materials) for each maintenance job.
The job template you select on this sheet is the overall default for the module. You can override this template
on a specific site within the Site Configuration program. Likewise, when the Maintenance Plan Processor
generates jobs for equipment plans, it first uses any job templates selected on equipment records. You
create equipment records in Equipment Maintenance.
2. Enter the starting Job Prefix automatically used on identifiers for maintenance jobs. When the Maintenance
Plan Processor generates jobs, this prefix is added to the front of these job numbers.
This job prefix is the overall default for the module. You can override the job prefix on a specific site within
the Site Configuration program.
For more information on the Site Configuration program,
review the Sites chapter later in this guide. For information
on the Maintenance features, review the Maintenance
chapter in the Epicor Application User Guide. You can
also find additional details in the application help.
3. When you finish setting up the maintenance parameters, click Save.
85
Services
You set up the company configuration for the Field Service and Project Billing modules using the Services sheets.
This section describes the options available for each module.
Field Service
Use the Modules > Services > Field Service sheet to define the default settings for service contracts and service
jobs.
To define the field service parameters:
1. Enter the Starting Contract number for the first contract created in Service Contract Entry. Service
contract numbers generate automatically by adding 1 to the highest number available in the database.
If you do not enter a value in this field, the service contracts begin with 1 and increase from the current
number.
2. Enter the Starting Service Call number for the first service call entered in Service Call Center. Service call
numbers generate automatically by adding 1 to the highest number available in the database. If you do
not enter a value in this field, the service call numbers begin with 1 and increase from the current number.
3. In the Service Call Job Prefix field, define the prefix used on service call job numbers. When you create a
job through Service Job Entry, this prefix is automatically added to the job number. You can then locate
service jobs more easily.
4. Select the Contract Startup Mode check box to indicate existing service contracts are invoiced and updatable
at both the Contract Header and Line level. Use this option when you add existing service contracts to the
Field Service module.
While the Contract Startup Mode check box is selected,
all service contracts can be modified. Be sure to clear the
check box after you finish entering existing contracts.
5. The Default Site field displays the Site used for service calls. You cannot change this Site value. To learn
more about configuring sites, review the Sites chapter later in this guide.
86
6. Click the Default Resource Group drop-down list to specify the default resource group used for service
calls. The values defined on the selected resource group determine the costs on service jobs. You create
resource groups using Resource Group Maintenance. For more information, review application help.
7. Select an option from the Product Group drop-down list to specify the default product group for service
calls. This product group is used when the part selected on a field service job does not have a product group
assigned to it.
Because the Field Service job hierarchy does not look at
general ledger accounts linked to product groups, these
GL accounts are not used. You create these records in
Product Group Maintenance; for more information, review
this topic within application help.
8. Select the Print Prices on Service Tickets check box to indicate prices are automatically printed on all
tickets for service calls.
9. Enter the Expiration Horizon to define how many days before the service contract Expire Date a contract
can be renewed. If the current date plus the Expiration Horizon is greater than or equal to the Expire Date
on a contract, the Field Service module determines the contract will soon expire. The application notifies
you the contract is ready for renewal.
10. Enter the Renewal Period. This value determines the number of days after a contracts Expire Date the
contract can be renewed. If you enter a zero in this field, all expired contracts can be renewed at any time.
11. When you finish defining the field service parameters, click Save.
Project Billing
Use the Modules > Services > Project Billing sheet to enter project billing settings for the current company. You
can set the default invoice method and the default values for role codes, revenue recognition, rates, and tax
categories.
To define the project billing parameters:
1. Click the Default Invoicing Method drop-down list to define the method used for new projects. Available
options:
Customer Shipment
Milestone Billing
Fixed Fee
Time and Materials
Cost Plus
Progress Payments
87
Users can override this method on specific projects in Project Entry.
2. Select the Default Validate Employee Role to Operation Role check box if you want Project Entry to
automatically validate project role codes when employees enter labor against an operation linked to project
job. If this check box is clear, the Epicor application does not validate the employee and operation roles,
and each employee can enter any project role code available on the employees record.
You can also validate the project role codes on a specific
project in Project Entry. To do this, navigate to the
Contract > Detail sheet and select the Validate Employee
Role to Operation Role check box.
You create role codes in Role Code Maintenance; for more information, review application help or the
Epicor Application User Guide. You create employee records and link role codes to them in Employee
Maintenance. To learn more about this program, review the Personnel chapter later in this guide.
3. Select the Allow Validate Role to be Changed per Project check box so users can change the Derive
Project Rates From values on specific projects. Within Project Entry, this drop-down list is available on the
Contract > Detail sheet.
4. Click the Default Location for Role Code in Labor Booking drop-down list to define where the application
finds role codes. Available options:
Employee
Operation
88
5. Click the Default Revenue Recognition Method drop-down list to specify the default revenue recognition
method used in Project Entry. This default value displays on the Contract > Detail sheet. Available options:
On Invoice
Labor Booking Recognition
Manual Recognition
Actual Burden Recognition
None (This indicates revenue is not recognized in Project Entry.)
6. Select the Allow Revenue Recognition Method to be Changed per Project check box so users can
change the Revenue Recognition method on specific projects. When you select this option, the Revenue
Recognition Method drop-down list activates in Project Entry.
7. Click the Revenue Recognition Journal Reversal drop-down list to determine the journal reversal process
for project billing. Available options:
Reverse in Following Period (available if the Manual Recognition method is selected)
Reverse on Project Close
Reverse on Invoice/Shipment
8. Click the Default Derive Project Rates From drop-down list to define the source from which project rates
calculate. The rates selected on this source are then used to determine project costs. Available options:
Hierarchical
Project
Employee Only
Role Only
9. Select the Allow Override at Project Level check box to activate the Derive Project Rates From drop-down
list in Project Entry. Users can then select different rate sources on specific projects.
10. Tax Categories classify different products and services based on taxes. When a group of products needs
a different rate from the rate selected on the tax type, this alternate rate can be assigned to the product
tax category. You assign these tax categories to different project billing categories. Available project billing
categories:
Material (If you do not select a Material option, the application uses the standard tax category.)
Labor
Other Direct Cost (If you do not select an Other Direct Cost option, the application uses the miscellaneous
charge tax category.)
Burden
Subcontract
Fee
Billing Schedule
For more information on these categories, review the Product Tax Categories section the Global Tax Engine
chapter found later in this guide.
11. Select the Allow Sales Order To Be Defined On Project/WBS Phase check box so users can select sales
orders on both projects and Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) phases within Project Entry.
89
12. Select the Automatically Load All Releases to WBS Phase check box to pull in all sales order releases
into WBS phases.
13. When you finish selecting the project billing options, click Save.
Multi-Companies
Use the Multi-Site functionality to share data across your organization. Leverage these features to share global
master records like customers, parts, and suppliers, coordinate purchasing between your divisions, consolidate
financial data, and other internal data sharing activities. Implement the features you need to better coordinate
the diverse activities of your entire organization.
You can set up companies to share data for the following features:
Global Records Share master records across your multi-site environment. These master records, called
global records, synchronize across the database, ensuring the same data is used by invoices, sales orders,
packing slips, and other entry records.
Global Customer Credit Use the Global Customer Credit functionality to create and enforce a credit limit
for a specific customer for all companies within your organization.
Inter-Company Purchase Orders Create Inter-Company Purchase Orders (ICPOs) and suggestions between
multiple companies.
AP Invoice Automation Automate creating AP invoices for inter-company trading transactions. An AP
invoice is automatically created for the purchasing company and an AR invoice is automatically created for
the selling company.
Consolidated Purchasing Consolidated purchasing centralizes purchasing and AP functions across multiple
companies. Use this functionality to define the central purchasing, or parent company. Then define the other
receiving, or child, companies who receive PO releases from the parent company.
Central AP Invoice Payments Pay for subsidiary AP invoices at the corporate (parent) level. The corporate
parent then has greater control over the AP process throughout your organization, as all AP invoices flow
through the main (parent) company.
Multi-Company Journals and AP Allocations Use the Multi-Company Journals and AP Allocations functionality
to distribute amounts from a parent company to one or more subsidiary (child) companies.
Multi-Company Consolidation Pull together, or consolidate, the fiscal books of one or more child companies
within a parent company. The consolidation relationship can be a single child company to a single parent
company, multiple child companies to a single parent company, or multiple child companies to multiple parent
companies.
Multi-Company Dashboards Create multi-company dashboards that can display data from multiple companies
through global business activity queries.
Multi-Company Configurator Manage configured parts in a multi-company enterprise. These functions
automate business situations in which a Sales company configures and sells products designed and
manufactured in another company.
The information in this section is intended as an overview of
multi-company relationships. To learn more details, review the
Multi-Site Company Technical Reference Guide available within
application help.
90
External Systems
Access External System Maintenance to add or update integration records you use to transfer data between
multiple companies.
You can transfer data between multiple companies through different methods. If your system uses multiple
databases and each contains a separate company, create an external system that uses the SERVICEBUS transfer
method. This third party application links multiple databases and then transfers the multi-company data.
If your system has multiple companies contained within a single database, create an external system that uses
the DIRECT transfer method. This method links the outbound and inbound tables together between multiple
companies. Since these companies are all on the same database, the Microsoft Service Bus application is not
needed.
If your organization uses Product Lifecycle Management (PLM), your external system connects to this third party
application using the PLM transfer method.
Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External System Maintenance
Enter an External System

To set up an external system:
1. Click the External System button to find and select an existing system.
The Epicor application installs with default external
systems. However you can create a new external system
by clicking the New button. Your new external system
must match an available External System identifier.
2. Enter the External System Name that concisely describes this external system.
3. The Transfer Method field displays the method through which the data transfers. When you first create
a new external system, this field is a drop-down list that contains the following methods:
DIRECT
GENERIC (ascii)
SERVICEBUS
91
PLM
4. Select the Financial System check box to indicate this external system links to an external financial system.
If this check box is selected, you can only link one external company record to this external system, as this
company's financial records must be compatible with the linked financial system.
5. Enter the values you need in the Service Bus Connection group box. The values you enter here links your
external system to Microsoft Service Bus .

The above illustration is only intended as an example of
a local Service Bus connection. You can use similar values
when you are testing Service Bus to verify the connection
and send messages; the Namespace, HTTP Port, and TCP
Port values are the default settings that initially install. To
fully implement Service Bus, review your Microsoft Service
Bus documentation. This documentation will help you
decide where you should install Service Bus and the
connection setup configuration that will work best for
your system.
6. When you finish defining the external system, click Save.
External Company Maintenance

Use External Company Maintenance to either establish direct relationships with companies within the same
database or create remote connections to companies on other databases. You create external company records
to pass data to and from the current company to an external company. For example, you can create an external
company record so the current company can share global customer, part, supplier and financial data with the
external company.
To do this, you first indicate which external system the Epicor application will use with the external company.
You then create an external company record for each outside company you want to share data with the current
company. To complete the relationship, you then launch External Company Maintenance within the other company
and enter a matching external company record.
Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance
Select External System

You begin by first selecting the external system and then creating the external company record.
92
1. Click the External System drop-down list to select the external system. The previous section describes how
you set up external system records.
2. The Transfer Method field displays how the external company linked to this system shares data with the
current company.
3. Now click the New button.
4. Enter the External Company ID and Name for the new external company.
5. The List Delimiter field displays the character that separates the fields during a data transfer. You cannot
change this value.
6. Enter the Server URL (uniform resource locator) for the application server this external company will use.
93
Establish Field Translations

You can establish field translations between the values of your internal fields with external fields. Use this sheet
when you want data from a field in your current company to transfer into an external financial system.
1. Select a table from the Tables List.
2. The fields available in this table display in the Fields List.

3. Select the field for which you want to create a translation.
4. Now click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Translation.
5. The Database Value defines the source field for the translation.
6. The Inbound Value defines the target field that receives the data from the translated field.
7. Select the Default Value check box to indicate the value of the translated field is the same as the field
highlighted on the Fields List.
8. Continue to add the field translations you need. When you finish, click Save.
External Company Configuration

Use External Company Configuration to configure direct relationships with companies in the same database or
configure remote connections to companies on other databases using Service Bus, Mobile Connect, Commerce
Connect, and so on.
You first create external company records in External Company Maintenance to pass data to (and from) the
current company to (and from) an external company. In a multi-company environment you can create an external
company so that you can share global customer, part, supplier and financial data with the external company. To
do this, you first indicate which external system the Epicor application will use with the external company. The
external system defines the connection method.
94
Once you define external company records, you configure the data relationships between the two external
companies. You define the specific types of interactions you want to occur between the companies - like sending
customer data, supplier data, PO suggestions, and so on for each record. You can also set up the Inter-Company
Trading functionality in this program, defining the two companies involved in this trading relationship.
Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration
Define Company Information

To begin, you first select an external company you created in External Company Maintenance. You can then
define how this company will interact with the other company.
1. Click the External System drop-down list to select the external system. The previous section describes how
you set up external system records.
2. The Transfer Method field displays how the external company linked to this system shares data with the
current company.
3. Click the External Company ID... button to find and select the external company record you need.
4. Now define the available options for the external company. Select the AP Invoice Discount check box if
the discount amount by line must be captured and sent to the external company (or a third-party Financials
package). This check box is available if the Transfer Method is Direct.
5. Select the Send Acknowledgments check box if an acknowledgment must be sent to the current company
when this external company receives a record. This check box is available if the Transfer Method is Generic.
6. If this external company supports inter-company trading, select the Enable check box; this activates the
fields in the Inter-Company Trading group box. Through this functionality, you create Inter-Company
Purchase Orders (ICPOs) and suggestions.
95
7. Enter the Transfer Days to External Company value. This value determines the number of days required
to transfer an order from one company to the other company. This number is subtracted from the purchase
order Need By Date to determine the correct need by date for the purchase order.
8. Now define the inter-company relationship between the two companies. In the Supplier ID field, enter the
identifier for the current external company; in the Partner Customer ID field, enter the identifier for the
linking external company.
9. Do the same for the second pair of fields. In the Customer ID field, enter the identifier for the current
external company; in the Partner Supplier ID field, enter the identifier for the linking external company.
10. Now use the check boxes in the Modules group box to indicate what records transfer to this external
company. Each check box causes a specific set of records to be sent. Available options:
Send Customer
Send Prospect
Send Suspect
Send Part
Send Pack
Send Supplier
Send AP Invoices
Send AR Invoices
Send PO Suggestions If this external company uses consolidated purchasing, you must select this
check box so demand from this external company creates purchase order suggestions in the central
purchasing company.
Receive AP Invoices
Receive AR Invoices
Send Person/Contact
Send Configurator
11. When you finish entering the external companys information, click Save.
Create External Sites and Warehouses

If you are setting up child companies for consolidated purchasing, you must create an external company record
for the central purchasing company in each child company. These external company records must also indicate
the external sites and warehouses that receive goods from the consolidated purchase orders.
For a step-by-step walkthrough on setting up consolidated
purchasing, review the Consolidated Purchasing Setup topic
in the Multi-Site Technical Reference Guide.
To add external sites and warehouses:
96
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New External Site.
2. Enter the unique Site ID and Name that identifies this external site.
3. Enter the Address, City, State/Prov, and Postal Code.
4. Click the Country drop-down list and select the country where the site resides.
You create country records using Country Maintenance.
This program is located in multiple Setup folders on the
Main Menu, including the Customer Relationship
Management and Accounts Receivable Setup folders.
5. Enter the Phone and Fax contact information for this site.
6. Now enter the Default Warehouse for this site. This identifier defines the site that receives goods through
consolidated purchase orders.
97
7. You must also define the external warehouses used for consolidated purchasing. To do this, click the Down
Arrow next to the New button; select New External Warehouse.
8. Enter the Warehouse ID and Name for this external warehouse. This warehouse is located within the
external site.
9. Next enter the Address, City, State/Prov, and Postal Code.
10. Click the Country drop-down list and select the country where the warehouse resides.
11. Continue to add the external sites and warehouses you need. When you finish, click Save.
98
Enter Multi-Company Details

Use the Detail > Multi-Company > Detail sheet to enter the settings this external company uses to share financial
data with the current company. These settings define the Central AP Payment, Consolidated Purchasing, and
Multi-Company GL Journal multi-company features.
1. Enter the PONum Warning Point at which the application alerts the central purchasing company this
receiving company is near its PONum Reorder Point limit. The central purchasing company then gives this
child receiving company more PO numbers for independent purchases.
2. Now enter the PONum Block Size amount. This value defines how many new purchase order numbers the
central purchasing company assigns to this receiving company when it reaches its PONum Reorder Point.
This value indicates how many POs this child company can create on their own, ensuring unique numbers
are created for each purchase order.
For example, you set up an external company record for
the West Blue company and configure the consolidated
purchasing functionality. You indicate the West Blue
company can have 40 PO numbers available within its
PONum Block Size value. You then enter the PONum
Warning Point value, which you define as 10. Lastly, you
enter a PONum Reorder Point value of 5. The central
purchasing company assigns PO numbers 116-155 as the
block. When a user creates a purchase order with a
number of 145, a warning message alerts the user that
the available PO numbers are running out. When a user
creates a PO that uses 150, the central purchasing
company gives West Blue a new block of 40 PO numbers.
3. Enter the PONum Reorder Point at which the central purchasing company assigns more purchase order
numbers to this receiving company.
4. Enter the Invoice Group Prefix automatically placed on identifiers for AP invoice groups paid centrally at
the corporate location.
99
5. Click the Legal Number drop-down list to define the method used to generate legal numbers on central
AP payments. Available options:
None - Legal numbers are not used on central AP payments.
Use Original - Combines the Source Company Code with the original subsidiarys legal number. The
Source Company Code is added as a prefix.
If the corporate rules are set to manually create legal
numbers, only the Use Original option available. If you
use the Generate New option, the system will not
display the new legal number in a separate dialog box
instead; the system just creates the number. For more
information, review the Legal Numbers chapter later
in this guide.
Generate New - Causes the system to generate new legal numbers following the rules defined at the
corporate location.
6. Select the Send GL Accounts check box to indicate this external company can move intercompany
transactions out to subsidiary (child) company databases. These subsidiary companies then automatically
receive these transactions into a GL intercompany account.
7. Select the Send Multi-Company Segments Only check box to indicate only chart of account segment
values defined as multi-company segments are sent for either the General Journal or the AP Allocation. This
multi-company setting is only available on controlled segments.
8. Enter the Journal Group Prefix automatically placed on any journal groups that process intercompany
transactions.
9. Select the Allow GJ Allocations to check box to indicate this external company can receive General Ledger
allocations in the selected GL Intercompany account. These allocations are first entered at the corporate, or
parent, location and are then automatically entered into this external companys database.
10. Select the Allow AP Allocations to check box to indicate this external company can receive Accounts
Payable allocations from the corporate (parent) database. You can then automatically distribute expense
amounts across several accounts.
11. Now add the general ledger controls you need. To do this, click the Down Arrow next to the New button;
select New External Company GL Control.
100
12. Click the Type button to find and select the external company GL control type.
13. Next click the Control button to find and select the external company GL control.
14. When you finish defining the multi-company options, click Save.
Set Up Epicor Commerce Connect

Use the ECC sheet to define settings used in the interface between the Epicor ERP application and the external
server hosting Epicor Commerce Connect (ECC).
These settings include the URL for the ECC server and the identifier for the Epicor ERP user who can access the
ECC server. For consumer ECC transactions, you can also designate a default customer code and miscellaneous
charge code.
1. Find and select an external company that uses the Customer Connect or Supplier Connect External System.
2. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New External ECC.
3. Enter the ECC URL (Uniform Resource Locator) for the external ECC server. This address can be an internally
hosted Linux server, or one hosted in an Epicor data center.
Specifies the URL The Epicor application uses this value when you run the synchronization processes.
4. Now enter the User ID and Password for the Epicor user who can access the external ECC server. You
must enter a valid user account. You create these accounts in User Account Security Maintenance; for
more details, review the application help.
5. Select the default Customer (Customer Connect) or Supplier (Supplier Connect) identifier for ECC consumer
transactions. The Epicor application assigns this as the default customer/supplier for cash or credit card
consumers who use web orders.
6. Optionally, select a Misc Charge Code to define a default miscellaneous charge code. These miscellaneous
charges can include standard shipping and order processing fees you charge on web orders.
Miscellaneous charges only apply to customer/consumer
transactions; you do not use them on supplier
transactions.
101
7. When you finish setting up ECC, click Save.

Now when you run the ECC Customer/Consumer Synchronization and ECC Supplier Synchronization processes,
the Epicor application uses these parameters synchronize customer master, customer part, customer web order
and supplier master file information with the external server hosting Epicor Commerce Connect.
Initialize Multi-Company Records

When you finish setting up the external company, use the Actions menu options to activate data transfers.
To initialize multi-company records:
1. Click the Actions menu.
2. Run the Initialize/Send Multi-Company GL Account option to activate the Multi-Company Journal
functionality. This option is available when you select the Send G/L Accounts check box on the
Multi-Company > Detail sheet. This sheet was described in a previous section.
3. Run the Initialize Multi-Company Global Part/ Customer/Supplier/Person Contact/Currency/
Rate/Group/Exchange Rates option to refresh global records between the current company and this
external company.
A record is defined as a global record when its Global
check box is selected. This check box is available on the
detail sheet within the part, customer, supplier, rate types,
and currency maintenance programs.
4. Select the Initialize/Send Enterprise Configurator option to send a configuration created in the current
company to the external company.
You create enterprise configurations within the
Configuration Designer. For more information, refer to
the Configuration Designer topics and the Configurator
Technical Reference Guide within application help.
5. You can change the transfer method used on a Multi-Company external system. To do this, select an external
company that uses either the Multi-Company Direct or the Multi-Company Service Bus external system.
102
After you indicate which system you use, select either the Convert to Multi-Company Direct or Convert
to Multi-Company Service Bus option.
6. You can also change the transfer method used on an Enterprise Configurator external system. To do this,
select an external company that uses either the Enterprise Configurator Direct or the Enterprise Configurator
Service Bus external system. After you indicate which system you use, select either the Convert to Enterprise
Configurator Direct or Convert to Enterprise Configurator Service Bus option.
Global Tables
Use Global Table Maintenance to specify which fields update when global records are pulled into your current
company. Leverage this program to define which global fields are linked when you integrate data; the selected
fields update with information passed along from the global record.
Several master tables share data between multiple companies. Available shared tables include CUSTOMER,
SUPPLIER (VENDOR), PART, and CURRENCY.
Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > Global Table
Define Global Tables

Do the following to set up the global tables you will use.
1. Click the System drop-down list to indicate which global system you need to update. Available options:
All Systems
Customer Connect
Generic
Multi-Company
PLM
103
Supplier Connect
If you select All Systems, you update all the global tables.
If you select Multi- Company, only the multi-company
tables update.
2. Click the Company drop-down list to specify the external company. The default value is All Companies,
but all external company records display on this list.
3. In the Tree View, select the table you wish to edit.
4. After you select a table, its ID appears in the Table field.
5. The Available Choices column initially contains all the fields in the selected global table. To specify you
want one of these fields to update globally, highlight it from this list.
6. Click the Right Arrow button.
7. To move all the fields, click the Double-Right Arrow button.
8. The selected field(s) moves to the Selected Choices list.
9. Continue to move the fields you need. When you finish, click Save.
104
Sites | Chapter 2
Chapter 2: Sites
You use site records to set up the locations, buildings, or areas within a company where manufacturing and other
business is conducted. You must have at least one site record in a company. If your organization has a multi-site license,
you can create multiple sites, according to your requirements.
You first create sites within Site Maintenance. These records contain the basic information required to define the sites
within the current company. You then indicate how each site interacts within other modules through the Site
Configuration Control program. This program is similar to Company Configuration. You select a specific site and then
define various options for each module.
Sites
You enter the primary information for each site within Site Maintenance. Items you define include parameters
like Production Preparation Time, Rough Cut Horizon, and the Production Calendar. You can also define the cost
set, which determines the costing method used for the parts manufactured at this site. Lastly, you set up the
transfer order parameters this site follows when fulfilling internal sales orders.
Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Site Maintenance
Site Maintenance
To create a new site record in Site Maintenance:
105
Chapter 2 | Sites
1. Click New on the Standard toolbar.
2. Enter the Site identifier for the new site. This value displays within various programs and reports; enter an
identifier that helps you quickly locate the site.
3. Enter the Name for the site. This text displays on various programs and reports.
4. If your company has multiple sites, a maintenance team from one site can be responsible for maintenance
for one or more other sites. If equipment maintenance is performed by a team from another site, click the
Maintenance Site drop-down list to select this site.
106
Sites | Chapter 2
Planning and Costing

1. In the Intrastat Region field, enter the region this site uses for Intrastat reporting. Intrastat logic is used to
facilitate business transactions that take place in Europe or other locations which require this type of reporting.
2. The Prod Preparation Time field defines how many days this site requires to prepare and engineer a job
before it can be released for manufacturing. This value is used during Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
processing to add an additional amount of preparation time to the Planned Action Date on job suggestions
and unfirm jobs.
For more information on MRP, review the Material
Requirements Planning chapter in the Epicor Application
User Guide. You can also review the MRP Technical
Reference Guide in the application help.
3. The Kit Time field determines how many days are needed to assemble a part within the current site. MRP
processing uses this value to calculate the End Date for any material in the assembly of the parent site.
4. Click the Scheduling Send Ahead For drop-down list to define whether the scheduling engine uses the
start-to-start job operation offset for Production Time or Setup Time. Available options:
Setup Causes a secondary operation with a start-to-start relationship to begin setup X minutes after
the production starts on the primary operation. The minutes are defined on the operation.
107
Chapter 2 | Sites
Production Causes production time of the secondary operation to start X minutes after the production
starts on the primary operation. The minutes are defined on the operation.
To learn more about the scheduling engine and features,
review the Scheduling chapter in the Epicor Application
User Guide, or the Scheduling Technical Reference Guide
in the application help.
5. Select the Override Scheduling Constraints check box to indicate you can freely move jobs on scheduling
boards. You can move any jobs created in this site to different positions on the schedule, ignoring both
material constraints and subcontract purchase orders. You adjust job schedules within the scheduling boards
on their Move Job windows.
If this check box is not selected (clear), you can only move jobs to points in the schedule where material and
subcontract PO quantities are at least partially available.
6. Next, select the Use Dynamic Days of Supply in Lead Time check box to activate the Use Dynamic
Days calculation. This calculation generates specific material requirements when a new purchase suggestion
may not satisfy demand at the correct point in the lead time window (MRP Scheduled Start Date + Standard
Lead Time).
7. Select the Allow Consumption of Minimum Qty check box to activate the Consume Minimum Quantity
calculation. When you activate this calculation, you cause both the MRP and PO Suggestion processes to
use another level of lead time calculations. When the On-Hand Quantity falls below the Safety Stock
Quantity within the purchase lead time, an additional set of Urgent Planning parameters activate.
You define these parameters on part-site records within
Part Maintenance. To learn more about part records,
review the Part Parameters chapter.
8. Click the Calendar ID button to find and select the production calendar used to manufacture parts within
this site. By default, the production calendar selected on the company record is used, but you can select a
different production calendar if you need. Review the Production Calendar section later in this chapter for
more information.
9. Enter the Finite Horizon value to define how many days are added to the Schedule Start Date during
MRP processing. Any jobs with Start Date values during this date range are scheduled finitely - which means
load is not placed against a resource when it does not have the capacity to handle it. However any jobs with
108
Sites | Chapter 2
Start Date values outside this range are scheduled infinitely - which means that load can be placed against
a resource above its capacity to handle it.
You can enhance scheduling performance by defining an

Overload Horizon time frame, which is typically the
number of days you manage overloaded resources. You
can then use the Shop Load Graph and the Overload
Informer to manage overload in the site within this relative
time frame without loading data beyond the point you
currently need to manage.
10. In the Overload Horizon field, enter a value to define the number of days from the current date the
scheduling engine uses to place overloaded resource records within the Shop Load table. These overloaded
resource records display in both the Shop Load Graph and the Overload Informer.
11. In the Rough Cut Horizon field, enter the point in the schedule where jobs are calculated using Rough
Cut Scheduling. This feature schedules jobs using the Need By Dates and Lead Time values on each
material and operation to determine how much time is required for each job to finish. However this data,
or load, is not recorded against your resources, which reduces the processing time needed to generate the
overall schedule.
12. Enter the Auto Firm Horizon value to specify how many days MRP monitors to determine when to create
firm jobs. If demand is placed within the number of days you enter, the MRP Process automatically creates
firm jobs from these demand records.
109
Chapter 2 | Sites
13. In the Unfirm Series Horizon field, enter a number of days from the current system date (Today) where
the unfirm jobs created by MRP generate with a job number that uses the Firm Job Prefix value; this indicates
these jobs are ready to engineer and schedule. Any jobs generated outside of this date range use the Unfirm
Job Prefix value for their numbers.
14. Select the Forced Start Times check box to force times to be Start to Start when scheduling operations.
Start to Start is an operation relationship that assumes you want to start two operations at the same time.
In reality, however, you will likely start the first, or predecessor, operation before the second, or subsequent,
operation. By default, this relationship uses the Queue Time at the subsequent operation, as this calculation
does not assume that the subsequent operation starts as soon as the parts arrive at the resource.
15. Select the Forced End Times check box to force times to be Finish to Finish when scheduling operations.
Finish to Finish is a scheduling relationship that defines how two operations interact with each other. By
using this relationship, you indicate that the two operations will finish at about the same time.
16. The Manufacturing Lead Time calculation determines how long it takes, in days, to receive materials and
manufacture part quantities at each subassembly level. This calculation then uses these values to total how
long it takes, in days, to complete the final assembly. Use the options within the Include in Manufacturing
Lead Time Calculation section to define which lead times associated with this site are included in this
calculation. Available options:
Lead Time
Transfer Lead Time
Receive Time
Kit Time
Rough Cut Parameters
17. The Site Cost ID specifies the default costing identifier for the site. It indicates a reference to a cost set
which defines the costing method (Standard, Average, Last, FIFO) used to calculate costs for all the parts
manufactured within sites that share the cost set.
For more information on job costing, review the Job
Costing Technical Reference Guide in the application help.
110
Sites | Chapter 2
Transfer Requirement Planning

1. You now can define how this site handles transfer orders from other areas within your company. Select the
Auto Create Transfer Order on Firming Requirements check box to indicate transfer orders are created
when the demand requirement is marked firm.
2. Select the Single Line per Transfer Order check box to indicate when transfer orders automatically
generate, each suggestion creates a separate transfer order.
3. Click the Allow Shipment without a Transfer Order drop-down list to define how shipments are handled
when a transfer request is sent to this site that does not have a transfer order linked to it. Available options:
Allow The transfer request is automatically added to the shipment without warnings.
Stop The application prevents the transaction, so the user is unable to add the transfer request to the
shipment.
Warn An alert message displays, but the user can decide whether to proceed or cancel the transfer
shipment request.
4. Enter the Auto Confirm Window days value to specify the number of days before a suggestion is
automatically converted to a firm requirement.
5. In the Manager Name field, enter the name of the person in charge of the current site.
6. When you finish entering the site details, click Save.
111
Chapter 2 | Sites
Address and Comments

Use the Address and Comments sheets to define the location and enter any additional information you need to
include with the site record.
To add the site address and comments:
1. Navigate to the Address sheet to enter the mailing location for the site.
2. Enter the Address, City, State/Prov, and Postal Code information.

3. Click the Country drop-down list and select the country where the site resides.
4. Enter the Phone and Fax contact information.
112
Sites | Chapter 2
5. Navigate to the Comments sheet to either enter or review additional information about this site.
6. The Site Comments field displays the information. Enter any comments you need in this field.
GL Controls (Sites)
Use the GL Controls sheets to define the default accounts and journal codes available during the posting process.
Financial transactions placed against this site use these GL controls to determine journal and account contexts.
You can associate one or more GL controls to this site record, but each GL control must belong to a different GL
control type. These GL controls determine the different account contexts used when users post financial transactions
against this site.
1. Navigate to the GL Controls > Detail sheet.
2. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Site GL Control.
113
Chapter 2 | Sites
3. Click the Type button to find and select a GL control type. This defines the contexts and business entities
required for a GL control set.
4. Next, click the Control button to find and select the GL control you need. All controls of the selected GL
control type display in the search results.
5. When you have selected the GL control, click Save.
For more information on GL control types and GL controls, review the General Ledger chapter.
Site Configurations
Use Site Configuration Control to set up how each site interacts with various functions such as Inventory
Management, Production Management, and Shipping/Receiving. You first create site records through Site
Maintenance. You then select each site record within Site Configuration Control to define its module and function
parameters.
Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Site Configuration
Select the Site

To select the site or sites you want to configure:
1. Click the Site button to find and select the site you need. You can also select all the sites available in the
current company.
2. The sites you select display in the Tree View. Select the site you need to configure.
114
Sites | Chapter 2
3. On the Detail sheet, the Site and Name of the selected site display.
4. Click the Modules tab to begin configuring the site.
The next sections describe what you set up on each site record.
Inventory Management
Use the Inventory Management sheets to define the warehouses, serial tracking default values, transfer order
definitions, and resources for each site.
General
You define warehouse, data collection, and field service defaults on the General sheets. You also specify the GL
controls used for the current site.
Detail
To enter the main warehouse and resource group parameters for the site on the Detail sheet:
1. Navigate to the Modules > Inventory Management > General > Detail sheet.
2. Click the Receiving drop-down list to define the default receiving warehouse for part quantities manufactured
within the current plant. This warehouse is the default option displayed within Receipt Entry.
3. Notice you can also select the default bin that receives these part quantities. Click the Bin button to find
and select this default bin; only bins created for the selected warehouse are available.
4. Use the Shipping drop-down list and its Bin field to define the primary shipping warehouse and bin for
the current plant. By default, all shipments sent from this plant use this warehouse and bin to store the
shipping quantities.
115
Chapter 2 | Sites
5. Select the default DMR Processing warehouse and Bin. These selections determine the warehouse and
bin used for processing Discrepant Material Requests (DMR) records. By default, all DMR quantities entered
for the current plant are stored in this warehouse and bin.
6. Use the Inspection drop-down list and its Bin field to define the default warehouse used for part quantity
inspections. The selected warehouse and bin values are the default options that display in Receipt Entry;
they define where inspected quantities are stored.
7. Select the General warehouse for the current plant. All part quantities not stored within the Receiving,
Shipping, DMR Processing, and Inspection warehouses move to this warehouse instead.
You create warehouses using Warehouse Maintenance,
and you create bins using Warehouse Bin Maintenance.
To learn more, review the Warehouses and Bins chapter.
Information on these records is also available in the
application help.
8. Idle Time classifies periods in the schedule during which no Setup or Production work is taking place.
When you select the Calc Idle Time check box, the Epicor application determines how much idle time occurs
on resource groups available in this plant.
9. If you select the Calc Idle Time check box, you must also select a Resource Group. A resource group defines
specific work areas and production teams in the current plant. Click this drop-down list to select the resource
group you need.
You create resources groups in Resource Group
Maintenance. This program is located in the Production
Management > Job Management > Setup folder. For
more information on resource groups, review the
Engineering chapter in the Epicor Application User Guide
or the resource group topics in the application help.
116
Sites | Chapter 2
10. If you have an installed Purchase Contracts Management license, the Purchase Schedule Mode field
specifies how related demand requirements should be handled for this plant. Select Schedule Fixed in
Period is designated that demand for the resulting purchase schedule delivery dates should not be moved
forward but remain on the calculated delivery dates. Select Schedule Forward One Period to designate
that demand requirements for a part should be pulled forward in time to the next earlier delivery date,
within the established (overall) delivery date schedule. The default comes from Company Maintenance but
you can override it for specific sites.
11. If you select the Calc Idle Time check box, you must select an Indirect Labor code from the drop-down list.
This code classifies any time entries not applied against Setup or Production tasks.
You create indirect labor codes using Indirect Labor Code
Maintenance. This program is located in the Production
Management > Job Management > Setup folder. For
more information on indirect labor codes, review the
application help.
12. Enter the Time Zone Offset value you need for this plant. This value indicates how many time zones away
from the server the current plant is located.
Data Collection records the time zone for each plant for all transactions that require time values. The base
time zone is the zone defined for the server. Because of this, the plant record is configured to indicate how
many time zones away from the server base time zone the current plant is located.
For example, the server is in Minneapolis. One of the sites
is in New York City, and another plant is in Honolulu. A
third plant is in Minneapolis. The Time Zone Offset for
the Minneapolis plant is 0. The New York City plant has
a Time Zone Offset of 1. The Honolulu plant has a Time
Zone Offset of 5.
13. In the Field Service Defaults section, click the Resource Group drop-down list to select the default group
that display on service calls created for the current plant. For more information, review the Field Service
chapter within the Epicor Application User Guide.
14. Select the Default in the Order Shipping Warehouse/Bin check box to indicate the default warehouse
and bin for a customer shipment should be the packing location for the order release, as identified on the
originating order (if available). Clear this check box to use the default primary warehouse and bin established
for the part and current plant in the Part Maintenance > Part > sites > Warehouses > Primary Bin sheet. This
applies to both pack out and standard shipments.
15. When you finish setting up the inventory default values, click Save.
GL Control (Inventory)
Use the GL Control sheet to define the default accounts and journal codes available during the posting process
for inventory transactions at this site.
You can associate one or more GL controls to this inventory configuration, but each GL control must belong to
a different GL control type. These GL controls determine the different account contexts used when users post
inventory transactions against this site.
117
Chapter 2 | Sites
1. Navigate to the Modules > Inventory Management > General > GL Control > Detail sheet.
2. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Inventory GL Control.
3. Click the Type button to select a GL control type. This defines the contexts and business entities required
for a GL control set.
4. Next, click the Control button to find and select the GL control you need. All the controls of the selected
GL control type display in the search results.
5. When you finish selecting the GL controls, click Save.
Shared Warehouses
Use the Shared Warehouses sheet to link warehouses so you can issue and receive parts between them. A shared
warehouse is a warehouse that belongs to a different site, but when you link it to the current site configuration,
you can directly issue and receive parts through this shared warehouse.
For example, your sheet metal (SM) warehouse is set up in your
Main site. You want to issue parts from and receive parts into
this warehouse while you are logged into your West site. When
you open the West site record in Site Configuration Control,
navigate to the Shared Warehouse sheet. Select the Main site
118
Sites | Chapter 2
as the remote site and then move the SM warehouse into the
Shared Warehouses group box.
To use this functionality, at least one additional site record must be set up for the current company. You can
then select this record as the remote site and then define which warehouses this remote site shares.
1. Navigate to the Modules > Inventory Management > Shared Warehouses sheet.
2. Click the Remote Site drop-down list to select the site through which you want to share warehouses. All
sites in the current company display on this list.
3. The Remote Site Available Warehouses list displays the warehouses available to share with the current
site. Select a warehouse on this list.
5. The selected warehouse now displays in the Shared Warehouses list. This list contains the warehouses
currently shared with the selected remote site.
119
Chapter 2 | Sites
6. You can also remove a specific warehouse, multiple warehouses, or all warehouses from this group box. To
do this, highlight it on the Shared Warehouses list.
7. Click the Left Arrow button. The warehouse moves back to the Remote Site Available Warehouses list.
8. Share the warehouses you need. When you finish, click Save.
Transfer Definition
A transfer order is an inter-company request for a specific part quantity. Use the Transfer Definition sheets to
define how the current site handles transfer orders it requests from other sites. You also define the GL controls
you use with the transfer definitions.
Transfer Detail
The values on the Transfer Definition > Detail sheet define the main parameters for transfer orders originating
from this site to another site. To create a transfer definition for each site record in the current company:
120
Sites | Chapter 2
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Transfer Definition.
2. Navigate to the Modules > Inventory Management > Transfer Definition > Detail sheet.
3. Click the To Site button to find and select the site which will receive the transferred part quantities.
4. When you select or enter a site within the To Site field, the Description from its record displays in this field.
5. Enter the Estimated Transfer Days it will take to move quantities to the selected destination site. This
value is used to determine scheduling and Due Date values.
6. Click the Default Transfer Ship Via drop-down list to define the transportation method used to ship
quantities to the destination site.
You create ship via records using Ship Via Maintenance.
This program is located in several setup folders, including
the Material Management > Shipping Receiving > Setup
121
Chapter 2 | Sites
folder. For more information, review the Ship Via

Maintenance topics within the application help.
7. Click the Transfer Sales Category drop-down list to select the category for quantity transfers between
the current site and the receiving site. You use these categories to group sales orders on reports and trackers.
You create sales categories using Sales Category
Maintenance. This program is located in several setup
folders, including the Sales Management > Order
Management > Setup folder. For more information, review
the Sales Category Maintenance topics in the application
help.
8. Select the InterDivisional Accounting check box to indicate transfer order transactions post to the general
ledger using interdivisional accounting standards.
9. Enter the Transfer Order Number Prefix for the transfer orders generated through this multi-plant
relationship. This prefix value is added to the front of each transfer order number so you can locate and
group these records on reports and trackers.
10. Click the Transfer Order Pick drop-down list to define from which warehouse the transferred part quantities
are shipped.
11. Next, click the Bin button to find and select the bin that stores the transferred part quantities before they
are shipped.
12. Continue to add the transfer definitions for other sites. When you finish, click Save.
GL Control (Transfer Inventory)

Use the GL Control sheet to define the default accounts and journal codes available during the posting process
for transfer inventory transactions at this site.
You can associate one or more GL controls to this transfer definition, but each GL control must belong to a
different GL control type. These GL controls determine the different account contexts used when users post
inventory transactions against the current transfer definition.
122
Sites | Chapter 2
1. Navigate to the Modules > Inventory Management > Transfer Definition > GL Control > Detail sheet.
2. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Transfer Definition GL Control.
3. Next, click the Type button to select a GL control type. This defines the contexts and business entities
required for a GL control set.
4. Click the Control button to find and select the GL control you need. All the controls linked to the selected
GL control type display on the search results.
5. When you finish selecting the GL controls, click Save.
123
Chapter 2 | Sites
Transfer Resources
Use the Transfer Resources sheet to transfer resource groups and warehouses from one site to another site. When
a resource or a warehouse is moved to a new site, it is no longer available in the previous site.
1. Navigate to the Modules > Inventory Management > Transfer Resources sheet.
2. Click the To Remote Site drop-down list to define which site will receive the resource groups and/or the
warehouses. The sites available in the current company display on this list.
3. Highlight a resource group in the Available Resource Groups list.
5. The resource group displays in the Selected Resource Groups list.
6. Highlight a warehouse in the Available Warehouses list.
If you need to move all the resource groups and/or
warehouses to the remote site, click the Double Right
Arrow buttons. If you need to remove all the resource
groups and/or warehouses from the remote site, click the
Double Left Arrow buttons.
8. The warehouse displays in the Selected Warehouses list.

9. To review how these changes affect the sites, click the Test Transfer button.
124
Sites | Chapter 2
10. The Site Test Transfer window displays. Select the report options you need.
11. Click the Print Preview button. Review the report so see what changes will occur as a result of the transfer.
12. If you are satisfied with the changes, return to Site Configuration Control. Click the Transfer
Resources button.
Serial Tracking
Use the Serial Tracking sheet to define how the current site generates serial numbers.
The Epicor application can display the entire history of all transactions involving a serial tracked part. A serial
number can be added through purchase receipts, transfer receipts, order receipts, RMA receipts, job receipts,
quantity adjustments, or cycle counting.
To define the serial tracking options:
125
Chapter 2 | Sites
1. Navigate to the Modules > Inventory Management > Serial Tracking sheet.
2. Click the Serial Tracking Options drop-down list to define how serial numbers are tracked through this
site configuration. Available options:
Full Serial Tracking Activates all serial number tracing functions, requiring users to assign serial
numbers for all part transactions. If you want to change this option later, you can change to Outbound
Serial Tracking if no uninvoiced shipments, open cycle counts, or physical inventory quantities are currently
in the database. You must also change the Lower Level Tracking option to Outbound Serial Tracking.
You can change to the No Serial Tracking option if there are no open cycle counts or physical inventory.
Outbound Serial Tracking Activates serial number tracing for shipments from sales orders and transfer
orders. Through this option, you do not need to define serial numbers for all transactions. However when
a serial tracked part is shipped, you must enter its serial number. If you want to change this option later,
you can change to Full Serial Tracking if no inventory quantities are available in the current sites
warehouses. You can change to No Serial Tracking without restrictions.
No Serial Tracking Turns off serial numbering. If you want to change this option later, you can use
Outbound Serial Tracking if no uninvoiced shipments are currently in the database. You can change to
Full Serial Tracking if no inventory quantities are available.
3. Select the Record Serial Numbers On Inventory Moves check box so a serial number is entered whenever
a serial tracked part moves between bins in the same warehouse. When you select Full Serial Tracking, you
can select this check box.
4. Click the Lower Level Serial Tracking Options drop-down list to define whether serial numbers from
child component parts must be linked to the serial number for the parent finished product. Available options:
Full Lower Level Serial Tracking When serially tracked components are used to manufacture a parent
part quantity, lower level serial numbers for each received component part are required. A window
displays that lists all parts entered on the receipt. You can then enter the component serial numbers for
parts used to manufacture the top level serial tracked part.
Outbound Serial Tracking Only When a serial tracked part is shipped on a sales order or transfer
order, you must enter serial numbers for the component parts.
No Lower Level Serial Tracking Turns off the lower level serial number tracing.
5. Click the Serial Matching Warning drop-down list to define what warnings can appear during the job
receipt process. These warnings occur when component serial numbers do not match the top level serial
126
Sites | Chapter 2
numbers. If the No Lower Level Tracking option is selected, this drop-down list is not available. Available
options:
No Warnings Turns off the warning alert messages.
Warn but Allow Processing When component serial numbers must be matched with the parent
part, a warning displays. However, you can ignore this warning and continue to process the receipt
without matching these serial numbers.
Warn and Do Not Allow Processing When component serial numbers must be matched, a warning
displays. You must match all component serial numbers before you can save the job receipt.
6. When you finish defining the serial number options, click Save.
Cycle Count
Use the sheets under the Cycle Count tab to define the parameters used for inventory counting and cycle counting
with this site configuration.
Cycle Count Detail

The Cycle Count > Detail sheet displays the main items you modify to determine how cycle counting is run in
the current site.
To define the cycle counting options:
1. Navigate to the Modules > Inventory Management > Cycle Count > Detail sheet.
2. Click the Cycle Count Selection Method drop-down list to define how count items are selected. Available
options:
Repetitive - Divides selected count items equally among the number of count days in the cycle period.
The method includes all items that match the selection criteria, regardless of the total number of selected
items. As long as items are not removed from the list, all items are counted according to the specified
cycle interval.
Random - Uses an algorithm to randomly select counted parts based on selection parameters defined
for the specific ABC code. The method selects parts randomly and then divides them equally based on
the number of count cycles available in each cycle period.
In some situations, the Epicor application does not select
all parts for cycle counting through these methods. To
track these part quantities, the Cycle Count Status report
displays part quantities either overdue for a cycle count
127
Chapter 2 | Sites
or not counted since a specified date. Use this report to

determine whether to add or delete parts from the
selection process.
3. Click the Cycle Count Calendar button to find and select the production calendar used to generate cycle
schedules through Cycle Count Schedule Maintenance. Review the Production Calendars section later
in this chapter for more information.
4. When you finish setting up your cycle count options, click Save.
To learn more about cycle counting, review the Inventory
Management chapter in the Epicor Application User Guide
or the cycle counting topics in the application help.
ABC Codes
Use the ABC Codes > Detail sheet to configure ABC codes to match the cycle counting process you run at the
current site. You first create ABC codes and enter their default values within ABC Code Maintenance. However
the values you enter on this sheet override these default ABC Code values to define the specific counting processes
for the current site.
To define the ABC code options:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New ABC Code.
2. Navigate to the Modules > Inventory Management > Cycle Count > AbcCodes > Detail sheet.
128
Sites | Chapter 2
3. Click the ABC Code button to find and select the existing ABC code you want to modify.
4. Select the Exclude From Cycle Count check box to indicate parts linked to the selected ABC code are only
counted during physical inventory and not included during cycle counting.
5. Select the Override Stock Validation check box to cause the stock valuation for the current site to be used
instead of the stock valuation defined on the ABC code. Enter this alternate valuation in the accompanying
Stock Valuation Percent field.
6. The Stock Valuation Percent defines how stock is valued for the site configuration. When the Calculate
ABC Codes program is run (located in the Material Management > Inventory Management > General
Operations folder), it determines total stock valuation for each part. Usage, on-hand quantities, and/or
projected usage factors can be included in the total value calculation.
If the same percentage is entered for multiple ABC codes, the Calculate ABC Codes program uses the first
occurrence of a duplicate percentage and ignores the second occurrence, since it evaluates ABC codes in
alphabetical order.
For example, if you enter 80.0 for ABC Code A, the
Calculate ABC Codes program assigns Code A to inventory
items that represent 80% of the total inventory value. If
you enter 95.0 for ABC Code B, the Calculate ABC Codes
program assigns Code B to inventory items that represent
the next 15% of the total inventory value. Enter 100.0
for ABC Code C to assign this code to inventory items
that represent the remaining 5% of the total inventory
value.
7. Select the Override Count Frequency check box to indicate the value entered in the accompanying Count
Frequency field is used instead of the value defined on the ABC code.
129
Chapter 2 | Sites
8. Enter the Count Frequency value to designate how often parts assigned to this ABC code are counted.
This value specifies the number of days between each count cycle.
For example, ABC code A items require counting every
60 days, so you enter 60 in this field. When you select
parts for cycle counting, the Epicor application selects all
A items not counted within the past 60 days.
9. Select the Calculate Percent check box to indicate the value entered in the accompanying Percent Tolerance
field is used to control discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical inventory counts. If a part is defined as out
of tolerance, you can post adjustments to the inventory quantity using a Count Discrepancy Reason code
in Count Cycle Maintenance.
10. Next, enter the Percent Tolerance value to designate the percentage difference between the pre-count
quantity and the actual count quantity. This value defines how much variation you allow for each count.
Enter zero (0) to indicate you do not accept any percentage variance. A percentage higher than zero indicates
a percentage difference between the pre-count quantity and the actual count quantity, by more than this
value, is considered out of tolerance. This result is then included on count variance reports.
For example, enter 10.5 if the percentage difference
between the pre-count quantity and the actual count
quantity can vary by no more than 10.5 percent.
11. Select the Calculate Quantity check box to indicate the value defined in the accompanying Quantity
Tolerance field is used to control quantity discrepancies. If the calculated difference between the pre-count
quantity and actual count quantity is greater than the specified tolerance, the Count Variance
Calculation/Report displays these parts. You can post adjustments to the inventory quantity using a Count
Discrepancy Reason code in Count Cycle Maintenance.
12. Enter the Quantity Tolerance value to designate the difference between the pre-count quantity and actual
count quantity you allow in this site. Enter zero (0) to specify you do not accept any quantity variance. A
value higher than zero indicates a quantity difference between the pre-count quantity and the actual count
130
Sites | Chapter 2
quantity, by more than this value, is considered out of tolerance. This result is then included on count variance
reports.
For example, enter 10 if the calculated difference between
the pre-count quantity and actual count quantity for a
part can vary by no more than 10.
13. Select the Calculate Value check box to indicate the monetary value defined in the accompanying Value
Tolerance field is used to control cost discrepancies.
14. Enter the Value Tolerance to indicate the difference you accept between a part quantitys pre-count cost
and actual count cost. Enter zero (0) to indicate any monetary variance is out of tolerance. A number higher
than zero indicates a cost amount difference between the pre-count value and the actual count value, by
more than this cost limit, is considered out of tolerance. This result is then included on count variance reports.
You can post adjustments to the inventory quantity using a Count Discrepancy Reason code in Count Cycle
Maintenance.
For example, enter 100.00 if the cost difference between
the pre-count quantity and the actual cycle count quantity
can vary by no more than $100.00.
15. Make adjustments to other ABC codes as you need. When you finish, click Save.
Additionally, the Epicor application overrides ABC code count parameters defined on the site configuration
through values you can define in the following programs:
Part Maintenance Cycle count settings are defined for specific parts/warehouse relationships on the Part >
sites > Warehouses > Cycle Count > Physical Inv sheet.
Warehouse Maintenance Cycle count settings are defined for warehouses on the Cycle Count/Physical
Inventory sheet.
Part Maintenance Cycle count settings are defined for specific site/part relationships on the Part > Sites >
Sites > Cycle Count\Physical Inv sheet.
Any values entered in the above locations override the values on the site configuration. Use these cycle count
settings to precisely determine how each part quantity is included in cycle counting.
Time and Expense

Use the sheets under the Time and Expense tab to define the default values for time and expense entries and
approvals for the current site configuration. You set the default values for record entries, approvals, supervisor
rights, approval logic, and default workflow groups.
Time
Time transactions are labor hours entered by employees and submitted for approval through Time and Expense
Entry. Use the Time sheet to define the approvals process for these transactions.
To define the time entry options:
131
Chapter 2 | Sites
1. Navigate to the Modules > Time and Expense > Time sheet.
2. Select the Restrict Entry check box to limit which employees can enter time transactions for other employees.
You then use Employee Maintenance to indicate which users have these access rights. For more information
about setting up employees, review Chapter 5: Personnel.
3. Select the Supervisor Allowed Entry check box to indicate supervisors can enter, modify, and delete time
transactions for employees they supervise. You indicate which employees are supervisors in Employee
Maintenance.
4. Select the Submit on Save check box to indicate time entries are automatically submitted for approval after
users save them to the database.
5. When you select the Approval Required check box, all time entries submitted by employees must be
approved by the approvers assigned to the workflow task.
You create a time entry approval process by assigning
approver roles to employee records, and then selecting
these roles on task sets. These task sets are, in turn,
selected on workflow groups. For more information,
review the Time Management chapter in the Epicor
Application User Guide.
6. If you select the MES Labor Approval Required check box, all time entries entered through the
Manufacturing Execution System (MES) interface must be approved by the approvers assigned to the
workflow task.
7. Select the Approver Allowed to Delete Transaction check box to indicate all approvers can add and
remove time transactions.
8. Select the Approver Allowed to Modify Submitted Transaction check box to indicate all approvers can
update time transactions.
132
Sites | Chapter 2
9. Click the Create Default Approval Workflows button to display a separate workflow window. Use this
window to define what workflows are required for time entries.
You can also create a default approval workflow by
clicking the Actions menu and selecting the Create Default
Approval Workflows option.
10. Select the workflow approvals you need. Available options:

Multi Level Approval
Supervisor Approval
Project Manager Approval
PM and Supervisor Approval
11. When you finish selecting the workflow options, click OK.
12. You return to the Site Configuration Control > Time and Expense > Time sheet.
13. Click the Indirect Approval Logic drop-down list to specify the indirect method for approving production
time transactions submitted by employees. Available options:
Automatic Time entries are approved automatically when users submit them.
133
Chapter 2 | Sites
Employee Time entries are approved by employees as defined on their records in Employee Maintenance.
14. Next, click the Production Approval Logic drop-down list to select the approval method used for approving
production time transactions submitted by employees. Available options:
Automatic Time entries are approved automatically when users submit them.
Employee Time transactions are approved by employees as defined on their records in Employee
Maintenance.
15. Click the Time Workflow Group drop-down list to select the workflow group used for time transactions
entered for the current Site. You create workflow groups in Workflow Group Maintenance; review the
application help for more information.
16. When you finish defining the time parameters, click Save.
Expense
Expense transactions are reimbursable expenses entered by employees and submitted for approval in Time and
Expense Entry. Use the Expense sheet to define the approvals process for these expense transactions.
To define the expense entry options:
1. Navigate to the Modules > Time and Expense > Expense sheet.
2. Select the Restrict Entry check box to limit which employees can enter expense transactions for other
employees. You then use Employee Maintenance to indicate which users have these access rights. For
more information about setting up employees, review Chapter 5: Personnel.
3. Select the Supervisor Allowed Entry check box to indicate supervisors can enter, modify, and delete
expense transactions for employees they supervise. You indicate which employees are supervisors through
Employee Maintenance.
134
Sites | Chapter 2
4. Select the Submit on Save check box to indicate expense entries are automatically submitted for approval
after users save them to the database.
5. When you select the Approval Required check box, all expense entries submitted by employees must be
approved by the approvers assigned to the workflow task.
You create an expense entry approval process by assigning
approver roles to employee records, and then selecting
these roles on task sets. These task sets are, in turn,
selected on workflow groups. For more information,
review the Expense Management chapter in the Epicor
6. Click the Create Default Approval Workflows button to display a separate workflow window. Use this
window to determine what workflows are required for expense workflows. To create a default approval
from the Actions menu, select Create Default Approval Workflows.
7. Select the workflow approvals you need. Available options:
Multi Level Approval
Supervisor Approval
Project Manager Approval
PM and Supervisor Approval
8. When you finish selecting the workflow options, click OK.
135
Chapter 2 | Sites
9. Select the Approver Allowed to Delete Transaction check box to indicate all approvers can add and
remove expense transactions.
10. Select the Approver Allowed to Modify Submitted Transaction check box to indicate all approvers can
update expense transactions.
11. Click the Indirect Approval Logic drop-down list to select the indirect method used for approving production
expense transactions submitted by employees. Available options:
Automatic Expense entries are approved automatically when users submit them.
Employee Expense transactions are approved by employees as defined on their records in Employee
Maintenance.
12. Click the Expense Workflow Group drop-down list to select the workflow group used for expense
transactions entered for the current Site. You create workflow group in Workflow Group Maintenance;
review the application help for more information.
13. When you finish entering the expense options, click Save.
Production Management
Use the Production Management sheet to determine how this site and its warehouses generate production
records like Kanban jobs and Material Requirements Planning (MRP) unfirm jobs. You also define how some
production, labor and burden calculations are handled.
The options you select on this sheet affect the Job Management, Scheduling, Engineering, Material Requirements
Planning, Data Collection, and Quality Assurance modules.
To define the production management options:
136
Sites | Chapter 2
1. Navigate to the Modules > Production Management > General sheet.
2. Kanban is a parts-movement system that controls costs and increases efficiency on a production line. Enter
the Kanban Prefix you want automatically placed on all generated Kanban jobs. The Epicor application
assigns this prefix to job numbers it generates for Kanban receipts, based on the current job number sequence
defined for the site.
For example, if the next available job number is 1110, it
assigns a Kanban job number of KBM1110 for a Kanban
receipt.
3. Material Requirements Planning (MRP) is a set of planning tools you use to both estimate potential demand
and propose supply that may answer this demand. Unfirm jobs are potential jobs you can review to determine
whether they should become firm jobs for production. Enter the Unfirm Job Prefix you want to automatically
add to unfirm job numbers.
4. Enter the Firm Job Prefix that replaces the Unfirm Job Prefix when the Firm box is selected on an unfirm
job.
Both the unfirm and firm prefix values help you locate
these jobs in the Job Manager, Job Entry, and other
programs. Be sure to enter both a Firm Job Prefix and an
Unfirm Job Prefix on this sheet. If the site configuration
has a Firm Job Prefix but does not have an Unfirm Job
Prefix, users can cause errors by manually entering job
numbers in Job Entry.
137
Chapter 2 | Sites
5. Production Yield is a feature that recalculates the yield of a job when its operations result in under or over
quantity production. Select the Production Yield Default check box to cause the application to monitor
the production yield of any job that uses parts stored in this site. Selecting this option also causes the
Production Yield check box to activate on job records.
For the Production Yield calculation to work correctly,
each operation must also have one or more production
yield recalculation actions defined in Operation
Maintenance.
6. If you select the Production Yield Default check box, you must specify which action occurs once the application
completes recalculating the yield. Select the Send Adjustment Alert check box to automatically send an
alert when the application determines a quantity adjustment must be made on a job.
7. If you select the Production Yield Default check box, you can also select the Adjust Job Quantities check
box. This causes the application to automatically apply a quantity adjustment against a job changed by the
Production Yield calculation. This feature recalculates production quantities on operations above or below
the original estimates.
Be sure to select either one or both check boxes. If you
select both the Send Adjustment Alert and Adjust Job
Quantities check boxes, the alert displays information
about the automatic quantity adjustment. If you only
select the Send Adjustment Alert check box, the alert
displays the adjustment quantity recommended by the
Production Yield calculation. If both check boxes are clear,
the Production Yield recalculation does not result in any
action.
8. Select the Only Include Posted Labor in Project Analysis check box to cause project analysis results to
only display labor transactions posted to the general ledger.
138
Sites | Chapter 2
9. Click the Job Pick and the Bin drop-down lists to select the warehouse and bin that stocks quantities for
parts used on manufactured jobs in this site.
10. Select the Suppress Sales Order Make Direct Job Warning check box to prevent a warning to display
when a sales order release will be made direct. This option indicates the quantity ordered on the release is
manufactured on a job instead of being pulled from inventory.
11. Select the Apply Burdens to all Operation Resources check box to cause burden costs to be totaled for
operations with multiple resource groups. If this check box is clear, the burden amount is added to the first
operation, but the burden amounts are placed separately against each resource.
12. If you select the Autocomplete Setup check box, the Setup is marked as Complete and load for Setup
Hours is relieved when production for an operation is marked as Complete. The setup time is not relieved
if the operation is not marked as Complete or the Autocomplete Setup check box is clear.
13. Select the Include Completed Qtys/Hours in Send Ahead Calculations check box to include completed
quantities in the Send Ahead calculation in job scheduling. If this check box is clear each time a job is
scheduled, then the full Send Ahead quantity is used in all calculations. If selected, then the full Send Ahead
quantity minus completed quantity/time is used.
14. Use the Assign Material Dates field to specify when scheduling dates should be assigned. During Job
Entry, material due dates will default from related operations based on the option selected in this field.
Select an option from the drop-down list:
Unengineered - Material due dates will default from attached operations even if the job is unengineered.
Engineered (Default) - Material due dates will default from the attached operation only if the job is
engineered.
Scheduling - Material due dates will be assigned only during scheduling.
15. When you finish defining the production management options, click Save.
139
Chapter 2 | Sites
External MES
Use the External MES sheet to define site integration with a selected external MES type. In this sheet define the
Output and Input locations for the data to travel from the Epicor application to the external MES and vice versa.
External MES is a service integrated into the Epicor application.
It has certain validations which are used as a type of
automatization.
1. Navigate to the Modules > Production Management > External MES sheet.
2. Select the External MES Integration check box to enable integration for this site. If you select this check
box, all fields on the sheet are activated.
3. Click the Output Location button to find and select the location for the data flow from the Epicor application
into the external MES.
4. Click the Input Location button to search for and select the location for the data flow from the external
MES into the Epicor application.
5. In the External MES Type field, select the external MES with which you want this site to integrate.
6. When you have defined the integration, click Save.
Maintenance Management
Use the Maintenance Management sheet to specify the starting prefix for maintenance jobs and to select the
default maintenance job template used for maintenance plans. You enter the default template and prefix in
Company Configuration, but you can enter different values in this sheet for a specific site configuration. For more
information on the company default values, review the Company Configuration chapter.
To define the site maintenance management options:
140
Sites | Chapter 2
1. Navigate to the Modules > Maintenance Management sheet.
2. Click the Template Job button to find and select the template job used for the current sites maintenance
jobs. When users run the Maintenance Plan Processor, these jobs generate using this template. The job
template contains the details (operations, assemblies, and materials) for each maintenance job.
While the job template you select on this sheet is the
overall default for the site, when the Maintenance Plan
Processor generates jobs for equipment plans, it first uses
any job templates selected on equipment records. You
create equipment records in Equipment Maintenance.
3. Enter the starting Job Prefix automatically used on identifiers for maintenance jobs. When the Maintenance
Plan Processor generates jobs, this prefix is added to the front of these job numbers.
4. When you finish setting up the maintenance parameters, click Save.
Advanced Material Management (AMM)

Use the Advanced Material Management (AMM) sheet to activate advanced inventory parameters for the current
site configuration.
To define the Advanced Material Management options:
141
Chapter 2 | Sites
1. Navigate to the Modules > AMM sheet.
2. Click the drop-down lists in the Fulfillment Workbench Defaults section box to define how quantity
search results sort for sales orders, jobs, and transfer orders. You select these default search options
respectively on the SO Inventory Sort Sort, Job Inventory Search Sort, and Xfer Inventory Search
Sort drop-down lists. Available options:
FIFO - Sorts results in order by First In, First Out records.
LIFO - Sorts results in order by Last In, Last Out records.
Bin Ascending - Sorts results by bin in ascending order.
Bin Descending - Sorts results by bin in descending order.
Quantity Ascending - Sorts results by quantity in ascending order.
Quantity Descending - Sorts results by quantity in descending order.
You can override these default values by defining alternate
options for allocation templates you create in Allocation
Template Maintenance; you then select these templates
in the Fulfillment Workbench. You can also directly
override these search defaults when you process
allocations in the Fulfillment Workbench.
3. Click the Pick Transaction Priority drop-down list to define the priority level for pick transactions in the
Material Queue. When pick transactions are inserted from the Fulfillment Workbench into this queue, they
use this priority level. These priority levels rank transactions by importance, suggesting the order in which
142
Sites | Chapter 2
users should process these transactions. The available priority levels are 1-9; 1 has the highest priority, while
9 has the lowest priority.
4. Next, click the Putaway Transaction Priority drop-down list to define the priority level for putaway
transactions in the Material Queue. When putaway transactions are inserted from the Fulfillment Workbench
into this queue, they use this priority level. The available options are 1-9.
5. Click the Replenish Bin To Bin Priority drop-down list to define the priority level for bin-to-bin replenishment
transactions. These transactions display on the Replenishment Workbench in the Move sheet. The available
options are 1-9. If you do not select a value from this drop-down list, the default priority level assigned to
these transactions is 9 (least priority).
6. Select the Lock Orders On Pick check box to prevent users from modifying sales order lines after a pick
transaction is placed against the line. These users can then pick material quantities for the entire sales order.
For example, User A runs a transaction that requires a
pick transaction for part 3498 on sales order 123, line 1.
Four other detail lines are on sales order 123. Because
User A has run a pick against SO 123, the other lines are
not accessible by User B or User C. Only User A can pick
part quantities for sales order 123.
7. Select the Sort Queue by Priority check box to cause the Material Queue to sort transactions in the
following order:
Priority
Bin
Sequence Number
143
Chapter 2 | Sites
8. Enter the Handheld Auto-Select Transactions Max value to define how many material queue transactions
are automatically selected on the Handheld MES interface. This saves time, as users do not need to manually
select these transactions on their handheld devices.
9. Click the Default Net Weight UOM drop-down list to select the unit of measure used to calculate weight
values (for example, Kilograms, Pounds) that display in the Selected Weight field in the Fulfillment
Workbench. The options available from the Weight UOM Class display on this drop-down list.
10. Now click the Default Net Volume UOM drop-down list to select the unit of measure used to calculate
volumes (for example, Cubic Centimeters, Cubic Inches) that display in the Selected Volume field in the
Fulfillment Workbench. The options available from the Volume UOM Class display on this list.
You enter units of measure and units of measure classes
in UOM Maintenance and UOM Class Maintenance. For
more information on these setup programs, review the
Part Parameters chapter, or review the Unit of Measure
topics in the application help.
11. Select the Reserve Inventory on Job Release check box to indicate jobs automatically keep, or reserve,
inventory when these records are released.
12. Select the Unpack to Picked Status check box to define what occurs when users unpack or delete packing
slip lines. If this check box is selected and a line is deleted/unpacked, the inventory used on both Direct Pack
and Procedural Pack records is assigned the Picked status. As an allocation record generates, these records
are added to picked orders.
If this check box is clear and a line is deleted/unpacked, inventory on Direct Pack records is assigned the
Available status and the application does not create an allocation record. However if this check box is clear
and a line is deleted/unpacked on Procedural Pack records, this inventory is assigned the Picking status. The
application generates an allocation record, the Warehouse/Bin becomes the location from which the quantity
was picked, and the line is not added to picked orders.
144
Sites | Chapter 2
13. Select the Allow Credit Hold Orders to be Released for Picking check box so users can pick orders for
customers currently on credit hold. These sales orders can then be fulfilled as normal.
14. Select the Allow partially reserved or allocated SO to be Released for Picking check box so users can
pick partially reserved or allocated sales order releases. When the Epicor application determines whether a
sales order released can be picked, it ignores the Ship Order Company and Ship Line Complete check
boxes.
15. When you have finished defining the Advanced Material Management options, click Save.
Shipping Receiving
Use the sheets under the Shipping Receiving tab to define the default shipping manifest parameters for the
current site configuration. You can set up manifest parameters for General, General International, FedEx, and
UPS shipping. You also define the Billing parameters.
General (Shipping Receiving)

Use the General sheet to establish default carrier options for the site configuration. These options define default
values for shipments of parts manufactured in this site. This information is sent to the manifest system where
the Pack ID is freighted.
You can change these default values in Customer Shipment
Entry.
To define the general carrier options:
1. Navigate to the Modules > Shipping Receiving > General sheet.
2. Select the Saturday Delivery check box to indicate this site can receive shipments on Saturday.
3. To indicate this site can send shipments on Saturday, select the Saturday Pickup check box.
4. Select the Residential Delivery check box to specify shipments will arrive at a home or residence.
5. Select the Signature Required check box to indicate all shipments received at this site must have their
receipts signed by a site manager or other employee.
145
Chapter 2 | Sites
6. To indicate this site only received and delivers shipping documents, select the Documents Only check box.
7. Select the Apply Charge check box to add a handling fee for shipments sent from this site. This activates
the Charge field; enter the additional charge amount in this field.
8. To indicate value insurance is available for shipments from the current plan, select the Declared Value check
box.
9. Collect On Delivery (COD) is a financial transaction where payment for shipments occurs when shipments
are received instead of being paid in advance. Select the COD check box to indicate payment is required
for all shipments from the current site.
The COD amount defaults from the first sales order added
to the pack, and this value is not recalculated on
shipments when users close them.
10. Additional COD options are available. Select the Add Freight to Amount check box to indicate the freight
COD amount is added to the final amount on all shipments from this site.
11. Select the Cashiers Check/Money Order Required check box to specify a cashiers check or a money
order is required for COD payments.
12. To disable the pack out functionality in Customer Shipment Entry, select the Disable Pack Out check box.
Users cannot access the Pack Out sheet in Customer Shipment Entry.
13. When you finish defining the general shipping options, click Save.
General - International
Use the General International sheet to define carrier options for international shipments sent from this site. You
indicate which shipping documents are required for internationally shipping items. You also define the freight
forwarder who assists with the export process at the current site.
The options on this sheet are the default values in Customer Shipment Entry. If you need, you can change these
options on specific shipments. This shipping information is then sent to the manifest system that freights the
pack record.
To define the international general carrier options:
146
Sites | Chapter 2
1. Navigate to the Modules > Shipping Receiving > General - Intl sheet.
2. Select the International Shipment check box to indicate this site sends out international shipments. This
activates the rest of the fields on this sheet.
3. A Certificate of Origin document certifies the shipment quantity was completely manufactured in a specific
country. When you select the Certificate of Origin Required check box, you indicate these documents
are needed on international shipments from this site.
4. A commercial invoice is needed when dutiable, or non-document, goods are shipped internationally. To
satisfy Customs requirements, you must enter a complete description of these goods on these invoices.
Select the Commercial Invoice Required check box to indicate these invoices are required on shipments
from this site.
5. When you select the HazardousShipment check box, you indicate hazardous materials are both shipped
and received through this site.
6. Select the Export Declaration Required check box to indicate a Shippers Export Declaration (SED) or
Electronic Export Information (EEI) document is needed for international shipments from this site. These
documents track export statistics and help control the export process.
7. A Shippers Letter of Instructions document provides shipping information to the freight forwarder, ensuring
accurate movement of products internationally. Often this document includes billing terms for freight and
other charges, and it may also provide distribution and preparation instructions. Select the Shippers Letter
of Instruction check box to indicate these documents are needed.
8. Now enter the contact information for the Freight Forwarder who handles international shipments for
the current site. These shipping agents are familiar with the import rules and regulations of foreign countries,
the export regulations of the United States and other countries, the methods of shipping, and the documents
147
Chapter 2 | Sites
related to foreign trade. Enter the ID, Name, Contact, Address, City, State, and Postal Code for the
freight forwarder.
9. Click the Country drop-down list and select the country where the freight forwarder resides.
10. Enter the main Phone number you use to contact the freight forwarder.
11. When you finish defining the international carrier options, click Save.
Billing
You create billing types to define the various ways shipments are paid by this site. The information from each
billing type is sent to the manifest functionality. You can create as many billing types as you need.
To enter billing types:
148
Sites | Chapter 2
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Billing Type.
2. Navigate to the Modules > Shipping Receiving > Billing > Detail sheet.
3. Click the Billing Type drop-down list to specify a freight billing option for this site. Available options:
Consignee
Fedex Prepaid
Shipper
UPS Cost And Freight
4. Depending on the option you select, a different billing code is automatically selected in the Billing Code
field. However, if another code is available, you can select this alternate code from the Navigation toolbar.
5. Enter the Account number that records transactions for this billing type. You need to enter an account
number when the billing type is Fedex Collect, UPS Freight Collect, or Third Party.
149
Chapter 2 | Sites
6. Next, enter the Address, City, State, and Postal Code for the payer. You need to enter the payer address
on Third Party billing types.
7. Click the Country drop-down list and select the country where the third party payer resides.
8. Enter the Phone number for the third party payer.

9. Click the List sheet to review all the billing types currently defined for this site configuration.
10. When you finish adding billing types, click Save.
FedEx
If FedEx is the shipping service the current site uses, enter the freight information settings on the FedEx sheet.
To define the FedEx options:
1. Navigate to the Modules > Shipping Receiving > FedEx sheet.
2. Select the COD check box to specify FedEx shipments are sent as Collect On Delivery (COD). When you
select this check box, you activate the Ground Collection Type radio button options.
3. The Ground Collection Type radio button options determine the means of payment for the FedEx shipment.
Available options:
Any Payment
Guaranteed Funds
Currency
150
Sites | Chapter 2
4. Select the Notification check box to indicate an email message is sent when the shipment reaches its
destination. When you select this check box, you activate the Email Addresses field.
5. Enter the Email Addresses for the individuals who receive notifications when a shipment from this site
reaches its destination. Be sure to separate each email address with a comma.
6. Select the Home Delivery check box to specify the shipment can arrive using the home delivery service.
Selecting this check box activates the Date, Phone, and Instructions fields.
7. Click the Date drop-down list to select when the home delivery shipment is received. You can also enter
the date directly.
8. Enter the Phone number for the contact who will receive the home delivery.
9. Next, enter any additional Instructions required for the home delivery.
10. If you need additional information to accompany the shipment, enter this text in the Reference Notes field.
11. Select the Non Standard Packaging check box to indicate this shipment does not use typical, standard
packaging.
12. If this shipment is critical, select the Priority Alert check box. This status is then assigned to the shipment.
13. When you finish entering the FedEx options, click Save.
UPS
If UPS is the shipping service the current Site uses, enter the freight information settings on the UPS sheet. This
sheet also contains the Quantum View notification functionality. When you select the Notify check box, you can
then enter all the email addresses that receives notifications when a UPS shipment is sent, fails to arrive, and/or
successfully arrives.
To define the UPS options:
151
Chapter 2 | Sites
1. Navigate to the Modules > Shipping Receiving > UPS sheet.
2. Select the Delivery Confirmation option this Site requires for UPS shipments. Available options:
No Signature Required Indicates a written signature is not required to receive the UPS package.
Adult Required Indicates an adult must sign for the received UPS package.
Confirmation Required Indicates the UPS shipment requires a written signature to complete delivery.
Verbal Confirmation Indicates that only a spoken acknowledgement is required to receive the UPS
package.
3. If the shipment requires more handling then a normal shipment, select the Additional Handling check
box.
4. Use the Reference Information fields to enter additional text you want to include with the UPS shipment.
Five reference fields are available.
5. The Quantum View notification functionality is a service from UPS that helps individuals receiving UPS
shipments track their progress. Select the Notify check box to specify shipments sent from this Site use this
UPS service. Selecting this check box activates the Ship From Company and Memo fields.
6. Enter the Ship From Company from which the UPS package will be sent.
7. Next, enter a Memo you want to display with this Quantum View UPS shipment.
152
Sites | Chapter 2
8. Use the Quantum View features to indicate who receives email notifications during the shipment process.
To do this, click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New UPS Email Address.
9. Enter the Email Address for the individual who will receive Quantum View notifications.
10. If this person needs to be notified when a shipment is sent, select the Shipment Notification check box.
11. Select the Failure Notification check box if the person must be notified when the shipment does not arrive
at the Quantum View email address.
153
Chapter 2 | Sites
12. To send an electronic notification to this person when the UPS shipment is delivered, select the Delivery
Notification check box.
13. Continue to add all the Quantum View email addresses you need. Click the Quantum View List sheet to
view these individuals and their selected UPS notifications.
14. When you finish defining the UPS options, click Save.
Site Costs
You use Site Cost Maintenance to create cost sets. Each cost set defines the costing method calculations run
against parts manufactured within the sites linked to the cost set. These records make sure the same costing
method is used for all sites included in this cost set. You select cost sets in the Costing Workbench. During the
standard cost rollup calculation, the application uses the selected cost set as a source for the calculated unit cost
amounts.
If different costing methods are needed for some sites, create a separate cost set for each method. The unit cost
results are then consistent for all sites which use this method. Although you can link sites with different costing
methods to the same cost set, Epicor recommends you use separate costs sets for each method.
For more information on how cost sets are used in the Costing
Workbench, refer to the Costing Workbench > Group Detail
topic in the application help.
Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Site Cost Maintenance
To create a cost set:
2. In the Site Cost ID field, enter a unique identifier for the cost set.
3. Enter a Description for the cost set. This text displays on the Copy from Site Cost ID drop-down list on
the Costing Workbench.
4. Click the Primary Site drop-down list to select the site considered the main site for this cost set. When you
select this Site option in the Costing Workbench, the specified cost set displays by default.
154
Sites | Chapter 2
5. Select the Load Alternate Methods check box to indicate alternate costing methods are used for the
What-If calculation in the Costing Workbench. The What-If calculation generates an estimated cost based
on potential factors.
6. To indicate these lot size settings are used in the What-If calculation in the Costing Workbench, select the
Load Costing Lot Sizes check box.
7. Select the Enable FIFO Layers check box to maintain First In, First Out (FIFO) costs layers as secondary costs
for non-FIFO costed parts. Any issue or receipt of the part consumes or creates PartFIFOCost records to
reflect the movement of FIFO quantities and costs. This process is identical to how the Epicor application
updates/consumes FIFO costed parts.
The FIFO cost layers created for non-FIFO parts are typically
used for tracking. If this check box is selected, the same
validations apply to non-FIFO parts, as the Epicor
application prevents the FIFO costs/quantities from going
negative. You still receive FIFO negative quantity errors
when the FIFO layer is enabled; these errors stop you from
processing the transaction.
8. To specify job and shipment costs are updated when a user enter a purchase adjustment, select the Update
Issue to Job/Shipment Costs check box.
9. Select the Skip Revision Cost Rollup check box to indicate the Costing Workbench will ignore the method
of manufacturing defined for a purchased part that has an approved revision. Costs are then not calculated
for the purchased part through its method. Instead, the Costing Workbench uses the cost method selected
for the part in Part Maintenance to determine its cost.
10. When you finish setting up the cost set, click Save.
155
Chapter 2 | Sites
Production Calendars
Each production calendar defines the working days and non-working days available during the year, as well as
the number of hours available for production each working day. You use Production Calendar Maintenance to
define the calendar you follow within your manufacturing center and other business areas.
You may need different production calendars for different sites. You can also select production calendars on
resource groups and suppliers.
Menu Path: Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Production Calendar
Create the Calendar

To create a new production calendar:
2. In the Calendar ID field, enter a unique identifier for the calendar. This value displays on several programs
and reports.
3. Enter a Description that includes the purpose of the calendar. This text displays on Production
Calendar drop-down lists throughout the Epicor application.
4. Use the Default Hours Per Day field to define how many hours are available for work each day. The value
you enter here determines the number of Hour check boxes that activate within the Days and Hours grid.
5. Within the Days and Hours grid, define the specific hours during which work is carried out.
6. To select all the hours for a specific day, click the Day (Monday, Tuesday, and so on) button. To clear all
the hours, click this button again.
7. Click the specific Hour button (1, 2, 3, and so on) to select this hour for every day of the week. To clear all
the hours for the specific time, click this button again.
156
Sites | Chapter 2
Non-Working Days
Use the Working Days sheets to define how many working days and non-working days are available during the
current production calendar.
1. To define non-working days by month, click the Month sheet.
2. Highlight a date on the Month calendar.

3. Click the Toggle Day button.
The selected day is now defined as a Non-Working Day. The scheduling engine and other functions skip
this date when determining what days are available for production.
157
Chapter 2 | Sites
4. To define all non-working days for the current year, click the Year sheet.
5. Highlight a date on the Calendar.

6. Click the Toggle Day button.
Where Used
Use the sheets under the Where Used tab to review all sites, resource groups, and suppliers that currently use
this production calendar:
To review these items:
1. Click the Where Used tab.
2. For this example, you click the Site sheet.

3. All the sites that use the current production calendar display on the Sites grid.
158
Sites | Chapter 2
Week Numbers
Use the Week Numbers sheet to define both week numbers and ranges for the current production calendar. You
use week numbers to define purchase order contracts for suppliers.
For more information on purchase contracts, review the
Purchasing chapter in the Epicor Application User Guide.
To add a range of weeks:
1. From the Actions menu, select Add Week Range.
2. The Add Week Range window displays.
3. Enter the Starting Week Number to identify the week range you want to add.
4. Next, enter the Starting Year and select a Starting Date for the week range. You must select a Monday for
the Starting Date.
5. Enter the Number of Weeks you want to include in the range.
6. Click the Create Week Numbers button.
159
Chapter 2 | Sites
7. The Production Week Numbers grid displays the range of weeks you generated.
8. When you finish creating your production calendar, click Save on the Standard toolbar.
160
Part Parameters | Chapter 3
Chapter 3: Part Parameters

You create part records for manufactured, sales kit, and purchased parts. These part records are then used throughout
the application on quotes, sales orders, purchase orders, jobs, AR invoices, and so on. You create part records within
Part Maintenance; this program is available in several locations throughout the Epicor application, like Job Management
and Inventory Management.
However, before you can create part records, you need to set up some global parameters that define how you
organization tracks parts in the application. You can organize all your parts through part classes, which help you
generate organized reports. You should also enter the units of measure your manufactured and purchased parts use
for purchasing, inventory, and sales.
If you track parts through serial numbers, the Serial Number Mask functionality helps create a regular method for
generating serial numbers. International governing localities have rules for limiting the use of hazardous substances;
you can define the hazardous substances contained in the parts you buy and sell. If you sell complex products like
electronic equipment, you can also indicate the reference designators you use with these products.
Part Classes
Part classes categorize and organize your parts. Although not required by the Epicor application, part classes are
used for reporting purposes and also define information about parts stored within inventory. Part classes can
indicate whether inspections are required for received part quantities, which buyer is responsible for purchasing
parts through this class, and what action should be taken when a part quantity becomes negative.
For example, if you have three distinct types of raw materials, create three part classes to review the stock status
and other inventory reports for the different types.
Use Part Class Maintenance to establish part classes for inventory parts. Part classes are assigned to each part in
Part Maintenance.
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Part Class
161
Chapter 3 | Part Parameters
Create a Part Class

To create a new part class:
2. Enter a unique identifier for the Part Class. Use a meaningful ID, because on some reports where space is
limited, you may only see this ID.
3. Enter a Description for the part class.
4. The Buyer defines the individual responsible for purchasing parts in this class. An optional value, if you enter
a buyer in this field, all purchase orders for parts in this class are assigned this buyer by default. If you need,
you can override the default buyer on specific part records.
5. When this part class is for purchased parts, click the Approved Suppliers button to find and select the
suppliers used for this part class. These suppliers are then available for all parts in this part class during the
purchasing requisition process.
6. Select the Inspection Required check box to indicate parts assigned to this class must be inspected when
you receive them. If you enter a receipt for any part in this class, you will automatically receive it to inspection.
7. When you select the Requisitions check box, you indicate this part class is available for requisitions through
Requisition Entry. If you requisition a part, you can assign it to any class which has this feature active.
8. Select the Split PO Line check box to indicate that purchase suggestions for part records with unique
Purchasing comments generate a different purchase order line for each part entry.
9. You use consolidated purchasing to control purchasing and AP functions across multiple companies. Through
this functionality, you can set up global requirements and global purchase orders. You select the
Consolidated Purchasing check box to activate this functionality on a part class.
Consolidated Purchasing requires the Multi-Site
Management license. For more information, review the
Multi-Site Management documentation and the Multi-Site
Technical Reference Guide in the application help.
162
10. You use the Negative Quantity Action options to determine what action activates when transactions
against parts in the part class cause the on-hand quantity to become negative. Available options:
Warn Causes an error message to display, but the inventory transaction can continue.
Stop Causes an error message to display and the inventory transaction does not complete the update
process.
None Causes the transaction to process without any error messages.
11. If you need to track parts in this class for Intrastat reporting, link it to a Default Commodity Code. Besides
the reporting feature, a commodity code can also identify whether you need to enter a weight or secondary
quantity on invoices for the part.
If you do not have Intrastat functionality, you can still use
this field. Your industry may have a recognized external
coding system, and you can enter these external reference
codes in this field.
The code you select here becomes the default for all parts linked to this class, but you can select a different
commodity code on a part record. This field activates when you select the Internationalization option within
Company Configuration.
12. When you must post AP invoices into two set of accounts for legal reporting in Europe, select a Purchase
Type Code. This links the part class to the extra debit and credit GL accounts required for Intrastat financial
reporting.
Sites and Part Classes

Use the Site sheet to establish planning parameters for a part class and site combination. These default parameters
apply to all parts assigned to the part class, but you can override these parameters on Part-Site details in Part
Maintenance.
To add a part to a part class:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Site.
2. Select the Owner Site you need for this part class. All sites available within the current company display
on this drop-down list.
163
3. If the part class is for manufactured items, Receive Time indicates how many days are required to move
the assembly either to stock or to the next job. During scheduling, this additional time buffer is added to
the Due Date on a job.
If the part class is for purchased or transferred items, Receive Time defines how many days it takes to receive
and inspect the parts. This time buffer is subtracted from the Demand Date to give suppliers the correct
Supply Date.
4. The Planning Time Fence field indicates a time limit for changes within this part class. This value is the
number of days from the current system date that the application does not consider demand transactions
requiring supply changes. However, all demand transactions outside of this time limit are processed as
normal.
5. The Reschedule Out Time Delta field controls when Material Requirements Planning (MRP) sends messages
to Reschedule Out orders. The value you enter defines a number of days. Any reschedule out message either
less than or equal to this value does not generate a change suggestion message.
6. The Reschedule In Time Delta field controls when Material Requirements Planning (MRP) sends messages
to Reschedule In orders. The value you enter defines a number of days. Any reschedule in message either
less than or equal to this value does not generate a change suggestion message.
7. When you finish setting up the part class, click Save.
Units of Measure
You leverage the Units of Measure functionality to define the measuring values your organization uses for both
manufactured and purchased parts. You can define different unit of measure (UOM) codes for the same part; it
can use one UOM within inventory, another UOM for selling to customers, and a third UOM for purchasing from
suppliers.
You can enter the units of measure that best reflect your business practices, and then group related UOMs under
a unit of measure class. When you select a UOM class, only the UOMs contained within that class are available
on the record.
Unit of Measure Maintenance

Use Unit of Measure Maintenance to create all the unit of measure codes available within the application. Examples
of UOM codes include weights and measures such as Cubic Centimeters, Each, Feet, Box, and Case.
A primary inventory (or base) UOM code must be defined for every part. This base value indicates the main UOM
used to record inventory balances.
Main Menu Path: Production Management > Engineering > Setup > UOM
To create a new UOM:
164
2. Enter a unique identifier for the UOM.

3. Enter a Description for this UOM code. In this example, you enter Box.
4. The Symbol field indicates how the UOM code prints on reports and documents throughout the Epicor
application. For example, the UOM code for square meter is SQM, but you enter Sq Mtrs in this field. The
Sq Mtrs value is printed on reports and documents.
5. If fractional quantities are allowed, you can click the Rounding drop-down list and select an option for this
UOM code. Available options: Round Up, Round Down, No Rounding, and Math Rounding.
6. Select the Allow Decimals check box to indicate users can enter fractional quantities for parts which use
this UOM code. If this check box is clear, users can only enter whole quantities for parts that use this code.
7. If the Allow Decimal check box is selected, the Decimals field activates. Use this field to define the maximum
number of decimals users can enter for quantities in this unit of measure.
8. When the Active check box is selected, it indicates UOM code can be used to measure part quantities. If
this check box is clear, this UOM is no longer available for use.
9. Click the Description sheet to enter a longer explanation for the unit of measure code.
10. Continue to create more UOM codes as you need. When you finish, click Save.
165
Unit of Measure Class Maintenance

Launch UOM Class Maintenance to define unit of measure class codes you later assign to parts in Part Maintenance.
A UOM Class code contains a bundled set of UOM codes, like Bag, Box, Case, and Pallet, which then convert to
a single base unit of measure.
Main Menu Path: Production Management > Engineering > Setup > UOM Class
To create a new UOM class:
2. Enter the Class ID you want for the UOM class. In most cases, the Class ID must be identical to the value
selected on the Class Type drop-down list. Only one UOM class can be defined for each class type. The
exception is the Other Class Type; in this case, you can enter a unique class identifier to create your own
UOM classes.
3. Enter a Description for the UOM Class.
4. Select the Class Type you need from the drop-down list. These system assigned values define the type of
UOM codes which make up the class. Available options:
Length Calculates lengths like feet, centimeters, and yards.
Area Calculates areas like square feet, cubic centimeters, and square yards.
Weight Calculates weights like pounds, tons, and grams.
Volume Calculates volumes like square feet, cubic centimeters, and square yards.
Count Calculates counts like each, box, and carton.
Time Calculates times like seconds, minutes, and hours.
On the Fly Caluclates on case-by-case basis for specific orders or quotes.
Other A UOM class that you use to create a user-defined UOM class.
5. Select the System Default check box to indicate this UOM class is the default value that displays within
Part Maintenance.
6. By default, the Active check box is selected. This indicates users can select this UOM class within Part
Maintenance.
166
Add UOM Codes

You can now add the UOM codes to the class. One UOM code must be selected as the Base UOM; all the other
UOM codes then convert to this base value.
To add the UOM codes to the class:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New UOM Conversion.
2. Click the UOM Code drop-down list to select the code you want added to the class. All the UOM codes
you created through UOM Maintenance display on this list.
3. If Other was selected for the Class Type on the Detail sheet, select the Part Specific check box to create
a UOM class that does not use conversion factors.
4. Use the Conversion Factor fields to specify the factor operator and value required to convert between the
current unit of measure code and the Base UOM. For example, if the base UOM is Each and ten units are
packed into a Case, enter multiply as the factor operator and 10 as the value - 10 Each units equal one Case
unit.
5. If this value is the primary unit of measure you want for this UOM class, select the Base UOM check box.
All the other UOM codes within this class must convert to this primary UOM.
6. Select the Default UOM check box if you want the current UOM code to be the default Inventory UOM
code for parts that use this class.
7. By default, the Active check box is selected, which indicates this UOM code can be used on part records.
8. Continue to add the UOM codes you need to the UOM class. When you finish, click Save on the Standard
toolbar.
Serial Number Masks

Use Serial Mask Maintenance to create a serial number format update record, or mask, which changes the format
of a suppliers serial number to a format compatible to your serial number system.
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Serial Masking
To create a new serial mask:
167
2. Enter a unique identifier for the Serial Mask. The identifier can use the available default characters, but it
can also use characters you define on the company record.
3. Enter a Description that identifies the purpose of the serial mask.
4. By default, the Active check box is selected. This indicates the serial mask is available in Part Maintenance.
When the Is Used check box is selected, it indicates this serial mask is used by various part records. It can
no longer be deleted from the application.
5. A serial mask can either be one of the following types:
Validation Type - This serial mask only validates existing serial numbers and cannot be used as a mask
for generating new serial numbers.
Generation Type This serial mask only generates new serial numbers and cannot be used as a mask
for validating existing serial numbers.
6. Use the Prefix Length and Suffix Length fields to indicate how many numeric fields are available at the
beginning and the end of the serial number.
7. Enter the Mask format you want for the serial numbers. You must enter valid characters within this field;
review the Default Mask Characters and Serial Number Examples topic within application help for a complete
list. You can also define additional characters within Company Configuration. When you leave this field,
the program checks the characters to make sure they are valid.
8. If the Generation Type option is selected, the Starting Sequence field displays the beginning sequence
for the serial numbers. It validates the positions defined for the &, @, or # characters.
9. The Example field displays a sample of a serial number created through this mask.
10. The Characters Used field indicates how many characters are used for these serial numbers.
168
Restricted Substances
Use the Restrictions that is in the Certain Hazardous Substances (RoHS) functionality to indicate that current
material used on parts complies with the weight limits defined for hazardous substances in electronic equipment.
Different legislative bodies, such as the European Union or the state of California, have defined these weight
limits to reduce accumulation in landfills.
Use the following programs to define the hazardous materials within the products you buy or sell. You can then
select these materials on part records and other records. To complete the process, run a verification program to
determine whether the product meets the standards for a selected locality.
Substance Maintenance
You enter the hazardous substances within Substance Maintenance. Examples of hazardous substances include
Lead (Pb), Mercury (Hg), and Cadmium (Cd). Several of these substances are already defined within the application,
but if you need, use this program to enter additional hazardous substances.
You later group these restricted substances through Substance Restriction Type Maintenance.
Main Menu Path: Production Management > Engineering > Setup > Substance
To enter a substance record:
2. Enter a unique identifier for the Substance. This value displays on several programs throughout the
application.
3. Enter a Description for the hazardous substance.
Substance Restriction Type Maintenance

Use Substance Restriction Type Maintenance to define the types of restrictions you can later select on part records,
jobs, and so on. Each type contains a series of substances designated as hazardous by the governing locality.
Each substance can also be assigned the lowest level threshold percentage allowed by the governing body
Main Menu Path: Production Management > Engineering > Setup > Substance Restriction Type
To create a new substance restriction type:
169
2. In the Type field, enter a unique identifier for the restriction type.
3. Enter a Description for the restriction type.
4. Select the Validate Compliance check box to indicate this substance restriction type requires the weight
amounts on specific quantities be validated. When you select this check box, you activate the other available
check boxes.
5. If you want to activate validation for a specific function, select its corresponding check box. Available options:
Purchase Suggestions / Purchase Orders, Request For Quote, and Sales Orders.
6. By default, the Inactive check box is clear. When this check box is clear, it indicates the current substance
restriction type is available (active) to use.
7. You are now ready to identify the substances included with this restriction type. Click the Down Arrow
next to the New button; select New Substance.
8. Click the Substance button to find and select a substance you defined within Substance Maintenance.
9. The Description of the substance displays by default.
10. Enter the Threshold percentage required by this governing entity. The percentage of the product by weight
cannot exceed this percentage.
11. Repeat these steps to add the substances you need to this type. When you finish, click Save.
You can now select this type on several records throughout your Epicor application. You can then run a validation
process to make sure the part quantity does not exceed the RoHS standards. This validation functionality is
explored in the Engineering and Job Management chapters within the Epicor Application User Guide.
170
Reference Designators
Use the Reference Designators functionality to define the reference designators related to the current material.
In the electronics industry, reference designators are used in schematics and printed circuit board layouts to label
components. For example, in a circuit board, each component is usually labeled with reference designators such
as R1, Q1, C1. To identify each component directly on the circuit board, the reference designator text is printed
next to the component.
You add reference designators on part, job, and quote records. Each reference designator can be added as a
series using the Add Range button or entered manually within the methods. You can also add XYZ board
coordinates, rotation, and comment text for each reference designator.
To begin using this functionality, you create reference categories.
Reference Category Maintenance

Use Reference Category Maintenance to define the categories used to group materials for reference designator
assignment. After the Reference Categories are defined, you assign them to specific parts in Part Maintenance.
Once a category is assigned to a part, it cannot be deleted.
Main Menu Path: Production Management > Engineering > Setup > Reference Category
To create a new reference category:
2. Enter the Reference Category identifier you want for this record.
3. Enter a Description that helps users understand the purpose of the reference category.
4. In the Prefix field, enter the starting characters used by this category.
5. In the Suffix field, enter the ending characters used by this category.
6. Continue to create the references categories you need. When you finish, click Save.
171
Chapter 4 | Personnel
Chapter 4: Personnel
The tasks and responsibilities each employee performs within your organization can be reflected within the Epicor
application. You do this by creating person, employee, and warehouse team records. This ensures each person is
accurately and consistently entered in the application. This prevents users from adding duplicate records and reducing
confusion when employees enter records in multiple programs.
You set up personnel data by first entering person/contact records. These records contain primary details about each
person, whether an internal employee or an external customer or supplier contact, such as address and phone
information. These details are then synchronized on other records linked to each person contact record, ensuring
consistency of this basic information.
Once your person contact records are entered, you next launch Payroll Employee Maintenance (if you use the Payroll
module) to enter information required for payroll check processing. Payroll employee records share data with shop
employee records. You enter these records through Employee Maintenance to define individuals who do manufacturing
work within your organization. Through this program, you define the rights each employee has in the application. You
can also add production information, role codes, and production calendars to each employee.
Lastly, you can create warehouse teams and assign shop employees to these teams. These teams monitor and initiate
the inventory transactions that occur within the current company.
You should enter these records when you first set up the application and then update these records as needed to
reflect changes in employment.
Persons and Contacts

Various individuals within your organization may have multiple roles that you need to reflect in your data. Likewise,
outside individuals within customer and supplier organizations may have multiple roles as well. To keep accurate
records of these individuals, use Person/Contact Maintenance. The records you enter here can then be used on
various employee, buyer, customer, supplier, and other records throughout the application. You can also use
this tool to pull in any global people/contacts you need from other companies.
Additionally, Person/Contact Maintenance can be used as a tracker tool to see where each contact is referenced
on various setup records. You can also create records that use the contact; through this feature, you indicate
what records should be created and then immediately launch the respective maintenance program.
Main Menu Path: Sales Management > Order Management > Setup > Person / Contact
172
Personnel | Chapter 4
Contact Creation
You first enter the primary details about the individual. To create a new contact record:
2. Enter the Contact ID. The Contact ID is a numerical value that identifies the contact record throughout the
application. You can enter this number directly, but the application can also automatically assign an ID
number.
3. Enter the Name for the contact. This value is the default name that displays when this contact record is
selected within other maintenance records (such as customers, buyers, employees, and so on).
4. Use the Function, Role, Title, and Reports To fields to define the position this person has within the
organization.
5. Enter the contacts primary Email address.
If you define an email address here, then anywhere in the
application where the email address displays, you can
right-mouse click to open your default email application
to send an email using this email address. The email
configuration in Company Maintenance must be set up
to enable the email context menu option.
6. If this person is a contact you want to use across companies within your organization, click the Global check
box.
7. If you are creating a contact record for an internal employee, click the User ID button to find and select the
user account you need.
173
8. Use the fields in the Address section to define the contact information for this individual.
9. Use the fields in the Phone/Fax section to enter all of the phone numbers for this individual.
10. The Person Contact Link List grid displays all the maintenance records that use this contact record. As you
add more links, this grid displays the links for the current contact record.
Additional Contact Information

Use the other sheets within this program to add more details, like web information and a photo file, to the
contact record.
To add other information:
1. Click the Name Details tab to enter more information about the contacts name.
2. The Display Name field displays the default name that displays within other maintenance programs.
3. Enter the Prefix, Initials, First Name, Middle Name, Last Name, and Suffix information for this contact.
4. If you want to attach a picture file to this contact record, click the Photo tab. Use the fields on this sheet
to find and select the photo.
5. Click the Web Links tab to enter internet information for the contact.
6. Enter the Website that you can use to contact this individual.
7. If this individual uses an instant messenger application, enter the value in the IM field.
174
8. If this individual has accounts on Twitter, LinkedIn, and Facebook, enter these values in the respective
fields.
9. Click the Comments tab to enter any additional text you need for this individual.
Links
You create links for the contact record for any internal buyer, work force, employee, or payroll employee
maintenance record. Use this functionality to quickly add the contact record to any internal maintenance record.
To create an employee record for a contact:
1. Click the Links tab.
2. The Context Link field displays the current record to which this contact is attached. In this example, Aaron
Christiansen is attached to a Workforce record.
3. Notice the Workforce section displays this record.
4. You now want to create an employee record for this contact. To do this, navigate to the Employee section
and select the Create check box.
5. From the Actions menu, select Create Selected Links.
175
6. The respective maintenance program launches. Enter any further information you need. In this example,
Employee Maintenance launches.
7. If you want changes made to the Name, Address, Email, Phone, and other fields to automatically update
records linked to this contact, select the Sync Name, Sync Address, Sync Phone, and Sync Email check
boxes.
8. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.
Now the information you synchronized on this record is automatically updated on other records that use this
contact.
Actions Menu Functions

The Actions menu contains other features that help you enter and maintain contact records.
To use these functions:
1. Click the Actions menu.
2. The Maintain Links option merges two contact records that represent the same person; for example, Frank
Greene and Frank Green. Use this window to merge the current person/contact record with the person/contact
176
record you want to keep. Any links to the internal buyer, work force, employee, or payroll employee are
pulled into the contact record as well.
3. If you use multi-site functionality, you can pull in global contacts from other companies. To do this, select
Link Person/Contact and use the window that displays to find and select the global contacts you wish to
add to the current company. Any contacts that have their Global check boxes selected can be pulled into
the current company. To learn more about the global contact feature, review the Multi-Site Technical
Reference Guide within application help.
4. If you want to link an outside file to the current contact record, select the Attachments command.
Shifts
Use Shift Maintenance to define the shift times needed in production centers, distribution centers, and other
areas of the company. These records are used for labor reporting and time collection. Each employee you enter
in Employee Maintenance will belong to a default shift record you enter in Shift Maintenance.
Data collection and shop warnings use these entries to report alerts such as Employee Clocked in Early or Employee
Clocked Out Late.
Main Menu Path: Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Shift
Add a Shift
To add a new shift:
2. Enter the Shift number you need; this number must be greater than zero.
3. Enter a Description of the shift. For example, Day, Swing, Morning, and so on.
4. Define the Start time for the shift. These values are based on a 12-hour clock and display in hours:minutes
format. You do not need to enter the colon (:), as it displays automatically.
5. Complete the shift's duration by selecting or entering an End time.
177
6. The Length field automatically displays how long this shift will be in hours.
7. If this shift includes a meal break, select the Lunch check box.
8. Enter the Start and End times for the lunch break. After you enter these values, the Length field displays
how long the lunch break will take.
9. The Rate field indicates the monetary amount you pay for shift differential time against this shift. The number
you enter can be an Hourly addition or a Percent addition, depending on the radio button option you
select. For example:
2.00 ($2.00 per hour or 2%)
5.50 ($5.50 per hour or 5%)
10. Select when the Epicor application calculates shift differential pay. Available options:
Always Calculated against all hours reported on this shift by all employees.
Only when off shift Calculated only when the shift is different than the employees ordinary shift.
If you need more information on this feature, review the
Shift Differential Pay topic within the application help.
Shift Breaks
You can enter additional shift breaks, other than lunch, for each shift. To add additional breaks:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Break.
2. Enter a Description for the shift break.

3. Now enter the Start and End times for the additional break. After you enter these values, the Length field
automatically updates with the length of the break.
4. Continue to add the shift breaks you need. When you finish, click Save.
178
Payroll Employees
If your organization has the Payroll license, you next enter employee records using Payroll Employee Maintenance.
The information you enter through this setup program defines how you pay each employee. Payroll employee
records contain the contact information, social security number, pay rate, pay type, paid time off (PTO) balance,
taxes, deductions, and other details for each employee.
You must be a selected user in Payroll Class Maintenance to access or add employee records because information
in this maintenance program is confidential. Selected users can add and edit employees in the payroll classes in
which their user IDs are selected.
Payroll employee records are different from the shop employee records used within the Job Management module.
If your company has payroll employee records and shop employee records, you add both to the application with
Payroll Employee Maintenance.
After you add employee records, the records designated as active employees also display in the Job Management
module within Employee Maintenance. Subsequent changes made in Payroll Employee Maintenance to records
that have an active shop employee status will also reflect this status in the shop employee record.
Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Payroll > Setup > Payroll Employee
Add a Payroll Employee

To add payroll employees:
2. In the ID field, enter a unique identifier for the employee. You can use a the employee's initials or the first
part of this person's name. This value displays in several programs and reports.
179
3. In the SSN field, enter the employees social security number. Be sure to include the punctuation required
for this social security number.
4. Click the Person / Contact button to find and select an existing contact record. The default information
entered in Person/Contact Maintenance populates the Name, Address, City, and other fields within this
group box.
5. Select the Payroll Class for this employee. Payroll Classes group together similar employees for payroll
processing and they determine who should be paid during each payroll run. Some examples include Shop
Employees and Salaried Employees.
This name must match the employee name of this person's
Social Security card. If it does not match, an error could
result that will cause a penalty.
6. The Hired field indicates the date on which this employee started to work for your company. Click the
Down Arrow to select a date from the calendar.
7. If the employee no longer works for your company, select the Terminated check box and enter the Date on
which the employee left the organization. A terminated employee is excluded from all payroll processing.
8. Click the Supervisor button to find and select the employee who manages the current employee. This field
is required.
When you first enter employees into the application, add
those who are supervisors first, starting with the CEO.
Otherwise an employees supervisor will not display for
selection in the Supervisor field, which is a required field.
You cannot save an employee record unless a supervisor
is selected, but you can select an employee as his or her
own supervisor.
9. Click the User ID button to find and select the user identifier for this employee. Although not required,
some employees will need a user record to access functionality in the application.
You should create a user ID for each person that will make
material entries. Each material transaction will then be
linked to the user ID. For more information, read the User
Account Maintenance and How do I enter Shop Employees
and Payroll Employees? Topics within application help.
10. Use the check boxes within the Roles group box to define how you want to synchronize this employee
record with an existing person/contact record. Depending on what options you select, you can cause Name,
Email, Phone Number, and other updates on this sheet to automatically refresh other records that contain
this same person/contact. Available options:
Sync Name
Sync Phone
Sync Address
Sync Email
180
11. Use the Roles sheet to indicate the various roles, like Service Technician, Shipping/Receiving, Shop
Supervisor, and so on this payroll employee performs.
12. When you finish entering the employee record, click Save.
Payroll, Deduction, and Tax Information

You use the fields on the Payroll > Detail sheet to indicate how the current employee is paid by your organization.
Use this sheet to define the pay type, shift, pay rate, and other key information. You also enter deduction and
tax information through the remaining sheets in this program.
To define payroll information and enter a pay rate:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Pay Rate.
2. Click the Pay Type drop-down list to indicate what kind of pay the employee receives. Available options:
Hourly The employee is paid based on the number of hours worked.
Salaried The employee is paid a fixed amount, independent on the number of hours worked. This
employees pay is automatically generated through the Check Run process. These employees are not
linked to labor hours entered through the Job Management module, and are not included in any overtime
or shift differential calculations.
181
3. Select the Frequency option. This value determines how often the current employee is paid. Available
options:
Weekly
Biweekly every two weeks
Semimonthly twice a month
Monthly
4. Click the Shift drop-down list to specify the shift this employee normally works. You enter the shifts for the
current company through Shift Maintenance.
5. Click the Expense drop-down list to specify the default expense code for this employee. A required field,
this code defines the gross pay expense account number used for each labor transaction. You can enter
these account numbers through the Pay Type Maintenance program. These expense codes simplify data
entry, as longer GL account numbers do not have to be entered directly.
6. Click the Workers Compensation drop-down list to specify the workers compensation group linked to
this employee. A required field, select the group that applies to this employee from the available options.
7. Select the Third Party Sick Pay check box to indicate this employee is part of a deferred compensation
plan. This value displays on the employees W-2 form.
8. Select the Retirement Plan check box to indicate this employee is included on a retirement pension plan.
This value also displays on the employees W-2 form.
9. When you select the Active Employee check box, you indicate this employee currently works on the shop
floor. This person is then automatically defined as an Active Shop Employee in the Job Management
module. Depending on whether you select or clear this check box, different actions occur:
If you select this check box and the employee does not have a record within the Job Management module,
this employees record is automatically added to this module.
If this check box is clear and the employee has a record within the Job Management module that does
not have any labor detail, the employees file is automatically deleted.
If this check box is clear and the employee record within the Job Management module has some labor
detail, the employees status is set to Inactive.
182
You can select or clear this check box at any time
10. If you select the Active Employee check box, click the Job Department drop-down list to specify the shop
employees home department. This value defines a default job department for the work queue within the
Data Collection module.
11. If you select the Active Employee check box, the Labor Rate field becomes active. Use this field to specify
the hourly rate for costing this employees labor on jobs.
Normally, this value will be the same as the employee pay
rate, so that actual labor costs are posted to jobs. Any
additional labor costs (premium pay, benefits, and so on)
should be averaged and included in the resource groups
burden rate. Review the Resource Group Maintenance
documentation in the application help for more
information.
12. The Factors group box tracks the amount of Vacation time and Sick time accrued by the current employee.
The Accrual Rate fields specify the number of hours earned by the employee each pay period. The Remaining
fields display how much accrued time is currently available for this employee. The Maximum fields define
the limit of the Vacation and Sick time this employee can accrue.
13. The Overtime Threshold group box defines the point at which this employee works at the overtime pay
rate. The Per Day field specifies the overtime threshold per day, whereas the Per Week field specifies the
overtime threshold per week.
14. When you create a Pay Rate, a new row displays on the Pay Rate grid. Enter the Effective Date on which
this pay rate will begin.
15. The Pay Rate field defines the pay per hour this employee receives. After you enter this value, the Annual
Salary field automatically displays the amount this employee receives each year.
183
16. Use the fields on the Deductions sheet to enter voluntary deductions for the selected employee. To do this,
you click the Down Arrow next to the new button and select New Deduction.
17. Use the fields on the Taxes sheet to enter payroll taxes for the selected employee. To do this, you click the
Down Arrow next to the new button and select New Tax. If you need to include an employee on a tax
report, but that employee is exempt from this tax, select the Exempt check box on this sheet.
18. After you finish setting up the payroll employee record, click Save.
Employees
Use Employee Maintenance to create employee records. Employees are the individuals who perform work on
jobs; their effort is recorded within Labor Entry.
Main Menu Path: Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Employee
184
Add a New Employee

To create a new employee record:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New ID.
2. In the ID field, enter a unique identifier for this employee record.

3. Optionally, select the Person / Contact identifier for this employee record if one exists. If one does not
exist, the application uses the values in the employee information fields to automatically create a
person/contact record.
4. Enter the Name of the employee.
5. Use the Address, Phone, and Email fields to enter the contact information for the employee.
6. Use the Emergency section to define who should be contacted in case the employee suffers accident or
illness.
7. The Status drop-down list indicates the current state of this employees employment. Available types are
Active, Inactive, and Terminated.
185
8. Select the Payroll Employee check box if this employee should be included during Payroll processing. Once
an employee is entered as a payroll employee, you cannot clear this check box.
9. Select the Service Technician check box if this employee can be sent out to handle Field Service calls.
10. Select the Material Handler check box if the current employee handles material quantities. You can only
assign an employee to a warehouse team within Warehouse Team Maintenance if this check box or the
Shipping/Receiving check box is selected.
11. Select the Shop Supervisor check box to indicate this person is a shop supervisor. This employee then has
access to the Supervisor tab within the MES interface.
12. Select the Shipping/Receiving check box if the shop employee works in the shipping or receiving
departments. You can only assign this employee to a warehouse team if this check box or the Material
Handler check box is selected.
13. Select the Production Worker check box if the current employee works in manufacturing part quantities.
If the Advanced Material Management module is installed, this check box is available. This employee then
has access to the Production tab within the MES interface.
14. Select the Warehouse Manager check box if the current employee manages a warehouse. Only employees
designated as a warehouse manager can access the Queue Manager for handling transactions processed
by handheld devices in a warehouse.
15. Select the Can Override Allocations check box if this shop employee can change quantity allocations for
Packing and Picking type transactions in a warehouse.
16. Select the Contract Employee check box if this employee is currently working as a contract employee.
17. Select the appropriate Synchronization check boxes to perform a synchronization of the employee
information to other programs.
186
Employee Production Information

To add Production information to the employee record:
1. Click the Production Info tab.
2. Select the Shift during which this employee works. You can also define the default expense code for direct
labor code entries for this employee, the department inside which this employee works, as well as the
employees hourly labor rate.
If a default shift has been established at the Company
level in Company Maintenance, the companys default
shift automatically displays in the Shift field when adding
a new employee or creating a new ID for an existing
employee.
3. Define the work hours for this employee. From the drop-down list, select the Resource Group associated
with this employee.
4. Select the Allowed to book to direct jobs check box if this employee can book time to manufacturing
jobs.
5. Select the Request Material and Report Quantity check boxes to specify if this employee is allowed to
complete these material and quantity tasks.
6. Select the Override Job check box if this shop employee can override the specifications created for a job.
7. Select the Report Scrap Quantity or the Report Non-Conf Quantity if this employee can record these
quantity types.
8. When finished, click Save on the Standard toolbar.
187
Role Codes
To enter Role Code information to the employee record:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Role Code.
2. Enter the Role Code to assign to this employee. You create role codes within Role Code Maintenance.
For more information on this program, review application
help or the Time Management chapter within the Epicor
3. Enter a Description for the role code.

4. Select the Primary check box if this is a primary role code for the employee. Only one role code can be
defined as the primary role.
5. You can define role rates for this role code. To do this, click the Down Arrow next to the New button;
select New Role Rate.
6. To define the date range for this role code, enter the Effective Date and End Date.
188
7. Select the Currency assigned to the role rate.

8. Enter the Charge Rate for this project role code. The rate is displayed in the designated currency code.
9. Select the Time Type from the drop-down list. Time types are created in Time Type Maintenance.
10. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.
Employee Calendar
To add calendar information to the employee record:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Calendar.
2. Click the Calendar button to find and select a calendar for this employee.
3. Enter an Effective Start Date of this calendar for this employee.
4. Enter an End Date on this calendar.
Time and Expense Approvals

You use the sheets under the Time and Expense tab to indicate whether this employee can approve time and/or
expense entries. You can also assign this employee to workflow groups.
To define approvals:
189
1. Navigate to the Time and Expense > Time > Detail sheet.
2. If this employee cannot enter time records, select the Disallow Time Entry for user assigned to employee
check box.
3. Select the Auto Approve Time check box to indicate this employee can automatically approve time
transactions.
4. To assign a workflow group to approve time transactions, select a Workflow Group from the drop-down
list.
5. To view the workflow group you selected, click the Approval Taks tab.
6. Expand the workflow group tree to review the different tasks defined for the workflow group.
190
7. You can also define expense approval rights for this employee. To do this, navigate to the Time and Expense
> Expense > Detail sheet.
8. Select the Enter Expenses check box to allow the employee to enter expenses. An employee cannot enter
expenses in Time and Expense Entry if this check box is clear.
9. Click the Supplier button to find and select a supplier ID for this employee. The supplier ID is used to create
AP invoices for the employee when entering expenses for reimbursement.
If the employee does not have a supplier ID, you can
create one manually, or, if configured in Company
Configuration, the application can add one automatically
when you save the employee record.
10. Now define the approval workflow for expense transactions submitted by this employee. Select the Auto
Approve Expenses check box to indicate the employee can automatically approve expense transactions.
11. To assign a workflow group to approve expense transactions, select a Workflow Group from the drop-down
list.
12. To view the workflow you selected, click the Approval Tasks tab.
191
13. Expand the workflow group tree to review the different tasks defined for the workflow group.
Warehouse Teams
Use Warehouse Teams to create teams and assign shop employees to the teams. A shop employee must be
assigned to a warehouse team in order to receive processing transactions such as allocations and bin to bin
moves. You can also assign attributes, transaction types, and warehouse bin and zone information to a team.
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Warehouse Team
Create a Warehouse Team

To create a new warehouse team:
2. Enter the Warehouse Team identifier you want for this team.
3. Enter a Description for the warehouse team.
4. The employees who are designated to handle material quantities or shipping/receiving display in the Available
Employees section.
5. To select employees for this warehouse team, from the Available Employee list, select the employee(s)
and click the Right Arrow. Use the other arrows to make any additional changes between lists.
192
6. Click the Attributes tab to assign warehouse attributes to this warehouse team. Attributes are defined
using Warehouse Team Attributes.
7. Click the Transactions tab to select available transaction types to this warehouse team.
193
8. Click the Warehouses tab to assign bins, zones, and items to this warehouse team.
9. Click Save.
Users
The previous sections of this chapter describe how to set up access for employees that primarily work in production
and inventory centers who do not need access to the full Epicor application. However, any employees who enter
quotes, sales orders, jobs, invoices, and similar records will need a user account. They can then log into the Main
Menu and launch the entry programs and run the reports they need.
User accounts also regulate security. Through these records, you can assign users security privileges and add
them to security groups. Security privileges give users access to internal application tools like customization,
styling, and business activity queries. Only users responsible for managing the use of the application should have
access to these tools. Epicor recommends you assign all users to security groups. You then simplify your security
setup, as you do not need to assign security to individual users. This approach also ensures you implement security
through an organized and clearly defined method.
This section describes how you create user accounts and assign privileges to each account. Security groups are
documented later in the chapter concerning Security.
You create user accounts through User Account Maintenance.
Main Menu Path: System Setup > Security Maintenance > User Account Security Maintenance
194
Create a User
To create a new user account:
2. Enter the User ID for this user account. This code uniquely identifies a particular user. The user is prompted
for this ID during login for the Epicor application. If possible, enter real names to make it easier for users to
remember these identifiers. If names conflict, add initials to make each identifier unique.
3. Enter the Name, Address, City, State/Prov, Postal Code, and Country information for this user.
4. In the Office Phone, Phone, and Email fields, enter the contact information for this user.
5. Click the Language drop-down list to select the language the application needs to display when this user
logs in. For the interface to display in a different language, you must install a language pack. Contact your
Epicor Account Manager for information on the language packs currently available.
6. Click the Format Culture drop-down list to select the interface requirements for the users culture. Each
culture code defines the date format, number format, currency symbols, field layout, and so on applicable
to a specific world culture. For example, a culture code can change the interface so the user can read and
enter data from right to left (instead of left to right)
To learn more about localizing a client installation, review
application help or the Localization chapter in the Epicor
ICE Tools User Guide.
7. The Single Sign-On feature allows users to log into the application using the same Login ID and Password
they use to log into their computers operating system (for example, Windows, Unix, Linux and so on). If
195
this feature is enabled by selecting the Require Single Sign-On check box found on this screen, enter the
name of the operating system Domain for the current user.
A time-saving feature, Single Sign-On causes the
application to launch without displaying the Login
window.
8. The Domain User ID defines the identifier for the current user on an operating system domain. If the Single
Sign-On feature is enabled and the Domain User ID does not match the Epicor User ID, enter the domain
identifier in this field.
9. You select the Disable Account check box to inactivate the users account. You typically disable a users
account if this person is on an extended leave or has left the company.
10. Select the Allow Requisitions check box to indicate this user will display in the Requisitioner Selection
List; this list is accessible from Requisition Entry.
11. Select the Require Single Sign-On check box to cause this user to log on using the operating system logon,
bypassing the Epicor logon window.
12. Use the Shop Tracker Refresh Minutes field to define how often you want the data on the Shop Tracker
to refresh for this user. Enter this value in minutes.
13. The Session Timeout Minutes value defines how many minutes this user account can be inactive before
the application will log out (shut down). This field cannot be set for less than 15 minutes.
When the application times out, the users account is
released, allowing additional users to log in. The user
remains connected, but their license is released for other
users. If a users account times out, when they return,
they will automatically be granted a license if one is
available. This functionality helps work environments
where a users system is idle for long periods of time and
other users need to log into the application.
196
14. The Client Start Menu ID defines the primary menu that displays when the current user logs into the
application. Use this field to limit this users access to the Main Menu, as the current user can only launch
programs contained by this Menu ID.
For example, you could limit the user to only access the Production Management modules. To do this, enter
XAMN2000 as the Client Start Menu ID value. When this user launches the application, only the Production
Management folder and any modules contained below it display on the Main Menu.
You find the identifiers for specific menu items using
Menu Maintenance.
15. Both the Expire Password and Clear Password options force users to enter a password the next time
they log into the application. Select the Clear Password option to force users to enter their existing password;
select Expire Password to force users to create a new password.
16. The Date Last Used and Time Last Used values display the date and time stamp for the last time this user
account was used.
17. The Password Last Changed field displays the last time the user updated the password for this user account.
18. Use the Password Expires Days to define how often this user needs to create a new password. When you
enter a value in this field, the Password Expires field displays the date on which the current user account
password will expire.
19. When you finish entering the details for the user account, click Save.
User Privileges
You use the check boxes and settings on the Options sheet to define the additional features and tools the current
user can access. Each item you select grants privileges to an application tool or other feature.
As you enter user accounts, carefully consider what privileges each user needs. Several options are typically not
needed for normal use of the application and can slow performance, so only activate options the current user
needs.
197
Define Tools Options

To assign user account privileges for the application tools:
1. Click the Options tab.
2. Select the Security Manager check box to indicate this user can access System Management folders on
the Main Menu. Users with security manager rights can define or change the profiles of themselves or other
users, as well as set up menu security.
System administrators should have two user accounts one for normal user activity and one for administrative,
security management purposes. Since administrators will
usually log into the normal account, this reduces the
chance that other users access the system tools while the
administrators are away from their workstations.
3. To give this user access to the customization tools, select the Customize Privileges check box. This user
can then create alternate versions of interfaces (forms) and make them available to everyone in the current
company. For more information, review the Customization topics within application help or the Epicor ICE
User Experience and Customization Guide.
4. Select the Allow Personalization check box to grant this user access to the personalization tools. This user
can then modify program interfaces as they need for personal use. These modified forms only display when
this user logs into the application. For more information, review the Personalization topics within application
help or the Epicor ICE User Experience and Customization Guide.
5. Select the Allow Translation check box so this user can then select different language sets and culture
formats to display. This user also has access to Language Maintenance and other localization tools. For more
198
information, review the Localization topics within application help or the Epicor ICE User Experience and
Customization Guide.
If this user does not work with translations, do not select
this check box. Activating this feature slows down
performance, as it causes the translation functionality to
load with each form.
6. Select the Dashboard Developer check box to give this user rights to modify and create dashboards. The
user can then modify existing dashboards and also create new dashboards. For more information, review
the Dashboard topics within application help or the Epicor ICE Tools User Guide.
7. To indicate this user can access the complete Business Process Management (BPM) functionality, select the
BPM Advanced User check box. This user can then launch programming tools to create custom BPM
methods and updatable business activity queries (BAQs) methods. For more information, review the Advanced
BPM topics within application help or the Epicor ICE Tools User Guide.
8. When you select the BAQ Advanced User check box, you indicate the current user can create updatable
business activity queries (BAQs) that allow data entry in selected fields (columns). Other users can then
update the database through the BAQs this user creates.
To create updatable BAQs, the current user must also
have BPM Advanced User rights. Updatable BAQs run
through BPM methods, so the current user requires
permission for both advanced privileges.
9. Select the Allow Creation of Cross Company BAQ check box to grant this user the ability to create BAQs
that pull data from multiple companies. You then must define which companies the user account can access;
you do this on the Company sheet.
10. Solutions are bundles of customizations, BAQs, BPMs, and other modifications that can be installed on other
companies. If this user will build solutions, select the Can Create Solutions check box; this user can then
access the Solution Manager. If this user can import and install solutions, select the Can Install
Solutions check box. For more information, review the Solution Management topics within application
help or the Epicor ICE User Experience and Customization Guide.
11. Quick Searches are configurable search programs that pull in unique search results. Select the Can Maintain
Quick Search check box to cause Quick Search Maintenance to display on context menus for this user.
Likewise, select the Can Maintain Enterprise Quick Search check box to give this user access to the
Enterprise Search Quick Entry program. For more information, review the Searches topics within application
help or the Epicor ICE Tools User Guide.
12. Select the Can Maintain Themes check box to indicate the user can access programs available on the
Options > Styling sub-menu. The Styling functionality is useful when you differentiate one company from
another company. For more information, review the Styling topics within application help or the Epicor ICE
User Experience and Customization Guide.
199
Define Access Options

To define what features this user account can access:
1. Review the options available in the Access Options group box.
2. To give this user the ability to change the account password, select the Allow Password Change check
box.
3. Select the Allow Enterprise Search check box to display Enterprise Search toolbar when this user logs in.
Enterprise Search is an optional search application used to retrieve indexed content from within the application
and then quickly launch specific programs to display the data returned from the search.
4. Select the Allow Epicor Web Access check box to allow the current user to display the application through
a web browser. This web format is called Epicor Everywhere. You define how users access the Epicor
Everywhere interface within Company Configuration.
5. To give this user the ability to display the application on mobile devices, select the Allow Mobile Access check
box.
6. The options in the Enterprise Search group box define the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) this user accesses
to launch Enterprise Search. Select the Use Default URL check box to use the Enterprise Search URL defined
for the company instead of the search URL defined for the user.
200
7. If you do not want this user to access the default URL for an Enterprise Search, clear the Use Default URL
check box and enter the alternate address in the Search URL field. The format for this URL is:
http://searchservername:8098/search/searchindexname.
You can also override the search URL for a company by
editing the default.sysconfig file in the users Client folder
and adding a value for the EnterpriseSearchURL
configuration setting. For more information, review the
Configuration Settings File topics within application help
or the Epicor ICE User Experience and Customization
Guide.
Define System Options

To grant this user account access to system options:
1. Activate the Allow Session Impersonation check box so the current user account can be selected on
system agent and task agent services. You can then enter this account in both the System Agent
Maintenance and Task Agent Service Configuration programs. This user now impersonates other users,
so this person can run all reports and processes assigned to schedules on the system agent.
2. Review the options available in the System Options group box.

3. Select the Allow Multiple Sessions check box to specify this user can activate multiple instances of the
application.
4. When you select the Allow Main Menu Tabs check box, you indicate the current user can create and edit
tabs on the Main Menu. Users access this feature from the Main Menu by clicking Options > Preferences.
201
5. Users can annotate application help topics to contain additional information they need. These annotations
can display for a specific user or the entire company. Select the Can Edit Company Annotations check
box to indicate this user can create and edit company annotations; select the Can Edit User
Annotations check box to indicate this user can create and edit user annotations.
6. Select the Can Change Save Settings on Exit check box to indicate this user can maintain company, Site,
and language selections for the Main Menu. The next time this user launches the application, these settings
display by default.
7. Select the Can Maintain Favorites Programs check box to indicate the current user can add programs to
the Favorites Bar. The user can then click these program icons to launch them.
8. After you finish defining the privileges and access options for this user account, click Save.
Define Social Enterprise Options

To override a user's Epicor ERP user credentials with other existing Epicor Social Enterprise user credentials:
1. In the Social Enterprise group, for User ID, and Password, enter the user credentials that will be applied
when the user accesses Epicor Social Enterprise functionality from within Epicor ERP.
This override typically is not needed. The majority of users are able access Epicor Social Enterprise using their
Epicor ERP user account. The following are situations where you may need to override a user's login
The user has an established Epicor Social Enterprise account and the account name does not match their
Epicor ERP account name.
The user has multiple Epicor ERP accounts on different servers, all pointing to the same Epicor Social
Enterprise site.
Windows endpoint bindings are being used to get into Epicor ERP but Epicor Social Enterprise is set up
with windows user.
202
The user wants to demonstrate or test something and needs to log into Epicor Social Enterprise as a
different user.
Define Enterprise Search Options

To override the Epicor Enterprise Search installation URL that is specified in their company (or companies):
1. In the Enterprise Search group, ensure that Use Default URL is unselected.
2. For Search URL, enter the URL of the Epicor Enterprise Search installation.
The format (assuming the default port number) for the URL is:
http://searchservername:8098/search/searchindexname. For example, if your search server name is EpicorApps
and your search index name is ErpSearch, the URL would be http://EpicorApps:8098/search/ErpSearch.
The search URL set for companies and users can also be
overridden by editing the Epicor client .sysconfig file .
Enter a value (in the form noted above) for the
EnterpriseSearchURL element.
Companies
Use the Company sheets to define the internal and external companies for which the current user has access. If
you work in a multi-company environment, each user can access one, multiple, or all companies created within
the database.
If you work in a multi-site environment, each user can also access data generated in external companies which
exist in other databases. You set up external companies within External Company Maintenance.
203
Add Companies
To add companies to a user account:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Company.
2. Click the Company drop-down list to select the internal company which the current user can access.
3. Now click the Employee drop-down list to define the name this user enters as a shop employee within the
selected company. When this user is a shop employee, this field is required. You create employee records
within Employee Maintenance.
4. Click the WorkStation drop-down list to indicate the workstation the user logs into when accessing the
selected company. You create workstation records in Workstation Maintenance.
5. Select the Can Update Time for All Employees check box to indicate this user can update time entries
for any employee in the selected company.
6. Select the Can Update Expenses for All Employees check box to indicate this user can update expense
entries for any employee in the selected company.
7. Use the Available sites and Authorized sites sections to indicate which sites this user can access in the
selected company. To add a site to this user account, highlight it in the Available sites field and select the
Right Arrow button. The site now displays in the Authorized sites section.
204
8. To add an external company to the user account, click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select
New External Company.
9. Click the External Company button to find and select the external company you need.
10. Continue to add the internal and external companies you need. When you finish, click Save.
205
Chapter 5 | Warehouses and Bins
Chapter 5: Warehouses and Bins

Warehouses and bins segregate materials so they can be easily found when you need them. Use each warehouse to
group items in your inventory. A warehouse can be a separate building or a virtual warehouse anywhere on the Site
floor. Examples of warehouses are finished goods, raw materials, inspection, and tooling. Many reports can be sorted
by warehouse as well - such as the Stock Status report.
If you need, you can further organize your inventory by creating bins. Each bin is defined by its location within the
warehouse. Typically your site managers directly control the inventory in a warehouse bin. However, you can also
indicate that bins are customer or supplier managed areas within your warehouses. The contents of these bins are then
maintained by these outside organizations, but you monitor the quantities available within them.
You must set up at least one warehouse and one bin before you can enter any parts within Part Maintenance.
The warehouse setup programs record and define the storage areas available within a site. Use these setup programs
to define each available warehouse, the individuals responsible for maintaining inventory in each warehouse, and zones
you need for the bins within each warehouse.
Warehouse Maintenance
You use Warehouse Maintenance to enter warehouse records. Any warehouses defined through this program
are automatically set up in the current site.
You can share warehouses with other sites. A shared warehouse is a warehouse that belongs to one specific
plant, but when you share it with one or more sites, you can directly issue parts from or receive parts into the
warehouse from all sites linked to it. You do this in Site Maintenance on the Shared Warehouses sheet.
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Warehouse
206
Warehouses and Bins | Chapter 5
Create a Warehouse
To create a new warehouse:
1. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar.
2. Enter a Warehouse identifier for this record that helps you identify this warehouse later.
3. Enter a Description for the new warehouse. This concise explanation describes the purpose for the warehouse
on related programs and reports.
4. Enter the warehouse Name, Address, City, State, Postal Code, and Country to define where this
warehouse is located.
5. Enter the Manager Name of this specific warehouse.
6. Click the Bins button to launch the Warehouse Bins program. Bins are sub-divisions of a warehouse that
further define where parts are stored. Every warehouse must have at least one bin associated with it. Later
in this chapter, the Warehouse Bin Maintenance section contains more information about this key
maintenance program.
GL Controls
Use the GL Control sheets to determine the accounts and journal codes used to post transactions against the
current warehouse. You can associate one or more GL controls with a warehouse. However, each control linked
to the warehouse must belong to a different control type.
To add GL Controls to this warehouse:
207
2. GL Control Types group the contexts and entities required for a set of GL controls. You can enter the GL
control type directly or click the Type button to find and select a control type.
3. The controls linked to the selected control type are available. Either enter the control directly or click the
Control button to find and select the control you need.
4. When you finish setting up the warehouse, click Save on the Standard toolbar.
Warehouse Zones
When the primary warehouse information is complete, you can further organize your inventory by adding bins
to each warehouse. In order to better organize your bins, however, the Epicor application contains functionality
you should define before you actually create bins for each warehouse. Warehouse zones are one of the features
you can leverage to help better organize bins.
A zone is a group of related bins contained within a warehouse. You can group together any bins regardless of
their type or any other attributes. Warehouse zones are primarily used to satisfy orders through the Fulfillment
Workbench.
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Warehouse Zone
To create a new warehouse zone:
208
2. Enter the Zone identifier; this value defines the warehouse record. This value displays within related programs
and reports.
3. Enter a Description for the warehouse zone. This value is the text which displays on drop-down lists, so
enter a concise explanation that explains the purpose for the zone.
Warehouse Bin Sizes

In addition to zones, you can also create bin size groups that define height, length, width, and volume sizing
information for each bin. You can then select the size of a specific bin within both the Bin Setup Wizard and
Warehouse Bin Maintenance.
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Warehouse Bin Size Group
To create a warehouse bin size group:
2. Enter the Size identifier for the group. This value displays within related programs and reports.
3. Enter a Description for the warehouse bin size. This value is the text which displays on drop-down lists, so
enter a concise explanation that explains the purpose for the size.
209
4. If you do not want to use the current size record, select the Inactive check box. This indicates the size does
not display on any drop-down lists throughout the application.
5. Enter the Length of the bin size. Use the accompanying drop-down list to define the unit of measure for
the length value. The unit of measure codes that display are those assigned to the Length Unit of Measure
(UOM) class within UOM Class Code Maintenance. This program is discussed earlier in Chapter 4: Part
Parameters.
6. Enter the Width of the bin size. The numeric value you enter here uses the unit of measure you defined for
the Length value.
You can also launch the Warehouse Bin program within
Warehouse Maintenance. To do this, click on the Actions
menu and select Bins.
7. Enter the Height of the bin size. The numeric value you enter here uses the unit of measure you defined
for the Length value.
8. Enter the Volume of the bin size. Use the accompanying drop-down list to define the unit of measure for
the volume value. The unit of measure codes that display are those assigned to the Volume Unit of Measure
(UOM) class within UOM Class Code Maintenance. This program is discussed earlier in Chapter 4: Part
Parameters.
Warehouse Bins
After you define the warehouse zones and sizes you need, you are ready to create bins for a specific warehouse.
You can create as many bins as you need for each warehouse. Each warehouse must have at least one bin linked
to it.
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Warehouse Bin
To create a new warehouse bin:
210
2. Enter the Bin identifier. This value displays within related programs and reports.
3. Enter a Description for the warehouse bin. This value is the text which displays on drop-down lists, so enter
a concise explanation that explains the purpose of the bin.
4. Select the Zone inside which this bin belongs. A zone is a group of related bins within a warehouse. You
create zones within Warehouse Zone Maintenance; a previous section describes this maintenance program.
5. Select the Size group for this bin. Size groups define height, length, width, and volume dimension information
for each bin. You create size groups within Warehouse Bin Size Group Maintenance; a previous section
describes this maintenance program.
6. If you need, enter a Sequence value for the bin. This numeric value defines the order in which this bin is
sorted within various programs and reports.
7. Select the Inactive check box if you are no longer using this bin. You can only select this check box if the
bin does not contain an inventory quantity balance. Inactive bins cannot be used for new inventory
transactions.
8. To indicate that inventory quantities within the current bin should not be included within on-hand quantities,
select the Non Nettable check box. Any quantities within this bin are not available for use within the
Fulfillment Workbench.
9. If this bin can be transported to a new location, select the Portable check box. A portable bin does not
have a dedicated physical location. Portable bins are used during Order Fulfillment Processing. For more
information about this functionality, review the Sales Order Processing chapter in the Epicor Application
User Guide.
211
10. The Type area defines the primary function of the current bin. If the current bin is new or empty, you can
select a Type for it. Available options:
Standard Stores normal inventory balances owned by the current company. This option is the default
value.
Customer Managed Indicates the quantity stored in this bin is for a specific customer. After you select
this option, either enter the Customer ID directly or click the Customer button to find and select the
record you need. A customer-owned bin can only contain inventory quantities for the selected customer.
Supplier Managed Indicates the quantity stored in this bin is for a specific supplier. After you select
this option, either enter the Supplier ID directly or click the Supplier button to find and select the record
you need. A supplier-owned bin can only contain inventory quantities for the selected supplier.
11. Enter the Aisle where the current bin is located. If the Portable check box is clear, this field is available.
The Aisle, Face, Elevation, Max Fill and Percent Fillable
fields are all used during Fulfillment Processing. For more
information about this key functionality, review the Sales
Order Processing chapter in the Epicor Application User
Guide.
12. Enter the Face within the aisle where the current bin is located. If the Portable check box is clear, this field
is available.
13. Define the Elevation (height) within the specified aisle and face where the current bin is located. A bin on
the ground level normally has an elevation of 1, while the bin directly above it has an elevation of 2. If the
Portable check box is clear, this field is available.
14. Select the Wave Replenishable check box to specify this bin is included when running wave (consolidated)
picking in the Fulfillment Workbench within this warehouse.
15. Use the Wave Max Fill field to define the maximum fillable quantity which can be stored within the bin
during Fulfillment Workbench processing. You can override this value in other programs.
212
16. Use the Wave Percent Fillable field to indicate how much of the total bin can be used for stock quantities
during Fulfillment Workbench processing. This defines the default percentage fillable for the bin; you can
override this value in other programs.
17. If this bin requires user-defined parameters, you can select these parameters on the Attributes sheet. An
attribute can be any parameter you need. For example, you can have an attribute that indicates a forklift is
required to move quantities within this bin. When work is assigned on the queue, an inventory move
transaction to and from this bin indicates that a forklift needs to be assigned to a user in order to complete
the transaction. You create attributes within Warehouse Bin Attribute Maintenance.
Warehouse Bin Setup Wizard

Creating individual bins for a warehouse can be a time-consuming process. If you need to create a series of similar
bins for the same warehouse, use the Warehouse Bin Setup Wizard. You can automatically generate a series of
bins for a warehouse that follow specific criteria. You first define the criteria for the bins and then generate them.
After you review and verify the new bins, you can then define the complete details required for this new set of
bins.
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Warehouse Bin Setup
Wizard
To use this wizard:
2. Select the Warehouse for which you want to automatically generate the bins.
3. The Format field displays the text values used to automatically generate identifiers for the new bins. In this
example, A displays, which indicates a single character string value is used to automatically generate identifiers
for this warehouse. If you need, you can change these parameters within the Bin Number Segments grid;
continue reviewing these steps for more information.
4. Use the Limit Number of Bins to: field to define how many bins you want to automatically generate. In
this example, the process will generate five new bins.
213
5. The remaining fields on this sheet define the format used for automatically generating the bin identifiers.
Use the Segment drop-down list to select the data type for the identifiers. Available options are String,
Number, and Separator.
6. Use the Length field to indicate how many characters or digits are available for the bin identifiers.
7. Use the Minimum and Maximum fields to enter the range of values possible for the bin identifiers. In this
example, identifiers between A and Z are available during the bin generation.
8. When you are ready, click the Generate button.
9. The Verify sheet displays the proposed bins. Use this sheet to indicate you want to add these bin records
to the selected warehouse.
10. The bins that were generated display in the Bin column.
11. By default, the Selected check box for each bin is active. This indicates you want to create the bin. If you
do not want to create a specific bin, clear its check box.
12. If this bin already is defined for the current warehouse, its Exist check box is selected. You cannot add this
bin to the warehouse.
13. If you do not want to use any of the new bins, click Clear.
14. If you want to use all of the new bins, click Select All.
214
15. When you are satisfied with your selections, click on the Commit tab.
16. The specific parameters you want for this set of bins display on this sheet, like Warehouse Zone, Size,
Sequence, and so on. Select and define the parameters you want for this bin. For information on each field,
review the previous Warehouse Bin Maintenance sections.
17. When you finish, click the Commit button.
The new bins are now added to the selected warehouse.
215
Chapter 6 | Multi-Currencies
Chapter 6: Multi-Currencies
Use the Currency Management functionality to define currencies, conversion rules, and currency exchange rates, and
to revalue currencies to reflect the correct up-to-date amounts. You can select the currency used for reports and
financial statements. Because of this, you can publish annual and quarterly reports in one currency and legal reports
in another currency.
The Epicor application also contains a rounding engine you can leverage to indicate how currencies should round
amounts. You define the rounding rules on specific currencies. Rounding values can also be set up on companies and
customer records.
Multiple Currencies
Use Currency Master Maintenance to enter and update the currencies available within a company. You define
the currency symbols, number of decimal places, and the rounding rules for each currency. Each company must
have a base currency, which is the primary currency it uses for transactions. It can also have up to three reporting
currencies, which are currencies you can use to report amounts within various reports and programs. A company
can also have any number of transactional currencies available in order to conduct business in various countries
and localities.
The default currency for a supplier or a bill-to customer applies to their transactions unless the currency is
overridden during transaction entry. You can override default currencies when entering sales orders, quotes,
purchase orders, and invoices by using the Currency toolbar. This toolbar was described previously in The Epicor
Environment chapter.
Only the companys base currency and three reporting
currencies can be selected as a GL book currency.
Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Currency Management > Setup > Currency Master
To add a new currency:
216
Multi-Currencies | Chapter 6
2. Enter the Currency Code identifier you want for the currency. This value defines the unique internal identifier
for the currency; once you save this record, you cannot change this value.
3. Enter the Currency ID you want for this currency record. This value displays on reports and windows that
show currency information. You can change this value later if you need.
4. Enter a Description for the currency.
5. The Currency Symbol indicates the special character used for this currency. This value displays on reports
and programs near the currency amounts. Currency symbol examples include $, , , , and so on.
6. Enter the Document Description you need. This extended explanation is printed on quotes, sales orders,
invoices, and other records that use this currency.
7. Select the Inactive check box when the current company can no longer use this currency. Users cannot
create new transactions against this currency, but any previous records that use this currency are maintained
by the application.
8. Select the Maintain Rates check box to indicate exchange values for this currency can be updated. This
check box activates the exchange rate fields for this currency within Exchange Rate Entry. This check box is
selected by default.
9. The Base Currency check box indicates this record is the primary currency used by the company. This
currency is the default used for all transactions within the company. Only one currency can be defined as
the Base Currency.
10. The Reporting Currency check box indicates this currency can be used to display amounts on invoices,
purchase orders, sales orders, and other records (except payroll and inventory transactions). To add a reporting
currency, use the Actions > Add Reporting Currency option. This currency then becomes available on
Currency lists throughout the application.
217
11. Enter the Scale Factor you use to modify the actual exchange rate in order to display amounts for this
currency in a more understandable format. The actual rates within the database are not changed by this
value, but all display rates are entered by users and shown using this factor value.
12. The Number of decimals area indicates how many decimals this currency can display for unit cost amounts.
You can have between 0-5 decimals for Cost and Price amounts and 0-3 decimals for General amounts
like extended prices, tax amounts, and any amounts posted through inventory, general ledger, assets, and
banks.
13. The Global Currency check box indicates whether this currency can be used by other companies within
your organization. Select this check box if you want to make this currency available across your entire
organization.
14. If you select the Global Lock check box, any changes you make to the global currency record do not update
the local version of the currency record. If the Global Lock check box is clear, changes you make to a global
currency record also update the local version.
15. Enter the ISO Number to process credit card amounts in this currency. In order to process credit card
amounts in multiple currencies, you must use the PaymentTrust credit card processor. This credit card
processor can also give you the ISO Number required for this currency.
16. Use the Link Currency sheet to indicate which global currencies can be linked to other companies within
your organization.
218
17. Use the GL Control sheets to determine the accounts and journal codes used to post transactions against
the currency. You can associate one or more GL controls with a currency. Each control linked to the currency,
however, must belong to a different control type. To add a GL control, click the Down Arrow next to the
New button, and select New GL Control.
18. Continue to add the currencies you need. When you finish, click Save.
Rate Types
Use Rate Type Maintenance to apply conversion rules to currency pairs. A currency pair consists of an original,
or source, currency and a resulting, or target, currency. Each currency you add through Currency Master
Maintenance is automatically paired with another currency. This relationship displays in Rate Type Maintenance
as undefined; use this program to then define the conversion rule that applies to each currency pair.
You can have multiple rate types available to reflect different business needs. Later, you associate rate groups
with exchange rates within Exchange Rate Maintenance.
Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Currency Management > Setup > Rate Type
To create a new rate type:
219
2. Enter a unique Code identifier and a Description for this rate type. These values display on several programs
and reports.
3. Optionally, click the Code button on the Base Rate Type pane to find and select the rate type you want
to use as the parent record to the current rate type. Use this field when you want the current rate type to
use conversion rules from another rate type.
4. In the Decimals field, enter the number of decimals that are calculated and displayed for amounts converted
through this rate type. You can enter between 0-6 decimal places in this field.
5. The Cross-Rate Currency section contains the fields you use to define the interim currency for the Cross-Rate
conversion rule or the primary interim currency for the Double-Cross Rate and Reverse Double-Cross
Rate conversion rules.
6. If you can round values calculated for the Cross-Rate Currency, select the Round check box. You can then
indicate up to how many decimals can be used to round within the Decimals field. For more information
on rounding, review the Rounding Engine section later in this chapter.
7. The Alternative Cross-Rate Currency section contains the fields you use to define the interim currency
for the Alternate Cross-Rate conversion rule or the secondary interim currency for the Double-Cross Rate
and Reverse Double-Cross Rate conversion rules.
8. If you can round values calculated for the Alternative Cross-Rate Currency, select the Round check box.
You can then indicate up to how many decimals can be used to round within the Decimals field.
9. If the Global Lock check box is clear, any updates made to this rate type are also automatically sent to all
companies that use this rate type. If you select this check box, however, any updates you enter are not sent
to these companies.
10. Select the Global check box to indicate this rate type can be used by other companies within your
organization.
220
Conversion Rules
When you finish defining the primary values for the rate type, you can set up the currency conversion rules. To
enter conversion rules:
1. Navigate to the Conversion Rules > Detail sheet.
2. Each currency pair displays on this sheet. Use the Tree View to navigate between the available currency
pair conversion rules.
3. The Source Currency fields display the original currency for the conversion rule.
4. The Target Currency fields display the resulting currency for the conversion rule. The conversion rule
changes amounts in the Source Currency to the Target Currency.
5. Click the Conversion Rule drop-down list to define the rule used for the conversion. Available options:
Direct - Multiplies an amount in the source currency against the exchange rate for the target currency.
Inverse - Divides an amount in the source currency against the exchange rate for the target currency.
Cross-Rate - Uses an intermediate, or interim, currency to convert amounts between the source and
target currencies. The Cross-Rate currency defined on the Detail sheet is the interim currency.
Alternate Cross-Rate - Uses an interim currency to convert amounts between the source and target
currencies. The Alternative Cross-Rate Currency defined on the Detail sheet is the interim currency.
Double Cross-Rate - Uses two interim currencies to convert the source amount to the target amount.
This conversion rule runs the Direct calculation to convert the amounts generated between each currency
Reverse Double Cross-Rate - Uses two interim currencies to convert the source amount to the target
amount. This conversion rule runs the Inverse calculation to convert the amounts generated between
each currency.
6. The Display Mode indicates how the conversion rule displays within programs that display source and
target currency amounts. The currency pair displays along with an arrow indicating the direction of the
conversion and the exchange rate below it.
7. Select the Use Base Rate check box if the conversion rules from the base rate type (if one is selected) should
be used for the currency pair. If you select this check box, all other fields on this sheet are not available.
221
8. Select the Fixed Rate check-box to indicate whether the rate defined for this currency pair can update the
Effective Rate value. If this check box is selected, the rate is locked, or fixed, and the Effective Rate cannot
be updated by this conversion rule. If the check box is clear, however, the conversion rule uses a variable,
or float, exchange rate and this rate can be updated daily.
9. To define all the conversion rules for this rate type at the same time, click the Matrix tab. The grid on this
sheet displays all the currency pairs and contains a drop-down list for each pair where you select the
conversion rule you need.
Exchange Rates
Use Exchange Rate Maintenance to define exchange rates for currency pairs and an effective date for the rate
type to which they belong. The application uses these rates to convert amounts on multi-currency transactions.
Although you can enter these rates manually, you can also use the Exchange Rates Import program to import
rates from an external file generated by Epicor Service Connect.
Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Currency Management > General Operations > Exchange
Rate Entry
To manually enter a new exchange rate:
1. Click the Rate Type button to find and select the rate type you want. The conversion rules defined for each
currency pair update amounts using the exchange rate you enter in this program.

3. Enter the Effective Date on which the exchange rates begin. You can also click the Effective Date button
to find and select an existing exchange rate record.
4. The Source Currency, Target Currency, and Conversion Rule fields display values defined within the
rate type.
5. Enter the Rate Value you need for the currency pair.
6. If you need to record additional information, enter text in the Reference field.
222
7. Click the List tab to select another currency pair to update.

8. Click the Matrix tab to update all of the exchange rates for the currency pairs at the same time.
Import Exchange Rates

To import an exchange rate list into the application:
1. From the Actions menu, select Import.
2. On the Exchange Rates Import window, click the Filename button to find and select the exchange rate
data file to import.
3. The List Delimiter field indicates the character used to divide and organize the data within the imported
file. Enter the value you need. The default value is the comma ( , ).
4. The Date Order field defines the sequence through which dates display when the file is imported into the
application. Available formats are m/d/y and d/m/y.
5. The Number Format defines how number values are imported from the Service Connect file. Select the
format you need from the drop-down list.
6. Click OK.
223
Rounding Engine
Use the Rounding Engine to define locale-specific rounding requirements and rounding-related settings. This
functionality includes currency tolerances, company tolerances, and rounding accounts. The Rounding Engine
controls rounding for currencies, sales documents, customers, payments, and cash receipts.
You define the rounding tolerances for each currency within Currency Master Maintenance. You can also define
rounding tolerances within Company Configuration and Customer Maintenance.
Currency Master Maintenance

Use Currency Master Maintenance to define the rounding settings for a selected currency. You define the rounding
tolerances on the Rounding sheet.
Main Menu Path : Financial Management > Currency Management > Setup > Currency Master
1. Select the currency you want to update on the Currency > Detail sheet.
224
2. Navigate to the Currency > Rounding sheet.
3. The Value Type indicates the field values affected by the rounding tolerance. Notice you can define rounding
tolerances for Unit Prices, Unit Taxes, and so on.
4. The Multiplier defines the value used when rounding amounts. This value must be a positive number. A
zero value indicates no rounding calculation occurs. The number of decimals used when entering multipliers
is the same number of decimals defined for the currency on the Currency > Detail sheet.
5. Select the Rule you need for each value from the drop-down list. Available rules:
No Round
Round Up
Round Down
Round to Nearest - round up if the remainder value of dividing the number by the multiplier is greater
or equal to half the value of the multiplier; otherwise, round down.
Company Configuration
You can define rounding tolerances in both accounts receivable (AR) and accounts payable (AP) configurations.
Company settings determine whether customer specific rounding applies. Rounding rules apply to the net unit
price when the company calculates discounts on the unit price in sales programs.
Main Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration
To define the rounding tolerances in Company Configuration:
225
1. Navigate to the Modules > Finance > Accounts Receivable > General sheet.
2. Enter the Tolerance value you need for the Accounts Receivable module.
226
3. Navigate to the Modules > Finance > Accounts Payable sheet.
4. Enter the Tolerance value you need for the Accounts Payable module.
5. Click Save.
Customer Maintenance
You can also define rounding parameters on specific customer records. Use Customer Maintenance to define a
tax rounding rule and indicate whether the rule applies to invoice lines or totals. Customer settings override the
rounding defaults defined for the company.
Main Menu Path: Sales Management > Order Management > Setup > Customer
To define the rounding tolerances for a customer record:
227
1. On the Customer > Detail sheet, select a customer.
2. Navigate to the Billing > Detail sheet.
228
3. Select the Tax Rounding Rule you want for this customer. Available options:
Use Rounding Rules from Currency Master
Round Up
Round Down
Round to Nearest
4. Select the Tax Level for the rule. Available options:
Per Line Indicates the tax calculation is run against each invoice line.
Per Invoice - Indicates the tax calculation is run against the total invoice.
5. When you finish your rounding options for this customer, click Save.
229
Chapter 7 | General Ledger
Chapter 7: General Ledger

The general ledger is implemented through a hierarchical structure of setup records. You define default parameters
on items found at the higher levels of this hierarchy, but then modify these values as needed at lower levels to reflect
specific areas of financial activity.
The primary records you define are books. You create books for different financial purposes to reflect unique localities
or separate businesses in which your organization carries out financial activity. You can also create consolidation books
that reconcile amounts entered in multiple currencies. You then link books to specific GL transaction types. Each GL
transaction type contains posting rules you can modify to reflect reporting requirements.
The Epicor application contains chart of account features you leverage to generate account structures required by your
organization. You define the charts, account segments, self-balancing segments, natural accounts, and other accounting
features.
The account and journal contexts you create are added to maintenance records using GL control types and GL controls.
Each GL control type contains a series of parent account and journal contexts which then define what GL controls are
available through the specific type. Then each GL control contains specific account and journal contexts to determine
which accounts are updated when a transaction is placed against a selected record.
When you implement the entire general ledger functionality, you can accurately track and report the financial activity
of your company.
For more information on general ledger set up and processes, refer to the Consolidation and the General Ledger chapter
found within the Epicor Application Users Guide and the Posting Engine Technical Reference Guide found within
application help.
Fiscal Calendars
Use Fiscal Calendar Maintenance to determine the periods during which journals post. You can define multiple
fiscal calendars for use with different books. The books to which a transaction posts determine the periods to
which its journals apply.
Each fiscal calendar contains a sequence of Fiscal Years. A Fiscal Year in one calendar cannot overlap another
fiscal year, and there can be no gaps between years.
Each fiscal year contains a number of periods. A fiscal year can also contain a 13th period; use this for posting
year-end adjustments. You can then accommodate post-audit changes to the companys financial records.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Fiscal Calendar
Add Fiscal Calendar

To create a new fiscal calendar:
230
General Ledger | Chapter 7
2. Enter the Calendar ID for this record. This identifier displays within other programs and reports.
3. Enter a Description for the fiscal calendar. Use this text to help explain the purpose of the fiscal calendar.
Add Fiscal Years

You can add as many fiscal years as you need to the fiscal calendar.
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Fiscal Year.
2. In the Fiscal Year field, enter the period of time for a fiscal year. Typically, you enter a calendar year in this
field.
3. The fiscal Year Suffix identifies the suffix used for the fiscal year; for example, Q1.
4. In the Start Date and End Date fields, enter the beginning date and the ending date for the fiscal year.
5. Enter the Number of Periods contained by the fiscal year. This value identifies how many ordinary periods
are assigned to this fiscal year.
6. Enter the Number of Closing Periods contained by the fiscal year. This value identifies how many closing
periods are assigned to this fiscal year.
231
7. The Previous Year and Next Year fields display the preceding and subsequent years within this fiscal
calendar.
Add Fiscal Periods

After you define how many fiscal periods are available within the current fiscal year, you can add the periods you
need. You can only create as many periods as the fiscal year allows. To do this:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Fiscal Period.
2. The Fiscal Year field displays the current fiscal year.

3. Use the Fiscal Period field to identify the fiscal period with the year. If you are creating a fiscal year that
follows the calendar year, enter values between 1 12.
4. Enter the Start Date for the fiscal period. The default value is the day after the end date of the previous
fiscal year.
5. Enter the End Date for the fiscal period. This defines the last date on which fiscal transactions can occur
during this period.
6. Continue to add the fiscal periods you need. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.
Chart of Accounts
Use Chart of Account Maintenance to define the structure of each company chart of accounts (COA) and the
characteristics of its segments. The application uses COAs to control entry of accounts.
Each of the companys books must have a COA. Books can have different COAs, or several books can share the
same COA. When you associate a book with a COA, you can then use the COA to record journals within the
book.
The companys Master COA defines the general ledger accounts available to manually enter general ledger
accounts. You indicate which COA is the master within the Company Configuration program. The application
uses the Master COA to define available values in fields used for entry of general ledger accounts. For example,
the application limits entries in the GL Account field in AP Adjustment to Master COA accounts. Because of this,
the Master COA must define all accounts needed to post from these fields.
232
A natural account segment defines the chart segment used with the account. The first segment you save on a
COA automatically saves as its natural account. When a segment is defined as a natural account, the application
zero balances in income statement accounts and maintains balances for balance sheet accounts.
A controlled segment does not change as transactions are applied. Subsequently, controlled segments record
the primary financial history of the company. Use dynamic segments to record temporary, unique business activity.
You can link a dynamic segment to a business entity, which is a table that records data placed against customer,
supplier, part, and other entities.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Chart of Accounts
To create a new Chart of Account:
2. Enter a unique Chart of Account identifier and a Description for this COA. These values displays on several
programs and reports.
3. In the Separator Character field, enter the character used to separate the various segments within the
chart.
4. If this COA is the Master for the current company, this check box is selected.
5. The Chart Length field indicates the maximum length of the accounts generated through this chart.
Define Segment Values

You are now ready to define the segment values used with this COA. To define segment values:
233
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New COA Segment.
2. The Segment Number identifies the segment in relation to the other segments on the chart. You can create
as many as 20 segments.
3. Enter the Name of the segment. Typically Segment 1 is often named Natural. Some examples of other
names: Department, Product, and Customer.
4. Enter the Maximum Length and Minimum Length for the account segment. Each segment can contain
as many as 50 characters and must have a minimum of 1 character. Each account can have as many as 200
characters.
The application sets a default minimum length when a
dynamic segment uses a business entity. In this case, you
cannot define a segment shorter than what is allowed for
the entity.
5. Select the Dynamic check box to indicate this segment is dynamic. The Epicor application then defines the
value of the dynamic segment based on entity references and posting rules. If this check box is clear, it
indicates this segment is controlled and cannot be changed by the application.
6. If this segment is dynamic, you can select the Use Business Entity check box. This check box indicates this
segment uses a business entity to define the segment value. If this check box is clear, it indicates the
application uses booking rules and lookup tables to define the segment value.
7. If you select the Use Business Entity check box, the Business Entity drop-down list becomes available. Click
this drop-down list to select the business entity that generates the dynamic values.
234
8. Select the Create Segment Values check box to indicate dynamic segment values are created automatically.
This causes segment values to be added when a system entity record is created. If this check box is clear,
you manually update business entity values.
9. Select the Balance Options you want for this account segment. Available options:
Include in Detail Balance Indicates the application maintains segment balances for display on reports
and trackers.
Include in Summary Balance Indicates the application summarizes segment balances for display on
reports and trackers.
Opening Balance on P/L Indicates the application maintains year-end segment balances for expense
and revenue accounts. By default, the application reduces the balances in temporary accounts to zero
at year end. If you select this option, you can maintain an income statement independent of the fiscal
year.
10. Select the Alphanumeric check box to indicate the account segment can include both letters and numbers.
11. Click the Entry Control drop-down list to indicate whether the segment must display in general ledger
account codes. Available options:
Mandatory The segment must be included in general ledger accounts.
By Natural Account The segment can be either optional or mandatory for each natural account value.
You define this option within Account Segment Values Maintenance. This program is described later in
this chapter.
Optional General ledger accounts can be posted without this segment.
Reference Account Mask The segment can be either optional or mandatory, depending on the
account mask defined in GL COA Reference Type Maintenance. This program is explored later in this
chapter.
Modify Display Order

You can also modify the order in which the segments display on the current chart of accounts. To modify the
display order:
1. Click the Display Order tab.
2. Highlight the segment for which you want to change the order.
235
3. Click the Up or Down arrows to change the sequence order. As needed, continue to change the order of
any other segments.
5. Additional Chart of Accounts functionality is available from the Actions menu. Select Update Business
Entity Segment Values to manually update specific segment values based on reference-type segments.
You can also use it for other referenced-entity segments that require manual updates.
6. Select Rebuild Display GL Account to update the display of account segments in fields used to enter
general ledger accounts and define segment masks.
When you are ready to generate the chart of accounts, you use General Ledger Account Maintenance. This
program is described later in this chapter.
COA Categories
Use COA Category Maintenance to define the categories you need to associate with natural accounts within
Account Segment Values Maintenance. This determines how the application maintains both account balances
and the accounts that provide financial statement values.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > COA Category
To create a new COA category:
236
2. Click the Chart of Account drop-down list to select the COA for which you want to create a category.
3. Enter the Category ID. This identifier is used on reports and programs that do not have space to display
the full Description text.
4. Enter the Description for the COA category. The GL Report Wizard uses this value to label entries in financial
statements.
5. Select the Net Income check box to indicate this category reports net income values. Typically, corporate
balance sheets use Retained Earnings to describe this category.
6. Select the Enable Transaction Matching check box to indicate you can use this category to link, or match,
related transactions within the database.
7. Select the Type for the new COA category. The category is either for a Balance Sheet or an Income
Statement.
8. Use the Normal Balance options to indicate whether this category carries either a Debit or a Credit balance.
9. Click the Parent Category drop-down list to define the main category under which this child category
displays. The GL ReportWriter uses this field to structure statements. You can define as many subcategory
levels as you need.
10. Enter the Sequence for the child category. This value determines the position of the current category in
relation to the other child categories on financial statements.
11. Click the Consolidation Type drop-down list to define the exchange rate settings used when consolidation
journals generate from the selected COA.
Refer to the Consolidation Type Maintenance topic in
this chapter for information on creating new consolidation
types.
GL COA Reference Types

Use GL COA Reference Type to define the reference types and reference type masks you want to apply to a COA
segment. Reference type values classify campaigns, projects, and other entities with a fixed life span. Account
masks determine the general ledger accounts that include the reference-type segment; they also indicate whether
including the segment is required or optional.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL COA Reference Type
To create a new reference type:
237
2. Select the Chart of Account you want to contain the reference type segment.
3. Click the Segment drop-down list to define the segment to which this reference type applies.
4. Enter the Type identifier you want. You use this value to select the reference type within the Account
Segment Values program.
5. Enter a Description for the reference type. This value displays on several programs and reports.
Create Account Masks

You are now ready to create the account masks you want to associate with this reference type. To create account
masks:
238
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Account Mask.
2. Enter the Account Mask value you need. This value defines the general ledger accounts that use the current
reference type. You can select specific accounts or use the underscore ( _ ) as a wildcard to reference multiple
accounts.
3. Click the Reference Status drop-down list to define whether accounts that match the mask include values
defined for the selected type. Available options:
Exclude - Blocks using reference type values with accounts that match the mask.
Optional - Can use reference type values with accounts that match the mask.
Required - Must use reference type values with accounts that match the mask.
4. Continue to add the account masks you need. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.
Restricted Functions
Use Account Entry Restricted Function Maintenance to select the specific program functions you want to limit
for manual journal entry. You use these functions to restrict entries against specific natural accounts defined in
Account Segment Values.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Account Entry Restricted Functions
To create a new restricted function:
239
2. Click the Browse button to find and select the program function you want to restrict.
3. After you select the function, it displays within the Restricted Function field.
4. Enter a Description for the restricted function. This text value displays within the Account Segment Values
program.
5. The Restriction Type field indicates whether the function originates with the system (S) or is user-defined
(UD).
Account Segment Values

Leverage the Account Segment Values program to define values for both dynamic and controlled segments. You
also define options for natural account values and indicate the effective dates for these segment values.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Account Segment Values
To create a new account segment value:
240
2. In the Segment Values field, enter a unique identifier for this record.
3. Enter the Name you want for the segment value. This value displays on several reports and programs.
4. Use the Description field to provide more information about the segment. This text displays on custom
reports and trackers.
5. Click the Reference Type drop-down list to indicate the reference type used to group values for the segment.
You can specify a reference type for segments associated with the GLCOARefType business entity within
Chart of Accounts Maintenance. Segments values are applied to the reference type linked with the segment
within GL COA Reference Type Maintenance.
6. Click the Category drop-down list to select the COA category you want to link to this account segment
value. This value determines how the application maintains both account balances and the accounts that
provide financial statement values.
7. Click the Normal Balance drop-down list to indicate whether this account segment value carries debit or
credit values. This list is only available for natural accounts.
8. Within the Reverse Balance Category group box, select the Category you use to determine the account
characteristics when the segment value is reversed.
9. Select the Active check box to indicate this account segment is available for posting transactions.
10. The Effective From Date and the To Date fields define the time period during which this account segment
value can be used for posting. If the To Date field is blank, this segment value can be used for posting
indefinitely (or end when the Active check box is clear).
241
Natural Account Options

Use the Natural Account Options sheets to link COA categories with natural accounts and designate a natural
account as a currency account. You can then save multi-currency conversion values used in reporting. You can
also select the restricted functions you need to prevent manual journal entry for the account segment.
1. Navigate to the Natural Account Options > Detail sheet.
2. Click the Summarization drop-down list to determine whether the application summarizes the accounts
journal details when a transaction posts. When you summarize posted details, you reduce the records stored
in the database. Available options:
Summarize Posts a single journal that summarizes the accounts debits and credits.
Summarize Debit and Credits Separately Posts one journal that summarizes the accounts debits and
one journal that summarizes the accounts credits.
No Summarization Posts journal details to the account.
The default value is defined within GL Transaction Type
Maintenance; however, you can override this default value
on this sheet.
3. Select the external Analysis Code you want to link to the natural account. This code is used for reporting
purposes in some countries. You create these codes using External Financial Analysis Code Maintenance.
4. Click the Enable Transaction Matching check box to indicate journal detail records that contain this natural
account can be matched using the GL Transaction Matching program. You define the default value for this
check box in COA Category Maintenance, but you can change this default value on this sheet.
5. To indicate this natural account is a currency account, select the Currency Account check box. You can
then use this account to convert transaction currencies to a reporting currency, and display currency gains
and losses on financial reports.
6. Click the Credit drop-down list to define the currency exchange rate used to revalue amounts posted to
credit accounts. Typically, accounts payable and other credit accounts use a buy rate.
242
7. Click the Debit drop-down list to define the currency exchange rate used to revalue amounts posted to
debit accounts. Typically, accounts receivable and other debit accounts use a sell rate.
8. To add a transaction currency to the natural account, click the Down Arrow next to the New button and
select New Currency.
9. Click the Currency Code drop-down list to select the currency you wish to add.
10. Select the Allowed check box to revalue amounts in this transaction currency to the posting currency.
11. Click the Revalue Option drop-down list to define whether the application captures gains, losses, or both
when exchanges involve the currency. By default, no revaluation occurs.
12. Select the Gain Account, Loss Account, and Accrual Account that records the amounts calculated when
this transaction currency is converted to the posting currency.
13. Use the Segment Options sheet to define the relationship between the natural account segment and other
controlled segments. You can require that a segment must be used with a specific natural account; you
define this requirement in Chart of Accounts Maintenance.
14. Add restricted functions to the Restrictions sheet to block when the natural account is used when users
enter manual journals. You create these restricted items in Restricted Function Maintenance.
15. Continue to add and define the account segment values you need. When you finish, click Save.
General Ledger Accounts

Use General Ledger Account Maintenance to define valid general ledger accounts for a selected COA. General
ledger accounts contain the natural account segment and other controlled segments. You use the Generate
functionality within this program to generate the defined general ledger accounts.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > General Ledger Account
243
2. Select the Chart of Accounts inside which you want to create this general ledger account.
3. The GL Account field defines a general ledger account which matches the selected COA. Before you can
use a COA, it must contain all of the valid combinations of required segment values.
4. Enter a Description that identifies the account on reports and programs. Enter the text you need. By default,
this value includes the name of the natural account and the abbreviated descriptions of the other segments.
5. Select the Multi Company check box to indicate whether this account is used for inter-company processing.
During this process, all multi-company accounts are updated within the COAs of a parent company and its
subsidiaries.
6. Select the Preserve Description check box to indicate the Description text cannot be deleted during
automatic account updates. These updates occur while accounts are generated within Chart of Accounts
Maintenance.
7. Select the Preserve Activation check box to prevent the account from being deactivated during automatic
account updates. These updates occur while accounts are generated within Chart of Accounts Maintenance.
8. The Effective From Date and the To Date fields define the time period during which this general ledger
account can be used for posting. If the To Date field is blank, this account can be used for posting indefinitely
(or end when the Active check box is clear).
Generate Chart of Accounts

To generate the chart of accounts:
244
1. From the Actions menu, select Generate. The Generate command uses a COAs controlled segments and
the segments values to automatically create general ledger accounts. To save time, you can use this command
rather than creating accounts manually.
2. The Generate Accounts window displays. Enter a Chart of Account or click the COA button to find and
select the COA to be used in the generation.
3. Select the generation mode.

Simple Generation - Generates accounts based on defined segment values. Use the Target Segments
Definition sheet to select specific segment values or define value ranges used in the generation.
Generation with copying Generates accounts based on combinations of segment values. Use the
Source Segments Combination Definition sheet to define the combinations.
4. Indicate if you want to override the existing accounts options. Available options:
Create New Accounts Only - Blocks the process from updating existing accounts.
Preserve Mode - Protects existing account settings during updates.
Override Mode - Resets all existing account settings to process defaults you have defined. The existing
accounts become inactive and their descriptions are deleted.
5. Select the Trial Balance check box to specify the segment balance displays on the trial balance sheet.
6. Select the Store Balances check box to indicate the application maintains segment balances for use on
reports and trackers and in consolidations.
7. When you are ready to generate the chart of accounts, click the Generate button.
245
Self-Balancing Segments
Use Self-Balancing Segment Maintenance to define segments used for self-balancing journals. Typically, segments
that define divisions, organizations, departments, and projects are used as self-balancing segments.
A self-balancing segment is one which automatically posts a balancing journal when a transaction occurs between
two values defined for the segment. This makes sure the book linked with the COA maintains a balanced set of
records within the segment. Self-balancing segments use the balancing and offset accounts selected within the
program.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Self Balancing Segment
To set up a self-balancing segment:
1. Select the Chart of Account inside which you want to create the self-balancing segment.
2. Select the Segment that you want to create the self-balancing journals. Segments which define divisions,
organizations, departments, and projects are often used for self-balancing segments.
3. Select the Self-Balancing check box to indicate you want this segment to automatically balance.
4. Use the Level field to determine the processing order when a COA has multiple self-balancing segments.
The process begins with the segment which has a 1 value.
5. Click the Balancing Account button to find and select this required account. This value defines the natural
account used to process balancing journal amounts.
6. Click the Offset Account button to find and select an account used to create offset balances when an
optional segment is self-balancing.
246
GL Account Budgets
Use GL Account Budget Maintenance to define budgets for income-statement accounts. You can include these
budgetary amounts in cash flow analysis and custom reports. You can define budgets for revenue and expense
accounts.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Account Budget
To create a GL account budget:
1. Select the Book that contains the account you want to budget.
2. Click the Fiscal Year button to find and select the fiscal year to which you want this budget to apply. The
fiscal calendar which contains the fiscal year determines how many periods are available in the budget. For
example, the year 2014 contains 12 periods, so in turn, this account budget uses 12 periods.
3. Click the GL Account button to find and select the account for which you want to budget. You can only
select accounts for income statements; the COA category linked to the account indicates whether it is an
income statement or a balance sheet account.
4. Enter the budget Amount you want for the account. Enter a positive amount to track increases in expense
accounts or decreases to revenue accounts. Enter a negative amount to track decreases in revenue accounts
or increases to expense accounts.
When you save the budget, the application uses the
Amount and Qualifier values to create period budgets
within the Period Budget sheet.
5. Click the Qualifier drop-down list to indicate whether the amount applies to either the selected fiscal year
or each of its periods.
6. The Total Budget Amount field displays the budgeted amount for the fiscal year.
7. Select the Cash Flow Analysis check box to indicate budgeted amounts for the account affect entries
within the Cash Flow Tracker.
247
8. Click the Period Budget tab to display the budget divided by the periods within the selected fiscal year.
GL Account Allocations
Use GL Account Allocation Maintenance to define how you distribute periodic expenses and revenues between
accounts in a book. Typically, you use these allocations to distribute expenses among divisions, organizations,
departments, or projects; these entities are defined by a segment in the COA linked to the selected book.
You can create more complex allocations using the Advanced
Allocation functionality. Leverage this feature set to define a
series of allocations that first pulls amounts from financial
source data and then spreads these allocated amounts across
multiple target accounts. To learn about this functionality,
review the Advanced Allocations chapter in the Epicor
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Allocation Template
To create a new GL account allocation:
248
2. In the Allocation ID field, enter a unique identifier for the GL account allocation. This identifier displays
within various programs and reports.
3. Enter a Description for the allocation. This text describes the allocation within Journal Entry; it is used to
enter allocation journals.
4. In the Basis field, enter the purpose for the allocation. This value gives users information about the allocation,
but it does not affect the allocation processing.
5. Click the drop-down lists in the From Account section to select the Book, Account, and Description that
defines the account from which the allocation originates.
Enter Allocation Detail Lines

You are now ready to enter the detail lines you use with this allocation. To add these lines:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Allocation Line.
249
2. Click the G/L Account drop-down list in the GL Account Allocation Lines grid to select an account to
which a portion of the allocation amount is distributed. The book that contains the account can be different
from the book that contains the allocation.
3. Enter the Allocation Units for this detail line. This value defines how the allocation is distributed. It uses
allocation unit entries to calculate the percentages used in distributing the allocation.
4. The Percent field displays the percentage of the allocation amount distributed to the current account. As
you add detail lines to the allocation, this percentage is automatically reduced.
For example, you define three allocation lines, and each line has 50 allocation units. The Percent column
displays 33.33% for each line.
5. Continue to add allocation detail lines as you need. When you finish, click Save.
GL Control Types
Use GL Control Type Maintenance to group contexts and entities together; these types are later used to define
GL controls. Each GL control defines the account and journal contexts used for the control type from which it is
based.
You can associate one or more GL controls with a record in a setup (Maintenance) program. Each control associated
with a record must belong to a different control type. You can then use control values when the record is applied
against a posted transaction.
The application installs with a set of predefined GL control types. These types match the programs that maintain
the codes applied to posted transactions. However, you may need to create a type to support a new accounting
process.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Control Type
To create a new GL control type:
2. Enter the Type value you need. This value displays on several programs and reports.
3. Enter the Description for this control type.
250
4. Add an account context to this control type. To do this, click the Down Arrow next to the New button;
select New Account.
5. The Account Context sheet becomes active; it defines contexts used in GL controls based on the GL control
type. GL controls based on the type use its contexts to specify the books and accounts to which journals
post. Booking rules use the account information to define journal details.
6. In the Context field, enter the purpose for the context.
7. Select the Required check box to indicate an account must be defined for this context. You must define
the account for the GL code for this type.
8. Select the Use Master Chart check box to indicate this context requires use of a master chart. You can
only use this context for accounts defined for the master COA; the master COA displays in the accompanying
field.
9. Select the All Books check box to indicate the account context can map to multiple company books.
10. If you need, select a specific Book from this drop-down list. This limits the mapping of the context to an
account within the selected book.
11. Add a journal context to the control type. To do this, click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select
New Journal.
12. Use the Journal Context sheet to associate journal codes with GL controls based on the type. Journal codes
can group together journals created by the posting process.
13. Add a Context and select a Journal from drop-down list on the grid.
251
14. Add an entity to the control type. To do this, click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New
Entity.
15. Use the Entity sheet to limit use of the GL control type to a specific entity or entities. Programs can use a
GL control if its type references an entity.
16. Select an entity from the Business Entity drop down list on the grid. A program can use a GL control if
the type on which it is based references the entity managed by the program.
GL Controls
Use GL Control Maintenance to define the accounts and journal codes available to a specific record during the
posting processes. You define all the posting accounts used during posting within this program.
A GL control uses the account contexts and journal contexts of the control type from which it is based. You can
associate one or more GL controls with a record within a setup (Maintenance) program. Each control you associate
with a record must belong to a different control type.
You can create and modify GL controls to extend posting functionality. For example, you add a Landed Cost
context to the AP Account type in order to add a landed cost account to the AP-type control applied to a record
in Company Configuration. Ensure new account contexts are appropriate for the entities against which the type
applies.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Control Code
To create a new GL control:
252
1. In the Type field, select the GL control type to which the control will belong. The type determines the
account contexts, journal contexts, and business entities used by the GL control.
2. To create a new GL control, click New on the Standard toolbar.

3. Enter the Name and Description for the GL Control. These values display on several programs; use them
to identify the specific GL control.
4. Click the Account tab.
5. Use the Account sheet to designate the accounts used by a posting process that references the control.
Click the Account button to find and select the account you need.
6. Use the Journal sheet to specify the journal codes available to a posting process that references the current
GL control.
253
Journal Codes
Use Journal Code Maintenance to define codes used to group journals. These groups help users track and report
on journals. Journal codes are applied to journals by associating a posting process with a GL control that references
the code. Users can then track and report on journals based on the code.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Journal Code
To create a new journal code:
2. In the Journal Code field, enter a unique identifier for the journal code. When you use a journal code with
a GL control, it applies the journal code to all the journals created through the GL control.
3. Select the System Journal check box to indicate this code is applied to default journals generated by the
application.
4. Enter a Description for the journal code. This value displays on several reports and programs.
Recurring Journal Entry

Use Recurring Journal Entry to define periodic or repeating journals. To do this, you create a template for these
recurring journals and then generate the schedule of journals you need for a specified fiscal year. You can then
modify each generated journal as you need, and verify their accuracy using the edit list.
Recurring journals save you the work of manually creating journals for routine transactions. Typically, recurring
journals update accounts for flow-type transactions such as depreciation, amortization, interest expense, or
interest revenue.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Recurring Journal
Recurring Journal Entry - Header

The settings in the Header area determine the book, fiscal calendar, and chart of accounts of the journal. The
currency used for the journal is determined by the book you select. You can also define recurring reversals for
each journal.
254
To create a recurring journal:

2. The application inserts a value in the Entry field.

3. Use the Description field to identify the record in this program, various GL reports, and Chart Tracker.
4. If you need, change the value in the Group Prefix field. The abbreviated description for the default fiscal
calendar displays as the default prefix, but if you need, you can change this value.
5. Optionally, select the Corr.Accounting (Correspondence Accounting) check box. You can specify the
credited and debited account for each line in a journal entry with correspondence accounting. This
functionality is for countries that require each individual line of a journal to have matching debit and credit
entries.
6. Use the Single-Book and Multi-Book options to define the defaults that apply to the recurring journals:
Single-Book - Creates a recurring journal for a specific book. When you select this option, the recurring
journal uses the fiscal calendar, currency, and COA of the selected book as default values for journal
entries in the group. You must also select a book in the related field.
Multi-Book - Creates a recurring journal for multiple books. When you select this option, the recurring
journal uses the companys main fiscal calendar, currency, and Master COA to provide default values for
journal entries. This recurring journal can then be used across multiple books.
7. The default Calendar determines the periods used for posting.
8. The default Currency applies to amounts entered in the Detail sheet.
9. Use the Rate Type drop-down list to select the default rate type applied against journals in the group. Rate
types define the conversion rules used for multiple currencies. You can apply a different rate type to individual
journals. When necessary, the application uses the rate type to convert an amount from the original, or
source, currency to the target currency. The rate type you select is used either to convert amounts for
255
currency accounts on the journal details, or to convert amounts from a company currency to a book currency
in multi-book transactions.
10. Optionally, use the REVERSE option to generate reversing entries with the recurring journals. Typically,
reversing entries are used for accrual entries.
Recurring Journal Entry - Detail

Recurring journals contain details that define the accounts to which debit and credit amounts post. Typically,
recurring journals post to the same accounts each period. You can adjust the detail amounts for a journal prior
to posting it.
To create a detail for a recurring journal:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Line.
2. The application inserts a value in the Line field. You can change the line number.
3. Enter an account in the G/L Account field. This field designates the account to which the detail amount
posts. The application validates the account you enter.
4. Use the Description field to identify the detail in this line. This description text displays in various GL reports,
the Journal Tracker, and the Chart Tracker. The journal description supplies the field default.
5. Use either the Debit field or the Credit field to enter the amount posted to the selected account. Each
detail has either a debit or credit. A detail cannot post a zero amount.
6. If required, click the AutoBalance button to create a balancing detail based on an entered credit or debit
amount. Company options require you to enter balanced journals unless specifically overwritten.
256
Recurring Journal Entry Generate Recurring Journals

After defining journal settings, you generate the journals for a specified fiscal year. You can modify each generated
journal and use Print Edit List on the Actions menu to verify their accuracy.
To generate recurring journals:
1. From the Actions menu, select Generate Schedule for Fiscal Year.
2. The Generate Schedule window displays. In the Fiscal Year field, enter the fiscal year that contains the
periods to which the journals post and a Fiscal Year Suffix if applicable, to differentiate the fiscal year.
3. Click Generate. The application creates recurring journals for the selected year. Default dates are defined
based on the fiscal calendar that applies either to the book (single-book mode) or to the company calendar
(multi-book mode).
Recurring Journal Entry - Schedule

Use the Schedule sheet to set a journals Post and Apply dates and to indicate a journal is scheduled for posting.
Use this functionality to control which recurring journals post.
To schedule a journal for posting:
257
1. Click the Schedule tab.
2. Find the journal you want to schedule in the grid.

3. If you need, use the Apply Date field to change the apply date of the journal. You can enter dates from
the current fiscal period selected for the journal. This period also defines the default value that displays.
4. Optionally, use the Reversal Apply Date field to change the date on which a reversing journal posts. By
default, the reversal occurs in the period following the original posting. In order to use this functionality,
you must select the Reverse option for the recurring journal.
5. If you need, use the Schedule Date field to change the date the journal posts. The scheduled date and the
apply date can be different dates.
6. In the Scheduled Status field, select Scheduled from the drop down menu to post the journal on the
schedule date.
Accounting Segment Mapping

Use Accounting Segment Mapping to define the mappings used to transfer journals between COAs. Mapping
transforms a segment from one COA into a segment of another COA. This functionality eliminates redefining
the posting (booking) rules that create journals.
You can use COA maps to automatically transfer posted journals between books. You associate maps with a
book and its rules in GL Transaction Type Maintenance; this program is explored later in this chapter. For example,
your current company has a financial and a legal book that use different COAs. You want to book the same
258
accounts payable journals to both COAs. To do so, you create a map with the financial books COA as the source
COA. The map links natural account segment values for AP accounts in the two COAs.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Accounting Segment Mapping
To create a new account segment mapping:
2. Enter the Chart of Account Map name you need. This value displays within other programs.
3. Enter a Detailed Description for the accounting segment mapping. This value helps identify the purpose
of the mapping.
4. Click the Source Chart of Account drop-down list to select the COA which contains the original, or source,
COA.
5. Select the Target Chart of Account that you want to map to the Source Chart of Account.
6. Click the Map Type drop-down list to indicate the kind of map you are creating. Available options:
Accounts Segment Map Creates a map for specific segments within a COA.
GL Account Map Creates a map that links an entire GL account.
COA Mapping
Use the sheets under the COA Mapping tab to complete the mapping. You can link either entire GL accounts or
specific account segments.
Account Mapping
If the COA map is a GL Account map type, you link account strings between source and target accounts.
To associate an account string in the COA mapping:
259
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New GLAccount Mapping.
2. Use the Source GL Account column to specify a general ledger account from the source COA. Transactions
posted to this account also post to the corresponding target account.
3. Use the Target GL Account column to specify a general ledger account in the target COA.
4. Continue to link the account strings you need. When you finish, click Save.
Segment Mapping
If the COA map is an Accounting Segment Map type, you link specific source and target account segments
together.
To link account segments in the COA mapping:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Segment Mapping.
2. Select the Source Segment type you wish to map. Only segments from this source type are then available
to link on the map. Available options:
Chart
Division
Department
GLReference
Customer
Employee
260
3. Select the Target Segment type you wish to map. Only segments from this target type are then available
to link. These options are the same as those available on the Source Segment column.
4. Use the Source Segment Value column to select the source segment you wish to link.
5. Complete the segment mapping by selecting a Target Segment Value. Values entered in the source
segment also now post to the target segment.
6. Continue to link the segments you need. When you finish, click Save.
Books
Use Book Maintenance to define the companys books. Book settings determine its currency, chart of accounts,
and fiscal calendar. These values apply to journals posted to the book and in the generation of financial reports.
Books can record financial transactions or consolidate other books. A standard book records financial activity of
the company. Consolidation books regulate the transfer of consolidation journals between two standard books.
Typically, a company uses multiple books to display the same financial information in other contexts. Use multiple
books to value items differently in financial and statutory reports. For example, an insurance company might use
GAAP guidelines to value investments and other items for one report, but use National Association of Insurance
Commissioners guidelines within another book. In addition, state regulations might also impact reporting, requiring
the definition of additional books.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Book
To create a new book:
2. In the Book field, enter a unique identifier for the book. This value displays on several reports and programs.
3. Enter the concise Description for the book. This value displays on several drop-down lists throughout the
application.
4. Select the Main Book check box to indicate the current book is the default. This book automatically displays
on all reports and trackers for the current company.
261
5. If you no longer want to use the book, select the Inactive check box. Users can no longer enter journal
records against this book.
6. Click the Type drop-down list to determine the primary function of the book. You can use books to either
record financial transactions or consolidate other books. Available options:
Standard - This type records financial activity of the company and has no relationship to other books.
Consolidation - This type merges balances from several books to create consolidated reports for the
companys subsidiaries.
7. Click the Chart of Account drop-down list to define the Chart of Account (COA) you wish to use with the
book. Each book can have a different COA, or several books can share the same COA. The COA defines
valid general ledger accounts, available dynamic segments, and balance maintenance for segments other
than the natural account. For more information, review the Chart of Accounts Maintenance section earlier
in this chapter.
8. Select the fiscal Calendar you want to use with this book. These calendars define the fiscal periods used
by the application to record transactions. You create fiscal calendars within Fiscal Period Maintenance; this
program is discussed earlier in this chapter.
9. Click the Book Currency drop-down list to define the currency of the book. The book currency can be used
on financial reports and in consolidations. All journal amounts post in the currency selected on the book.
Books can also store journals using transaction currencies as needed for multi-currency reporting.
10. Select the Corr Accounting check box to identify this book uses correspondence accounting rules.
Retained Earnings
The Retained Earnings sheet designates the standard account used for retained earnings for the book. The
application continually updates the retained earnings account balance with postings to the COAs revenue and
expense accounts. As a result, the balance sheet always reflects the current balance. At year-end closing, run the
Transfer Balances process to transfer account balances to the next fiscal year.
Balance sheets report the balance in the standard retained earnings account. You can further divide the reported
retained earnings balance by substituting a segment in the retained earnings account for a corresponding segment
in the income statement. You can then split retained earnings by division, department, or another mandatory
controlled account segment. Account masks designate the relationship between the split segment and the
retained earning accounts that displays the balances.
Often, a book that uses segment substitution also uses self-balancing segments. When you create a self-balancing
segment in Self-Balancing Segment Maintenance, it enables the balancing journals to automatically post within
a segment. This ensures the book to which the journals post maintains a balanced set of records within the
segment. For more information, review the Account Segment Values Self-Balancing Segment Maintenance
sections earlier in this chapter.
To define a standard account and an account mask:
262
1. Navigate to the Retained Earnings sheet.
2. Click the Standard Account button to find and select this account.
3. The Name and Description of the standard account displays in these fields. A standard account designates
a balance sheet account as the standard account used for retained earnings for the book. The application
updates the retained earnings account balance with postings to the COAs revenue and expense accounts.
4. To add an account mask, click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Account Mask.
5. Define the mask in the Account Mask column. This creates an account mask that splits a COA segment so
its balances can transfer to multiple retained earnings accounts.
6. Define the account in the Retained Earnings Account column. This creates an account mask for a retained
earnings account so it can display balances from a split COA segment.
Report
Use the Report sheet to define the natural account range that displays on reports for the book selected.
To define this range:
1. Navigate to the Report sheet.
263
2. Click the From Account button to find and select the first account in the Natural Account Range that will
display on reports.
3. Click the To Account button to find and select the last account in the Natural Account Range that will
display on reports.
4. Enter the Level List value you need. This value defines the sub-total level list that will display on reports for
the current book.
Posting
Use the Posting sheets to configure a link to another book. This enables GL transactions generated in this linked
book to be mapped to the current book. Once the link is defined, you can apply this link to one or multiple GL
transaction types. A GL transaction type defines the processes you use to post accounts and journals. You can
automatically generate and activate transaction type revisions that use the mapping.
Source Book Details

Use the Posting > Source Book > Detail sheet to link a general ledger account, used during the posting process,
from a source book to a secondary book.
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Link To Source Book.
2. You enter the link information on the Posting > Source Book > Detail sheet.
3. Click the Map GL Transaction From Book drop-down list to select the source book you wish to use for
general ledger transaction mapping.
264
4. Click the Use COA Map drop-down list to specify the chart of accounts map for the selected pair of target
and source books.
5. Click the Transactional Currency drop-down list to specify the transaction currency. This value is either
the document currency or source book currency.
6. The GL Transaction Configuration section contains the fields you use to map the GL transaction types you
wish to link between the books. To activate all the available GL transaction types, click the Enable All
button. The EnableMapping check box activates on each transaction type.
7. To clear all the Enable Mapping check boxes, click the Disable All button.
8. The GL Transaction Types grid displays information on all the available transaction types. The Display
Name, Revision Code, Revision Status, and EffFromDate (Effective From Date) displays the current state
of the GL transaction type.
9. To activate a specific GL transaction type, select the EnableMapping check box. Different actions occur
depending on whether this check box is selected or clear:
If the EnableMapping check box is selected, the mapping setup for the link replaces the configuration
of the current book in the revision.
If the EnableMapping check box is clear, the reference to the current book is removed from the revision.
10. When the Limited check box is selected on a GL transaction type, it indicates the types transaction document
and posting rules cannot be changed.
11. Click the Update Transaction Types button to complete the updates.
Posting Details
Use the Posting > Detail sheet to link rounding parameters to GL transaction type maps. These parameters control
how rounding differences are automatically handled by the posting engine.
1. Navigate to the Posting > Detail sheet.
2. Enter the Tolerance value you need for the rounding calculation.
3. The Currency field displays the currency symbol for the tolerance value.
4. Click the Account button to find and select the account used to record the rounding differences that occur
during auto balancing.
265
Validations
The Validations sheet defines error handling for journals posted to a specific book. By default, books ignore most
posting errors. You can change the defaults, so the book blocks and logs errors. Define validation rules at the
book level; because of this feature, you control how all issues are handled within a specific book.
To modify the validations for the current book:
1. Navigate to the Validations sheet.
2. The Description field displays the error message that displays when a GL transaction to this book fails to
validate.
3. To change what happens when a validation rule fails, click the Action drop-down list.
4. Select an option. Depending on the validation rule, different actions are available:
Error - This blocks posting of the journal. You can view the journal in the Review Journal.
Ignore - No entry displays in the error log, and the journal posts to the general ledger. This method is
the default setting for most posting errors.
Warning and Autocorrect - This logs a warning in the Review Journal and automatically corrects the
journal using a pre-defined process. For example, the autocorrect process changes the apply date for a
journal posted to a closed period to the current period.
5. When you finish setting up the book, click Save.
Lookup Tables Setup

Use the Lookup Tables Setup program to map database field values to segment and account values. Rules can
use lookup tables to obtain values for any COA segment. You typically use these records to define dynamic
segments.
When you use lookup tables, you reduce the amount of programming needed for a rule to define segment and
account values.
266
For example, you plan to define a rule in GL Transaction Type Maintenance (described later in this chapter) for
a transaction that generates when a sales order record posts. You want to define a rule that pulls the warehouse
ID from which the inventory quantities came from and then define the value of a dynamic segment based on
this ID.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Lookup Table
To create a new lookup table:
2. Enter the Lookup Table identifier and Search Name field you want to use for this lookup table. Use this
value to locate this lookup table later.
3. Optionally, enter a Detailed Description of the lookup table.
4. To map the database fields, click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Source Value
Field.
5. Use the Source Value Fields grid to find and select the table/field you need.
6. Select the DB Table that contains the field you wish to add to the lookup table.
267
7. Select the DB Field you want to add to the lookup table.

8. Follow similar steps to create a target field. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New
Target Value Field.
9. The Target Value Fields sheet displays.

10. Enter the target field details within the Target Value Fields grid.
Lookup Table Links

To add data that links between the tables:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Lookup Link.
2. Enter the database field values for Source Field and Target Field in the corresponding columns.
3. If you want to prevent this value from being changed by other companies, select the GlobalLock check
box. This value is now a static global value.
4. If this value is a global value used in multiple companies, select the GlobalLookupLink check box.
5. Continue to add the links you need. When you finish, click Save.
268
GL Transaction Types
A GL transaction type defines the rules your books use to post accounts and journals. The posting process provides
a unified series of rules which are applied against specific business transactions. You use GL Transaction Type
Maintenance to define the processes that post accounts and journals.
Each posting process runs one or more GL transaction types. Each GL transaction type has a set of elements posting codes, functions, and amounts - specific to its posting process. These elements contain data the posting
rules need to build account and journal details. It also contains a set of rules each book uses, and each rule set
can contain the functions, pre-posting rules, reference rules, and posting rules needed to post business transactions
which match the GL transaction type.
These rules are flexible and can be modified to meet the needs of a specific book. You do this by creating revisions
for each GL transaction type and then modifying its posting rules.
This section describes the main features for GL Transaction
Type Maintenance. For more details about how to use this
program, review the GL Transaction Type topics and the Posting
Engine Technical Reference Guide. This information is available
within application help.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Transaction Type
Select Transaction Type

The application installs with default GL transaction types, and you can select and display each type on the
Accounting Transaction Type sheet. GL transaction types define the posting process for a specific type of financial
activity like inventory, invoices, and bank reconciliation.
Each GL transaction type uses a document template and a set of posting rules to determine how programs post
transactions which match the specific type.
To select a GL transaction type:
1. Navigate to the Accounting Transaction Type sheet.
269
2. Click the Transaction Type button to find and select the GL transaction type you wish to review or modify.
You can access the Posting Engine Log Viewer (PE Log
Viewer) by right-clicking this field. Use this program to
define how you want the current GL transaction type
monitored on the log file. You can then view this log to
review the financial activity.
3. The Description field describes the accounting transaction type.

4. Select the Logging check box to enable logging for the transaction type.
Create a Revision
If you wish to modify a GL transaction type, you need to create a revision. This ensures the installed GL transaction
type is always available in case you need to restore the default posting rules and other items for the transaction
type.
When you use revisions, you can trace the journals created by posting with the different revisions. Create new
revisions so you can model and test changes in the accounting logic you may need in each company.
To create a GL transaction type revision:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Revision.
2. The New Revision window displays.
3. Verify Create new revision by copying existing revision is selected.

4. Verify the SourceRevision is the one you want to copy.
5. Click OK.
270
6. The Revisions > Revision Detail sheet displays.
7. Verify the new revision is selected in the tree view. It will display as the Draft revision.
8. In the Revision ID field, enter a unique identifier for the type revision. This value displays on several application
processes.
9. Enter a Description for the revision.
10. Click the Status drop-down list to define the current state of the revision. Available options:
Draft status indicates the revision is in development.
Active status indicates the revision is in use or is scheduled for use.
Blocked status indicates an expired revision. If you wish, however, you can change this status to Active;
the revision is then available again.
11. The Version and Patch Version fields indicate the version levels at which this revision was created.
12. Select the Manually review all transactions check box to cause the application to log all journal details
generated by this revision. You should only select this option while you test the revisions posting rules.
This option does not affect logging invalid journals. You
define validation options on the Validation sheets in both
GL Transaction Type Maintenance and Book Maintenance.
Incoming Document Line

You use the Incoming Document Line tab to modify the entities, posting codes, BAQs, and amounts defined on
the document template for the current GL transaction type.
To update the incoming document line sheets:
271
1. Click the Revisions > Incoming Document Line > List sheet. This sheet displays all the custom document
lines available in the current GL transaction type.
2. Make a selection from the Reference List grid.

3. Use the sheets under the Entities tab to create and maintain custom entities; these items are collections of
posting codes and default settings. These settings define how elements populate in the posting rule
collections.
272
4. The lines under the Amounts sheet define and maintain custom amount elements. Amount elements
typically hold transaction amounts used with posting rules.
5. The BAQ (Business Activity Query) sheets define selection criteria used to pull data for custom posting codes
and posting rules. A BAQ statement can return a value from a single field in a table or can use values from
several fields to calculate a value. BAQ statements obtain data for posting codes you add to document
templates. The templates provide data custom posting rules use.
Add a Book
You use the Book sheets to determine how journals for this GL transaction type post to a selected book. When
you select a book on this sheet, you can define its posting rules. All rules defined for a single book are a rule set
which generates a complete journal for the book.
To add a book to the current GL transaction type:
273
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Book.
2. Click the Add Book button to find and select the book you want. The Description displays for your review.
3. The Package defines the book type. Available options:

Standard - This type records financial activity of the company and has no relationship to other books.
Consolidation - This type merges balances from several books to create consolidated reports for the
companys subsidiaries.
4. Select the Use Mapping check box to indicate you would like to leverage mapping to duplicate the journal
details created by rules in another book. Activate this feature so you do not need to duplicate posting rules.
5. After you select the Use Mapping check box, the Mapping from drop-down list and other related fields
activate. Use this list to select the book from which the journal details will be copied.
6. Click the Using drop-down list to define the Chart of Accounts map you want to use to transfer the journal
details.
274
7. Click the Transactional Currency drop-down list to indicate what currency you wish to use in the book
mapping. You can use either the Document Currency or the Source Book Currency.
8. Click the Summarize drop-down list to define how journals are summarized when posted to a book.
Available options:
Summarize posts a single journal for an accounts debits and credits.
Summarize debit and credits separately posts one journal that summarizes an accounts debits and
another journal that summarizes an accounts credits.
No Summarization posts journal details to the books accounts.
Use natural account settings applies account-by-account summarization. The Account Segment Values
applies summarization settings for accounts in a COA.
9. Use the sheets under the Booking Rules tab to create, modify, or remove the posting rules defined for the
current book. Posting rules can use data to define journal details. The posting rules determine the details
amount, the account to which it posts, and whether the amount debits or credits the account. To create a
new posting rule, add a rule and select appropriate values to define each modifiable option. Each rule builds
the detail field-by-field.
10. Use the Functions sheets to define reusable functions for the posting rules.
11. Use the Book Variables sheet to maintain variables for the posting rules.
12. When you finish modifying the GL transaction type, click Save.
Daily Balances Setup

Use Daily Balances Setup to maintain the daily balances for tracking and reports for a limited number of accounts.
You can use account masks to specify the COA segment or segments that supply the balances. You apply masks
to books associated with a COA. Each daily balance is selected and applied for a specific book.
Refer to the Chart of Accounts topic in this chapter for
information on selecting the balance options you want for the
account segments. Refer to the Company Configuration
chapter for information on setting up batch balance options
from the Modules > Finance > General Ledger sheet of
Company Configuration.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Daily Balances Setup
To create a daily balance account mask:
275
1. Click the Chart of Accounts drop-down list to select the COA that contains the accounts for which you
want to mask. The program displays books associated with the COA in the folder view.
2. In the Tree View, select the book you want to use for maintaining the daily balances. When you post the
journal and the accounts are part of the specified mask, the corresponding daily balance updates.
3. Click New on the Standard toolbar to create a row in the Account Mask list.
4. In the new row, use the Account Mask field to define a mask that specifies a general ledger account or
accounts which maintain daily balances.
Daily Balances Setup - Copy GL Account Masks

Use the Copy GL Account Masks command from Daily Account Balances Setup to copy masks from one GL book
to another.
1. To use a set of existing masks in a source GL book to copy to another GL book, from the Actions menu,
select Copy GL Masks.
276
2. The Copy GL Accounts Masks window displays.
3. Select a source book from the From Book drop-down list.

4. Select a target book from the To Book drop-down list.
5. Click OK. The masks are copied from the source book to the target book.
Consolidation
Consolidation is a legal process through which you merge the financial results of subsidiary companies into one
consolidated book within the parent company. The process rolls up financial results between source and target
books, typically books from a child, or subsidiary company, to a parent company or an external application. You
run this process at the end of each fiscal period or on a continuous basis and then complete the consolidation
results at the end of each fiscal year.
When consolidation is complete, you can either preview the results in an intermediate (consolidation) book in
the source company or review the final results in the parent company. If you use periodic consolidation, you can
preview the results in an intermediate book; you then later transfer the approved results to the parent company.
Through the consolidation process, you can re-calculate the financial results posted in one currency to another
currency. You can also report these results using a different fiscal calendar and chart of accounts selected on the
parent company book.
You can set up the consolidation process to handle any multi-company structure you need. Consolidations can
be a one-to-one relationship between a source subsidiary book in one company to a parent target book in another
company. You can set up a consolidation routine that consolidates transactions from multiple child companies
into one target parent company. You can also consolidate multiple child, or subsidiary books, into multiple parent
books in different companies. You might do this, for example, when the parent company is also an operational
company and needs to consolidate its results with other entities.
The financial data from the source book is transformed into the account structures defined in the intermediate
book. The chart of accounts structure matches the structure in the target book, so this data can now move from
the intermediate book into the target book within the target company. The intermediate book transforms the
transactions into the currency, fiscal calendar, and accounting structures needed within the target book. You
use the intermediate book to verify the consolidation results before they are posted to the target book.
Details on consolidation operation programs can be found in
the General Ledger chapter in the Epicor ERP Application Guide.
The consolidation sequence:
1. The general ledger transactions post to the source book. These transactions use the posting process defined
for the source book.
277
2. The consolidation process begins transferring balances into the format needed for the intermediate
(consolidation) book. If the intermediate book uses a different currency, the process first converts the amounts
using the exchange rate calculated by the selected consolidated rate type and the consolidation type.
Consolidation Rate Type Maintenance defines the method used to calculate the consolidation rates.
Consolidation Type Maintenance defines the method used to calculate consolidation amounts using the
consolidation rates.
3. The balances are then transformed into the account structure required for the intermediate book.
4. The balances are calculated and adjustment transactions are created within the intermediate book.
5. Using the Multi-Company Direct Server Process (for companies that reside on the same server) or the
Multi-Company Server Process (for companies that reside on different servers), the GL transactions transfer
from the intermediate book in the source company to the target book within the parent target company.
The parent target book is updated with the transactions.
For more information on consolidation, refer to the Multi-Site
Technical Reference Guide within application help.
Consolidation Rate Type Maintenance

Use Consolidation Rate Type Maintenance to define the rate to convert balances when a source book and an
intermediate book use different currencies. You use this program in the source company.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Consolidation Rate Type
To define a consolidation rate type:
2. In the Consolidation Rate Type field, enter a unique identifier for the type. Application processes use the
value in this field.
3. Enter a Description for the type. This value will display in several programs and reports.
4. Select the Default Method used to calculate the exchange rate applied during consolidations. The selected
currency rate type determines the methods which apply to its values. Available options:
Daily Average - Applies an average exchange rate for a consolidated period.
Period End - Uses the exchange rate from the last day of the consolidated period.
None - Uses the exchange rate entered in the Consolidate to Parent Entry program. This program is
discussed later in this section.
278
5. The Currency Rate Type field defines the rate type used for this consolidation rate type. The selected
default method uses the currency rate type conversion rules to calculate the currency amounts for the
intermediate book.
6.
When you finish, click Save.
Consolidation Type Maintenance

Use Consolidation Type Maintenance to determine the method used to calculate account balances during
consolidations and to determine the consolidation rate type applied to the balances. Consolidation types can
also apply against account categories. You set up consolidation types in the source company.
After you configure all needed Consolidation Types, you can assign a consolidation type to a particular account
by specifying it in the account category. Consolidation types assigned to an account category are used in translating
all accounts that belong to that category. If a consolidation type is not specified for an account category, the
consolidation process uses the default consolidation type specified in the Consolidation Definition program.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Consolidation Type
To create a consolidation type:
2. In the Type field, enter a unique identifier for the type. This value will display on several programs and
reports.
3. Enter a Description for the type. This value will display in several programs and reports.
4. Click the Calculation Type drop-down list to select the method used to calculate account balances during
consolidations.
Balance - Uses year-to-date amounts to determine account balances. As a result, prior-period adjustments
affect account balances which use this type. This calculation type typically applies to monetary
balance-sheet accounts.
Period Movements - Uses period amounts to determine account balances. This type of calculation
typically applies to non-monetary balance-sheet accounts and income-statement accounts.
279
5. Click the Consolidation Rate Type drop-down list to select the consolidation rate type used to calculate
the exchange rate applied to account balances.
Epicor recommends the following consolidation type
settings:
Income Statement Accounts should use a Period
Movement calculation type and a Daily Average rate
type.
Balance Sheet Accounts (monetary assets) should use
a Balance calculation type and a Period-End rate type.
Balance Sheet Accounts (non-monetary assets) should
use a Period Movement calculation type and a Daily
Average or Period End rate type. (This group of
accounts includes Retained Earnings accounts.)
Consolidation Definition Maintenance

Use Consolidation Definition Maintenance to define settings that control the consolidation between source and
target books. These settings include the default values for converting amounts into the target book currency,
converting the chart of accounts structure, the consolidation mode, and definition of the consolidation target.
Each consolidation definition defines a target book and one or more source books from which the consolidation
journals originate. You enter consolidation definitions in the source company.
Consolidations can occur continuously or periodically. Continuous consolidations occur between two standard
type books. Before the consolidation process begins in continuous consolidation, all the transformations are run
in the source book using the rules defined within the posting engine. In periodic consolidations, journals post
from a source book to a target book via an intermediate book, a consolidation-type book.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Consolidation Definition
Consolidation Definition Maintenance - Detail

Use periodic consolidation to post the financial results to the intermediate book.
To define a periodic consolidation:
280
2. In the Consolidation ID field, enter a unique identifier for the consolidation. This value will display in several
programs and reports.
3. Enter a Description for the consolidate record. This value will display in several programs.
4. Click the Consolidation Type drop-down list to select Periodic. Periodic consolidations usually occur at
the end of each fiscal period.
5. Select the Immediate Transaction check box to define the consolidation as a single process. When you
select this check box, you consolidate journals simultaneously, posting to both the intermediate book and
the target book.
6. In the Intermediate Book Options pane, click the Book drop-down list to select the intermediate book
for the consolidation. You use consolidation-type books for this purpose.
7. If you need to transfer the results to a different Company, select the company that owns the book from
this drop-down list.
8. Now select the Book to which the consolidated journals post. Only books available in the selected company
display on this drop-down list.
9. Use settings in the Remote Options pane to post the consolidation results to an output file.
10. Select the Remote Parent check box if the consolidation process generates an output file. This file could
be used to post the journals to the book in a different ERP system.
11. If the consolidation targets another Epicor application database, select the Epicor Database check box.
You can use the Import Consolidation From Subsidiary program to import consolidation files. This
program is discussed later in this section.
281
12. Click the Output File button to find and select the path and name of the file to which the consolidation
journals post. The consolidation process creates a flat file in ASCII format that is used to transfer journals to
a remote parent.
Consolidation Definition Maintenance Source Detail

You use the Source Detail sheet to define defaults for the source book or books. The consolidation mode you
select determines how much setup is required on the Source Detail sheet. You use periodic consolidation to post
journals from one more multiple source books to an intermediate book. You use continuous consolidation to
post journals from one or more source books to a target book. A continuous consolidation does not use an
intermediate book; instead, conversions are run within source books using rules defined within the posting
engine. These source books then contain the required converted balances and account structures; you select
these books as the sources on the definition.
To define defaults for a source book:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Source Book Definition.
2. Click the Source Book drop-down list to select the book used as the source for consolidation journals.
Values in this field are limited to standard books used by the source company.
3. If the chart of accounts in the source and intermediate/ target books is different, click the COA Map ID
drop-down list to select a map that converts accounts in the source book to an intermediate/target book.
Be sure to select a map that will convert the source GL accounts into the structured required on the
Intermediate/Target GL accounts. If the target and source books have the same COA, however, leave this
field blank.
4. If you need, select the Exclude Open Periods check box to filter open periods in consolidations that use
the source book. This option limits the consolidation to closed periods.
282
5. In the Closing Periods field, enter the number of the last closing period available for consolidation. If you
enter a zero (0) value, you cannot consolidate closing periods separately.
6. Optionally, select the Reverse Debit / Credit check box to reverse debit and credit entries on journals
created from the source book. This option effectively reverses source book entries in the target book.
7. Click the Intermediate Journal and Target Journal drop-down lists to respectively select the journal codes
used to group consolidation journals posted to an intermediate and target book. Intermediate journals apply
only to consolidations that run in periodic mode.
8. Click the Balance Sheet and Income Statement drop-down lists to respectively select the default
consolidation type applied to the source books balance-sheet and income-statement accounts.
These default options can be overridden by consolidation
types defined in COA Category Maintenance.
9. Click the Diff Exchange Account drop-down list to select a Difference on Exchange account for the source
book. In some cases, different consolidation rate types are applied to different accounts. Because of this,
the consolidation journal may be out of balance. The Difference on Exchange account records this out of
balance amount.
Financial Report Designer

Financial Report Designer (FRD) allows you to create custom financial reports for your company. You can set up
a report, select the data and accounts that will display on the report, define the report layout, and select the
report format. FRD creates report files in an .xml format.
The financial reports are defined based on report details, rows, and columns. Each report you create may be as
simple or as complex as necessary. You can use the Report Wizard to create the basic framework for your report
and then you can provide the specific data and accounts to display on the report. Use the Report Wizard to
quickly create a standard income statement or balance sheet. Use of the Report Wizard is not mandatory. Refer
to application help for more detailed information on the Financial Report Designer.
Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Financial Report Designer
To create a report using the Report Wizard:
283
1. Click the New on the Standard toolbar.
2. In the Report ID field, enter a unique identifier for this report.

3. Enter the Description for the report. This value displays on various drop-down lists throughout the application.
4. Click the Book drop-down list to select the book for which you want to create a report. The associated
COA displays in the COA field.
5. Click the Balance Level drop-down list to select the level of balance you want for your report. Available
options: Detailed Balance Account, Summary Balance Account, or Natural Account.
6. Click the Balance Frequency drop-down list to select either Period Balances or Daily Balances.
7. Click Save.
8. From the Actions menu, select Report Wizard.
284
9. The Financial Report Wizard window displays.
10. Select either Income Statement or Balance Sheet, depending on the report you want.
11. Click OK.
12. The rows and columns based on your accounts display under the Specification sheets.
13. Navigate to the Specification > Columns > List sheet.

14. Make any necessary column changes you would like for your report in the Columns grid.
15. Click Save.
285
16. Navigate to the Specification > Syntax Check sheet to perform a syntax check of your report.
17. Select a report type. Available options: Income Statement, Balance Sheet, or Other.
18. Click the Syntax Check button.
19. Report errors display in the Syntax Error Report grid. Refer to application help for information to correct
any errors that display.
286
Legal Numbers | Chapter 8
Chapter 8: Legal Numbers

Some countries require you use legal numbers with company transactions. Legal numbers improve tracking and auditing
because they make sure business documents and transactions have unique sequential numbers. For example, you can
indicate within Company Configuration that legal numbers are required on all customer printed invoice and credit
documents. Legal numbers have two categories:
Legal document numbers - These numbers are assigned to external documents like packing slips, sales invoices,
and credit memos. The number assignment occurs when the documents are posted or printed.
Legal transaction numbers - These numbers are assigned when documents are created that do not require printing,
for example, manual journals and cash receipts.
You use Legal Number Maintenance to define the prefixes, formats, masks, sequences, and legal text. You then use
Document Type Maintenance to link number sequences to specific document types.
If your Epicor application is integrated with another financial application, legal numbers can also be generated through
this external system and then returned to the Epicor application. You may then view the legal number through various
tracking programs.
Transaction Document Types

Use Transaction Document Type Maintenance to define the kinds of documents assigned to legal number
sequences. The types link a transaction with a particular legal number.
Examples of system document types include AP Invoices, Promissory Notes, Petty Cash transactions, and
Withholding Taxes. Most of the system types support legal document numbers applied to internal transactions.
Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Transaction Document Type
Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Transaction Document Type
Financial Management > Cash Management > Setup > Transaction Document Type
Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Transaction Document Type
To create a new document type:
2. In the Document Type field, enter the document type you need. This value displays within Legal Number
Maintenance and in several places with entered documents, specifying document types for particular
documents.
287
Chapter 8 | Legal Numbers
3. In the Description field, enter a concise explanation of the document type.

4. From the System Transaction drop-down list, select the transaction type you need. For example,
AR Invoices
Credit Memos
Payment Instrument AP
Payment Instrument AR
5. If you want this document type to be the default option, select the Default for System Transaction check
box. This transaction document type becomes the default for this transaction. However, you can create
other document types for this transaction.
6. Select the Red Storno check box if this document type uses reverse entry transactions. This functionality is
used for transactions within Russia and other localities that have this financial requirement (to create negative
debit and negative credit entries); this feature is sometimes called negative posting.
7. Certain localities, such as Romania, require that authorized users be assigned to transaction document types
specifically AR Invoices and Credit Memos types. You can then track who created these transactions in
the database. To do this, click the Authorized Users sheet.
8. Clear the All Users check box.

You cannot clear this check box if the document type is
the default option for this transaction; this occurs when
its Default for System Transaction check box is selected
on the Detail sheet. If you need authorized users, either
clear this check box or create a new document type.
9. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Authorized User.
10. From the User ID drop-down list, select the user you need. Each user is considered a Default user, so this
check box is automatically selected.
11. Continue to add the authorized users you need. When you finish, click Save.
288
Legal Numbers
Use Legal Number Maintenance to configure legal number sequences and associate the sequences with document
types. You can then associate these numbers with internal transactions and external documents.
You can define multiple legal numbers for the same transaction type. For example, you can use a legal number
formatted INV-2007-000001 with a national AR invoice and AR0000001 with an exported invoice.
Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Legal Number
Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Legal Number
Financial Management > Cash Management > Setup > Legal Number
Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Legal Number
To create a new legal number sequence:
2. In the Legal Number field, enter the legal number identifier you use to locate the legal number sequence.
3. In the Description field, enter a concise explanation of the legal number purpose.
4. From the Number Type drop-down list, select the system transaction the Legal Number is linked to. Specific
Transaction Document Types will be defined later, review the Document Types section below.
5. Use the fields in the Generation Type section to define how the legal number is generated. You can select
either an Automatic or Manual generation type. You can also select the Generate SSCC check box to
indicate a Serial Shipping Container Code number should also be generated for this legal number. For more
289
information about how to use SSCC numbers, review the Shipping and Receiving chapter in the Epicor
6. Leverage the fields available within the Prefix Type section to define how the prefixes generate for this
legal number. You can create user-defined or journal code prefixes. If you select the journal code type, you
must select the journal you need from the Journal Code drop-down list.
7. Select the Display Number After Generation check box if you want the legal number to display to the
user after generation.
8. Select the Use Pre-numbered Formats check box if you want to print the transaction and the legal number
using an installed numbering format. This check box is available when you select Automatic from the
Generation Type drop-down list.
9. Select the Allow Prefixes By sites check box to indicate you want sequences assigned by sites codes.
10. Select the Allow Prefixes by Warehouse check box to indicate you want sequences assigned by warehouses.
11. Select the Allow Prefixes by Users check box to indicate you want sequences assigned by users.
12. Select the Allow change after printed check box to indicate documents can be changed after printed
with an assigned Legal Number. If this check box is clear, you cannot change the document once is printed,
your only options is to void the Legal Number, change the document, and assign a new Legal Number.
13. Use the Detail Lines in Format field to define the number of lines that can be printed using a pre-numbered
format. This field is active when the Use Pre-numbered Formats check box is selected.
14. Enter the Sequence Length to define the length of the sequence number. Valid entries are 1-10.
15. Select the Overrideable Prefix check box to indicate the user can change the prefix on the legal number.
This check box is available if the Type field is set to the Manual option. When you activate the Overrideable
Prefix check box, you can create alternate prefixes and alternate prefix sequences for this legal number. This
functionality is explored in the Alternate Prefixes and Sequences section later in this chapter.
16. Use the Number Option drop-down list to define how numbers generate for this legal number method.
This check box is available if the Type field is set to the Manual option. Available options:
Sequence entered manually The user must directly enter the number.
Sequence system generated The Epicor application automatically generates a number.
17. Enter the Separator Symbol used to divide sequences within the legal numbers.
18. Select a Calendar to define the fiscal calendar for this legal number.
19. Click Save.
Default Sequences
Default sequences define the typical sequences through which the current legal number generates. You can set
up these sequences for each fiscal year, or for each period in the fiscal year. You can also indicate when this
default sequence is no longer available.
To add a default sequence:
290
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Default Sequence.
2. A new row appears on the Default Sequences grid.

3. Enter the Transaction Year and fiscal Period (optional) during which you want this default legal number
sequence to be used.
4. If you need, define the Start Sequence and End Sequence for the current legal number. These values
determine the first and last numbers available for this sequence.
5. In the Available field, enter the number of pre-printed forms are present to use with this default sequence.
6. When this default sequence should no longer be used, select the Inactive check box.
Alternate Prefixes and Sequences

You can create alternate prefixes and sequences for the current legal number. You can add alternate options on
the Alternate Prefix sheet when the Overrideable Prefix, Allow Prefixes by Site, Allow Prefixes by Warehouse, or
291
Allow Prefixes by Users check boxes are selected. Users then select these alternate legal number options as
needed.
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Alternate Prefix.
2. A new row displays on the Alternate Prefixes grid.

3. Enter the Sequence Prefix.
4. If the Allow Prefixes by Site check box is selected, you can select the Site where you want to use the
alternate prefix; all sites available in the current company display on this list. You can do the same with
Warehouse and Users, if respective check boxes are selected.
5. Define the Number Option for the alternate prefix. Available options:
Sequence entered manually The user must directly enter the number.
Sequence system generated The Epicor application automatically generates a number.
292
6. You next define the alternate sequences to use with each alternate prefix. You can create as many sequences
as you need. Select an alternate sequence. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New
Alternate Sequence.
7. A new row appears on the Alternate Prefix Sequences grid.

8. Enter the Transaction Year and fiscal Period during which you want this alternate legal number sequence
to be used.
9. If you need, define the Start Sequence and End Sequence for the current legal number. These values
determine the first and last numbers available for this alternate sequence.
10. Continue to define the alternate sequence; the remaining columns are identical to the columns on the
Default Sequences grid on the Default sheet. When you finish adding alternate sequences, click Save.
Document Types
Use the Document Type sheet to link the legal number with selected transaction document types. You can
associate multiple sequences with the document types selected in Customer Maintenance and AR Invoice Entry.
The available document types must not be assigned to another legal number. They must also be both active and
restricted to the legal numbers system transaction.
To link a transaction document type to a legal number:
293
1. Click the Document Type sheet.
2. From the Available Document Type list, select the transaction document type.
If you want to move a transaction type from the Assigned Document Type list to the Available Document
type, use the Left Arrow.
4. The transaction document type will display on the Assigned Document Type list.
5. Continue to add the transaction document types you need. When you finish, click Save.
294
Global Tax Engine | Chapter 9
Chapter 9: Global Tax Engine

Use the Global Tax Engine to define tax codes, tax rates, timing of liability, and custom tax algorithms. This functionality
is flexible; you can define tax parameters for nearly every country in which you do business.
The Global Tax Engine supports three methods of tax collection:
Invoicing The supplier includes tax amounts on invoices and remits the taxes to authorities when payment is
received. Invoices normally include separate line items for taxes, but you can also include tax line amounts, as in
VAT.
Withholding The purchaser withholds a portion of the invoiced amount in order to pay the suppliers tax liability.
Income taxes are normally collected by withholding.
Self-assessment (reversed charge) The taxpayer calculates the taxes owed on relevant transactions and reports
the tax to the tax authorities. Self-assessments can create single tax transactions or dual (input and output) tax
transactions.
This chapter describes the programs you use to set up the global tax engine.
Cents Override
Use Cents Override Maintenance if you need to change the normal rounding values to define the tax required
on the decimal portion of an amount. These definitions use the number of decimals defined for the base currency
of the company. Cents overrides apply to the effective rates defined in Tax Type Maintenance. This program is
explained later in this chapter.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Cents Override
To create a cents override record:
2. In the Code field, enter the code identifier for the cents override record.
3. Enter a Description for the code identifier.
295
Chapter 9 | Global Tax Engine
4. You enter cents override values between .00 and .99. To create a new cents override detail line, click the
Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Cent Line.
5. Enter the monetary range you need in the Cents From and Cents To fields.
6. Enter the Tax Amount you need for this cents range.
7. Continue to add more detail lines as you need. When you finish, click Save.
Tax Report Categories

Use Tax Report Category Maintenance to define categories you can then select on tax types. Tax categories are
optional parameters you may use for filtering or grouping on VAT tax reports. VAT is a consumption tax assessed
on the value added to goods and services sold in the European Union.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Tax Report Category
To create a new tax report category:
2. In the Report Category field, enter the code identifier for the tax report category.
3. Enter a Description for this tax report category.
296
Legal Text
Use Legal Text Maintenance to create default text that explains the taxes that display on external documents.
The text that displays on a specific document is defined through the tax type used to calculate the tax.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Legal Text
To create new legal text:
2. In the Legal Text Code field, enter the code identifier for the legal text record.
3. Enter a Description for the legal text.
4. You are now ready to enter the legal text for this record. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button;
select New Tax Text Detail.
5. Use the Language drop-down list to define the language used for the legal text.
You can install several languages within your application.
For more information on installing languages, review the
Localization chapter within the Epicor ICE User Experience
and Customization Guide.
6. If you want this text to be the first value that appears when this legal text record is selected, select the
Default check box.
297
7. Enter the Legal Text you need.

8. Repeat these steps to add more legal text to the record. When you finish, click Save.
Tax Jurisdictions
Tax jurisdictions are the governance or authority that grants the power to tax a particular tax type. Optionally
use Tax Jurisdiction Maintenance to define an authority to which you report the taxes. You link jurisdictions to
tax types. You must associate each jurisdiction you define with at least one tax type in Tax Type Maintenance.
They may be used as a filter on VAT Tax reporting.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Tax Jurisdiction
To create a new tax jurisdiction:
2. In the Code field, enter the code identifier for the tax jurisdiction.
3. Enter a Description that identifies this tax jurisdiction within Tax Type Maintenance. Counties, Districts,
and Cities are some examples of jurisdictions. This program is explained later in this chapter.
4. In the Tax field, enter the tax linked to the jurisdiction.
5. Click Save.
Tax Boxes
Optionally use Tax Box Maintenance to define tax boxes (the reporting values on tax returns, usually referenced
with a number); these records are used to report taxes to authorities. Tax boxes can be used with VAT tax
statements, Australian BAS statements, and tax documents sent to employees in the United States. Each tax box
defines default values you associate with rate codes in Tax Type Maintenance. You can also define the XML
element that contains tax box data transmitted electronically to taxing authorities.
The values you enter through this program are the default for the tax box selected on the rate code. However,
you can override these values on a specific rate code or add multiple records to a single rate code.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Tax Box
To create a new tax box:
298
2. In the Tax Box field, enter a value for this tax box. This value identifies the tax box in application processing.
When you link a tax box to a rate code, the values defined in the tax box record are used with the rate code.
For more information, review the Tax Types section later in the chapter.
3. Enter a Description for the tax box. This description will display in several programs and reports.
4. In the XML Tag field, enter the .xml element that contains tax box data. This setting applies when the
statement on which the tax box appears is transmitted to authorities electronically. For example, the Sales
Tax Report and Sales List Report can use electronic interfaces for tax reporting.
5. Enter any additional information you need for this tax box in the Comment field. Typically this field contains
a longer description of how the code is applied and reported.
6. Now select a Source Module from the drop-down list. A required field, this option defines the record type
used for the origin of the tax box information. Available options:
A/R Invoice
A/P Invoice
A/R Credit Memo
A/P Debit Memo
7. Click the Line drop-down list to specify the acquisition sequence for the selected tax box. Available options:
Primary/Standard These lines are created if typical charges apply to the tax box.
Secondary/Reversing These lines are created if EU acquisition or reverse charges apply to the tax box
8. Next click the Amount Type drop-down list to specify the type of amount used with this tax box. Available
options:
Taxable Amount This tax box is used to hold the taxable amount on the transaction. This value is the
total amount on the transaction that can be taxed, excluding tax.
299
Tax Amount This tax box is used to hold just the tax amount on the transaction. This value is the total
tax levied against the transaction.
9. Use the Box Sign drop-down list to specify the positive or negative value on the tax box. A required field,
select either the + or option. Note that the system internally holds AR invoices with the implied negative
sign to indicate that output tax is payable. If you are not sure the selected box sign will generate the results
you want, verify your tax box settings, test your settings in a test environment.
Custom Tax Algorithms

Use Custom Tax Algorithm Maintenance to define the base value you use for tax calculations and the actual
algorithm. The standard tax algorithm multiplies the net amount, after discount amounts are subtracted, by the
applicable tax rate. Leverage this program to handle different calculations, such as taxes that directly affect other
taxes. You link custom algorithms with tax types.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Custom Tax Algorithm
To create a new custom tax algorithm:
2. In the Algorithm field, enter the algorithm identifier for this custom tax.
3. Enter a Description for this custom tax algorithm.
300
4. You can now create the algorithm. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Line.
5. The Line > Detail sheet displays.

6. Select the first operand you need from the Operand 1 drop-down list. Available options:
NV Net value (price after discount excluding taxes).
GV Gross value (all calculated taxes are included).
SV Sales value (before discount, excluding taxes).
SV Sales value (before discount, excluding taxes).
TA Tax amount before exemptions, tax type is defined in operand 3.
TE Tax amount after exemptions, tax type is defined in operand 3.
Lxx Result of expression in line xx.
PT Payment total amount.
PI Payment proportional amount. The paid amount is proportionally split to the underlying invoice lines.
The tax is calculated based on those tax categories.
n Numeric constant.
7. Click the Operator drop-down list to define the Operator you want to use to calculate this detail line.
Available options:
+ Add operand 1 and operand 2.
* Multiply operand 1 with operand 2.
/ Divide operand 1 with operand 2.
- Subtract operand 2 from operand 1.
% Calculate operand 2 as a percentage value of operand 1.
> Logical expression: If operand 1 is greater than operand 2, the line value is defined by operand 3, else
by operand 4. This operator is disabled if operand 1 or 2 is TA or TE.
< Logical expression: If operand 1 is less than operand 2, the line value is defined by operand 3, else by
operand 4. This operator is disabled if operand 1 or 2 is TA or TE.
= The expression result is equal to operand 1.
TR Calculate tax rate as defined by tax liability and product tax category.
301
8. Select the second operand you need from the Operand 2 drop-down list. These options are the same as
those on the Operand 1 drop-down list.
9. If the value of Operand 1 is not TE or TA and the Operator value is > or <, the Operand 3 drop-down list
is available. These options are the same as those on the Operand 1 drop-down list.
10. If the Operator value is > or <, the Operand 4 drop-down list is available. These options are the same as
those on the Operand 1 drop-down list.
11. If the Operand 1 value is TE or TA, you can select a sales tax code from the Operand 3 Tax drop-down list.
12. If the Operand 2 value is TE or TA, you can select a sales tax code from the Operand 4 Tax drop-down list.
13. If the Base Line check box is selected, it indicates this algorithm will be used as the taxable base amount;
if the Tax Line check box is selected, it indicates this algorithm will be used as the tax amount.
14. Continue to add the algorithm detail lines you need. When you finish, click Save.
Tax Types
Use Tax Type Maintenance to specify different tax types and tax rate codes for use in sales and purchases. Tax
types define the algorithm used to calculate taxes, collection method, time of recognition, tax rates, accounting
information, and other tax attributes. You first create tax codes. Tax codes each have a rate value the application
uses to calculate the tax amounts. These tax codes are later grouped under a tax liability. The tax types you enter
vary based on the localities with whom you conduct business. Refer to the Country Specific Functionality topics
in the application help for information on the tax types you set up in different countries.
For example, the Value Added Tax, or VAT, is a consumption tax assessed on the value added to goods and
services sold in the European Union locality. Any goods imported into the European Union are subject to VAT,
while goods sold outside the European Union are not subject to VAT. So a company in Great Britain has two
domestic VAT rates - an exempt rate of 0% and a standard rate of 17.5%. You must create two tax codes and
later add these tax codes to the Domestic tax region.
Another type of tax is Use Tax. Levied in the United States locality, this internal corporate tax is self-assessed
when a product is purchased by a resident of the state that issues the tax. It does not affect the invoice total,
but it does affect the general ledger. Use tax is strictly to account for storage and consumption of goods used
internally by the company in a specific state (not for resale).
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Tax Type
Create a Tax Type

To create a new tax type:
302
2. In the Tax ID field, enter the tax ID for this tax type.
3. Enter a Description for the tax type.
4. Click the Collection Method drop-down list to define the method to collect this type of tax. Available
methods:
Invoicing The tax amount is added to the amount shown on the invoice and is collected by the supplier,
as part of the total invoice value. The supplier collects and pays the taxes to the authorities. The tax
amount is usually separately specified on the invoice, and if needed, it can be included in the amount
charged for the item.
Withholding The purchaser is required to withhold a portion of the amount invoiced and pay this to
the authorities. These types of taxes are collected and paid by the purchaser on behalf of his suppliers
tax liability.
Self-Assessment The tax payer must calculate the tax amount due on relevant transactions (sometimes
called reversed charge).This tax can apply on purchases, such as European Union (EU) purchases where
the purchaser must report VAT amounts.
303
Self-Assessment, dual entry The tax payer must create both input and output tax transactions. This
method is used for EU acquisition purchases. Since this covers both sides, the net tax value on the invoice
is zero.
5. Use the Tax Timing drop-down list to define when and how taxes are calculated and posted as committed
tax transactions. The available options are Invoice, Partial Payment, and Fully Paid. You use the Tax Timing
parameter together with the collection method.
6. Use the Custom Algorithm drop-down list to select a user-defined algorithm you defined within Custom
Tax Algorithm Maintenance. For more information, review the previous Custom Tax Algorithms section.
7. Click the Payment Discount Treatment drop-down list to define how a tax is calculated when an early
payment discount is given. Available options:
Does Not Affect Tax - This value is the default.
Payment Discount Reduces Tax - Tax is adjusted if the payment discount is taken against the amount
as a separate adjustment record at the time of recording the payment.
Terms Discount Reduces Tax - Tax and tax base are adjusted by the possible settlement discount when
the invoice is created. This method is used in Unighted Kingdom and Ireland when settlement discount
is part of your normal terms of trade.
8. Select the Tax Jurisdiction you need linked to this tax type. You create these records within Tax Jurisdiction
Maintenance; review this previous section for more information. You can use tax jurisdictions as selection
criteria when printing tax reports.
9. Use the Report Category drop-down list to select the tax report category you want to associate with this
tax type if required. You create these records within Tax Report Category Maintenance; review this previous
section for more information.
10. Select the Legal Text you wish to use with this tax type if applicable. You create these records within Legal
Text Maintenance; review this previous section for more information.
11. To activate Epicor Tax Connect, select the Tax Connect Calculation check box. This tax service can help
you calculate your taxes automatically. Contact your Epicor account manager for more information on this
time-saving application.
304
12. Select the Manual Tax Calculation check box to indicate this sales tax is manually calculated and entered.
13. When you select the Round Down Tax check box, you indicate that all tax amounts calculated through
this tax type are automatically rounded down to the nearest value.
14. If you select the Advanced Billing check box, you indicate this tax is charged on an advanced billing line.
Rates
You use the Rates sheets to enter rate code information for the current tax type. When you create a rate code,
you then further define its effective rates, tax exemption options, tax boxes, and GL controls.
Enter Rate Codes

To create a new rate code:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Rate.
2. In the Rate Code field, enter the code identifier for the new rate. This code is used together with the tax
type to identify the rate within other financial programs, reports, and trackers.
3. Enter a Description for the rate code.
4. Click the Legal Text drop-down list to define the text that explains this tax type and rate code on external
documents. You enter the legal text options you need within Legal Text Maintenance; this program is
described earlier in this chapter.
5. Select the Default Rate check box if this rate code is the default rate used with this tax type. However, you
can override this rate through a product tax category; review the Product Tax Categories section later in this
chapter for more information.
Define Effective Rates

Use the Effective Rate sheets to define the active rates available for the current rate code.
To create an effective rate:
305
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Effective Rate.
2. Select the Effective From date you need. This value is the date from which this rate is used when the
application calculates taxes.
3. Click the Rate Type drop-down list to select what kind of rate you are creating. Available options:
Percentage (default)
Fixed Value
Graduated Rates
4. In the Percentage field, enter the tax percentage. This value is multiplied against taxable line items to
calculate tax results. If the rate type is selected to Fixed Value or Graduated Rates, this field is not available.
5. If the selected rate type is Fixed Value, enter the specific amount for this effective rate in this field. This set
amount is used to calculate taxes.
6. If you need, enter the AP Deductible %. This field defines what percentage of the tax is deductible; this
calculation is used in countries where taxes on purchases are not levied either fully or partially. The
non-deductible amount is treated as a cost and expensed to a non-recoverable tax account.
7. Use the Currency drop-down list to define the currency this effective rate uses. The fixed tax amount and
any graduated rates are calculated using this currency.
Normally these values are always calculated in the base
currency. However if the invoice for which these taxes are
calculated is in another currency, the application
recalculates the amounts by converting the source
currency into amounts for the selected target currency
on this tax type record.
8. If you need, enter a Minimum Tax Amount. This field specifies the lowest tax amount charged through
this effective rate. If the calculated tax amount is less than this amount, no tax is charged. You indicate
whether this amount is calculated at the line or document level using the Compare At options.
9. Likewise, you can enter a Maximum Tax Amount. This field specifies the highest tax amount charged
through this effective rate. If the calculated amount is higher, the amount charge reverts to this Maximum
Tax Amount. You indicate whether this amount is calculated at the line or document level using the Compare
At options.
306
10. Now select the Cents Override option you wish to use with this effective rate. This value defines the tax
required on the decimal portion of an amount. You create these options using Cents Override Maintenance;
review this previous section for more information.
11. Use the Compare At radio button options to indicate at what level within the taxes are calculated. Available
options:
Document Level Rates are calculated at the main document level (sales order, purchase order).
Line Level Rates are calculated at the detail line level.
12. If the Rate Type is set to the Graduated Rates option, you can enter a series of rates on the Graduated
Rates sheets. You do this by clicking the Down Arrow next to the New button and selecting New
Graduated Rate.
Specify Exemptions
Use the Exempt sheet to specify products exempt from a tax type and rate. The exemption can be either partial
or full.
To add an exempt category:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Exempt Category.
2. Click the Category ID drop-down list to select a product tax category exempt from this tax type and rate.
When a user adds a line to an invoice, the application verifies whether the product tax category on the detail
line is exempt for the selected tax type and rate.
3. Select the Reportable check box to indicate that sales for this tax category must still be reported to the tax
jurisdiction as gross receipts.
4. Click the Exemption drop-down list to define how the exemption is calculated. Available options:
Reduced Base (default) The taxable base amount is reduced with the percentage given for the
exemption.
Reduced Rate The tax percentage derived for the tax type is reduced with the percentage given for
the tax type.
Fully Exempt The tax is fully exempt and will not be reported. No tax is calculated and no tax
transactions are created for the tax type. The global tax engine ignores the tax.
307
5. Enter the exemption percentage in the Percent field. If this item is a full exemption but you still need to
report the amount, select either Reduced Base or Reduced Rate and enter 100%. If this category is Fully
Exempt, this percentage is 100% by default and you cannot change the value in this column.
Add Tax Boxes

Use the Tax Box sheets to link the current rate with tax boxes, the items used to report taxes to authorities. Tax
boxes can be defined for VAT tax statements, Australian BAS statements, and tax documents sent to employees
in the United States.
You create tax boxes with Tax Box Maintenance. Review the previous Tax Boxes section for more information.
Multiple tax box entries can be recorded against a single rate; for example, a box recording the gross tax-inclusive
price will have two records, one adding the taxable value and a separate entry to add the tax.
To add a tax box to a rate code:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Tax Box.
2. Click the Box Code button to find and select the tax box you need.
3. Select a Source Module from the drop-down list. A required field, this option defines the record type used
for the origin of the tax box information. Available options:
A/R Invoice
A/P Invoice
A/R Credit Memo
A/P Debit Memo
4. Click the Line drop-down list to specify the acquisition sequence for the selected tax box. Available options:
Primary/Standard These lines are created if typical charges apply to the tax box.
Secondary/Reversing These lines are created if EU acquisition or reverse charges apply.
308
5. Click the Amount Type drop-down list to specify the type of amount used with this tax box. Available
options:
Taxable Amount - This tax box is used to hold the entire taxable amount on the transaction. This value
is the total amount on the transaction that can be taxed.
Tax Amount - This tax box is used to hold just the tax amount on the transaction. This value is the total
tax levied against the transaction.
6. Use the Box Sign drop-down list to specify the positive or negative value on the tax box. A required field,
select either the + or option.
7. The Description field displays the concise explanation for the tax box code.
Add GL Controls
GL Control Types group contexts and entities together that define GL controls. A GL control then uses the account
contexts and journal contexts from the control type to generate the specific accounts needed to record financial
transactions. Use the GL Control sheets to assign one or multiple GL control types and GL controls to the current
rate code.
To add a GL control:
2. Click the Type button to find and select the GL Control Type you want to associate with the current rate
code.
3. Click the Control button to find and select the GL Control available within the selected GL Control Type.
4. When you finish entering the rate information, click Save.
309
International Descriptions
You can further define the tax type by entering some information on how this tax type is used internationally.
1. Click the Description tab to enter an explanation for the tax type in another language. These foreign
language descriptions display when a different language is selected for display in the application.
2. Click the Language drop-down list to select the specific language you wish to use for the description.
3. Enter the alternate language Description you need.
4. Click Save.
European Union Data

Use the European Union Data sheet to define information relevant to European Union regulations.
1. Click the Reverse Tax Report Category drop-down list to select the tax category you need. Tax categories
are optional parameters you can use for filtering or grouping VAT tax reports. For more information, review
the previous Tax Categories section.
2. Enter the Direct indicator you use to identify direct sales.

3. Likewise, enter the Triangulation indicator you use to identify any triangulated sales.
310
Product Tax Categories

Use Product Tax Category Maintenance to define categories used to create exemptions for a tax rate. Leverage
these category records to apply exemptions throughout the application. Product tax categories and tax liabilities
together determine the taxes and tax rates applied to company transactions.
Categories can also set a default tax rate for a type of product or service. This setting overrides the default rate
set for the tax type that contains the rate. You create rate codes in Tax Type Maintenance, but you can override
these values in this program.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Tax Product Category
To create a new product tax category:
2. In the Category field, enter a category identifier for this record. You will use this record to find the category
in other programs.
3. Enter a Description that explains the purpose of this product tax category.
4. Select the Default check box if you want to identify this product tax category as the default option. This
option then automatically displays on all Product Tax Category drop-down lists throughout the application.
5. Select the Internal Usage Taxable check box to indicate parts that use this tax category are subject to use
tax. This type of tax is levied in the United States.
This internal corporate tax is self-assessed when a product is purchased by a resident of the state that issues
the tax. It does not affect the invoice total, but it does affect the general ledger. Use tax strictly accounts
for storage and consumption of goods used internally by the company in a specific state (not for resale).
You can automatically generate use tax amounts through
the Avalara (Tax Connect) functionality. Use tax
automatically generates whenever sales taxes are
calculated through Avalara. After you define the use taxes
that apply for your company, Avalara automatically
generates the use tax amounts.
6. If you want to prevent this product tax from generating Intrastat transactions, select the Exclude from
Intrastat check box. For example, you select this check box to indicate this product tax is used for services.
Intrastat transactions are then not generated for this tax.
311
7. You are ready to add tax rates. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Tax Rate.
8. Use the Tax Type field to indicate the tax type record you want to link to the product tax category if you
need to over-ride the default tax rate defined on the tax type. You create tax types in Tax Type Maintenance;
review this previous section for more information.
9. Select the Rate Code you want to link to the tax type. The rate codes available for the selected tax type
display on this drop-down list; this code defines the rate used for the selected product category instead of
the default tax type rate.
10. Continue to add the tax rates you need. When you finish, click Save.
Tax Liabilities
Use Tax Liability Maintenance to define the taxes the company needs to calculate from customers and suppliers.
The tax liability is the region or locality that will receive a tax amount from this invoice. This can be taxes liable
due to either your companys tax status or the tax status of the customer or supplier.
Use Customer Maintenance or Supplier Maintenance to attach a default tax liability code to the customer or
supplier bill to and ship to addresses. The tax liability and the product tax category (which represents what has
been sold or purchased) combination determines the final taxes and rates for the transaction.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Tax Liability
To create a new tax liability:
2. In the Tax Liability field, enter the tax liability identifier.

3. Enter a Description that explains the purpose of the tax liability record.
4. Select the Inside EU check box to indicate this tax liability is used for sales and purchases conducted within
the European Union. Note that this setting on a tax liability together with that on the company tax liability
will trigger the intrastat logic to see whether an intrastat-country border has been crossed.
5. Select the EU Third Party Trade check box to indicate any sales that use this tax liability are reported as
third party sales on the Sales List report.
6. Select the Tax Inclusive Pricing check box if this tax liability is used in tax inclusive pricing.
312
7. To use this tax liability in Accounts Receivable and/or Accounts Payable, select the Use in AP and Use in
AR check boxes.
8. If you want to calculate taxes for this liability record using the Tax Connect application, select the Tax
Connect Calculation check box.
Add Tax Types

You can now add the tax types you need to the liability.
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Tax Type.
2. Select the Tax Type you need from the drop-down list. You create these records within Tax Type
Maintenance; review this previous section for more information.
3. Click the Tax Method drop-down list to define how the taxes are calculated against records which use this
tax liability. Available options:
Document Level Taxes are multiplied against the amounts summed on the entire record (sales order,
invoice).
Line Level Taxes are multiplied against the amount on each detail line within a record (sales order,
AR invoice).
4. If an exemption is available for this tax type, select it from the Exemption drop-down list. Available options:
No Exempt (0) Default value, no exemptions are allowed for this tax type.
Reduced Base (1) Exemption amount is calculated by multiplying the base amount against the Exemption
%.
Reduced Rate (2) Exemption amount is calculated by subtracting a percentage against the tax
percentage in order to use a smaller rate.
5. If you select Reduced Base from the Exemption drop-down list, the Exemption % field is available. In this
field, enter the percentage which you want to multiply against the base amount in order to calculate the
exemption amount.
6. Continue to add the tax types you need. When you finish, click Save.
313
Tax Authorities
Use Tax Authority Maintenance to define a tax authority you use when the application is integrated with another
financial system. You leverage this definition to link the authority with the customers and suppliers within your
database.
Some countries require additional separation for tax reporting within areas of their country. This value is based
on a table of tax authorities. This field is then compared against customer, ship-to location, and supplier records
for the transfer to an external tax package.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Tax Authority
To create a new tax authority:
2. In the Code field, enter the code identifier for the tax authority. This value will display in several reports and
programs.
3. Enter a Description for the tax authority. This value displays on Tax Authority drop-down lists within other
programs.
4. If you no longer want this tax authority to display on drop-down lists, select the Inactive check box.
314
Electronic Interfaces | Chapter 10
Chapter 10: Electronic Interfaces

You use the electronic interface functionality to activate electronic funds transfer, or EFT, for financial transactions.
The Epicor application uses plug-in files to handle any EFT format differences. Because of this, you can set up the EFT
files you need, regardless of the bank accounts involved in the fund transfers.
You also use this functionality to define the electronic formats used for generating reports. Leverage this functionality
to send tax reports in jurisdictions that require electronic delivery. You can select an electronic interface to generate
VAT tax, Sales List, and Intrastat reports.
This chapter documents how you set up electronic interfaces within the Epicor application.
Electronic Interfaces
Use Electronic Interface Maintenance to define the electronic interfaces used in both EFT and soft-format reports.
For EFT, the interfaces .cs (Source File) program formats the data to match the bank format, while the interface
properties define the fields used to send the data. For soft format reports, the .sc plug-in file and its properties
provide the formatting needed to generate a report file.
The Single Euro Payment Area (SEPA) electronic interface enables customers to make cashless Euro payments to
anyone within the SEPA area of member states, using only a single bank account and a single set of payment
tools. The SEPA initiative improves the efficiency of cross border payments as all electronic payments across the
SEPA member states are considered domestic transactions.
Before setting up a SEPA electronic interface, refer to the SEPA
Country Specific Functionality Installation Guide. Use the
SEPA-BankRef.cs file when using Optical Character Recognition
(OCR) reference numbers for single invoices. Use the
SEPA-Generic.cs file to include a free-text field to include
supplier invoice numbers on your invoices.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Electronic Interface
315
Chapter 10 | Electronic Interfaces
Create an Electronic Interface

To create a new electronic interface:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Interface.
2. In the Interface name field, enter a unique and concise bank interface name.
3. Select the Type option you need from the drop-down list. This value indicates the purpose of the bank
interface. Refer to the application help for a complete list of available options.
4. Click the Program button to find and select the .cs (Source File) program used as a plug-in for the current
electronic bank interface. You must enter both the directory path and the name of this file. These program
files are typically stored in the Erp\ei directory.
5. Enter a Description for this electronic bank interface. Use this text field to enter an internal explanation for
the bank interface. This text only displays on the internal maintenance form used with this bank interface.
6. When you select the System Interface check box, it indicates this bank interface is delivered with the Epicor
application. You cannot make changes to this electronic interface.
Properties
Use the Properties sheet to define the data required for the electronic interface. The properties you enter on this
sheet become fields on the bank interface file. If you are developing a new EFT file, locate the property format
requirements you need and then add these properties on this sheet.
To add an EFT file property:
316
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Interface Property.
2. Enter the Property Name that identifies this EFT property. The text you enter must be unique with the
other properties defined for this bank interface.
3. Now click the Type drop-down list to define what kind of property this field will be on the bank interface.
Available options:
Date
Decimal
List
Logical
String
4. The Minimum Length field defines the least number of characters that users can enter to save a value
within this property. If users do not enter at least this many characters, an error message displays.
5. The Maximum Length field defines the highest number of characters that users must enter to save a value
within this property. If users enter more characters than this limit, an error message displays.
6. The Number of Decimals field indicates the highest number of decimals you allow for this property. If
users attempt to enter more decimals above this limit, an error message displays.
317
Property Values
If you create a property that uses the List type, you must enter property values for this list. To add a property list:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Property Value.
2. An empty row displays on the PropValue grid.

3. Enter the values you need for this list in the grid.
4. When you finish adding options on this list, click Save.
Pay Methods
Use Pay Method Maintenance to define how you will pay various transactions. You can select specific payment
methods as the default for bank accounts, customers, and suppliers. You can set up a payment method linked
to an electronic interface and then associate this payment method with specific customers or suppliers for EFT
processing.
For more information on defining pay methods for customers
and suppliers, refer to the Customer Maintenance and Supplier
Maintenance topics in the application help.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Payment Method
318
Create a Pay Method

To create a new AR payment method:
2. Enter a unique identifier for the Payment Method. You select this value on drop-down lists within other
programs.
3. Click the Scope drop-down list to define whether this payment method is used with either AR or AP.
4. Click the Pay Method Type drop-down list to define how the current method processes the payments.
Options differ based on the scope you selected, either AR or AP. Some available options:
Check Printing - Use for system generated checks.
Electronic Interface - Use for electronic interface transfer (EFT) payments.
Future Payment Instrument Printing - Use for system generated future-dated checks or promissory
notes for payment instruments.
In Cash - Use when planning to pay an invoice in cash (for example using Petty Cash). Not typically used
as a form of bank transfer.
Manual - Use when no specific payment method is defined in advance. Any method can be used when
the invoice is paid.
Manual Payment Instrument - Use when no system-printed form is required for a payment instrument.
On-site - Use for an AP payment on-site.
5. If you select the Electronic Interface option on the Pay Method Type menu, the Electronic Interface
drop-down list activates. Select the electronic interface you use with the current payment method. All the
electronic interfaces you created within Electronic Interface Maintenance display on this drop-down list. For
more information about this program, review the previous section.
319
6. Click the Output File Name button to select the directory path and file you update through the selected
electronic bank interface. An optional value, you can also specify an output file within AP Payment Entry.
7. Select the Only Bank Currency check box to indicate this payment method is limited to only use the currency
defined for the bank. Only invoices which use the bank currency can be selected within AP Payment Entry.
8. If you select AR from the Scope drop-down list, the Summarize Per Customer check box is available. Select
this check box to indicate payment records are organized and summarized by each customer record in your
database.
9. If you want the payment method to have the ability to reimburse invoices, select the Reimbursable check
box.
10. Define the Allowable Thresholds for the payment. These fields become active when you select a cash
receipt import electronic interface provided for your country for use with the AR Bank Import Workbench.
Available fields:
Overpay Percent For an AR payment method, this value specifies the overpayment percentage
threshold you will accept that does not raise an error when a received value is applied to an open AR
invoice amount. The overpayment is considered as on account, or the un-applied cash receipt amount.
Underpay Percent For an AR payment method, this value specifies the underpayment percentage
threshold you will accept that does not raise an error when a received value is applied to an open AR
invoice amount. The underpayment is considered as an AR cash receipt discount.
11. Use the fields in the Payment Instrument Options section to define the payment instrument type and
generation method for the current pay method. You can also indicate if the payment instrument is
automatically treated as approved.
12. Click the Property sheet to review the properties defined for the electronic interface selected on the current
payment method. You cannot edit these fields; they display for your information.
Additional AP
Use the Additional AP sheet where required to add more AP information or options for an AP payment method
that uses an electronic interface type. You can define a default payment code, auto bank reconciliation, sender
reference, and registration number.
Use the Additional AP sheet where required to add more AP information or options for an AP payment method
that uses an electronic interface type. You can define a default payment code, auto bank reconciliation, sender
reference, and registration number.
320
1. Click the Additional AP sheet.
2. Enter the Default Payment Code you need for the AP option.
3. Select the Auto Bank Reconciliation check box to indicate a bank reconciliation entry is created when an
electronic output file generates.
4. Use the optional Sender Reference field to enter addition information you need.
5. Enter a Registration Number to define a reference number for this AP information.
6. Select the Proposed Payment check box to indicate this item is not an actual payment. You can then match
invoices to these bank payments within AP Bank File Import Workbench. For more information on this
program, review the application help.
7. When you select the Enter Payment Total check box, you indicate users can enter payment totals for
transactions which use this payment method.
8. Select the Test check box to indicate test transmissions are run when this electronic output file is created.
Additional AR
Use the Additional AR sheet where required to add more AR information or options for an AR payment method
that uses an electronic interface type. You can specify whether the application should automatically assign a
check number to each newly created AR check.
1. Click the Additional AR sheet.
321
2. Select the Auto Checking Numbering check box if the application should generate check numbers for
newly created AR checks. For each check, it assigns a check number prefaced by the current system date
and a unique number sequence for that payment method.
Electronic Reports
Access the Export sheet found on various reports to select the electronic interface used to generate a report. This
functionality is available within report programs that supports soft-formats. The following section uses the Sales
List report as an example.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Reports > Sales List
To select an electronic interface for a report:
1. Use the Detail sheet to select the parameters of the report.
322
2. Click the Export sheet.
3. Select the Electronic Interface you want to use for this report from the drop-down list.
4. Click the Export File button to find and select the directory path and file that will update with the EFT data.
5. Click the Generate Data button to populate the report with current data.
6. The Header group box displays the primary data at the top of the report, for example, the VAT Registration
Number (VRN). If you need, you can change these values.
7. The Detail grid displays the specific information included with this report.
323
Chapter 11 | Automatic Data Processing
Chapter 11: Automatic Data Processing

The Epicor application contains functionality you can leverage to automatically generate data when you need it and
where you need it. This automatic data processing functionality runs at a time during your work cycle which you define.
You can automatically generate data for reports, processes, and executive dashboards.
You use this functionality to assign a specific process, report, or executive dashboard to a recurring schedule. An
application server monitors the system clock; when the application server calculates the current time matches a schedule,
this schedule activates. Any report, process, executive query, or process set linked to this schedule launches, refreshing
the selected programs with current data.
Through process sets, you can also organize the sequence during which tasks launch. You first create process sets for
various functions. You then add related programs to the process set. The process is next assigned to a schedule; when
this schedule activates, all the tasks assigned to this process set run in the sequence defined for them.
You create recurring, automatic schedules in System Agent Maintenance. Only system administrators have access to
this program. If you are not a system administrator and need a new recurring schedule, contact this person and ask
that this new schedule be created and made available. It then displays on Schedule drop-down lists throughout the
Epicor application.
The System Agent

The system agent regulates tasks sent to it from client installations. These tasks include generating reports,
processing data, and refreshing executive queries. A powerful tool, use the system agent to streamline the flow
of data processed through your Epicor application.
You modify the system agent, its recurring schedules, and its task agent rules through System Agent Maintenance.
When you first install the Epicor application or update your existing application, the system agent is automatically
created. The system agent is connected to an application server; the application server moves the data from the
system agent to a server, and then a task agent assigned to the application server runs the data processing. You
use the Detail sheet in System Agent Maintenance to modify how the system agent interacts with the application
server.
You create application servers and task agents through Epicor
Administration Console. This key administration program is
installed on a server. For information about how to create
application servers and task agents, review the application help
in the Epicor Administration Console.
You next use System Agent Maintenance to define schedules users can then select on reports, processes, and
executive queries. Each schedule is set up to activate at regular, specific intervals - seconds, minutes, days, weeks,
and months. When the system clock activates a schedule, all the tasks assigned to this schedule run. Depending
on the task, this could cause a specific report to generate and print, a business activity query to export, a global
alert to be sent, and so on.
Then to make better use of your system resources, you can also create task agent rules. These task agent rules
divide the system agent's processing between different application servers. An application server manages how
a specific instance of the Epicor application runs. You can set up multiple application servers to run the same
database and balance the load. You could create two application servers for the same database, but these
application servers are linked to different server machines.
324
Automatic Data Processing | Chapter 11
You can have only one system agent, so you cannot delete it. However if the system agent is accidentally deleted
by an external method, you can create a new agent using System Agent Maintenance.
Modify the System Agent

When you first install the Epicor application or update your existing application to version 8.x or higher, the
default system agent is automatically created. Use the Detail sheet to indicate how the system agent interacts
with the application server.
Menu Path: System Setup > System Maintenance > System Agent
To define how the system agent interacts with the application server:
1. Click the Agent ID... button to find and select the system agent.
2. If you need, update the Description for the system agent.

3. The Status field displays the current status for the selected system agent. This field displays either Stopped
or Started.
4. Select the Auto Start check box to automatically activate the system agent when the application server
launches.
5. Use the Processing Delay field to define the minimum delay in time between when the system agent starts
and the time its schedules process tasks. Use this field to regulate how long it takes the system agent to
activate each task.
If you have a fast server that can accommodate the network traffic, enter a lower number in this field. A
value of 10 indicates ten seconds must pass before the system agent looks for new task to run; a value of
60 indicates that a minute must pass before the next batch of tasks is processed.
6. The User Name and Password fields define the name and password of the user who logs onto the
application server (System AppServer). Enter the user name and password combination in these fields; this
account is validated against the existing user accounts in the database. If the application cannot find a valid
user name/password combination, an error message displays.
This user account must also have permission to use the
system agent. If the account is not set up to use the
system agent, an invalid user account message displays.
325
You set up this permission within User Security

Maintenance; find the user account you need, navigate
to the Options sheet, and select the Allow Session
Impersonation check box.
7. You next define the various directories used with the application server connection. The Server File Directory
defines the root directory for any files created by tasks run by the system agent. This directory should be a
shared location. Typically it is a local directory located on the same machine that runs the application server.
For example: \\Common\EpicorData
8. The Client File Directory defines the root directory for common client files such as configuration, photos,
and drawings. This should be a shared directory, normally on the same machine as where the application
server (AppServer) is running. It must be entered using the UNC convention. For example:
\\Common\EpicorData
9. The Client Program Directory defines the location of the server deployment directory for the client
installation. You must enter this path with the UNC convention, so typically this value uses the
\\Server\Epicor\Server format.
10. The Status group box indicates whether the system agent is Started. If it is running, this group box displays
the user who it was Started By and the Start Date.
11. When you finish modifying the system agent details, click Save on the Standard toolbar.
Create a Schedule
You can create as many schedules as you need to process your data. Users can then select the schedules you
create on all system agents. These schedules display as options on reports, processes, and other tasks you can
link to a recurring schedule.
To create a schedule:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Schedule.
2. The Schedules > Detail sheet displays.
326
3. The Schedule Number defines each schedule as it is added to the system agent. This number is automatically
assigned; in this example, schedule 0 is shown.
4. Enter a Description for the schedule. For this example, you create a schedule that runs once every work
day, so you enter Daily Task Schedule here.
5. Select the Enabled check box to activate the schedule.
6. Select a Schedule Type. You can select Interval (hours/minutes/seconds), Daily, Weekly, and Monthly
schedule types. In this example, you select the Daily type.
7. Because this is a Daily schedule, the Daily sheet becomes active.
If you select Interval, you use the Interval sheet to specify
the schedule processing interval in hours, minutes and
seconds. If you select Weekly, you use the Weekly sheet
to specify when the weekly schedule processing recurs,
and if you select Monthly, you use the Monthly sheet to
specify when the monthly schedule processing recurs.
8. Select the specific days on which you want this schedule to run. For this example, you run it every day except
on Saturdays and Sundays.
9. Click the Next Run Date drop-down list to define the first date during which this schedule should run. You
can also enter the date directly.
11. As tasks run using this schedule, you can review them within System Agent Maintenance. To do this, navigate
to the Schedules > Tasks > List sheet.
You can also review them through the System Monitor;
this program is explained later in this chapter.
Your new schedule is now available throughout the application. It can be selected on any reports, processes,
executive queries, and process sets.
Task Agent Rules

You can improve how the system agent generates reports, processes, and executive queries by creating task
agent rules that cause these system activities to run on different application servers. Through this feature, you
can create a range of task agent rules -- from general rules that affect task/report processing for an entire company
to specific rules for a selected report or process.
Task agent rules move report and process generation to different application servers. This distributes the load
more evenly across your system resources, improving performance. For example, you could create a task agent
rule that causes Material Requirements Planning (MRP) to run on a more powerful server, and then create another
task agent rule that causes reports to generate on a server with fewer resources. By distributing the load between
multiple application servers, you reduce task bottlenecks and match a report, process, or query with a machine
best suited to run it.
Before you begin creating task agent rules, you first need to set up the application servers that will run the data
processing on your system. You also should assign users to security groups; these groups organize your security
plan by indicating which users can access specific programs in the Epicor application.
327
Application Server Setup

You add application servers through the Epicor Administration Console, a management tool you typically install
on a server machine. This key administration tool defines how the Epicor application interacts with your system.
You use the Epicor Administration Console to add databases and application servers. Then for each application
server, you create and modify the task agent that runs its database activities. The companies you set up in the
Epicor Administration Console are then available to select on task agent rules.
For more information about how to use this administration tool, review the application help for the Epicor
Administration Console.
Security Group Setup
It is also recommended you set up security groups within the Epicor application. Security groups categorize
employees by role or department, and you create them through Security Group Maintenance. After you create
these security groups, you then assign users to these groups, controlling access to specific areas of the Epicor
application. Through User Account Security Maintenance, you indicate to which security group(s) each user
belongs. You then launch Menu Maintenance to indicate which security groups can launch specific programs.
The security groups you create are then available to select on task agent rules.
For more information about implementing security, review the Security chapter in this user guide.
Edit Task Agent Rules

Do the following to add a rule for a task agent.
1. Click on the Actions menu and select the Edit Task Agent Rules ... option.
2. The Task Agent Rules window appears. Click the New button.
328
3. Select the Company for which this task agent rule will generate tasks. Only companies assigned to the
current user account display on this drop-down list. The task agent rule will then handle processing for the
selected company.
You create companies within the Epicor Administration
Console.
4. Optionally select the Security Group for the task agent rule. Whenever a user assigned to the selected
security group runs a report or process linked to this task agent rule, the application server linked to this
rule generates the system activity.
5. Next define the Rule Type option. This value indicates what tasks are handled by the task agent rule.
Available options:
Specific Task - Indicates this task agent rule will only run against a specific process. After you select this
rule type, you next select the process from the Process Id drop-down list.
All Tasks - Indicates all processes are run against this task agent rule. Any time a process is launched by
users within a company or a security group, this task agent rule handles the processing.
Specific Report - Indicates this task agent rule will only run against a specific report. After you select
this rule type, you next select the report from the Process Id drop-down list.
All Reports - Indicates all reports are run against this task agent rule. Any time a report is launched by
users within a company or a security group, this task agent rule handles the report generation.
6. If you select either the Specific Task or the Specific Report rule type, you next select the Process Id for the
item you want the task agent rule to run. Depending on the rule type, either reports or processes display
on this drop-down list.
7. Enter the Appserver URL for the application server that will run the activity for this task agent rule. This
value links the task agent rule to the application server's location. You can find the URL for each application
server within the Epicor Administration Console.
8. Use the Endpoint Binding drop-down list to indicate how this application server checks for authentication
certificates through Internet Information Services (IIS). When a user logs into the application, the selected
method checks whether the user can access the Epicor application. Available options:
UsernameWindowsChannel -- Authenticate using an Epicor Username and Password. Windows checks
for existing Epicor user accounts to authenticate logins. When you select this option, you need to enter
the User ID and Password for the account. You can select this option for both smart client and Epicor
Web Access (EWA) installations.
UsernameSSLChannel -- Use this option to authenticate using a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) X509
certificate. Use this method for application servers that handle installations where users reside in different
domains. By using an SSL certificate, users from these different domains can log into the Epicor application.
If you select this option, a DNS Endpoint Identity automatically displays. You then need to enter the
User ID and Password for the account used to access the application server. You can select this option
for both smart client and Epicor Web Access (EWA) installations.
Windows -- Select this option to authenticate using a Windows Username and Password. You can select
this method for application servers that handle client installations where users access the application
through the same domain. Any user who has a Windows Username and Password within this domain
can successfully log into the Epicor application. If you select this option, you do not enter a
Username/Password for the task agent rule. You can only select this option on smart client installations.
For information on how you set up each authentication method, review the Epicor 10 Architecture
Guide.
329
9. If you select either the UsernameWindowsChannel or UsernameSSLChannel endpoint binding option, enter
the User ID and Password for the account that can access this application server.
10. When you finish adding the task agent rule, click Save.
Continue to add the task agent rules you need.
If you need to remove a task agent rule, highlight it on the grid and click the Delete button.
Task Agent Rules Hierarchy

The task agent rules handle activity through a hierarchical sequence.
More specific rules have priority over less specific rules, so the task generates using the application server defined
on the more specific rule. This hierarchy:
1.
Company - Security Group - Specific Report/Specific Process (highest priority)
2.
Company - Security Group - All Reports/All Tasks
3.
Company - Specific Report/Specific Process
4.
Company - All Reports/All Tasks (lowest priority)
View Task Parameters

When tasks are assigned to a schedule, you can review and change their parameters directly through System
Agent Maintenance. You can then adjust these parameters at the same time you create/modify schedules and
task agent rules.
To view task parameters:
1. Use the Tree View to expand a schedule with tasks assigned to it. In this example, you expand the Daily
Task schedule.
2. Now expand the Tasks node. Notice several processes are listed under this node.
3. From the Actions menu, select View Task Parameters.
330
4. The selected task (report, process) displays. In this example, the Multi-Company Direct Server Process window
displays.
5. Define the parameters you want to use for this process. When you finish, click the Submit button.
Select a Schedule
After you enter the schedules, you can modify programs to run using a specific schedule created on the system
agent.
These programs automatically refresh and generate data when activated by the selected schedule. This feature
is useful, for example, when you want a large report to generate overnight so it is available for review at the
beginning of your work day.
You can select a schedule on most report and process programs. During this example, you set up the Production
Detail report to automatically generate its data each day.
Menu Path: Production Management > Job Management > Reports > Production Detail
To select a schedule:
1. Launch the report or process. In this example, the Production Detail Report window displays.
331
2. Select the Schedule during which you want this report to generate. Because you want this report updated
every day, you select the Daily Task Schedule option.
3. You now must indicate that you want this report to run each time the system agent launches the Daily Task
Schedule. To do this, select the Recurring check box.
4. Now indicate that these selections are the default values you want for this report. From the Actions menu,
select Save Defaults.
Notice additional commands are available from this
Actions menu. To restore the program to its original
parameters, select Get Defaults. To clear all the current
default parameters, select Remove Defaults.
Now each time the system agent launches the Daily Task Schedule, the Production Detail report automatically
generates. You can verify this report has run by launching the System Monitor. This program is described later
in this chapter.
Process Set Maintenance

Use Process Set Maintenance to organize the order in which you want various automatic tasks to run. You create
process sets through this program. You then indicate within each process set the sequence through which each
automatic task launches.
After you create the process set, other tasks can be added to it. For example, you can add the Job Traveler (a
report), the Auto Job Close Process, and the Auto Job Completion Process to the same process set.
Later, you can launch Process Set Maintenance again to see all the tasks executive queries, reports and processes
that automatically run through this process set. When you are satisfied with the assigned tasks and the order
in which they run, attach the process set to a schedule; the schedule automatically launches the process set and
runs the tasks in the sequence you defined. The next section, Schedule Process Set, describes how you link a
process set to a schedule.
Menu Path: Executive Analysis > Business Activity Management > Setup > Process Set
Create a Process Set

To create a new process set:
332
2. Enter the Process Set ID. This value is the identifier for this process set throughout the application. In this
example, you enter JobTasks.
3. Enter a Description for the process set. This value displays on drop-down menus throughout the application.
In this example, you enter Job Task Process Set in this field.
4. If this process set is required for the application to run correctly, select the System Process check box. Users
cannot modify or delete system process sets.
5. As tasks are added to this process set, they display within the Process Set Tasks grid. No tasks are currently
added to this process set, however, so in this example, the grid is blank.
This process set is now available within the application. Executive queries, processes, and reports can be added
to this process set as you need.
Add Tasks to a Process Set

For this example, you want to add the Job Traveler report, the Auto Job Closing Process, and the Auto Job
Completion Process to your new process set.
Menu Path: Production Management > Job Management > Reports > Job Traveler
To add tasks to a process set:
333
1. Click the Save Process Set button.
2. The Save to Process Set window displays.

3. Click the Process Set drop-down list and select the process set you need. For this example, you select the
process set you just created, the Job Task Process Set.
4. Click OK. The Job Traveler is added to this process set.
5. Now launch the Auto Job Closing Process. To navigate to this process:
Menu Path: Production Management > Job Management > General Operations > Auto Job Closing Process
6. Repeat the previous steps. Click the Save Process Set button.
7. Select the Job Task Process Set and click OK.
8. To add the last task for this example, launch the Auto Job Completion Process. To navigate to this process:
334
Menu Path: Production Management > Job Management > General Operations > Auto Job Completion
Process
9. Repeat the previous steps. Click the Save Process Set button.
10. Select the Job Task Process Set and click OK.
11. Now review the sequence this process set uses when it launches each task. Return to Process Set
Maintenance.
12. Click the Process Set ID button to find and select the JobTasks process set.
13. The tasks you added to this process set display within the Process Set Tasks grid.
14. Notice each task is assigned a number. In this example, the Job Traveler is run first, the Auto Job Closing
Process is run second, and the Auto Job Completion Process is run third. When a schedule activates this
process set, the tasks are launched in this order.
15. If you want to change the sequence through which these tasks run, highlight a task on the grid and click
either the Move Up or Move Down buttons. For this example, you want to close jobs before you complete
any jobs, so these tasks are in the sequence you need.
16. When you finish adjusting the task sequence, click Save.
335
Schedule a Process Set

To automatically activate the tasks assigned to this process set, you next must assign it to an automatic, recurring
schedule. When the schedule activates the process set, all the tasks assigned to it run in the sequence you defined.
You assign a schedule to a process set within the Schedule Process Set program.
Menu Path: Executive Analysis > Business Activity Management > General Operations > Schedule Process Set
To schedule a process set:
1. Click the Process Set drop-down list to select the process set you need. In this example, you select the
JobTasks process set.
2. Click the Schedule drop-down list to select the schedule through which you want this process set to run.
In this example, you select the Daily Task Schedule, which indicates this process set runs its tasks once during
each work day.
3. This activates the Recurring check box. Select this check box to indicate this process set is launched by the
system agent automatically. In this example, the process set is run each day.
4. Enter a User Description that identifies the purpose of the process set. When you review tasks on the
System Monitor, this description displays.
5. When you finish, click Submit on the Standard toolbar.
Now each time the system agent launches the Daily Task Schedule, this process set activates. Each task runs in
the sequence you defined within the process set.
System Monitor
You use the System Monitor to verify the application is activating process sets and other scheduled tasks. This
program queries the status of tasks either submitted directly by users or automatically through schedules.
Use the System Monitor

The System Monitor automatically runs when you first launch the application.
To use the System Monitor:
1. From the System Tray, double-click the System Monitor icon.
336
2. The System Monitor displays.
3. The Active Tasks sheet shows tasks currently in process. These include reports, processes, and executive
queries. Notice in this example, both Auto Job Closing and Auto Job Completion are currently in the active
queue, both are waiting to be processed (PENDING).
4. To can end a task, highlight it and then click Delete on the Standard toolbar.
5. Use the History Tasks sheet to review all the reports, processes, and executive queries recently run through
the application server (AppServer). In this example, notice this sheet has recorded some of the tasks you
assigned to the Job Task Process Set.
6. Use the Scheduled Tasks sheet to review and work with tasks scheduled to run at a later time.
7. You can end a scheduled task by highlighting it and then clicking Delete.
337
8. You can verify that scheduled reports ran on the Reports sheet. If a report failed to generate, this situation
is indicated on this sheet as well.
The System Monitor is an important tool that helps you manage the tasks you set up to run automatically. Use
this program to verify data processing generates as expected.
338
Enterprise Content Management | Chapter 12
Chapter 12: Enterprise Content Management

Nearly every business workflow requires documents created outside the Epicor application. Your engineers may have
an important .CAD file they need linked to a job record in order to illustrate an assembly design. Purchase managers
may want to attach a specification document to a part record so the correct part revisions are bought from suppliers.
A controller may want to attach an entry procedures document to a group of AR invoices as a quick reference guide
for new employees. Attaching these documents to a specific record within the Epicor application makes these items
readily available to any individuals within your organization who need them.
Available when you purchase the Document Management module, the Enterprise Content Management functionality
contains the features you use to manage and link outside documents to specific Epicor records. These attached
documents can be stored on your network either within a server file location or within a MicrosoftSharePoint site
library. Once you define where your source documents will be stored, you can then indicate which file formats are
available to attach onto Epicor records within the current company. To prevent these file formats from being used
everywhere, however, you can also restrict which formats can be attached to which specific Epicor records. You can
then further define how these files interact with the SharePoint library and/or the external file system. To complete the
setup, you then indicate which third-party programs automatically launch when users select the attached file.
When you finish defining the attachment conventions for the current company, users then add the files they need to
the records which accept each file format. Users can then select these attached documents for viewing, editing, and
printing. Any documents required by a business workflow will now be available to both attach and view whenever
users within your organization need them.
Functionality Setup
You set up the primary attachment functionality through three programs Company Maintenance, Document
Type Maintenance, and Document Type Control Maintenance. These programs define both the content library
used for automatically storing the attached files and the file formats you accept within the current company.
Attachment Configuration
You begin by defining how each company interacts with an attachment content library. You can set up each
company to store documents within a file folder on a server, a SharePoint site library, or both. To do this, launch
the Company Maintenance program and modify the settings on the Attachments sheet. Use this sheet to define
the specific location where users automatically store attached files within the current company
When users link files to a record within the database, they automatically save to the central network location.
This functionality ensures other users within the current company can select and view these same file attachments.
To define the attachment configuration for the current company:
339
Chapter 12 | Enterprise Content Management
1. Navigate to the Attachments sheet.
2. Select the Enable File System check box to indicate whether users at the current company can store
attached files within a central folder on a server available through your network.
3. If you activate the file system functionality, you must enter a directory path within the Default Base URL
field. Enter a directory path located on your server; this folder becomes the repository for the attached files.
When users attach files to a record, they automatically are placed in this server repository location. Enter
the server path you need in this field.
4. Select the Enable SharePoint check box to indicate users at this company can store attached files within
a SharePoint site library.
5. If you activate the SharePoint functionality, you must enter the SharePoint Site for the current company.
This value determines the web site location for the content library. Enter the SharePoint location you need
in this field.
6. After you have defined this web location, you are ready to build the library. To do this, click the Create Site
Library button. A library is created within the SharePoint application for the current company, and users
can now store attachments within this site library.
The windows login user creating the new site must have
access privileges to the SharePoint on trusted domains
and have SharePoint site administration rights.
340
7. The new SharePoint library is named by the company for which you define usage of attachments.
8. Optionally, select the Allow Default Document check box to indicate attachments can be dragged onto
the attachments nodes on the tree view for a specific record. If you select this check box, default attachment
nodes can be created for each record as default nodes on the tree view, and users can click and drag files
from WindowsExplorer (or another navigation tool) onto this attachment node.
If you do not select this option, users will need to right-click the parent Attachment node on each record.
They will then need to browse for the file they wish to attach to the current record.
9. After you select the Allow Default Document check box, you then indicate the default storage method used
to attach files. Select this option on the Method drop-down list. Available options:
File System Document - The attachment is automatically saved to the Default Base URL directory path.
SharePoint Document - The attachment is automatically saved to the SharePoint site location.
Attachment Link - Causes a default attachment value to populate the File Name field on the Attachment
window.
10. When you finish defining the attachment options for the current company, click Save.
You have now defined the content library or libraries used for attachments with the current company.
341
Document Types
Before users can attach a document, you next must set up its corresponding document type. Use Document Type
Maintenance to create the document types users need for attachments in the current company. Document types
identify the purpose of a document and indicate how the type will be stored within the application. Users can
then attach files of this type to a record which accepts this document type.
You can create document types for whatever purpose you need. Some examples of document types include:
Customer Approval
General Document
Internal Documents
Sales Order Contracts
Part Specifications
Menu Path: System Management > Document Management > Document Type Maintenance
To create a document type:
1. Click the New button.
2. Enter the Type ID you want. This unique identifier is used internally by the application to keep track of each
document type.
3. Now enter a brief Description for the document type. This value displays on the Document Type drop-down
list on the Attachment Management window; this window displays on all records where users can attach
files.
4. Select the Storage Type you need with this document type. This value determines how the document type
uploads files within the content library. Available options:
SharePoint Document - Indicates attached files which use this document type are saved within the
SharePoint site library defined for this company.
File System Document - Indicates attached files which use this document type are saved within the
network server folder defined for this company.
342
Attachment Link - Indicates the file location where attachments are stored in a directory path other
than the file system.
Collaboration Link - Indicates attached files which use this document type are directly linked to a specific
SharePoint document within the site library. Select this storage type for common documents you frequently
attach to records.
5. If you selected either the File System Document or Attachment Link as the storage type option, the Base
URL field activates. Use this field to enter either the directory path for the network server folder (File System
Document) or the directory path for the alternate storage location (Attachment Link).
6. Now select the Tree View Node Image you wish to use. The icon you select displays on the tree view when
an attached file is this document type. All icons available within the application display on this list; select
the image you need.
You can add unique icons to the Epicor application by
using the Resource Editor. This customization utility is
described in the Customization Utilities chapter within
the Epicor ICE User Experience and Customization Guide.
7. If you wish to limit where this document type is used, select the Reserved for Specific Tables check box.
This causes the document type to display within Document Type Control Maintenance; use this program to
define the specific records (for example, job records, AR groups, part records, and so on) this document
type can be used. The next section describes this key maintenance program.
8. Lastly, indicate whether this document type is necessary for a Receipt, a Shipment, or both transactions:
Receipt Select this check box if the document type is required for receipt transactions. If a part record
(Part Maintenance) indicates it needs receipt documents because its Receipt Docs Required check box
is selected, a file which uses this document type must be attached to any receipts for this part.
Shipment - Select this check box if the document type is required for shipment transactions. If a part
record (Part Maintenance) indicates it needs shipment documents because its Shipping Docs Required
check box is selected, a file that uses this document type must be attached to any shipment records for
this part.
Document Type Controls

Use Document Type Control Maintenance to define which document types are linked to records in specific tables
for the current company. For example, you can indicate users can only link part specification documents to the
Part table. This document type is then only available on part records and cannot be attached to a different record
(for example, a sales order).
You can, however, attach the same document type to multiple tables, so you can organize all your attachment
conventions through this program. Leverage this functionality to restrict what document types users can attach
throughout all the tables in the database.
If you indicate you want this document type to always display on a new record, the document type automatically
has its own node on the tree view, but no files are attached under it. Because this node always appears each
time a new record is created, users can drag and drop file attachments directly under this tree view node and
the file is immediately attached to the record in this node.
343
As discussed previously, any files added to the record are automatically stored within either a file system server
directory or a SharePoint site library. The storage option selected on the document type defines the location
where the new file attachment is placed.
Menu Path: System Management > Document Management > Document Type Control
To create a document type control:
2. Click either the Table button or the drop-down list to find and select a specific table.
3. Now click the Document Type drop-down list to select the document type you want to restrict on the
selected table. All document types which have the Reserved for Specific Tables check box selected on
their records display on this drop-down list. You select this option within Document Type Maintenance; the
previous section describes this check box.
4. If you want this document type to automatically display as a tree view node on each new record, select the
Expose In Tree check box. Users can then drag and drop files under this node. The file is automatically
attached to the current record and stored within the content library.
You activate this functionality within the Company Maintenance > Attachments sheet. If you select the
Allow Default Document check box on this sheet, the Expose in Tree check box is available within Document
Type Control Maintenance.
Third Party Parameters

You next define how the attached files interact with third-party applications. For example, you need to indicate
that attached .docx files launch automatically within Microsoft Word. If you use a SharePoint site library, you
must define how each document type populates information within the library table on the SharePoint site. You
also organize how external files are referenced within the Epicor database.
344
Document Type Metadata

Use Attachment Metadata Maintenance to define how document types and tables interact with a SharePoint
site library. The metadata for any file attachments which use this document type is then dynamically calculated
when the file is stored within SharePoint.
You first use this program to define the database table and the document type. You then indicate how the
metadata for this document type/table configuration interacts with your SharePoint site library. When users attach
a file for this table and document type, the metadata is calculated using the parameters defined within this
maintenance program. The file is then correctly added to the SharePointsite.
Menu Path: System Management > Document Management > Document Type Metadata
To define SharePoint metadata for a document type:
2. Click either the Table button or the drop-down list to find and select a specific database table.
3. Now select the Document Type for which you need to define attachment metadata. Attachments that use
this document type and then are linked to the selected table have their metadata dynamically calculated
using the parameters you define in the other fields on this sheet.
4. Enter the SharePoint Column Name you need to associate with this table and document type. This value
indicates the column within the SharePoint site library to which this document type is saved. When a user
adds a file attachment which uses the current table/document type configuration, the file is stored within
this SharePoint column.
5. Enter the SharePoint Display Name used with this metadata. This value defines the group name for the
attachments within the SharePoint site library. Any attached files which use the current table/document
type configuration display in SharePoint under this name.
By default, the Description text value from the selected document type displays in this field. If you need,
however, you can change this value.
345
6. The Database Mapping field defines the specific table and column within the database to which the
attachment files are linked (mapped). When users attach files which use this table/document type
configuration, they map to this table/column name. Enter the <table>.<column name> value you need.
If you are not sure which table/column name you should
use, launch the Data Dictionary Viewer. This program
displays all the database tables and their respective
columns. You navigate to this program on the Main Menu:
System Setup > System Maintenance > Data Dictionary
Viewer.
7. Optionally, select the Required check box to indicate users can only store attachments to this SharePoint
column using this table/document type configuration. If you do not select this check box, users can attach
files to this SharePoint column using other table/document configurations.
8. Select the Allow Override check box to indicate users can manually change these metadata values before
the file is saved to the SharePoint site library. When this option is selected, users can update the Metadata
Value fields within the Attachment Management window. If you do not select this check box, the Metadata
Value fields display as read only and cannot be changed.
External File References

Use External File Reference Maintenance to define and categorize any external files you need for the current
company. You first create a reference number for the file, link the external file to this number, and then define
its details. Typically you record certification documents through this program.
Menu Path: System Management > Document Management > Document Management
To create an external file reference:
2. The Reference Number is automatically assigned to the external file once the new record is saved.
3. Select a Type option for the external file reference from the drop-down list. The list displays entries defined
through Document Type Maintenance.
346
4. Either click the File Name button to find and select the external file, or directly enter the directory path and
name for this external file.
5. Enter the Description you need for this external file. Be sure to enter a value which clearly defines the
purpose of the external file.
The external file is now linked to the reference.
Document Associations
To complete the attachment setup, you need to associate each file extension with a third-party application. This
third party application displays the attached files which use this file extension. You use Document Association
Maintenance to define file associations for the current company.
You specify the command lines required to launch the file within the third-party application. When a user views
a document that contains the extension defined in the association, the file opens immediately within the third-party
application. This prevents the Open With window from appearing every time users select a file with this extension.
AutoVu 20.0 is not compatible with the Enterprise Content
Management functionality. If you wish to display AutoVu files,
be sure to use AutoVu 19.0 or earlier.
You can also define how files with this extension print for each document association.
Menu Path: System Management > Document Management > Document Association
To create a file association:
2. Enter the file Extension you wish to link to this association record. When a user views or prints an attached
file with this file extension, the corresponding view and print commands are used.
3. Next, enter a brief Description for the document association. This value identifies the purpose for the
document association. For example: Bitmap
347
4. Define the View Command which runs when users right-click an attached file and select View from the
context menu. This command launches the third-party application linked to this file extension and
automatically displays the selected file.
This command includes one variable, &1, which specifies the currently highlighted filename. You can cause
many Windows applications, such as the Microsoft Office Suite, to append a filename to the command
line in order to open that file when the command is run. Things to consider:
If the path to the application is included in the Windows path statement for the workstation, you only
need to specify the .EXE in this command line. For example: mspaint.exe &1
If the path to the application is not included in the Windows path statement for the workstation, then
you need to specify the entire path to the .EXE. For example: C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft
Office\Office12\WINWORD.exe &1
If this command line calls a 32-bit application, such as Microsoft Office, then the filename (or the &1
variable representing the filename) must be enclosed in quotation marks. However, if this command line
calls a 16-bit application, such as the version of AutoVue shipped with the Enterprise Content Management
module, the filename must not be enclosed in quotation marks. For example: avwin.exe &1
5. Define the Print Command which runs when users right-click an attached file and select Print from the
context menu. This command launches the third-party application linked to this file extension and
automatically sends the selected file to the default printer.
See your third-party applications documentation for more
information on printing options available from the
command line.
This command includes one variable, &1, which specifies the currently highlighted filename. The print
command for many applications can be run from the command line. For example, to print a file from a
Microsoft Word command line, add the following text to the Word command line: /mFilePrint. This runs
the printing macro for Microsoft Word.
Things to consider:
If the path to the application is included in the Windows path statement for the workstation, you only
need to specify the .EXE in this command line
If the path to the application is not included in the Windows path statement for this workstation, you
need to specify the entire path to the .EXE. For example: C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft
Office\Office12\WINWORD.exe /mFilePrint &1
If this command line calls a 32-bit application, such as Microsoft Office, then the filename (or the &1
variable representing the filename) must be enclosed in quotation marks. However, if this command line
calls a 16-bit application, such as the version of AutoVue shipped with the Enterprise Content Management
module, the filename must not be enclosed in quotation marks. For example: avwin.exe av\samples -p
&1
Attaching Files
Your users can now attach files to records, using the document types and file format restrictions you have set
up. This section shows you, as an example, how to attach a .docx file to a customer record. During this example,
you are attaching a customer approval document which is then automatically placed within a SharePoint site
library. Your users will follow the same steps to attach files to any record within the Epicor application that allows
attachments.
348
Attach File to Record

To attach a file to a record:
To begin this example, you launch Customer Maintenance.
Menu Path: Sales Management > Order Management > Setup > Customer
The CRM menu path is: Customer Relationship Management > Order Management > Setup > Customer
1. Find and select the customer record to which you need to attach the file.
2. Expand the Attachments node on the tree view. Notice the document types you selected to be exposed
on the tree within Document Type Maintenance automatically display within this node.
3. You want to add a customer approval to the SharePoint site library. Right-click the Customer Linked
Documents node and select the Add New Attachment option from the context menu. If you allow
documents to be clicked and dragged to the tree view, you can also use your mouse to click and drag a file
from Windows Explorer onto the tree view.
349
4. The Attachment Management window displays.
5. Notice the Document Type (Doc Type) drop-down list automatically displays the document type for the
selected tree view node.
6. Click the Browse button to find and select the file you want to attach to the record.
7. Enter the Title you need for the file. This value displays on the tree view node for the current record.
8. If the file will be saved to a SharePoint site, you can also enter other SharePoint properties for the document.
The values you select here display in the selected columns in the SharePoint site library. If you need, enter
any additional Comments for the attached file you want to display in SharePoint.
9. Select the current Status of the document from the drop-down list. You can indicate the file is a Draft,
Approved, Final, and so on.
10. The SharePoint Display Name and the Metadata Value columns display the values you defined for this
table/document type within Attachment Metadata Maintenance. If the Allow Override check box is selected
for this table/document type, you can change these values. If this check box is clear (not selected), however,
this table displays as read only and you cannot modify the values in this table.
11. Click OK.
350
12. The file is now attached to the record. It is also saved to the SharePoint site library.
Attached Files in Action

When users attach a file to a record, it displays as a unique node on the tree view. Your users can now display,
edit, print, and delete this attached file as they need.
To manipulate an attached file:
351
1. Launch a program which has a record with attachments. In this example, you launch Customer Maintenance
and pull in the customer record which has the approval document you previously attached.
2. Right-click the Attachments; a context menu displays.

3. To display the attachment, select View. The attached file appears within the third-party application you
defined within Document Association Maintenance.
4. To print the attachment, select Print. The attached file prints using the Print Command values you defined
within Document Association Maintenance.
5. If you need to change the file, select Edit to display the file within the third-party application. You can then
make the changes to the file as you need.
6. To delete the file attachment from the current record, select Remove. The attachment node disappears
from the tree node.
Users now have the control they need for each attached file you have approved for use within the current
company.
352
Reporting Tools | Chapter 13
Chapter 13: Reporting Tools

The Epicor ERP application contains tools you can use to modify existing reports to better reflect your business and
workflow needs. You can modify all installed reports within the Epicor application, adding fields and tables that then
display their data within the generated reports results.
Through Report Data Definition Maintenance, you can add a number of data fields, calculated fields, and additional
tables to each report. You can launch Microsoft SQL Server Report Builder, or another report writer to modify the
display of each report to include the added fields. You then use Report Style Maintenance to make this modified report
an option on the Report Style drop-down list available on each report window. The default report generator for the
Epicor application is SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS).
You set up how the Epicor application interacts with this functionality through the Company Maintenance and Printer
Maintenance programs. Use Company Maintenance to indicate whether your reports use SSRS or both SSRS and Crystal
Report types. The Crystal Report type is available for backwards compatibility. If you used Crystal Reports in a previous
Epicor application version, you can use this option to include the Crystal .rpt files. Use Printer Maintenance to define
the printers available within your organization for SSRS reports. Leverage the reporting tools functionality to generate
and send out the customized reports you need for improved communication within all workflows throughout the
organization.
Epicor ERP also has an external tool, the Advanced Financial Reporter,
which you can use to create reports which integrate with your Epicor
application. For more information about this financial reporting tool,
contact your account manager.
Epicor ERP and SSRS Integration

The Epicor application integrates with SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS). This service handles all the report
generation and printing functions.
Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) is a report generation tool that typically displays reports in an
internet browser. However because the Epicor application must support unattended printing, scheduled printing,
direct printing, and other features, it is not generally practical to work with reports in the SSRS browser portal.
The Epicor application generates reports by first extracting the report data from the database. It does this by
applying user security rules and restrictions specified by the Epicor application. The data is then written to a
transient report that uses database tables in the reporting database; this report database is different from the
application's transactional database. The encapsulated data is then combined with the SSRS report definition to
render the report output (PDF by default).
This report generation process is handled by the application server. System administrators set up the application
server using the Epicor Administration Console. The application server generates the data, writes this data to the
transient tables, and then connects with SSRS to render the report output. Users can then preview and print the
report.
An important feature of th Epicor/SSRS integration is that it enables users to work within SQL Server Report
Builder to create modified versions of shipped Epicor reports and create new, custom reports. Both modified
shipped reports and new reports can be added to the application menu, making them available for users. The
Epicor ERP application help includes examples of how to develop and integrate both modified shipped reports
353
Chapter 13 | Reporting Tools
and new reports, moving between the application client, SQL Server Report Builder, and SQL Server Report
Manager. For more information, see the following topics in the application online help:
System Management > Reporting > SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) > Developing a Modified Version
of an Epicor Shipped SSRS Report
System Management > Reporting > SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) > Developing a Custom SSRS Report
Reporting Functionality Setup

You set up the reporting tools functionality through the Company Configuration and Printer Maintenance
programs. These programs define the report types and the specific printers available for the current company.
When you have these parameters defined, you are then able to create the report definitions and styles you need.
Report Type Configuration

The report types a company uses is set through Company Maintenance. SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS)
is the default report type. However if you used Crystal Reports in a previous version, you can configure the
report type to use both formats. Users can then select which report type they want to use for the selected report.
If the current company is set up for SQL Server Reporting Services, be sure to configure the company to only
accept the SSRS report type.
To define the report types for the current company:
1. Navigate to the Email and Reporting sheet.
354
2. Use the Allowed Report Style drop-down list to select what report systems, or types, are available within
the current company. Available options:
SSRS Only Select this style when you use SSRS for your reporting tool.
Crystal and SSRS Select this style when you use both Crystal Reports and SSRS. Typically you choose
this option while you are moving between report writers. If your company is moving to SSRS, select this
option so that users can still run their Crystal Reports.
3. Click the WorkStation Method drop-down list to define how shipping and receiving workstations connect
to printers available on your network. Available options:
Default
UserID
Machine name + UserID
Machine Name + Domain User
4. Enter the Epicor SSRS Portal the current company uses for the Epicor SQL Sever Report Portal web site.
You need to specify this uniform resource locator (URL) if you will create custom SSRS reports.
You can use the Configure Epicor SSRS Service Utility to
find the URL. On the server where the Epicor SSRS
components are installed, navigate to Start > Programs
> Epicor Software > Epicor SQL Report Monitor and select
Configure Epi SSRS Service. The URL is displayed in the
Epi SSRS site field on the Configure the SQL Server Report
Portal screen.
5. Use the options on the SSRS Printer Option drop-down list to determine which printers a report will be
sent to for printing. Available options:
Client and Server Printing -- The default option, indicates reports will first attempt to print on any
printers directly linked to the client. If no client printers are available, the report will then attempt to print
on any printers connected to the server.
Client Printing Only -- Indicates reports will only be sent to printers connected to clients.
Server Printing Only -- Indicates reports will only be sent to printers connected to servers.
6. Optionally, you select the default printers used for automatic printing within the Auto-Print Defaults group
box.
When configured, these are the primary printers used for auto-printing of reports and labels for the current
company. Alternatively, printers for auto printing can be set (or the settings here can be overridden) at the
Workstation level, or in the configuration of the Business Process Management (BPM) data directives that
you create to initiate and control auto printing.
To learn more about setting up report auto printing,
review the Auto Print action topics in the Business Process
Management (BPM) section in the Epicor ERP online help.
7. The SSRS Report Server group is used only when a company needs to be set up on a report server and
database other than those specified in the application server. Any such change should be coordinated with
your administrator
355
Printer Maintenance
Printer records within the application identify your available printers. Use this program to define how the application
interacts with each printer installed within the current company. Create as many printer records as you need.
The printers you define here display on drop-down lists within Company Maintenance and Workstation
Maintenance programs to set up auto-printing. You also indicate whether a printer is compatible with SSRS
printing; printers you indicate can use SSRS printing then display as an option within SSRS Printer windows.
Menu Path: System Management > Reporting > Printer Maintenance
To add a printer:
2. Enter the Printer ID for this printer. Be sure to enter a unique identifier that helps you locate it.
3. Enter the Description of the printer. The text entered here displays on drop-down lists throughout the
application. In this example, you enter Manufacturing Center Printer.
4. Next, enter the Network Path. This defines the network location for the printer. Do not enter a local path
in this field; only enter a path that connects to a network printer. Be sure to correctly enter this path because
this defines the value the Epicor application uses to send report data to this printer.
5. If SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) reports can be sent to this printer and if you want users to print SSRS
reports to it, select the SSRS Printer check box. Users can then select this printer as an option on the SSRS
Printer windows. To learn more about SSRS printing, read the SQL Server Report Print Controls section later
in this chapter.
If you do not select the SSRS Printer check box, the printer
can still be used for SSRS reports. To do this, however,
you must select the SSRS option for a specific report style
356
within Report Style Maintenance. Use this method when

the device is a specialty printer you need to reserve for
specific reports. Examples of printing devices you would
not define as an SSRS printer but still use SSRS reports
include check printers, plotters, and label printers.
6. Select the Color check box if this printer prints out pages in color.
7. Select the Landscape check box if the printer prints pages in the landscape orientation which means its
documents are wider than taller. By default, this check box is clear.
8. Several default values display in the rest of the fields within this sheet. The Margin field defines the margins
of any page printed with this printer. The values are in hundredths of an inch.
9. The Paper Size Kind field indicates the size of the paper used in the printer. Select the size you need from
the drop-down list. In this example, you select the Letter paper size.
10. The Paper Height field defines the height of the printed paper, in hundredths of an inch. For example,
paper that is 11 inches tall displays as 1100 in this field.
11. The Paper Width field displays the maximum width of each printed page. This value displays in hundredths
of an inch. For example, paper that is 8.5 inches wide has an 850 value.
12. The Paper Source Kind field defines the source of the paper. Select the source you need from the drop-down
list. In this example, you select FormSource. Other options include Automatic Feed, Large Format, and Manual
Feed.
13. The Horizontal Res. and Vertical Res. fields display the horizontal and vertical resolution that the printer
will use, in dots per inch.
14. Optionally, select the Collate check box if the printed pages should always be assembled in the correct
order when the hard copy is generated.
Continue to enter the printer records you need. After you have defined all the available printers, users can select
these printers for use with auto-printing, SSRS reports, and other report types.
Work Station Maintenance

You can also define a default printer at the workstation level. When a user logs into this workstation, this default
printer is automatically used for both regular printing and auto-printing. You do this through Work Station
Maintenance.
Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > Setup > Workstation
To define a default printer for a workstation:
357
1. Click the WorkStation ID button. Find and select the workstation that you want to update.
2. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Device.
3. The Devices sheet displays.
4. Select the device Type from the drop-down list. To indicate this device is a printer, select the Printer option.
5. Enter a Description for the printer.
6. Select the Default Device check box. This indicates the printer is the default for this workstation.
You can add as many printers to the workstation as you
need. Only one printer, however, can be selected as the
default printer device.
7. Select a Printer ID from the drop-down list. This list displays all the printer records you created through
Printer Maintenance. For more information about this program, review the previous Printer Maintenance
section.
358
8. Now select a Printer Usage option. This defines how this default printer is used. Available options:
Reports
Labels
9. Click Save.
This workstation is now set up with a default printer. If a report does not have a rule that defines a network
printer path, this default workstation printer is used for any reports, forms, or labels printed from this workstation.
Report Data Maintenance and Report Maintenance

You leverage two programs to manage the reports your users run within the current company.
Use Report Data Maintenance to define report data definitions that identify the database tables and fields from
which each report pulls its information.
To make a new or modified report available, you next create a report style for it within Report Maintenance. This
program defines the type used for the report (SQL Server reporting, BarTender Labels, and so on) and the location
where the report file is found. You can also indicate for which companies this report style is available. Users can
then select this style on report windows within all of the companies you indicated through this program.
Report Data Maintenance

Use Report Data Maintenance to create and edit report data definitions. A report data definition defines a report's
main attributes and identifies the tables and fields that appear on the report.
To customize an existing system report, you first create a copy of it. Then, using a search function, you can add
fields and tables to it and remove any fields and tables you do not want. You can add any database table to a
standard report data definition.
Report Data Maintenance does not make changes to the reports layout; it only defines the data displayed on
the report. When you finish modifying the reports fields and tables, you must next open the report within the
BarTender, Microsoft SQL Server Report Builder, or another report writer and customize the reports layout.
This tool has a search function you use to attach any table to the selected report. It also exposes all the excluded
fields not included on a default reports base layout giving you the functionality to display these hidden fields
as well. You can also add lookup tables that display through fields on the customized report.
Menu Path: System Management > Reporting > Report Data Definition
Create a Report Definition

For this example, you are creating a new version of the Job Traveler. This report will use SSRS reporting and
contain some changes to the information it displays.
To create a new report data definition:
359
1. Click the Code button to find and select the report you need. In this example, you want the Job Traveler,
so you select the JobTrav code.
2. The Description field displays the name of the report you selected. In this example, Job Traveler displays.
3. The Report Type field indicates the kind of report that makes up this data definition. Available options:
Base Definition The selected type in this example. is the primary version of a report, as installed with
the Epicor application.
Crystal A report created using the Crystal Reports application.
Outbound EDI A report used to generate Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) data that you send out
to customers and suppliers.
Epicor Financial Report Reports created through the Financial Report Designer.
Bartender Labels Labels created through the BarTender application. Six generic BarTender reports
are available; they are generic because customer labels are typically customized by each company.
SQL Server Reporting A report created using Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services.
Although they are not installed with the Epicor application,
the Crystal Reports versions of the standard reports are
available on EPICWeb in the Epicor 10 download section.
These reports are compressed in a .zip file you can
download and expand in a folder on your server. You
then use Report Data Definition Maintenance and Report
Style Maintenance to give users access to these Crystal
reports.
4. Notice the System Report check box is selected. This indicates the current report definition was installed
with the application and cannot be changed. Instead, you need to make a copy of this definition.
5. To do this, click the Actions menu and select Duplicate Report.
6. The Duplicate Report Definition window displays.
360
7. Enter the Report Def ID. Be sure to enter an identifier you can use to easily find the report data definition
later. For this example, enter Traveler.
8. Enter a Description for this duplicate report. In this example, enter Job Traveler Auto Report Version.
9. Click OK to return to Report Data Maintenance.
10. Notice the Code and Description fields now display information from your duplicate report.
11. Click the Report Type drop-down list and select the SQL Server Reporting option.
12. The Duplicate of field displays the name of the original system report.
13. Click Save and remain in Report Data Maintenance.
Add and Modify Report Labels

Use the Report Labels sheets to enter or modify the labels which display on the current report. These constant
values are used to translate sections of the current report into different languages. Every piece of text contained
in the report, such as titles, headings, and fields are identified using a specific label defined on these sheets; you
can then translate all of these items into different languages.
The values you enter or edit are recorded within the RptLabels table. This table contains all the language versions
of the current report; the report writer accesses this table. These report labels generate the field labels, so each
field on the report can display in a different language by matching the Label Name for each item. You can also
add labels for new report sections through these sheets.
This functionality helps you avoid directly entering, or hard coding, text values within the report writers (for
example, Financial Report Designer, or SQL Server Report Builder). Instead, you can translate these labels
independently from the report writer. To do this, you could create a new report definition which contains the
translated text you define on these sheets; users can then select the specific language version of the report they
need.
To help identify the new tables and fields you are adding to the report, use this functionality to add the labels
you need. While you design the report through a report writer like Microsoft SQL Server Report Builder, you can
place these labels on the report layout.
To create a new label:
361
1. In Report Data Maintenance, click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Label.
2. The Report Labels > Detail sheet displays.
3. Enter the Label Name. This identifier defines the label within the report data definition.
4. Enter the Label Value you need. This value defines the text which displays within the label on the report.
5. Continue adding the labels you need. When you finish, click Save.
6. You can also edit existing labels. To do this, click the Report Labels > List sheet.
All of the labels within the current report definition display within the Report Labels grid. All labels can be
edited.
362
The report definition now uses the labels you defined on these sheets. You can manipulate where these labels
display within your report writer application.
Add Report Tables

You can define which tables are used in a report data definition. You can select a table from the current report
and then modify it as you need. You can also add any existing table to the report.
To add a table to your Traveler example:
1. In Report Data Maintenance, click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Table.
2. A new Report Table > Detail sheet displays.
3. The Report Table field displays the identifier for the selected table. Either enter the name of the table
directly or click the Schema Table button to find and select the table you need. Typically the Report Table
is the same as the Schema Table.
Changing the name in the Report Table field enables you
to display data from the same physical table in multiple
locations in the report. You would then modify the report
format in SQL Server Report Builder, and place selected
columns from these two tables in different locations on
the report.
363
4. The Schema field displays the schema identifier for the selected schema table. Typical options include ERP
and ICE.
5. The optional SeqControl field defines where the current report table is placed within the reports table
sequence (.xsd) file. You can then organize the tables within any Parent-Child relationships you need. You
can also enter a different value within this field.
6. When the Output RptLanguageID check box is selected, it indicates records within the dataset have an
additional RptLanguageID field. This field is used to link to the RptLabel table. As described in the previous
section, the RptLabel table is a temporary table which contains the translations for the label text (literals);
these text values are then included in all report datasets.
7. Click Save to finish adding the new table to your example.
Add Calculated Fields

You can add calculated fields to the report definition and later use Microsoft SQL Server Report Builder to add
them to the report layout.
The fewer fields included within the data definition, the better
the report will perform. Typically you only include the fields
used on the SQL Server for Reporting Services (SSRS) templates.
To add a calculated field:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Calculated Field.
364
2. The Report Table > Calculated Fields > Detail sheet displays.
3. Enter the Name for the new calculated field. This value is the main identifier used for the field within the
current report table.
4. The Label value defines the text which displays next to the calculated field on the report. Typically you enter
text which is similar to the Name value.
5. Use the Business Type drop-down list to format a number column to display as words. If you select Number
to Words for a column that has a numeric value, instead of showing numbers (the Default option), the
numbers display as words. For example, the value 123,500 would appear as One hundred twenty three
thousand, five hundred on the report.
The number to words feature only works on Windows
operating systems. On other operating systems the option
is ignored.
6. Define the Data Type that will be calculated within this field. Select a data type you need from the list.
Available options:
Character
Decimal
Date
Integer
Logical
If you select the Number to Word option for the Business Type, this field is read-only and displays the
Character value.
7. Use the Column list to select the numeric column that contains the source values you wish to display as
words. This drop-down list is available when you select the Number to Words option for the Business Type.
8. Use the Format field to define how the calculated field displays its data. The format value you enter in this
field depends on the Data Type you previously selected. Some format examples include x(20) (a character
field with 20 characters), 99/99/99 (a date field), and yes/no (a Boolean field).
9. You can continue to add additional calculated fields. When finished, click Save.
365
Exclude Fields and Field Labels

Through the Exclusions sheet, you determine which fields or labels are not used in a report data definition.
You can either exclude both a field's column and label or just the label. Excluding unused fields improves report
performance.
To exclude columns/labels or just labels:
1. Navigate to the Report Table > Exclusions sheet.
2. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Table Exclusion.
A new row displays on the Report Table Exclusion grid.
3. Click the Field Name drop-down list and select the column you want to exclude from the report data
definition.
By default, both the ExcludeColumn and ExcludeLabel check boxes are selected.
366
4. If you want the column to display on the report without the label, clear (de-select) the ExcludeColumn
check box.
The column will now display without the label.
You can choose to display the column without its label, but you cannot exclude the column and still
display the label.
5. Click Save.
Now either the selected columns and labels or just the selected labels are removed from the report definition.
Supporting report layout changes can be made in Microsoft SQL Server Report Builder.
Add Data Filtering Criteria

You use report table criteria to set data filters in the report data definition. This functionality helps you reduce
how much data is pulled from the database, focusing the report on the specific information you need to include.
You can create as many criteria as you need. To define how each criterion interacts with the other rules, you
leverage the And/Or value and the parentheses fields to define what criterion needs to evaluate first before the
next criterion.
To create a new criterion:
1. Select a table on the Tree View, click the Down Arrow next to the New button, and then select New
Table Criteria.
367
2. The Report Table > Criteria sheet displays with a line for the new criterion.
3. Click the And Or drop-down list to define how this criterion, or rule, works in relationship with other criteria
you define for this report definition. Available options:
And This rule must be TRUE in addition to any other rule.
Or Either this rule must be TRUE, or another rule must be TRUE.
<Null> This option is only selected for the first rule. It causes all the other And Or rules to run after
it.
4. When you need to nest two or more rules together, enter the Open Parenthesis ( character value in the
LeftP field. To define the beginning of a group of nested rules, you can enter as many open parenthesis
characters as you need.
5. Select the Field Name the rule will evaluate. The only fields available on this drop-down list are the ones
found on the current table.
6. Use the Compare Operator drop-down list to define how the selected field (the Field Name value) is
compared against either a Constant field or the To Table and To Field values. The operator list that displays
depends on the field you select:
Numbers: >, <, =, >=, <=, < >
Strings: >, <, =, >=, <=, < >, BEGINS, MATCHES
Booleans (check boxes): =, < >
7. The Is Constant check box indicates whether the item used to compare against the Field Name value is a
set, or constant, value. When you select this check box, you can then define the constant value you need
through other fields on this rule. Depending on the data type for the selected field (Character, Boolean,
Numeric, and so on), different constant fields activate.
If you do not select this check box (it is clear), you can compare the Field Name against a selected table and
variable field.
8. If you are comparing the Field Name against another field, the To Table column is active. Use this drop-down
list to select the table that contains the field you want to compare against the Field Name value. All the
tables linked to the current report data definition display on this list. After you select a table, the tables
fields then populate the To Field list.
368
9. After you select a table within the To Table drop-down list, select the specific field you wish to evaluate the
Field Name against from the To Field list. All the fields contained within the selected To Table display on
this list.
10. Select the FromToday check box if the rule is based on a number of days from the current date (Today).
This check box is only available if the Is Constant check box is selected. Selecting this check box activates
the FromTodayValue field.
11. Use the RValueDate field to define a specific date for the criterion. The criterion then evaluates its results
based on values filtered by this selected date. If the Is Constant check box is selected for a date field, this
column is available.
12. The FromTodayValue field defines how many days from the current system date (Today) is used to satisfy
this rule. This field is available if the FromToday check box is selected. Enter a numeric value in this field.
13. Use the RValueNumber field to define a specific numeric value for the criterion. The criterion then evaluates
its results based on values filtered by this number. If the Is Constant check box is selected for a decimal field,
this column is available.
14. Enter a Constant Char value to define a specific string for the criterion. The criterion then evaluates its
results based on values filtered by this character string. If the Is Constant check box is selected for a character
field, this column is active.
15. Use the Constant Bool field to define a specific boolean value (True, False) for the criterion. The criterion
then evaluates its results based on values filtered by this Boolean value. If the Is Constant check box is
selected for a check box field, this column is available.
16. Use the Constant Int field to enter a specific integer value for the criterion. The criterion then evaluates its
results based on values filtered by this integer. If the Is Constant check box is selected for an integer field,
this column is available.
17. When you need to nest two or more rules together, enter the Close Parenthesis ) character value in the
RightP field. To define the ending of a group of nested rules, you can enter as many close parenthesis
characters as you need.
369
Add Fields from Linked Tables

If you need to pull additional data for display onto the report, use the Pick Links sheet. This sheet displays the
lookup tables linked to the current table. When you select a table on this sheet, you indicate that data from this
lookup table can display on the current report. You then define which specific fields from the selected table are
used in the report.
To add lookup table fields to your report definition:
1. Navigate to the Report Table > Linked Tables > Pick Links sheet.
2. From the Lookup Available From zLookupLink list, select the lookup table you need.
3. Click the Right Arrow button to move the selected lookup table to the Lookup Picked list.
4. Click Save.
370
5. Now click the Description Fields tab.
6. You can select the specific fields from the lookup table you want to display on the report. If you have selected
multiple lookup tables, first select the table you need from the Pick Fields for this Lookup Link drop-down
list.
7. Within the Fields Available list, select the field you want to display.
8. Click the Right Arrow button to move the selected field to the Fields Picked list.
9. Continue to select the fields from the lookup tables you need. When you finish, click Save.
Add Table Relationships

After you add tables to the report definition, use the Relationship sheets to define any required links, or joins,
needed to display data within the modified report. You use the Detail sheet to define the links you want to create
for a specific table. Use the List sheet to review and update all the links contained within the current report.
To add a relationship to the report definition:
371
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Relationship.
2. Verify that the Relationships > Detail tab is displayed.
3. Enter the Relation identifier you want. This value helps you define the purpose for the table relationship,
as this identifier displays within other locations.
4. Enter the Description text for the relationship. This concise explanation helps you further identify the
purpose of this table relationship.
5. Select the Parent Table you want to link to a child table. The current tables available on this report data
definition display on the drop-down list.
6. The Key field defines the field you want to use to link the parent table and the child table together. An
optional value, selecting a field from this drop-down list helps the report data definition automatically create
a set of relationship fields. Available keys on the parent table display on this list; select the field you need.
372
7. Select the Child Table you want to link to the selected parent table. The current tables available on this
report data definition display on the drop-down list.
8. The Relation Type value defines how these two tables are joined within the report definition. The join you
select from this drop-down list determines how data between these two tables displays within the report.
Available options:
Definition Only This relationship is an inner join; the report will only display data from the parent
table if linking data exists in the child table.
Output This relationship is a left outer join; this report displays all requested data from the parent
table regardless of the linking data available within the child table.
9. You need to add the fields required to define the relationship between the parent table and the child table.
To do this, click the Add button.
10. The Seq column defines the order in which the data is pulled from the parent table and the child table. The
relationship field with a sequence of 1 is used first, followed by 2, and so on. As you add relationship fields,
this sequence number increases.
11. The Parent Field Name defines the field from the parent table used to establish the link to the child field.
All the fields from the parent table display on this drop-down list; select the field you need.
12. The Child Field Name defines the field from the child table used to establish the link to the parent field.
All the fields from the parent table display on this drop-down list; select the field you need.
13. If you need to remove a relationship field, highlight it on the Fields grid and click the Delete button. The
relationship field is removed from the Fields grid.
14. When finished, click Save.
Add Relationship Parameters

You can refine a table relationship further by using the fields on the List sheet.
To further refine the table relationship:
1. Click the Relationships > List tab.
2. The Relation ID, Parent, Child, and Key ID fields display the values you selected on the Relationships >
Detail sheet.
373
3. The Description field displays the text you entered on the Relationships > Detail sheet. If you need, you
can enter different text in this field. Enter a description that helps you further identify the purpose of this
parent-child table relationship.
4. Use the JoinType value to indicate how these two tables are joined within the report definition. The Relation
Type you selected on the Relations > Detail sheet displays by default. If you need, you can change this value.
Available options:
DefOnly This relationship is an inner join; the report only displays data from the parent table if linking
data exists in the child table.
Output This relationship is a left outer join; this report displays all requested data from the parent
table regardless of the linking data available within the child table.
5. Select the SystemFlag check box to indicate this relationship links to a system report. System reports are
the original reports installed with the application, like the Job Traveler, Order Acknowledgment, and so on.
6. Use the Sequence field to define the order in which these field relationships are placed on the EDI flat files.
7. When finished, click Save.
Set Up Report Routing

You can automatically print out different versions of the same report or form using criteria you define. Each time
you print or generate the report/form, any records that match the criteria automatically generate on a report
that uses an alternate report style. To create these styles, you must first set up routing on each report data
definition. This routing information defines the specific columns monitored by the application.
This section briefly describes this functionality. For more details
on creating alternate report styles, review the Alternate Report
Style Maintenance section later in this chapter.
To set up report routing information:
1. Click the Report Routing tab.
2. Select a Primary Table for the routing. You must select a header table from this drop-down list; the
functionality can only evaluate criteria that monitor columns on header tables.
3. Now click the Primary Key1 drop-down list to select a column that you want the functionality to evaluate.
374
4. If you need the Epicor application to monitor two columns, click the Primary Key2 drop-down list, select
the second column you wish to use, and select the Use Multiple Criteria check box.
By default, the application will only monitor the Primary Key1 value unless you select Use Multiple Criteria.
Your report routing is now available for use with an alternate report style.
Report Style Maintenance

Use Report Maintenance to define the variations, or styles, available within the application for your reports and
forms. Use this program to define the reports you have designed within Microsoft SQL Server Report Builder
or another report writer. You also use this program to indicate which styles are available for specific companies.
For this example, you select the report style that uses the Traveler report data definition.
Menu Path: System Management > Reporting > Report Style
Create a Report Style

A report style requires that you have an existing report and report data definition.
1. In Report Maintenance, click the Report ID button to find and select the report you want. In this example,
you select the JobTrav report.
2. The Description field displays the default description for the report. If you need, you can change this value
to something more meaningful for your company.
3. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Report Style.
375
4. In the tree, select the new, unnamed report style node to ensure that the Styles > Style Detail sheet is
displayed. Use this sheet to create and edit the different styles (report writers) you use to print customized
reports. You can also define the default style per company on this sheet.
5. The Style Number displays the identifier for the new report style. You cannot edit this field. When you add
a new style, the application assigns the next sequential style number.
6. Enter a Description for the report style. Enter a meaningful description that explains the purpose for the
report. For this example, you enter Job Traveler - Auto Print Version.
376
7. From the Report Type list, select a valid type for this report style. The report type defines the application
used to print the report. For this example, you select SQL Server Reporting. Available options:
Base Definition The primary version of a report; this version was installed with the Epicor application.
Crystal The report writer used for reports created through the Crystal Reports application.
Outbound EDI This report writer converts .xml into the EDI flat file format. This report can then be
exported out to customers and suppliers through Service Connect to update records.
Epicor Financial Report This report writer is only used for reports created through the Financial Report
Designer.
Bartender Labels This report writer creates flat files in the BarTender format. The first two lines sent
by the writer contain the BarTender template that reads the data, the network printer from where the
labels are printed, and other key information. The rest of this flat file is populated with the data using a
comma-separated format.
SQL Server Reporting The generic report writer used for all reports other than ones specifically created
through the Financial Report Designer.
For more information about sending EDI files to customers
and suppliers, review the EDI Technical Reference Guide
located within application help. To learn about using
Service Connect, review the Epicor Service Connect User
Guide.
8. The Data Definition field displays the applications database schema definition for the report you are
working on. From this fields drop-down list, select Traveler. This value is the data definition you previously
created during the Report Data Maintenance section.
9. Define the Report Location. This defines the path and report file used when you print this report style.
You cannot change the filename for the standard report/forms. You must enter the filename if you add a
new style.
For SSRS reports, this is the folder location and report .rdl file name on the SSRS Report Server.
10. Depending on the Report Type, the Output Location field contains different values:
SQL Server Reporting - This field becomes a drop-down list that defines the data output style for the
SSRS report; available options are Database and XML. In most cases you should select the Database
option, as SSRS reports released with Epicor 10 or higher store information directly within the database.
However if you are defining the style for an older SSRS report and have not migrated it, select the XML
option. Older SSRS reports store data in .xml files.
Bartender Labels - This field can be used to specify a directory path and file name for report output.
Values in this field override the default location in the application server's reports folder.
Outbound EDI - This field can be used to specify a directory path and file name for the report. Values
in this field override the default location in the application server's reports folder.
11. The Output EDI field defines the format that an outbound EDI field will use. You can select either Plain
Text or XML File from this list.
12. Use the Report Options field to define any special options needed when you print this report. For this
example, you leave the field blank.
13. Click Save to populate the Company List grid, which defines the companies within your organization that
can use this report style.
377
14. In Company List grid:

Select the Valid check box if this report style is one that this company can use.
Select the Default check box to indicate this style is always the version used when this company prints
the report.
If you make any adjustments, click Save again.
15. Because this is an SSRS report style, you can restrict which printers are available to print this report. Do this
when you want to limit the report style to only use specialty devices like check printers, plotters, and label
printers. To do this, click the Down arrow next to the New button; select New SSRS Printer.
This feature is optional SSRS functionality. If you do not
set up specific printers on this sheet, all devices defined
as SSRS printers are available as drop-down list options
for the current SSRS report style. For more information
about setting up SSRS printers, review the previous Printer
Maintenance section.
16. On the Styles > SSRS Printers sheet, notice the Style Number for your new style displays in the left
column.
17. Click the Printer drop-down list; all available SSRS printers display on this list. Select the SSRS printer you
need.
18. Continue to add the SSRS printers you want to associate with this report style. When you finish, click Save.
Alternate Report Style Maintenance

You use alternate report styles to automatically print out report versions based on criteria you define. When the
data values on the report/form match criteria defined for an alternate style, the report/form prints or generates
using this alternate style. You can set up this functionality globally across all the companies in your organization
or create alternate report versions for use in specific companies. You can create alternate styles for every report
within the Epicor application.
This functionality overrides the report style selected on each report window. If alternate criteria are defined for
a report and then data matches the criteria, the default report style selected on the report window is ignored by
the application and the alternative style generates instead. However, if data does not match the criteria, the
report prints using the default style selected on the report window.
378
The following sections describe how you create alternate report styles. They incorporate a case study that illustrates
how to create a series of AR invoice form versions that will each print for specific customers. When users print
a batch of invoices for multiple customers, the Epicor application automatically generates the invoice forms using
the alternate versions defined for each customer.
Create Alternate Report Files

Before you use this functionality, you must design and create different report files. Each report file is a version
of a report you run within the Epicor application. You create alternate version files using a third party report
writer like Microsoft SQL Server Report Builder.
These customized reports will be used in the report data definitions and report styles that support alternate
reports.
Define Report Routing

To connect your alternate report version to the Epicor database, you create a report data definition. To do this,
launch Report Data Maintenance and create the report data definitions you need. For more information on
creating report definitions, review the previous Report Data Maintenance section.
To set up the alternate report styles to print automatically, you define routing information on the report data
definition. These values indicate the specific keys (table columns) monitored by the application. Each report
definition routing can be set up to monitor two data columns.
Menu Path: System Management > Reporting > Report Data Definition
To set up report routing information:
1. Create the alternate report definition. In this example, you have used Actions > Duplicate Report to create
a new ARFORMALT report version for the system AR Invoice form called ARForm.
379
2. Click the Report Routing tab.
3. Select a Primary Table for the routing. Even though all the tables used in the current report definition
appear on this list, you must select a header table. The functionality can only monitor columns on report
header tables. For this example, you select the Invoice Header (InvcHead) table.
4. Now click the Primary Key1 drop-down list to select a column you wish to monitor. The columns available
on the selected primary table display on this drop-down list. For this report definition, you want the application
to monitor the Customer ID field. You select Calc_CustID; this field contains the customer identifier used
on each AR invoice.
5. If you need the Epicor application to monitor two columns, click the Primary Key2 drop-down list and
select the second column. For this example, you only want to monitor one key, so you do not select a value
from the Primary Key2 list.
6. By default, the application will only monitor the Primary Key1 value. If you wish to monitor both key values,
select the Use Multiple Criteria check box. Now both keys (columns) must be matched before the alternate
report style generates. As an example, you may want to match a Company value with the Customer ID
value. When both values match criteria you define for the style, the alternate report style activates.
If you are not sure you want to use both key values, do
not select the Use Multiple Criteria check box. You can
then run some test to determine whether you need to
use the Primary Key2 value.
7. When you finish setting up the routing, click Save on the Standard toolbar.
You can repeat these steps to create report definitions and routings for other alternate report versions. These
reports are now linked to tables within your database.
380
Define Report Styles

After create a report data definition to support the alternate report, you next launch Report Style Maintenance
to create report styles. The Epicor application can then use these styles for printing and generating reports. You
create styles as described previously in the Report Style Maintenance section; the following steps briefly describe
this process.
Menu Path: System Management > Reporting > Report Style
To create a new report style:
1. Use the Detail sheet to find and select the report for which you need to create a style. For this example,
you select the ARForm system report.
2. Now create the new report style. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Report
Style.
381
3. Navig0ate to the Styles > Style Detail sheet. You can do this by clicking on the new, unnamed report style
node in the tree.
4. Define the report style. Be sure to select the Data Definition for your alternate report; this value is the
identifier you created in Report Definition Maintenance. For this example, you select ARFORMALT.
5. For this example, the report type is SQL Server Reporting, so indicate the folder location and report .rdl file
on the SSRS report server.
Continue to create the report styles you need for all of your alternate report versions. Once you finish defining
these styles, you are ready to enter specific criteria that will automatically activate these styles.
Define Alternate Report Styles

Your alternate report styles are used to define the specific criteria that activate each alternate report. You enter
the criteria within Alternate Report Style Maintenance. When the report generates and a record matches the
criterion or criteria you define through this program, the report automatically uses the alternate report style.
Menu Path: System Management > Reporting > Alternate Report Style
To create an alternate report style:
382
2. Either click the Report ID button or click the drop-down list and select the report you are working with.
For this example, you select the ARForm system report.
3. Enter the specific value you want within the Criteria 1 field. This value must be available within the Key 1
(table column) you selected on the report definitions routing. Continuing the AR Invoice example, you
indicated the application will monitor the Customer ID column, so you enter JTCORP, a specific customer
identifier. When an invoice prints for the JTCORP customer record, this alternate report style is used to
generate the invoice.
4. If you indicated on the routing that a second criterion is needed, enter a specific value within the Criteria
2 field. Now before a report uses this alternate style, both data values much match on the records selected
for this alternate report style. For this example, a second key was not defined in the report data definition,
so leave the field blank.
5. When this alternate report style will only be used for a specific company, select a Company from this
drop-down list. All companies available within your organization display on this list.
6. You now can select the report style. This example is working with an SSRS report, so select report style
created in the previous task from the SSRS Report drop-down list.
Continue to create the alternate report styles you need. For example, you could define an alternate report style
for each customer within your database. Now when data on an AR invoice record matches the criteria defined
for the alternate style, the alternate style overrides the default style selected on the report window.
This case study demonstrates a simple example using Customer ID values. Typically you set up rules that monitor
report styles based on customer groups, categories, regions, and other higher level identifiers.
For example, if you do business with customers in Poland and the Czech Republic, you would first create one AR
invoice style for each country. You would then set up alternative styles that monitor Country values. The application
would then automatically print out one report for Poland customers and another for Czech Republic customers.
Customers who are not in either country would then receive invoices that use the default report style defined
on the report window.
383
Preview and Print Reports

After you have created report styles and defined which companies can display them, users can then begin using
the reports. Selecting a report from the Epicor ERP application menu opens a report form that controls how the
user can preview and print the report. This section describes the available print controls.
Using the Report Form Controls

Each report form contains settings and actions you can use to define how you want the report to print and for
initiating printing. You can save these options as the default settings, so the next time you launch the report
window these options automatically display. You can also immediately print a hard copy of your report, or preview
the report before you send it to the printer.
In this example, you will set up the default selection options on the Job Traveler report.
1. On the report form, use the Report Options section to define global parameters for the current report.
This section typically contains options you can define for the report, like date ranges and check boxes that
define the records to include.
2. The Filter Summary section indicates that records are selected through the Filter sheets.
384
3. To run the Job Traveler report, you need to select at least one job. Click the Filters tab, and then click Job
to search for and select a job.
4. Click the Selection tab. Notice that Jobs under Filter Summary now indicates Some Selected.
5. Select the Report Style you will use to print or preview the report. All of the report styles you created within
Report Style Maintenance for the current report and approved for use within the current company display
on this drop-down list. By default, most reports have at least an SSRS version, but any other styles you
created display on this drop-down list as well. In this example, you select Standard - SSRS, the default SQL
Services Report installed with your Epicor application.
6. From the Schedule list, select the schedule on which you would like the report to run. Options include
Now, Startup Task Schedule, and any other user-defined schedules created for your company. Schedules
are managed in the System Agent Maintenance program.
385
7. Enter how long you would like this report to stay available by selecting an option from the Archive Period
drop-down list. As long as the system clock has not passed this archive period, the report is available to
preview and print through the System Monitor. This program monitors all of the activity sent to it by the
Epicor application. For more information, review the System Monitor section later in this chapter. Available
Archive Periods:
0 Days
1 Day
1 Week
1 Month
1 Year
Forever
8. To help you identify this version of the report, enter the text you need in the User Description field. This
User Description identifier displays within the System Monitor to help you locate an archived report.
9. You can indicate that the options you have selected are the default values for the report. To do this, from
the Actions menu, select from the following options.
Select Save Defaults to record your current selections on the Selection and Filter sheets. The next time
you launch this report window, the saved settings are applied.
If you made some changes to the report options for the current session but now want to restore your
previously saved settings, select the Get Defaults option. None of your current adjustments are saved.
To restore the installed (shipped) default values for the report, select the Remove Defaults option. The
next time you launch the report, the original report settings display on the window.
10. To send the report to a printer, click the Print button. Choose either a server printer associated with the
application server or choose a client printer that is available to the system where you are running the
application client.
When you select the Server Printer option, the SSRS Printer window displays. Use this window to select
one of the SSRS printers available to you, choose printer setup options, and initiate printing. Your system
administrator determines which SSRS printers are available. For more information about the features of
the SSRS Printer window, see the topic SQL Server Report Print Controls.
When you select Client Printer, the Print window displays the printers connected to your client through
the Add a Printer feature on your windows client. Use this window to select a printer, select printer setup
options, and initiate printing.
386
11. To display the report in a Preview window, click Print Preview. For an SSRS report, the default preview
format is PDF. For more information, see the topic Print Preview.
SQL Server Report Print Controls

When you select an SSRS report style, some additional print functionality is available. These functions give you
control over how you want to print and distribute the SSRS report. Use these controls to define the specific SSRS
printer for the report, the settings for each report page, and any email/ fax recipients who will automatically
receive the report.
To display the SQL Server Report controls:
1. From the report form Report Style drop-down list, select an SSRS report style.
2. Click the Print button on the Standard toolbar and choose Server Printer.
3. The SSRS Printer window displays. Select the SSRS printer you wish to use from the Printer drop-down
list. Typically all printers defined as SSRS printers within Printer Maintenance display on this list. However,
if specific SSRS printers are defined for the report style within Report Style Maintenance, these devices
are the only available options. For more information about adding printer options to this list, review the
previous Printer Maintenance and Report Style Maintenance sections.
4. If you do not want to print a hard copy of this report, select the No Printing check box.
5. The Network Path field displays the directory path used to link the Epicor application to the SSRS printer.
You cannot edit this value; it only displays for your information.
387
6. Adjust the range of pages to print, number of copies, and turn collation on or off.
7. Click the Page Setting tab to adjust the layout of the printed page.
8. Select the Color check box to print out the report using color inks.
9. To switch the report orientation from Portrait (up and down) to Landscape (side to side), select the Landscape
check box.
10. Use the margin fields to define the page dimensions at which the report will print.
11. Adjust the paper stock, paper source, and printer resolution.
12. click the E-Mail tab if you want to send the report as an email attachment.
13. Enter the title for the email in the Subject field, and include any additional text you want to send using the
E-Mail Body field.
14. Indicate the file type you will send from the Attachment Type drop-down list.
15. Use the E-Mail To, E-Mail CC, and E-Mail BCC fields to indicate who will receive the report.
388
16. Click the Fax tab if you want to send the report as a fax.
17. Enter the reason for the fax in the Subject field and enter any additional Text you want sent along with
the report.
18. Define who will receive the fax within the Fax To and Fax Number fields.
19. When you finish, click OK.
The SSRS report prints using the parameters you defined. If you indicated you want to send the report out as an
email attachment or a fax, the report is sent out to the recipients you defined.
Print Preview
You can select the output format you wish to use for previewing the report. The report will then display in the
program that matches your output selection.
1. Click the Output Format drop-down list to select the format you will use for the report.
Available options:
CSV - Displays the report as a comma-separated values (.csv) file. You can then use various programs to
review and print the content of this report.
EMF - Displays the preview using the Enhanced MetaFile (.emf) format. You display this file format
through the Altec Advanced Print Management.
389
You can use the web.config file to define which reports should use the .emf file format by default.
This file is located in the Server folder in your Epicor ERP server installation. Open this file in Notepad
or a similar text editor and locate the <add key="EMFReports"> option. Enter the reports you want
in the Value parameter for this option. For example:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<configuration>
<appSettings>
<add key="EMFReports" value="APEdit;ChgLogReport;JobTrav>

</appSettings>
Excel - Displays the preview in Microsoft Excel.

Excel + Map - Displays the preview through a tree view in Microsoft Excel. You can review the report
data by selecting different nodes on the tree view. You can also click on the main spreadsheet tab to
review the generated report data.
PDF - Displays the preview in Adobe Reader.
Word - Displays the preview in Microsoft World.
XML - Displays the report using the .xml file format. You can then review this report using various
programs that display .xml file content.
For an SSRS report, the available output types are PDF (the default), Word, Excel, and Excel+Map.
2. Click the Print Preview button.
3. The report displays in the program you selected for the output.
The status of a report task can be seen in the application System Monitor. For more information, see the
topic System Monitor.
390
The System Monitor

You can check on the status of your printed reports through the System Monitor. You would use this program,
for example, if the report does not preview or print as expected and you need to find out the reason for the
error. You can also use this program to print any archived reports.
To display the System Monitor:
1. On your desktop System Tray, select the System Monitor icon.
2. The System Monitor displays with information about application activity displayed on four sheets.
3. The Reports sheet displays all reports/forms programs you have run. All report programs (running on the
appserver) generate physical files. These files are the data source that the System Monitor (running on the
client) uses to perform the actual printing. The TaskAgent (also running on the application server) runs a
purge of the reports approximately every 15 minutes. To keep a specific report file available for a longer
length of time, use the Archive Period field on the report/form program. When you enter a value in this
field, the TaskAgent does not purge it until the system clock passes this defined Archive Period value.
4. The Active Tasks sheet displays the reports, processes, executive queries, or other items currently running.
5. The History Tasks sheet displays the reports, processes, executive queries, or other tasks run in the past.
Records automatically purge from this sheet when they are 30 or more days old.
6. The Scheduled Tasks sheet displays any reports, processes, executive queries, or other tasks scheduled to
run in the future.
391
Auto Printing with BPM

Report auto printing can be enabled by creating a Business Process Management (BPM) standard data directive
with an Auto Print action in its workflow. Introduced in Epicor 10, the BPM Auto Print action replaces the Business
Activity Manager Auto-Print event used in previous Epicor ERP releases.
Working in the BPM Workflow Designer, an Auto Print action is configured by selecting a report, selecting a
printer and print options, and configuring the mapping of input values for report parameters. In the workflow,
the Auto Print action can be triggered by events such as the output from an Execute Custom Code action or the
state of a Condition action.
For more information, review the Business Process Management section in the Epicor ERP Online Help.
Report Form Customization

You can modify a report by customizing its window (form) and adding fields that define additional parameters
for generating the report. Within the customized window, you can create form and row rules that run whenever
users enter data or perform other actions which activate these rules. These rules in turn launch custom events
that you define on the customization.
You can further customize the report itself within Microsoft
SQL Server Report Builder or another SSRS report writer. For
example, you can prompt users to enter more parameters for
report generation and you can add additional table fields to
the displayed information.
Customize a Report Form

The Epicor ERP application customization functionality is enabled when you run in Developer Mode. The customized
version is deployed to your users by enabling it on the application menu.
The following procedure provides an overview of the workflow for enabling and working with customization
tools.
392
1. Turn on Developer Mode. From the application Home Page, go to the Settings Page, select General
Options and then select Developer Mode.
2. Navigate to and open the report.

With Developer Mode enabled, the Select Customization window displays. All existing customizations for
the report display. For this example, there are no existing customizations.
3. To create a customization from the original report form, select the Base Only check box and click OK.
393
4. The report form displays. To customize this form, click the Tools menu and select Customization.
5. The Customization Tools Dialog displays on top of the report form window. Notice also that a grid now
overlays on top of the report form.
6. You can now add fields, create rules, and modify the code for the report program. You access all of this
functionality within the various tabs and the Tools menu on the Customization Tools Dialog.
394
To learn about the customization tools, review the Epicor ICE User Experience and Customization Guide.
Multiple chapters within this book describe all of the customization tools in detail.
7. After you finish customizing the form, click Save on the Customization Tools Dialog.
8. In the Customization Save Dialog enter a unique Name for the customization. For this example, enter
Job Traveler Custom01.
9. Enter a Description that helps identify the purpose for the customized BAQ report. For this example, enter
Report Customization Demo.
10. Click Save. Optionally enter comments when prompted and click OK. Exit Customization Tools Dialog.
395
11. Turn off Developer Mode. From the application Home Page, go to the Settings Page, select General
Options and then clear Developer Mode.
12. You now can add the customization to the application menu. Open Menu Maintenance
Menu Path: System Setup > System Maintenance > Menu Maintenance
In the Menu Maintenance tree, select the report for which you have created a customization. In this example,
navigate to and select Job Traveler.
13. On the Detail sheet, select the customization from the Customization drop-down list.
396
Your customized form now is applied when the report is selected from the application menu. Users within the
current company will now use this custom version of the report.
397
Chapter 14 | Security
Chapter 14: Security

You control access to the Epicor ERP application through the security functionality. By identifying which users need
and do not need access to various programs, you ensure the integrity of the data entered in the application.
You can first restrict access to various parts of the Menu through run time arguments. By adding a Menu ID run time
argument to a desktop icon, the Epicor application will only display the programs available under this specific Menu
ID.
If you have more comprehensive security requirements, you define internal security for your application through two
key programs. First, use Security Group Maintenance to create groups that identify user related areas within your
organization. Then assign all users to these security groups through User Account Maintenance. With security groups
and their selected users defined, you can then assign security privileges throughout the application. For example, you
may want to prevent access to Payroll programs for most users. You can use the security privilege tools to only give
members of the Payroll security group access to these programs.
You define security access through three maintenance programs. Menu Maintenance can prevent programs from being
displayed for specific security groups and users. To block access to a program or program function (like updating
records) from wherever it can be launched, use Process Security Maintenance. You can also block or limit access to a
specific field by using Field Security Maintenance.
To review security settings and user activity, you run reports. The Menu Security report displays the current access rights
specific users and security groups have on the Menu. Other reports are available that display user activity, so run these
reports to verify the security settings you defined work as expected.
Run Time Argument Menu Control

Each Epicor ERP desktop icon can be set up to launch the Epicor application in a specific mode. These modes, or
run time arguments, activate immediately when a user double-clicks the desktop icon.
If you use the classic style interface, you can use the /menuid run time argument to cause the Main Menu to
only display programs that appear below a specific menu node. When a user launches the Epicor application
through this icon, the tree view displays the selected menu node and the programs that exist beneath this
node.This feature is an effective way to quickly set up a level of security on workstations.
As of this writing, you cannot use run time arguments to
control menu security in the Modern Shell style interface.
You can also use the /TE and /CRM run time arguments to set up unique concurrent user licenses. The /TE
argument limits the Main Menu to display only the Time and Expense functionality, while the /CRM argument
limits the Main Menu to display the Customer Relationship Management functionality. These unique licenses
consume a different concurrent user pool. Activate these licenses either when you want to limit a workstation
to display only these specific functions or when you want to set up additional licenses separate from the general
user pool.
To leverage this feature, you display the Properties window for the Epicor ERP icon and then modify the Target
field to include a menu ID run time argument. You can find the specific menu identifier you need within Menu
Maintenance. This program is described later within this chapter.
For this example, to limit a workstation to only display programs in the Accounts Receivable module:
398
Security | Chapter 14
1. On the desktop for the workstation, right-click the Epicor ERP icon.
2. A context menu displays. Select the Properties option.

3. The applications Properties window appears, displaying the Shortcut tab.
4. In the Target field, enter a [Space] after the target directory path. If you need, enter the /config run time
argument to indicate which configuration settings file the icon will use.
5. Next add a right slash (/) and enter the "/classic" run time argument. This causes the application to launch
using the Classic style interface.
6. Lastly add the specific Menu ID you want the interface to display. In this example, you only want the
Accounts Receivable programs to display, so you enter a "/menuid=ARMN0000" value.
Your Target field will resemble something like the following path: C:\EUQA\Epicor\ERP10\ERP10.0
.100\Client\Epicor.exe /config=EUQA.sysconfig /classic /menuid=ARMN0000
7. Click Apply.
399
8. Click OK.
9. Now when users launch the Epicor ERP application on this workstation, they only see the Accounts Receivable
module on their Main Menu tree view.
This method may not limit access to all the programs you intend. Several programs can still be launched by
right-clicking various fields. For example, users in AR Invoice Entry could still launch Part Maintenance from the
Part/Rev fields context menu. You will need to use other security methods described later in this chapter to
restrict access to the programs available on context menus.
Security Group Maintenance

Use Security Group Maintenance to define the various function areas, or security groups, that best reflect the
employee structure for your organization. After creating these security groups, you can then assign specific users
to these groups.
Before you create security groups, you should design an overall security plan. Determine what levels of security
access you need and which users will belong in each access level. You can then launch this program to create
the security groups that match your security plan.
Menu Path: System Setup > Security Maintenance > Security Group Maintenance
Create a Security Group

To create a new security group:
400
2. Enter the Group Code for your new group. This defines the identifier used for the security group. In this
example, you enter PROD.
3. Now enter a Description for this security code. This text displays within the security programs, so enter a
brief, concise explanation for the group in this field. In this example, you enter _Production Staff.
If you place an underscore (_) or a period (.) in front of
the Description, the security group sorts to the top of the
list in the security programs. This makes the new security
group much easier to find.
4. Click Save.
You have now created the Production Staff security group. Repeat these steps to create all the security groups
you need.
User Account Maintenance

Launch User Account Maintenance to assign users to both security privileges and security groups. Epicor
recommends you assign all users to security groups. This simplifies your security setup, as you do not need to
assign security to individual users. This approach also ensures you implement security through an organized and
clearly defined method.
The security functionality is flexible, as you can assign a single user to multiple security groups. The application
handles any conflicts between security groups through an access hierarchy. If a user is assigned to security group
Engineering, which allows access to the Engineering Workbench, and security group Purchasing, which does
not, the user will still be able to launch the Engineering Workbench. The security group with more access overrides
the security group with less access. Likewise, if a user is assigned rights to a program, but is assigned to a group
which is not, the user is still able to launch the program.
User rights have precedence over group rights, and the Allow Access setting has precedence over the Disallow
Access setting.
Menu Path: System Setup > Security Maintenance > User Account Security Maintenance
Assign User Privileges

To assign user privileges on the Group sheet:
401
1. Click the User ID button to find and select a specific user. In this example, Fred Grandy is selected.
2. Optionally, you can limit what this user sees on the Main Menu by entering a value in the Client Start
Menu ID field. Enter a menu identifier for either a sub-menu or a program. When this user launches the
Epicor application, only the contents under the specific sub-menu identifier or the specific program display
on the Main Menu. This feature is similar to the run-time arguments described in a previous section. However
this feature limits a user account to a specific menu. Whenever this user logs into the application, regardless
of the workstation, this person can only access the menu you define in this field.
You use Menu Maintenance to find menu identifiers. This
program is described later in this chapter.
3. Click the Options sheet.

4. If this user manages security, select the Security Manager check box. Users with this security access can
define and change the profiles of themselves and other users. They can also access all security programs.
As a good business practice, you should not give yourself
Security Manager access on your normal user account.
This ensures the menu choices you make on your normal
login are appropriate for your typical daily routine. It also
ensures that other employees do not grant security access
to themselves when you are away from your computer.
402
Instead, create a separate Security Manager account you

use for security tasks.
5. If this user account can be selected on system agent and task agent services, select the Allow Session
Impersonation check box. This user can then run all report and process tasks assigned to schedules, as this
user can impersonate all users who assign tasks to the system agent.
6. Use the Tools Options section to assign or prevent this user from accessing various tools and functions
throughout the application. A number of check box options are here; select the options you want available
to this user. For example, if you select the Allow Personalization check box, Fred Grandy is able to personalize
all programs he uses.
7. Use the Access Options section to allow or prevent this user from viewing information within a web browser,
mobile device, and enterprise-wide searches.
8. Use the System Options section to allow or prevent this user from running system-wide capabilities such
as company annotations and adding favorites icons to the Favorites bar.
Specific options are discussed in other chapters
throughout the Epicor ICE Tools User Guide and the Epicor
ICE User Experience and Customization Guide. For a
complete list of these options, review the User Account
Maintenance > Options topic within the application help.
9. When you finish assigning this users security privileges, click Save.
403
Assign User Groups

You assign user groups on the Group sheet:
1. Click the Group sheet.
2. The Available list displays all security groups to which Fred Grandy can be assigned. He is an engineer, so
you want to add him to the Production Staff group. Highlight this group from the list.
4. The Production Staff security group now moves to the Authorized list. Fred is now an official member of
this group.
5. To assign Fred to all the security groups, click the Double Right Arrow button.
6. Notice you can also remove security groups from the Authorized list. You do this by highlighting the group
from this list and then clicking the Left Arrow button.
404
7. To remove all the security groups from the Authorized list, click the Double Left Arrow button.
8. When you finish assigning this user to security groups, click Save.
This user is now a member of one or more security groups. When you use this security group on a menu item,
process, method, table, or field, this user (and other users in the group) either has or does not have access to
this item.
Assign User Companies and Sites

You also determine which companies and sites the current user can access. You assign company and site
permissions on the Company > Detail sheet.
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button and select New Company from the menu.
2. Select a Company option from the drop-down list.
405
3. Select an Employee to indicate the name this user will enter as a shop employee within the selected
company. If this user will log in as a shop employee, you must either enter or select the shop employee
name for this user account.
4. Optionally, select a Work Station the current user will log into within the selected company. Workstations,
or packing stations, are used to establish the scale and manifest interface for each pack station.
You create and edit shop employees within Shop
Employee Maintenance, and you create/edit work station
records in Work Station Maintenance.
5. To indicate the user can update time entries for any employee, select the Can Update Time for All
Employees check box. This user then has management access to time records in the Time Management
module.
6. Likewise, you can select the Can Update Expenses for All Employees to indicate the user can update
expense entries for any employee. This user then has management access to expense records in the Expense
Management module.
7. Now from the Available Sites list, select a site to which the current user needs to access.
8. Click the Single Right Arrow button.
The site moves to the Authorized Sites list.
406
9. Alternately if the user should have access to all sites in the current company, click the Double Right Arrow
button.
All sites move to the Authorized Sites list.

10. To remove a site from the Authorized Sites list, highlight the site and click the Single Left Arrow button.
11. To remove all the sites, click the Double Left Arrow button.
12. A list of all companies authorized for this user displays on the Company List sheet.
13. To edit a company in this user's account, select it on the Authorized Companies grid and then return to
this Company Detail sheet to edit what sites are available for this user.
14. You can also remove a company record from the Company List sheet. To do this, highlight the company
click Delete on the Standard toolbar.
Menu Maintenance
You use Menu Maintenance for two security functions. First you use this program to create Security Identifier
(ID) records; you then assign users and security groups to each Security ID record. Now when you select a Security
407
ID record on a menu node or program, only users/security groups assigned to this Security ID record can access
the menu item/program.
Menu Path: System Setup > Security Maintenance > Menu Maintenance
Create a Security ID
You create security IDs on the Security sheet. To create a new security ID:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Security.
2. Enter the Security ID you want for this security level. In this example, you enter UD78. The UD prefix stands
for user-defined. This prefix value indicates this record is a Security ID you have created.
3. Enter a Description that includes the purpose for this security level. In this example, you enter Production
Staff Engineering.
4. Select the Security Manager Access Only check box to indicate that only security managers can access
programs assigned to this security level. No other users are able to see these programs.
You should select this option only when you want this ID to override all other security settings. This option
is useful when you are first setting up security, as it blocks all access until you create a security plan. You
indicate which users have security manager rights within User Account Maintenance. Review the previous
User Account Maintenance section for more information.
5. Select the Current Company Only check box to apply this security code against menu structure for the
current company. Only users with access through this security code can display and launch the programs
within this company node, but this security code is not applied against other companies. If the Current
Company Only check box is not selected (check box is clear), this security code is applied against all companies
within your Epicor application.
408
For example, if security code SEC545 is defined for Company A and its Current Company Only check box
is selected, only users with access can expand this company node and display its programs. However this
security code does not affect other areas of the menu. If security code SEC545 does not have its Current
Company Only check box selected, then this level of security is applied against all companies within the
application.
While you assign security, always remember the security
hierarchy. If a user is assigned to two groups and one
group has access to a program while the other does not,
the group with access has precedence and the user can
launch the program. The same is true when a user has
access to a program while a security group does not; the
user is still able to launch the program. Users are higher
in the security hierarchy than groups, and groups with
access are higher in the hierarchy over groups that do not
have access.
6. To prevent users within this security group from launching the Epicor application within an internet browser,
select the Exclude Epicor Web Access check box.
7. The Menu Options field displays all the programs that currently use this security level. Because this record
is a new security ID, this field is blank. As you select this security ID for specific programs, this field displays
the selected programs that use this identifier.
8. If you select the Allow Access to All Groups/Users check box to give everyone in the company access to
programs that use this security level. To limit this security level to specific users and/or groups, you first must
clear this check box.
9. When you clear the Allow Access to All Groups/Users check box, the Groups/Users and Selected
Groups/Users lists become active. However until you add users and/or groups to the Selected Groups/Users
409
list, nobody has access through this security level. Be sure you are ready to assign security before you clear
this check box.
10. Highlight the specific group or user for which you want to give security access. In this example, you select
the Production Staff security group.
12. The user or group displays on the Selected Groups/Users list.
Any groups or users that remain in the Groups/Users list
do not have access to the programs assigned to this
security level.
13. Continue to use the Arrow Buttons to add and remove users/groups from this security level.
410
14. To prevent specific users/groups from accessing this security level, click the Disallow Access tab.
15. Select the Disallow Access to All Groups/Users check box to prevent everyone in the company from
accessing programs assigned to this security level. To disallow security access to specific users and/or groups,
you first must clear this check box.
The Groups/Users and Selected Groups/Users lists become active. However until you add users and/or
groups to the Selected Groups/Users list, everyone has access through this security level. Be sure you are
ready to assign security before you clear the Disallow Access to All Groups/Users check box.
have access to programs assigned to this security level.
16. Use the Arrow Buttons to add and remove users/groups from this security level.
You can now select this Security ID on any program you need. You do this on the Menu Maintenance > Detail
sheet.
Assign Menu Security

When you assign a Security ID to a selected program, only those users given access through this security level
can launch the program. If a security group (or user) is not included in the security ID, individuals in this group
(or user) cannot launch this program from their Menu.
To assign a Security ID to a specific program:
411
1. Click the Detail sheet.
2. In the Tree View, select the program you want to secure. In this example, you select the Engineering
Workbench.
If you change the security ID for a standard menu item,
this ID reverts back to its original security ID when you
install the next service pack. You should either use this
functionality only for custom programs or be prepared to
reassign the menu security IDs after a service pack
installation.
3. Click the Security ID button to find and select the Security ID you need.
412
4. For this example, you select the UD78 security ID you just created.
5. Notice the Web Access value indicates this program is available to display within a web browser. Users will
be able to see this node within the Epicor Web Access version of the application. You indicated this option
on the security group by clicking the Exclude Epicor Web Access check box.
6. Click Save.
This program is assigned to this security level. Continue to assign security levels to the programs you need on
the Menu.
You can also use Menu Maintenance to add customizations
and localizations to the Menu. These instructions are available
in the Epicor ICE User Experience and Customization Guide;
review the Customization Utilities and the Localization chapters.
Process Security Maintenance

Use Process Security Maintenance to define user access to both business objects (processes) and the methods
within these business objects. You can then block selected security groups and users from accessing specific
functionality within the application.
For example, the Terms business object is located on the Menu in several locations; it can also be called from
context menus within various programs. If you want to completely prevent the Production Staff security group
from launching this business object, you can indicate this security group cannot access this program. Likewise,
you may only want to prevent this security group from updating Terms codes. In this situation, you would limit
the access this security group has to the update method (BO.Terms.Update). You define business object (process)
security on the Process sheet; you define method security on the Method sheet.
When a business object is secure, all methods within this business object are also secure. This can lead to
unexpected results, as the methods will not run through Service Connect, embedded processes, and from other
413
menu options. You should assign security in a test environment first before you deploy security within your live
environment.
Menu Path: System Setup > Security Maintenance > Process Security Maintenance
Process (Business Object) Security

You define a business objects security by first selecting it and then indicating which groups/users can and cannot
access it.
To define process security:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Object.
2. Now click the Process ID button or the Search button (Binoculars) on the Standard toolbar to find and
select the business object you need. In this example, the bo.ARInvoice business object is selected.
3. The System Code field indicates which part of the system the selected business object belongs. Application
items (jobs, AR invoices, quotes, and so on) are ERP business objects; framework items (companies, user
accounts, dashboards, and so on) are ICE business objects.
4. To restrict this business object to security managers, select the Security Manager Access Only check box.
This indicates that only users defined as Security Managers within User Account Maintenance are able
to access this business object. To learn how to do this, review the previous User Account Maintenance
section.
5. Select the Current Company Only check box to apply this security setting for the process against the
current company. However this setting does not apply to this process in other companies. If the Current
Company Only check box is not selected (check box is clear), this security setting is applied to this process
across all companies in your system.
6. By default, the Allow Access to All Groups/Users check box is selected. To only permit access to specific
groups and users, clear this check box.
414
Now that this check box is not active, nobody has access to this business object until you add users and/or
groups to the Selected Groups/Users list. Be sure you are ready to assign security before you clear this
check box.
7. From the Groups/Users list, select a security group or user.
9. The security group or user now displays within the Selected Groups/Users list. Continue to add the groups
and users you need.
do not have access to this business object.
10. To remove access for a group or user from the Selected Groups/Users list, highlight the group or user and
click the Left Arrow button.
11. To remove access for all groups and users, click the Double Left Arrow button.
415
12. You can also prevent specific users and groups from accessing this business object. To do this, click the
Disallow Access tab.
13. By default, the Disallow Access to All Groups/Users check box is selected. To prevent access to specific
Notice that until you add users and/or groups to the Selected Groups/Users list, everyone has access to
this business object. Be sure you are ready to assign security before you clear this check box.
14. You can now define the specific groups and users that cannot use this business object. From the
Groups/Users list, select a security group or user. Click the Right Arrow button.
and users you need.
Any groups or users that remain in the Groups/ Users list
have access to this business object.
16. To give a group or user security access from the Selected Groups/Users list, highlight the group or user and
click the Left Arrow button. In this example, the _Production Staff security group displays in the Groups/Users
list, so only this group has access to the AR Invoice code business object. Notice you can achieve the same
result on the Allow Access and Disallow Access tabs; you just use a different access condition.
17. To restore access for all groups and users, click the Double Left Arrow button.
416
Method Security
You can also use Process Security Maintenance to define security for methods within a selected business object.
A method is an action run within a process like Update, Get New, Approve, and so on. For example, you can use
this functionality to permit a user to add a release to an existing purchase order but prevent this same user from
creating a new purchase order.
Not all business objects have multiple methods. This sheet is
only for more complex business objects that perform a variety
of actions. You can see all the methods contained in a business
object by using the Adapter tab found within the Custom
Object Explorer. For information on this program, use the Epicor
ICE User Experience and Customization Guide; review the
Custom Object Explorer section within the Advanced
Customization chapter. For a complete list of business objects
and their methods, use the Business Object Reference Guide.
This .pdf guide is available for download on EPICWeb.
To define security for a selected method:
1. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Method.
2. Select the Method Name from the drop-down list. In this example, the GetRows in bo.ARInvoice method
is selected.
3. To restrict this method to security managers, select the Security Manager Access Only check box. This
indicates that only users defined as Security Managers within User Account Maintenance are able to
access this method. To learn how to do this, review the previous User Account Maintenance section.
417
4. Select the Current Company Only check box to apply this security setting for this method against the
current company. However this setting does not apply to this process in other companies. If the Current
Company Only check box is not selected (check box is clear), this security setting is applied to this method
across all companies in your database.
5. By default, the Allow Access to All Groups/Users check box is selected. To only permit access to specific
Now that this check box is not active, nobody has access to this method until you add users and/or groups
to the Selected Groups/Users list. Be sure you are ready to assign security before you clear this check box.
6. You can now define the specific groups and users who can use this method. From the Groups/Users list,
select a security group or user.
8. The security group or user displays within the Selected Groups/Users list. Continue to add the groups and
users you need.
do not have access to this method.
9. To remove access for a group or user from the Selected Groups/Users list, highlight the group or user and
click the Left Arrow button.
10. To remove access for all groups and users, click the Double Left Arrow button.
418
11. You can also prevent specific users and groups from accessing this method. To do this, click the Disallow
Access tab.
12. To prevent all groups and users from accessing this method, click the Disallow Access to All Groups/Users
check box.
Now until you add users and/or groups to the Selected Groups/Users list, everyone has access to this
method. Be sure you are ready to assign security before you clear this check box.
13. You can now define the specific groups and users that cannot use this method. From the Groups/Users
list, select a security group or user. Click the Right Arrow button.
and users you need.
have access to this method.
15. To give a group or user security access from the Selected Groups/Users list, highlight the group or user and
click the Left Arrow button. In this example, the _Production Staff security group displays in the Groups/Users
list, so only this group has access to the GetRows in bo.ARInvoice method. Notice you get the same result
on the Allow Access and Disallow Access tabs; you just use a different access condition.
16. To restore access for all groups and users, click the Double Left Arrow button.
419
Field Security Maintenance

Use Field Security Maintenance to define security privileges at the field level. You use this program to first select
either a database table or an extended user defined table and then allow, limit, or prevent access to specific fields
within the selected table. Each field can have a unique security level assigned to it; this level can be globally
defined for the whole organization, specifically defined for the current company, or specifically defined for a
selected user or group.
Menu Path: System Setup > Security Maintenance > Field Security Maintenance
Assign Global Field Security

You can assign security to a specific field that then applies to the entire organization or a specific company.
To assign field level security:
1. The database in the Epicor ERP application is organized into different families of tables, or schemas. Click
the Schema drop-down list to select the schema that contains the table you need to secure. Typically you
select the Erp option, as this schema contains the tables for application processes that record manufacturing,
distribution, and financial activity.
2. Click the Table button to find and select the database table which contains the fields you need to secure.
For this example, you select the APInvHed table.
3. The Description field displays the purpose of the selected table.
4. In the Tree View, highlight the specific field for which you want to define security. For this example, you
select the TaxAmt field. This field is the Tax Amount field in AP Invoice Entry.
5. The Field Name displays the name of the selected field.
6. If the Primary Key check box is active, it indicates the current field is required by the database. You cannot
change the security option for a Primary Key field; usually these fields are for identifiers like the Customer
ID, Part ID, and so on. The TaxAmt field is not a primary key, so for this example, the check box is clear.
420
7. The Description field displays the purpose of the field.

8. Click the Default Access drop-down list to define the security option for the current field. Available options:
Full Users can both view and enter data within this field. This security option is the default.
Read This option assigns display-only (read-only) rights to the current field. Users can only view data
within this field; users cannot enter any data within it.
None This security option causes the field to be blank. No data displays in this field, and users cannot
enter any data in it. Be aware that the None setting also causes the fields data to not be included when
the dataset is sent to and from its program. This can have unintended consequences for processes, like
BPM directives, which may require this data.
9. If you want this security level to just apply to the company you are currently logged into, select the Current
Company Only check box. If you keep this check box clear, the security level you define for this field is
used globally throughout your organization.
Depending on whether you select the Current Company
Only check box, the security option you select on the
Access drop-down list is either applied against the entire
organization or the current company.
Group and User Field Security

You can also assign security to a field that only applies to a specific user or security group. To assign field security
for a user/group:
1. Click the Table button to find and select the database table which contains the fields you need to secure.
2. In the Tree View,select the specific field for which you want to define security. For this example, you select
the CurrencyCode field.
421
3. Click the Users/Groups tab.

4. Select the user or security group for which you want to define security. In this example, you select the user
Aaron Christiansen.
5. Click the Access column to display the drop-down list. Once again you have the Full, Read, and None security
options. You also have the Default option; select this option when you want the user or security group to
use the global security level assigned for this field on the Detail sheet. For this example, you select the Full
option.
6. Continue to define security for this user by selecting other fields from the tree view. In this example, you
select the RateGrpCode field.
7. You want to give Aaron read-only rights to this field. Click the Access column and select the Read security
option.
422
8. Lastly, you want to prevent Aaron from seeing any data displayed in the ExchangeRate field. Select this
field on the tree view.
9. Click the Access column and select the None security option.
Test Field Security

Now that you have defined field security for Aaron for the AP Invoice Header table, you can see the security
options in action. To do this, you log in using Aaron's user account. You then navigate to AP Invoice Entry.
Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > General Operations > Invoice Entry
423
1. Find and select an invoice group on the Group sheet.
2. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Invoice.
3. On the Header > Detail sheet, review the fields in the Currency group box.
4. Aaron can click on the Currency drop-down list and select a different currency. He has Full access rights to
this field.
5. The Rate Type drop-down list displays in read only mode. Aaron cannot change the Rate Type on AP
invoices.
6. Notice the Exchange Rate field is completely blank. Aaron cannot see the exchange rate value used for
the selected currency.
Review Field Security Settings

You can review the field security settings defined on the current table for a specific user through the User Effective
Rights window. This tool only displays the security rights for a selected user, so you can quickly verify the field
security rights assigned for a user on the current table are correct.
To review field security settings:
424
1. From the Actions menu, select User Effective Rights.
2. The User Effective Rights window displays.
3. Click the User button to find and select a specific user. In this example, you select the Aaron Christiansen
user account.
4. The field security rights assigned to Aaron for the APInvHed table display. If you sort by FieldName, you
alphabetize the fields.
5. In this example, you see that Aaron has Read access rights for the RateGrpCode field.
6. You can also sort this grid by the Access column to place the Full, Read, and None access settings together.
7. Repeat these steps to review field security for other users. When you finish reviewing the field security
options assigned on the current table, click Close.
425
Reset a Field
If you want to restore the security rights assigned to a specific field, use the Reset Field feature. This feature
causes Field Security Maintenance to revert all the security options for the selected field back to the default value
for all users and groups.
To remove security changes for a specific field:
1. In the tree view, select the field for which you want to revert back. For this example, you select the
RateGrpCode field.
2. From the Actions menu, select Reset Field.

3. All the security options you changed are removed. Notice that on the Users/Groups sheet, the Access
column displays the Default value on all rows for the RateGrpCode field, including the Aaron Christiansen
row. Previously, you had assigned the Read Only security option to this field for Aaron.
Reset a Table
You can also restore an entire table back to its default field security options. This feature removes all changes
you made for all users on the selected table.
To reset a table:
426
1. From the Actions menu, select Reset Table.
2. To verify the table is restored to its default value, you select the ExchangeRate field.
3. Notice that on the Users/Groups sheet, the Access column displays the Full value on all rows for the
ExchangeRate field, including the Aaron Christiansen row. Previously, you had assigned the None security
option to this field for Aaron.
Security Reports
Run the security reports to manage user and security group activity within the Epicor application. Each report
displays a specific view of user activity. Use these reports to evaluate your security settings and practices.
Menu Security Report

Use the Menu Security report to review the current access users and security groups have to items on the Menu.
Generate this report to evaluate the security currently defined for your programs.
You can review the security for users, security groups, or both. You can also filter this report to only display access
for a specific program, user, or security group. This key report can give you a complete overview of the security
plan currently in place.
This report has a number of parameters you define. The more information you include, the longer it takes to
generate this report. You should heavily filter the results the first time you run this report. After you view this
sample report, you can then expand the filters until the report displays the results you want.
To use the Menu Security report:
427
1. Select the New Page Per User/Group check box to cause this report start a new page each time it encounters
a new user or group.
2. Select the Include Allow Information check box to display the reason why each user is granted access to
the listed programs. When this feature is active, the report displays one of the following Allow types:
Security Manager The user is a security manager.
Group This user can use the program because this person is a member of a security group with access
to it.
Directly This specific user account is granted access to the program.
All This user has access because all user accounts can launch this program.
3. If you want to display all the security managers who have complete access to the Menu, select the Include
Security Managers check box.
4. To display all the users currently assigned to security groups, select the Recap Users on Group check box.
5. Notice the three Filter options. You can limit this report to display only Users or Security Groups. The
default value is Both; this causes the report to display all users and security groups.
6. To filter this report to only display security access for a specific program (Menu Item), click the Menu ID
button to find and select this specific program.
7. You can also limit this report to only display access for selected Users or Security groups. To do this, click
the Filter sheet.
8. The Filter Summary section indicates whether some or all Users and/or some or all Security Groups are
included in the report.
9. You can also indicate how you want to organize the report. You can Sort By User/Group or Group/User.
10. To print this report, click the Down Arrow next to the Print button. You can send this report to a client
printer linked directly to your computer or to a server printer available on the network.
428
11. To view this report, click the Print Preview button.

You can now use this report to evaluate how your security plan is currently implemented.
Change Log Report

The Change Log report displays activity that occurred in the database during a specific period of time. You can
limit this report to only display activity entered against a selected table. Leverage this report to see what changes
specific users are making to the database.
Menu Path: System Setup > Security Maintenance > Change Log Report
1. Select the Start Date for the report. All database activity that occurred on or after this date is included on
the report.
2. Select an End Date for the report. All database activity that occurred on or before this date is included on
the report.
3. Notice you can also select the Dynamic check box for each date field. This changes the date fields to display
a date parameter like Today, Next Monday, First of the Month, and so on. Use these options to run this
report through a dynamic date value. If you select Today, the report generates using the current date; if you
select End of month - 1 month, the report generates using the last date from the previous month.
When you save these settings, the report uses the dynamic
parameters each time you launch the report, so you do
not need to manually select a specific date. Likewise if
you set up this report to print through a recurring
schedule, the report generates using these dynamic values.
To see a list of the available options, review the Dynamic
Date Options topic in the application help.
4. Click the Filter tab to find and select a specific database table. The report then only displays activity that
occurred in the selected table.
printer linked directly to the computer or a server printer available on the network.
429
Users/Groups Report
Run the Users/Groups report to review the current list of users assigned to a specific group or groups. Although
you can run this report to display all security groups and users, you can also limit this report to display a specific
group or user.
1. To review the users and security groups in the current company, verify all Groups and Users are selected.
2. You can also click the Filter tab to find and select a specific user and/or group. Only information on the
selected users/groups display on the report.
3. Click the Sort drop-down list to define how you want to organize this report.
430
User Session Log Report

Run the User Session Log report to review how often all users or a specific user accessed the Epicor ERP application.
You enter a date range and can optionally select either all users or a specific user. The report displays the Log on
and Log off date/time for each time the user accessed the Epicor ERP application.
1. Select the Start Date for the report. All user sessions that occurred on or after this date are included on
the report.
2. Enter an End Date for the report. All user sessions that occurred on or before this date are included on the
report.
3. Click the Filter tab to find and select a specific user. Only user sessions initiated by a specific user display
on the report results.
431
Chapter 15 | Startup Configurations
Chapter 15: Startup Configurations

You can modify the startup routine, or configuration, for each Epicor client. When the Epicor client launches, it uses
the parameters you defined to activate local options and interact with the server. To do this, leverage Configuration
Settings Files and Run Time Arguments. By using different startup configurations and run time arguments, you can
specifically configure how the application runs on each workstation.
For example, if you want the application help hosted on a separate server from the deployment server, you would
modify the configuration settings file by entering the servers URL in the helpServerURL attribute. You would then
update this parameter on all configuration settings files throughout the company. You can also modify a specific
workstation with these tools. You can set up the configuration settings file to have the application use custom images
or define a run time argument that launches the application using the MES interface.
By changing just a few parameters within the configuration settings files and setting up run time arguments, you define
how the application launches on each workstation and interacts with the server.
Configuration Settings File

For the application to launch, it must find a configuration settings file. This file defines the main settings for both
your server installation and each client installation. If the .exe file can see the default.sysconfig file (or a different
.sysconfig file specified through a run time argument), the application launches on the workstation. The
configuration settings file is an .xml formatted file that uses syntax understood by the application.
This section explains how you modify the configuration settings file. It also describes one of the most common
changes, giving a user the ability to automatically log into the application. A complete list of all the settings and
their options is also found later in this chapter.
Configuration File Location

Your configuration files are all located in the Config folder within your client installation folder.
Locate the Files

You use Microsoft Windows Explorer to find and select these files.
1. Open your Epicor client installation folder, the client folder, and then the config folder.
2. The configuration files available for your client installation display.
432
Startup Configurations | Chapter 15
Notice multiple configuration files are available within this folder. You can create several configuration files in
order to launch the application using different settings.
Make a Copy of Default

Before you modify a configuration settings file, you must make a copy of the original default.sysconfig file. This
ensures you always have the original settings available for reference. This also creates a backup file that can
restore the original configuration settings, if needed.
You make a copy of this file by using the copy and paste functions within Windows Explorer.
Multiple Configuration Files

A key method for modifying the configuration settings file is to create alternate versions and then have a
workstation launch with a selected alternate file. You can then keep the original file while you experiment with
different configurations.
You do this by first creating the alternate configuration file and then defining the /CONFIG run time argument
on a workstation. To learn how to use this feature, read the Run Time Arguments section later in this chapter.
The Configuration Editor

When you finish making copies of the default.sysconfig file, you are ready to modify these files. You do this by
using the Configuration Editor. This tool is automatically installed with your client application.
To modify this file, you need to understand your computer network. If you are not sure about customizing this
file, work with your Epicor consultant before you enter any changes.
Launch the Configuration Editor

You use Windows Explorer to launch this program.
1. Navigate to your Epicor client folder on your C: drive.
2. Open the Client folder.

3. Select the ConfigEditor icon.
433
Configuration Editor Interface

When the Configuration Editor launches, it prompts you to select a file you want to edit. After you select the
configuration file, you can then edit the various parameters as you need. Here is what you do:
1. When you launch the Configuration Editor, the Please select a configuration file window displays.
2. Notice this window automatically displays all the files contained within your Config folder. Select the file
you want to edit. In this example, you select the .sysconfig file you use to launch the client installation.
3. Click Open.
4. The Configuration Editor displays.
5. The settings are divided into multiple sheets. The Application sheet displays all the settings that apply to
the overall application. You define settings like AppServerURL, ResourceFile, and Version here.
6. The User sheet contains the settings you can adjust for the specific user on this client workstation.
434
7. The Deployment sheet contains the settings for moving, or deploying, files from your server to the client
installation.
8. The Help sheet contains the settings that define the directory paths for the application help, on-line support,
and the Feature Summary. Use these options to define where this configuration file looks for documentation
and support resources.
9. Use the Sort sheet to define the method used globally to sort strings within the application. Your options
are stringSort and wordSort. You can also create exceptions to the default sort method on this sheet.
10. To change a setting, enter an expected value in its field. An expected value is a parameter compatible with
the setting. For example, you can use the Culture Code to define the default language displayed on the
Login window for this client installation. You can enter any ISO language code in this field.
11. When you have modified all the settings you need, click Save.
12. To exit the Configuration Editor, click Close.
The selected configuration file now has your revised settings. The next time a user launches the application using
this configuration file, your new settings become active.
For details on all the settings contained on these sheets, read
the Settings The Complete List section later in this chapter.
Automatic Login
A common reason you modify this file is so the user can automatically log into the Epicor application. When this
user double-clicks the program icon on the desktop, both the user name and password populate the Log On
window and the application launches immediately.
To set up the automatic login, you modify settings within the .sysconfig file.
435
1. Launch the Configuration Editor and select the .sysconfig file you use to launch the client application.
2. Click Open.
3. In this example, the Config file:ERP100500.sysconfig window displays.
4. Click the User tab.

5. Enter a UserID. This value is the identifier for the user who is logging into the application from this
workstation. Enter the identifier defined for this account within User Account Security Maintenance. In
this example, you enter JSmith for the UserID value.
User Account Security Maintenance is a system setup
program available within the Epicor application.
Menu Path: System Setup > Security Maintenance > User
Account Security Maintenance
6. Enter the Password for the user who is logging into the application from this workstation.
7. Click Save.
436
8. Click Close. This configuration file is saved with the new settings.
The next time this user clicks the desktop icon, the Log On window does not display. On this client machine,
the application automatically launches using this user account.
Settings - The Complete List

This series of tables list all the settings available within the default.sysconfig file. Each setting has its own row;
Purpose and Expected Values are displayed in the right column. Each section displays its settings in alphabetical
order.
Application Settings
The Application settings contain general connection settings and configuration settings. You change these settings
to apply custom (OEM) style themes to the application. You can also define custom images and text through
these settings.
Typically system administrators define these settings and then distribute the updated configuration files to all
workstations within the network for which they apply.
Setting
AppServerURL
Purpose and Expected Value

The address of the application server (AppServer) where the client connects
protocol://server:port; it uses the form value: AppServerDC://servername:port
Protocol: AppServerDC by default, or else AppServer for load balancing.
Server: Host name of the machine that runs AppServer.
Port: The port of the broker that runs the application. Default is 9000. Also,
AppServer accepts strings and numbers, but the port value accepts only
numbers.
AlternateCacheFolder
The location of the local disk cache folder. This folder is used to hold cached
.xml files. If none is specified, the default is: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\Epicor (Windows XP) or C:\ProgramData\Epicor
(Windows 7)
This folder accommodates some environment variables which can be substituted
during startup.
%UserName% The Windows ID of the user. Example: jsmith
%UserDomain% The Windows user domain. Example: USEAST
%AppData% The application data folder. Example: C:\Documents and
Settings\ jsmith\Application Data (Windows XP) or C:\Users\jsmith\AppData
(Windows 7)
%Homepath% The home path folder. This location is specified in Local Users
and Groups. Example: C:\Documents and Settings\jsmith (Windows XP) or
C:\Users\jsmith (Windows 7)
%AllUsersProfile% The location of the All Users profile. Example:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users (Windows XP) or C:\Users\Public (Windows
7)
CultureCode
The ISO language/culture code that defines the specific language and format
which displays on the Log On window. For example, sch (Simplified Chinese).
437
Setting

This value only affects the Log On window. After the user enters a user name
and password and clicks past this window, the language and culture code
settings defined on the user account display within the Epicor application.
CustomResourceFile
A path name to a resource file that contains custom images. You can add
images to this file by using the Resource Editor; this utility is available for
download from EPICWeb. Any images contained within this custom file will
override images within the base resource file. Typically, the value you enter
for this setting is: .res\MfgCustomImages.resource.
DnsIdentity
Defines the client installation's endpoint identity. The client checks this endpoint
identity value against the endpoint authentication returned by the service.
When these identity values match, the connection between the client and the
endpoint service is validated. This setting helps prevent phishing by stopping
the client installation from linking to an endpoint controlled by a malicious
service.
DuplicateAttachmentMode
Use this setting to indicate what occurs when two attachments share the same
identifier (ID) value. Available options:
Prompt - Causes the application to display a window that asks the user to
enter a different attachment ID. This is the default option.
AutoDateStamp - Causes the application to automatically add the current
date to the end of the attachment ID.
EnableSslStreamSecurity
EndpointBinding
Indicates whether you want to activate authentication between the client

machine and the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). To activate this feature, set this
configuration setting to True.
Indicates how this client checks for authentication certificates through Internet
Information Services (IIS). When a user logs into the application, the selected
method checks whether the user can access the Epicor application. Available
options:
UsernameWindowsChannel - Authenticate using an Epicor Username and
Password. Windows checks for existing Epicor user accounts to authenticate
logins. You can select this option for both smart client and Epicor Web Access
(EWA) installations.
UsernameSSLChannel - Authenticate using a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) X509
certificate. Use this method for AppServers that handle installations where
users reside in different domains. By using an SSL certificate, users from these
different domains can log into the Epicor application. You can select this option
for both smart client and Epicor Web Access (EWA) installations.
Windows - Authenticate using a Windows Username and Password. You can
select this method for AppServers that handle client installations where users
access the application through the same domain. Any user who has a Windows
Username and Password within this domain can successfully log into the Epicor
application. You can only select this option on smart client installations.
Note the binding you select in the .sysconfig file must match the setting on
the application server. You can review and update this application server setting
in the Epicor Administration Console.
438
Setting
EnterpriseSearchURL

The Uniform Resource Identifier address the client uses by default to launch
the Enterprise Search functionality. When the Enterprise search is launched, it
uses the URL you define in this setting value.
However you can override this default URL address within each company
record. To do this, launch Company Maintenance and navigate to the
General Settings sheet; enter a different Search URL for the specific company.
Likewise, you can override the URL value defined on the company on a specific
user record. Launch User Account Security Maintenance and navigate to
the Options sheet. Enter the alternate Search URL you want for the current
user.
The order of precedence for URL addresses:
1. User record (User Account Security Maintenance)
2. Company record (Company Maintenance)
3. Configuration Settings File
HelpAboutCopyrightText
The copyright text for the About dialog box.
HelpAboutCopyrightURL
The copyright URL for the About dialog box.
HelpAboutImage
The bitmap file for the Help About window.
HelpAboutProductText
The product text for the About dialog box.
HelpAboutTitleText
The title text for the About dialog box.
HHCustomMenuID
The Menu ID for the sub process that causes customized Handheld menus to
load onto your screen.
MaxBOMRU
The number of most frequently used business objects whose security settings
should be cached when a user logs in.
Logic then tracks this number of business objects in the following XML file:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Epicor\<appserver_and_port>\<version>\<company
>\BOSecMRUList\BOMRUList_<userID>.xml
(Windows XP) or
C:\ProgramData\Epicor\<appserver_and_port>\<version
>\<company>\
BOSecMRUList\BOMRUList_<userID>.xml (Windows 7)
This cached information helps minimize the number of calls between client
and server, improving performance.
This path is the default location of the cache folder, but it can change based
on the AlternateCacheFolder setting.
MaxClssAttrMRU
The number of most frequently used datasets. The information on the tracked
datasets is used at login to both fetch (get) and memory cache the extended
properties for frequently used datasets.
The logic tracks this number of datasets in the following XML file:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Epicor\<appserver_and_port>\<version>\<company
>ClsAttrMRUList\ClsAttrMRUList_<userID>.xml
(Windows XP) or
439
Setting

C:\ProgramData\Epicor\<appserver_and_port>\<version
>\<company>ClsAttrMRUList\
ClsAttrMRUList_<userID>.xml (Windows 7)
This cached information helps minimize the number of calls between client
and server, improving performance.
This path is the default location of the cache folder, but it can change based
on the AlternateCacheFolder setting.
MESCustomMenuID
The menu ID for the sub process that allows customized MES menus to be
loaded.
MESImage
The default image that is used by the MES menu. The default is blank.
OperationTimeOut
This setting defines how messages are sent and received by this client machine.
If a message is not sent or received before this timeout value, the message
attempt is stopped. This timeout value also applies when the client sends reply
messages for a request/reply service operation and a callback contract method.
The default value is 300 (30 seconds).
PredictiveSearchKeyPressDelay
Predictive searches are custom BAQ searches you can attach to a specific field,
and they display search results in a floating tooltip window. When a user starts
typing in a field linked to a predictive search, this value controls how long it
takes for the BAQ linked to the search to run. When you set this option to use
a longer delay, the user can enter more text, but the results will take longer
to display. The default value is 1500 (1.5 seconds).
PredictiveSearchPopupFadeDelay When a predictive search runs, this value controls how long the floating tooltip
window displays until it fades from view. The default value is 10000 (10
seconds).
ProductBrandIcon
Use this setting to define an optional icon that displays on the far left of the
application title bar.
ProductBrandText
Optional text that displays on the left side of the application title bar. If you
specify a ProductBrandIcon, this text displays to the left of this icon.
ProductID
The product identifier; for example: "Epicor"
ProductLogonImage
This setting defines an alternate bitmap image that displays in the upper half
of the Log On window.
ResourceFile
A path name to the resource file. This file contains images and other resources
that can be changed by partners for branding purposes; for example:
C:\Epicor\Client\res\MfgBaseImages.resources.
SessionManager
The Session Manager tracks all of the instances of the application running on
this computer, so that users can launch several instances without logging in
and consuming an additional license. Typically this will just monitor one user,
but it can monitor several instances if Terminal Services are enabled. Here are
the expected values for this setting:
ActiveHidden The default value. This value causes the Session Manager to
run, but its icon is not displayed within the System Tray
ActiveInTray Causes the Session Manager to run; there is an icon displayed
in the Windows system tray.
440
Setting

Disabled Causes the Session Manager to be turned off. Whenever a shortcut
or Information Worker attempts to launch the application, a login window will
display.
Any Information Worker processes or SYSCONFIG shortcuts you launch do not
consume an additional license if the Session Manager is running and an instance
of the client application is already logged on to the appropriate AppServer.
SessionManagerURL
The Uniform Resource Identifier address the client should use to communicate
with the manager service.
SpashImage
The splash screen image when you first log into the application.
SysmonPort
The port used for the Session Manager. Enter the port that this computer will
use. For example: 7777
ToolbarSetting
The path and XML file that defines the users default settings for the toolbar
functionality. For example: .\res\ToolbarSettings.xml
WCFCertValidation
Indicates whether the client application and WCF service need to validate their
connection through a certificate. If this value is set to True, a certificate is
required for this client installation to communicate with the WCF service.
Version
The current release and patch number for the application; for example:
"10.0.600"
User Settings
The User settings contain parameters that only apply to a specific user. Use these parameters to activate the
Single Sign On feature, System Monitor settings, login settings, or search settings.
Typically system administrators define these settings for a specific user; this configuration settings file is then
used to launch the application on the specific workstation.
Setting
AutoScaleMode

The concentration of pixels on the window, this setting accommodates
different geometries of forms in different versions of Windows.
None The default. No adjustment of forms is done.
Dpi An adjustment (dots per inch) of concentration for pixels is done on
forms.
The forms are adjusted to adhere to the DPI field on the Display Properties
> Settings > Advanced General form in Windows XP and Control Panel
> Display > Custom DPI SettingS form in Windows 7. Common settings
are 96 DPI and 120 DPI.
ComboAutoCompleteMode
ContextMenuNestingLevel
Defines how automatic completion works in the combo control when the
user types in the text field of the combo. Only two values can be used AutoCompleteOnly and DropDownList.
Use this setting to adjust the size of the context menus. Depending on the
value you enter, context menus can become taller or shorter. Expected values:
0 All Open With items display within the More sub-menu.
-1 All Open With items display directly on the context menu.
441
Setting

X Substitute an integer value (2, 3, 4, and so on) to indicate how many
items to display in the context menu; the remaining items will display in the
More sub-menu.
For example, <ContextMenuNestingLevel value ="0"/>
DataCollectionUser
DefaultSearchFromLocation
Defines whether or not this user is a data collection user; these users only
have access to Data Collection functionality. Two values can be used true or false.
This value controls the default location of search forms as they open. Available
options:
Top Search forms open at the top of the window from where you launched
the search. This value generally provides more real estate for displaying the
search results.
Center Search forms open in the middle of the window from where you
launched the Search. This setting is best for Multi-Monitor configured client
systems, as the search window opens centered on the user interface form
regardless of which monitor is displaying the Epicor application.
DefaultSearchPageSize
Use this value to control the maximum number of records returned by a

search for display within the search results. Lower values generally make
more efficient use of server and network resources.
Common settings range from 100 to 1000.
FormOpenMode
Use this setting to determine the initial behavior of a user interface (UI) form
as it opens. When no value is specified for this setting, a UI form opens with
no special processing. Available options:
AutoSearch The primary search for each UI form automatically displays as
the form launches.
AutoPopulate The primary search for each UI form is automatically run,
and all selected records automatically populate the form as it displays on
your screen.
LastLoginID
This setting is used with the LoginDefault setting.

When LoginDefault is set to Last, the value of LastLoginID is the last user ID
entered during the logon process.
When LoginDefault is set to List, the value of LastLoginID is a series of
previously entered user IDs that have accessed the application.
For the other LoginDefault setting values, LastLoginID is not used and is
typically set to have no value.
LaunchType
Use this setting to switch between the Classic Menu and the Modern Shell
Menu. Possible values:
"MainMenu" - Causes the client installation to launch using the Classic
Menu. Users navigate this interface through a tree view that displays nodes
for module groups, modules, and programs.
442
Setting

"Shell" - Causes the client installation to launch using the Modern Shell
Menu. Users navigate the interface through tile groups that contain related
programs.
LoginDefault
The login default setting that defines what displays in the User Name field.
Possible values:
Last Displays the last user ID that was used.
List Displays a list of all the recently entered user identifiers.
Windows Displays the same user ID used to log onto Windows on this
client machine.
None No default value; the User Name field will be blank.
Password
RibbonView
The password for auto-login; for example, JMSmith8754. Each password

must be at least eight characters long.
This setting controls if a ribbon view or a standard toolbar is used on forms.
Possible values:
True The commands from the standard toolbar will be dispersed in several
ribbon tabs on the top of forms.
False A standard toolbar will display on forms.
SelectTextOnEnter
This setting determines whether an entire word or number is selected when

you click a field with a value. Only two expected values can be used - true
or false.
SingleSignOn
The choices are true or false (the default). A value of true means the
application should use single sign-on logic, and not prompt for User ID and
Password but instead use the User ID of the current Windows user.
SmtpServer
The location of the smtp server; the smtp server is required for email.
StartSystemMonitor
Defines whether or not the System Monitor will start when the application
is launched. Only two values can be used - true or false.
Style
Use this setting to launch the application with a default theme and option.
You can then display the application using a look and feel you prefer. The
attributes you define are the style and the options for that specific theme.
To use the default Epicor appearance without running the styling features,
enter None in this setting option. If you use this configuration settings file
to launch the Epicor Handheld interface for display on a high resolution
device, be sure to set this value to "None". This prevents additional styling
from being applied against the fonts on the high resolution device, and the
HandHeld interface will display correctly.
Enter Default to use the theme defined as the default on the server. If
you would like to use another server distributed theme (other than default),
443
Setting

specify its name and file extension. To use a theme from any location on a
local computer, enter the complete path and filename. For example:
<Style value=None options=SpecifyName|None|Default
/>
<Style value=Default options=SpecifyName|None|Defau
lt/>
<Style value=BlueMain.isl options= SpecifyName|None
|Default/>
<Style value=C:\epicor\MyThemes\BlueMain.isl
options=SpecifyName|None|Default/
For more information, review the Styling and Themes chapter within the
Epicor ICE User Experience and Customization Guide.
SystemMonitorNonPriorityPoll
The frequency that determines how often the client System Monitor checks
the server when non-priority print jobs are scanned and processed. This
non-priority value is used for Scheduled reports.
This value is measured in milliseconds; the minimum value is 3000 - the higher
the number, the more network traffic is avoided.
This value is used with SystemMonitorPriorityPoll and
SystemMonitorPriorityPollDuration to determine how the System Monitor
interacts with the tasks sent to it.
SystemMonitorPriorityPoll
The frequency that determines how often the client System Monitor checks
the server when priority print jobs are scanned and processed. This non-priority
value is used for reports sent immediately to the System Monitor.
This value is measured in milliseconds; the minimum value is 3000 - the higher
the number, the more network traffic is avoided. It is used with
SystemMonitorNonPriorityPoll and SystemMonitorPriorityPollDuration
to determine how the System Monitor interacts with the tasks sent to it.
SystemMonitorPriorityPollDuration
The value of this setting determines how long the System Monitor will remain
in Priority Polling Mode.
By default, the System Monitor regularly polls the AppServer using the
milliseconds defined for the SystemMonitorNonPriorityPoll value. This
Non-Priority Mode is used by the application to process scheduled reports
through the System Monitor. When a report is submitted directly (not
scheduled) for processing, the System Monitor is then switched to Priority
Polling Mode. While in Priority Polling Mode, the System Monitor polls the
AppServer using the milliseconds defined for the SystemMonitorPriorityPoll
value.
The Priority Polling Mode lasts for the milliseconds value you define for this
SystemMonitorPriorityPollDuration setting. Once the process goes past this
duration value, the System Monitor returns to Non-Priority Polling Mode.
This value is used with SystemMonitorNonPriorityPoll and
SystemMonitorPriorityPoll to determine how the System Monitor interacts
with the tasks sent to it.
444
Setting
TextExpansionTest
Use this setting to enable the Text Expansion Test item within the Tools menu
on each form.
Since the translations sometimes result in longer strings than the original, it
is important that developers allocate sufficient space for language expansion.
This item helps developers achieve this task and check which forms do not
have sufficient space allocated. Only two expected values can be used "true" or "false".
You can fine tune the text expansion behavior in the
Client\Res\EpiResourceLibConfig.xml. For example:
<Options>
<option name="TextExpansionFillChar" value="^" />
<option name="TextExpansionEndChar" value="|" />
<option name="TextExpansionMinChars" value="8" />
<options>
TreeExpandIndicatorTreshold
The value of this setting determines whether tree nodes should be checked
to see if they have children when they are created. When there are large
numbers of nodes being created (over 1,000), this can take a long time. If
the number of rows available for the child view is greater than the value set,
child node processing will be deferred until the indicator is selected for
expansion.
Zero value implies to always check for children. 200 is a good value if you
enable this feature. For example: <TreeExpandIndicatorThreshold value="200"
/>
UserID
The user ID for auto-login; for example, "BobSmith".
Deployment Settings
The Deployment settings contain general client distribution parameters. Modify these parameters to configure
how files are moved from the server to the client. These settings define the directory path that the client uses to
locate the server files and the method used to receive these files either Xcopy or zip.
workstations within the network for which they apply.
Setting
clearDNS

This setting determines whether the local client cache will be cleared as part of a client
update. Either the default cache location of C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\Epicor\<appserver_and_port> (Windows XP),
C:\ProgramData\Epicor\<appserver_and_port> (Windows 7), or the directory specified
by alternateCacheFolder is conditionally cleared based on the value you enter for this
setting.
Available options are Never, Always, and Prompt.
deploymentPackage
If the setting of deploymentType is defined as zip, the value of this setting is the
name of the zip file retrieved from the Deployment Server during a client update. The
default value is: ReleaseClient.zip
deploymentServer
The URI of the deployment directory on the deployment server.
445
Setting
deploymentType

The method the deployment system uses to do actual deployment of client assemblies.
The choices are xcopy and zip (which copies a named zip file locally and then unzips).
doDateComparison
If deploymentType is set to xcopy, this setting determines whether the xcopy runs and
does a date comparison with the /D switch, or downloads all files regardless of date.
The choices are true or false. If it is set to false, then xcopy copies all files regardless
of modification date.
optimizeAssemblies
A setting that determines whether you can optimize assemblies within the Epicor
application. The choices are true or false. A setting of true requires that you have
administrator rights on the client installation.
Help Settings
The Help settings configure how the help system is hosted. You can host the help files locally on a client or
centrally through a server. You can also define how the client installation accesses Internet technical updates.
workstations within the network for which they apply. For additional information about how to use these settings,
review the Help System topics within application help.
Setting
AnnotationsOverrideXSL
Indicates the path or filename of the .xslt file used to print help annotations. If this
user needs to print help annotations, enter a path or filename within this property.
For example: \\myServer\Epicor\SysConfig10\Help\enu\Standard\myXSLT.xslt/>
courseServer
Defines the path name for the embedded courses licensed to your Epicor application.
After you install the education courses, enter the path to the courses within this
parameter; for example: http://EpicorEducation/EpicorEducation9001/ . Note that
Epicor recommends you create a separate configuration settings file for your training
environment and then link this settings file to a unique desktop icon. In this way,
the embedded courses are not available within your working environment.
CustomerCenter product
Defines the product and URL used when the user accesses the Customer Center;
for example Epicor followed by the URL href =
https://epicweb.epicor.com/support/epicor10/
E9EducationKeysServer
If the URL changes for the Education Courses License server, this setting indicates
the new server location which holds these licenses. Typically this value remains blank.
However if a new server is required, enter the URL path for this setting.
featureSummaryHomePage Defines the home page for the Feature Summary, for example: fs.htm
446
helpServer
Indicates the path name the client installation uses to access the help files. If you
want to link the help files to a central server instead of individually on each client,
enter the path to the help files location on the server.
OnlineSupport product
Defines the product and URL used when the user accesses online support; for
example Epicor followed by the URL href =
https://epicweb.epicor.com/support/myepicweb
Sort Settings
The following settings define how strings sort within the application.
If you update a Client installation, the Sort settings are
overwritten to match the values defined on the server level
configuration file.
Setting
Sort Method
Default
This value indicates the method used globally to sort strings within the application. The available
values are:
stringSort The default value, this sort method does not use special sort weighting. This causes
non-alphanumeric symbols, like hyphens, to be displayed together. For example, this feature is
useful if your company uses the hyphen in part numbers. Under this logic, the hyphen character
has a weight like any other character, so records using this character are sorted together, based
on the hyphens Unicode sequence value.
wordSort This sort method gives non-alphanumeric Unicode characters (like the hyphen) a
reduced sort weight, causing these characters to be sorted among the alphanumeric characters.
This reduced sort weight is not based on its Unicode sequence value. Under this logic, co-op
and coop are listed together.
To set the global default value for the application, use one of the following syntaxes:
<stringSort value="default" />
<wordSort value="default" />
Sort Method
Exceptions
You can also create exceptions to the default sort method by adding additional lines after the
default value. You do this by defining the table and column (TableName.ColumnName)
that sort using the different method. For example, if your application globally uses the wordSort
method, you can enter a new line under the default line (<wordSort value=default />) that
indicates the stringSort method will be used on part numbers. This exception value uses the
following syntax:
<stringSort value="Part.PartNum" />
Each exception line only supports one table/column combination. To apply this logic to multiple
table/columns, enter multiple lines:
<stringSort value="Part.ParNum"/>
<stringSort value="Customer.CustNum"/>
Continue to enter all the exception lines that you need.
If a column has a LIKE value, and the LIKE is one of the columns specified here, the other column
uses the same sort method logic as well.
447
Run Time Arguments

Each workstation can be set up to launch the application in a specific mode. These modes, or run time arguments,
activate immediately when a user double-clicks on the program icon.
Several run time arguments are available. You can indicate the application launches either the Dashboard or the
MES interface - instead of the default Menu. You can also have the application launch using a different
configuration file.
For example, run time arguments are useful when you are customizing programs. Normally during Run Time,
you have several favorites groups that autoload their programs into memory. However you cannot customize
autoloaded programs. To disable this feature while you are customizing, use the /AUTOLOADSUPPRESS run time
argument; this prevents the application from automatically placing programs into memory.
You can also use multiple run time arguments to further define how the application launches on the workstation.
For example, you want a workstation to only use the MES interface and you also want it to update to the latest
version. Because of this, you use both the /MES and /UPDATE run time arguments.
Activate Run Time Arguments

You add run time arguments to the properties of the application icon. Heres what you do:
1. On the desktop for the workstation, right-click the applications icon.
2. A context menu displays; select Properties.
448
3. The shortcut icon's Properties window appears.
4. Click the Shortcut tab.

5. In the Target field, enter a [Space] after the target directory path.
6. Enter a right slash ( / ) or en dash ( - ), followed by the run time argument. For example,
C:\epicor\client\Epicor.exe /update or C:\epicor\client\Epicor.exe -update
7. To add another run time argument, repeat the steps. For example: C:\epicor\client\Epicor.exe /update
/config=local.sysconfig or C:\epicor\client\Epicor.exe -update -config =local.sysconfig
8. Click Apply.
9. Click OK.
The next time the client application is launched on this workstation, it uses the run time argument(s) you entered
in the Target field.
449
Run Time Arguments List

This table lists all the run time arguments available for the application. They display in alphabetical order.
You can enter these arguments in two ways. You can enter the entire argument; for example,
/AUTOLOADSUPPRESS. However the application also accepts a shorthand version that only uses the first three
characters of the argument; for example, AUT. You can also use either the right slash ( / ) or the en dash ( - ) to
activate run time arguments.
Argument
Purpose
? or HELP
This mode causes a window to appear that displays the available run time arguments.
Use this mode to display a list of current options.
AUTOLOADSUPPRESS The autoloading feature causes selected favorite groups to load their programs into
memory; it improves the performance of these programs. If you customize the
application, however, you need to suppress autoloading. By running this argument,
you disable autoloading on this workstation.
BASE
Use this argument to prevent the loading of any verticalizations (industry-specific user
interface features), customizations, or personalizations. This option is useful for testing
the user interface.
CLASSIC
Use this argument to cause the application to launch using the Classic Main Menu
interface. Users navigate this interface through a tree view that displays nodes for
module groups, modules, and programs.
CONFIG=<filename> This argument causes the application to use a different configuration file saved in the
same folder as the default.sysconfig file. Enter the name of the file after the equals
sign. The next time the application is launched on this workstation, it uses this
configuration file. For example:
C:\epicor\Client\Epicor.exe /CONFIG=mycustom.sysconfig
CRM
This argument causes the application to launch using the CRM user interface. Use this
mode to display the application for a user with a CRM user license. This interface displays
the modules that include:
Customer Relationship Management
Case Management
Quote Management
Configurator Management
ShopVision
Trackers
Status Dashboards
450
DB
Use this argument to cause the Dashboard interface to launch - instead of the Main
Interface. Use this mode if you only want this user to access a dashboard interface.
HH
This argument causes the application to launch using the Handheld MES Interface. Use
this mode to display the application within a handheld device. This interface displays
the tools needed to report labor, inventory, and material transactions against jobs.
HHC
Use this argument to launch the Handheld MES Interface in Customization mode. You
can then customize this handheld interface as you need. For more information, review
the Sub Program Deployment topics in either the application help or the Customization
Utilities chapter in the User Experience and Customization Guide.
Argument
Purpose
MES
This argument causes the application to launch the MES Interface. Use this mode for
workstations used on the shop floor. This interface displays the tools needed to report
labor, inventory, and material transactions against jobs.
MESC
Use this argument to launch the MES Interface in Customization mode. You can then
customize this interface as you need. For more information, review the Sub Program
Deployment topics in either the application help or the Customization Utilities chapter
in the User Experience and Customization Guide.
MENUID=<Menu ID> You can limit the programs available on the Menu by including a menu identifier with
the config run time argument. To do this, add a run time argument (a slash or dash)
followed by the specific Menu identifier. You can find the Menu ID by selecting a
program icon within Menu Maintenance. Once you know this identifier, entering it
within the run time argument. For example:
C:\epicor\client\Epicor.exe /menuid=CRMN0000
RPT
This argument applies only to Crystal Reports. It has no affect when printing SSRS
reports.
Use this argument to give the application multiple printer options. When active, the
application first checks to see if a default printer is selected on a Crystal Report definition.
If it is, this printer and its settings are automatically used to print out the report. If a
printer is not defined on the report definition, however, the default printer selected on
the workstation is used instead.
Use this argument when you need a specific printer, like a label printer, to print out a
specific report.
SHELL
This argument causes the application to launch using the Modern Shell interface. Users
navigate the interface through tile groups that contain related programs.
SKIPCHECK
Use this argument to prevent updates from being automatically installed on this
workstation. It stops the client application from checking its version number against
the current version on the server.
Run this argument to streamline how quickly the application launches on this
workstation. By disabling these routines, the application no longer automatically updates
each time it is accessed.
TE
This argument causes the application to launch using the Time and Expense user
interface. Only modules available through this license display on the main interface.
Activate this mode for a user who is licensed to only access these modules.
UPDATE
This argument causes the application to skip checking its version number, but then
updates the workstation to the current version available at the server. This forces the
client to update - even when the version on the client and the server are the same. Use
this argument when you install a patch on the server; this patch then automatically
updates on your client installations.
You can also use this argument when a problem occurs on a client installation. Adding
this argument makes sure that the client installation is using the current version.
451
452
Index
Index
A
abc codes 128
access options, define 200
account mapping 259
account segment values 240
accounting segment mapping 258
accounts payable configuration 72, 75
accounts receivable configuration 65, 67
actions menu functions 176
add a book 273
add a new employee 185
add a payroll employee 179
add a shift 177
add fiscal calendar 230
add fiscal periods 232
add fiscal years 231
add gl controls 309
add tasks to a process set 333
add tax boxes 308
add tax types 313
add unit of measure codes 167
additional ap 320
additional ar 321
additional contact information 174
address and comments 112
advanced material management (amm) 141
alternate prefixes and sequences 292
alternate report style maintenance, alternate report style 382
alternate report style maintenance, create alternate report files
379
alternate report style maintenance, report routing 379
alternate report style maintenance, report style 381
ap configuration 72, 75
ar configuration 65, 67
asset management configuration 79
attach file to record 349
attached files in action 351
attaching files 349
attachment configuration 339
automatic login 435
B
billing 148
books 261
C
case management configuration 44
cents override 295
change log report 429
chart of accounts 232
coa categories 236
coa mapping 259
companies 203
company configuration 22, 225

company configuration, all modules 24
company configuration, currency 35
company configuration, detail 23
company configuration, general 24
company configuration, gl control 36
company maintenance 14
company maintenance, attachments 20
company maintenance, baq external datasources 21
company maintenance, email and reporting 17
company maintenance, general settings 14
configuration editor 433
configuration editor, automatic login 435
configuration editor, interface 434
configuration editor, launch 433
configuration file 432
configuration file, copy default 433
configuration file, locate 432
configuration file, multiple 433
configuration settings 437
configuration settings, application 437
configuration settings, deployment 445
configuration settings, help 446
configuration settings, sort 447
configuration settings, user 441
consolidation 277
consolidation definition maintenance 280
consolidation definition maintenance - detail 280
consolidation definition maintenance source detail 282
consolidation rate type maintenance 278
consolidation type maintenance 279
contact creation 173
conversion rules 221
Copy GL Account Masks 276
create a part class 162
create a pay method 319
create a process set 332
create a revision 270
create a schedule 326
create a tax type 302
create a user 195
create a warehouse 207
create a warehouse team 192
create account masks 238
create an electronic interface 316
create the calendar 156
currency master maintenance 224
custom tax algorithms 300
customer maintenance 227
customer relationship management (crm) configuration 43
cycle count 127
cycle count detail 127
D
daily balances setup 275
453
Index
data collection configuration 50

default sequences 290
define effective rates 305
define segment values 233
demand configuration 45
detail 115
document associations 347
document type controls 343
document type metadata 345
document types 293, 342
E
electronic interfaces 315
electronic reports 322
employee calendar 189
employee production information 187
employees 184
enter allocation detail lines 249
enter rate codes 305
enterprise search options, define 203
european union data 310
exchange rates 222
expense 134
external company configuration 94
external company configuration, company information 95
external company configuration, epicor commerce connect 101
external company configuration, external sites 96
external company configuration, external warehouses 96
external company configuration, initialize multi-company 102
external company configuration, multi-company 99
external company maintenance 92
external company maintenance, field translations 94
external company maintenance, select system 92
external file references 346
external sites 96
external system maintenance 91
external warehouses 96
F
fedex 150
field security maintenance 420
field security, global 420
field security, group 421
field security, reset a field 426
field security, reset table 426
field security, review settings 424
field security, test 423
field security, user 421
field service configuration 86
finance configuration 65
financial report designer 283
fiscal calendars 230
functionality setup 339
G
general 115
general - international 146
general (shipping receiving) 145
454
general ledger accounts 243

general ledger configuration 76
generate chart of accounts 244
gl account allocations 248
gl account budgets 247
gl coa reference types 237
gl configuration 76
gl control (inventory) 117
gl control (transfer inventory) 122
gl control types 250
gl controls 207, 252
gl controls (sites) 113
gl transaction types 269
global tables 103
I
import exchange rates 223
incoming document line 271
individual deposit invoice tracking configuration 71
international descriptions 310
inventory configuration 56, 58
inventory management 115
J
job configuration 46
journal codes 254
L
legal numbers 289
legal text 297
links 175
localization 26
localization, additional tax information 33
localization, detail 26, 28
localization, intrastat 28
localization, invoice banking reference 34
localization, percent at border 33
localization, receipt normal 30
localization, receipt returned goods 30
localization, shipment normal 31
localization, shipment returned goods 32
lookup table links 268
lookup tables setup 266
M
maintenance configuration 85
maintenance management, site configuration 140
material requirements planning configuration 54
materials configuration 56
menu maintenance 408
menu maintenance, assign security 411
menu maintenance, security id 408
menu security report 427
method security 417
modify display order 235
modify the system agent 325
mrp configuration 54
multi-companies 90
multiple currencies 216
N
national accounts configuration 70
natural account options 242
non-working days 157
O
opportunity/quote configuration 37
order configuration 39, 41
P
part classes 161
pay methods 318
payment instruments configuration 83
payroll configuration 78
payroll employees 179
payroll, deduction, and tax information 181
persons and contacts 172
pi configuration 83
plm configuration 52
posting 264
posting details 265
preview and print reports, application system monitor 391
preview and print reports, auto print with BPM 392
preview and print reports, preview report 389
preview and print reports, report form controls 384
preview and print reports, SQL server report print controls 387
process (business object) security 414
process security maintenance 413, 414, 417
process set maintenance 332
product lifecycle management configuration 52
product tax categories 311
production calendars 156
production configuration 46
production management 136
project billing configuration 87
properties 316
property values 318
purchase configuration 58
Q
qa configuration 53
quality assurance configuration 53
R
rate types 219
rates 305
recurring journal entry 254
recurring journal entry - detail 256
recurring journal entry - header 254
recurring journal entry - schedule 257
recurring journal entry generate recurring journals 257
reference category maintenance 171
reference designators 171
Index
report 263
report data definition, calculated field 364
report data definition, create 359
report data definition, criteria 367
report data definition, exclusions 366
report data definition, linked table fields 370
report data definition, report labels 361
report data definition, report routing 374
report data definition, report tables 363
report data definition, table relationship parameters 373
report data definition, table relationships 371
report data maintenance, overview 359
report form customization, create and deploy customized form
392
report maintenance, overview 375
report style, create 375
reporting tools, alternate report style maintenance 378
reporting tools, Epicor ERP and SSRS Integration 353
reporting tools, overview 353
reporting tools, preview and print reports 384
reporting tools, report data maintenance and report maintenance
359
reporting tools, report form customization 392
reporting tools, setup 354
reporting tools, setup, add printer 356
reporting tools, setup, report type 354
reporting tools, setup, workstation printer 357
restricted functions 239
restricted substances 169
retained earnings 262
role codes 188
rounding engine 224
run time argument, security feature 398
run time arguments 448
run time arguments, activate 448
run time arguments, list 450
S
sales management configuration 37
schedule a process set 336
security group maintenance 400
security reports 427
segment mapping 260
select a schedule 331
select the site 114
select transaction type 269
self-balancing segments 246
serial mask formats configuration 63
serial number masks 167
serial tracking 125
services configuration 86
shared warehouses 118
shift breaks 178
shifts 177
shipping receiving configuration 60
shipping receiving, site configuration 145
Site configurations 114
site costs 154
site details 105
sites 105
sites and part classes 163
455
Index
social enterprise options, define 202

source book details 264
specify exemptions 307
substance maintenance 169
substance restriction type maintenance 169
system agent 324
system monitor 336
system options, define 201
T
task agent rules 327
task agent rules hierarchy 330
task agent rules, edit 328
tax authorities 314
tax boxes 298
tax interface configuration 80, 81, 82
tax jurisdictions 298
tax liabilities 312
tax report categories 296
tax types 302
third party parameters 345
time 131
time and expense 131
time and expense approvals 189
tools options, define 198
transaction document types 287
transfer definition 120
transfer detail 120
transfer requirement planning 111
transfer resources 124
456
U
unit of measure class maintenance 166
unit of measure maintenance 164
units of measure 164
ups 151
use the system monitor 336
user privileges 197
user security 401
user security, companies 405
user security, groups 404
user security, options 401
user security, sites 405
user session log report 431
users 194
users/groups report 430
V
validations 266
view task parameters 330
W
warehouse bin setup wizard 213
warehouse bin sizes 209
warehouse bins 210
warehouse maintenance 206
warehouse teams 192
warehouse zones 208
week numbers 159
where used 158
Additional information is available at the Education and

Documentation areas of the EPICweb Customer Portal. To access
this site, you need a Site ID and an EPICweb account. To create an
account, go to http://support.epicor.com.

EpicorImplementation UserGuide 100600

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EpicorImplementation UserGuide 100600

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Epicor ERP

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Chapter 1: Company Configuration...............................................................14

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Chapter 3: Part Parameters...........................................................................161

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Chapter 5: Warehouses and Bins..................................................................206

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Chapter 7: General Ledger............................................................................230

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Chapter 8: Legal Numbers.............................................................................287

Chapter 9: Global Tax Engine.......................................................................295

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

European Union Data...........................................................................................................................310

Chapter 10: Electronic Interfaces..................................................................315

Chapter 11: Automatic Data Processing......................................................324

Chapter 12: Enterprise Content Management............................................339

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Attach File to Record............................................................................................................................349

Chapter 13: Reporting Tools.........................................................................353

Chapter 14: Security......................................................................................398

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Assign User Companies and Sites..........................................................................................................405

Chapter 15: Startup Configurations.............................................................432

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Chapter 1 | Company Configuration

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Chapter 1: Company Configuration

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Company Configuration | Chapter 1

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Chapter 1 | Company Configuration

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

here in Company Maintenance. However if you need, you

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Company Configuration | Chapter 1

Email and Reporting

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Chapter 1 | Company Configuration

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Company Configuration | Chapter 1

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Chapter 1 | Company Configuration

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide

Epicor ERP | Version 10

Epicor ERP Implementation User Guide